Mossambique Being at Mossambique wee were foure of our Fléete in company together only wanting the Saint Phillip which had holden her course so nere the coast of Guinea the better to shun the Flats of Bracillia that are called Abrollios whereon the yere before she had once fallen that she was so much becalmed that she could not passe the Equinoctiall line in long time after vs neyther yet the cape de Bona Speranza without great storms foule weather as it ordinarilie happeneth to such as come late thether whereby shee was compelled to compasse about came vnto Cochin about two months after we were al ariued at Goa hauing passed and endured much misery and foule weather with sicknes and diseases as swellings of the legs and the scorbuicke and paine in their bellies c. The 4. Chapter The description of Mossambique which lieth vnder 15. degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line vppon the coast of Melinde otherwise called Abex or Abexim MOssambique is a Towne in the Iland of Prasio with a safe although a small hauen on the right side towardes the cape they haue the golden mines called Sofala on the left side the rich towne of Quiloa and by reason of the foggie mistes incident to the same the place is both barren vnholsome yet the people are rich by reason of the situation In time past it was inhabited by people that beleeued in Mahoomet being ouercom kept in subiection by the tirant of Quiloa his lieftenant which the Arabians called Zequen that gouerned them Mossambique is a little Iland distant about halfe a mile from the firme land in a corner of the said firme land for that y e firme land on the north side stretcheth further into y e sea theÌ„ it doth before it there lie two smal Ilands named S. George S. Iacob which are euen w t the corner of the firme land and betwéene those two Ilands not inhabited the firme land the ships doe sayle to Mossambique leauing the Ilands southward on the left hand and the firm land â—n the north and so without a Pilot compasse about a mile into the sea to Mossambique for it is déepe enough and men may easily shun the sands that lie vpon the firme land because they are openly séene The ships harbour so neare to the Iland and the â—ortresse of Mossambique that they may throw a stone out of their ship vppon the land and sometimes farther and lie betwéene the Iland and the firme land which are distant halfe a mile from each other so that the ships lie there as safely as in a riuer or hauen The Iland of Mossambique is about halfe a mile in compasse flat land and bordered about with a white sand Therein growe many Indian palmes or nut trées some Orange Apple Lemmon Citron and Indian Figge trées but other kindes of fruit which are common in India are there verie scarce Corne and other graine with Rice and such necessarie marchandizes are brought thether out of India but for beasts and foule as Oâ—en shéep Goats Swine Hennes c. there are great aboundance and very good and cheape In the same Iland are found shéepe of fiue quarters in quantitie for that their tayles are so broad and thicke that there is as much flesh vpon them as vpon a quarter of their body and they are so fatte that men can hardlie brooke them There are certaine Hennes that are so blacke both of feathers flesh and bones that being sodden they séeme as black as inke yet of very swéet taste and are accounted better then the other whereof some are likewise found in India but not so many as in Mossambique Porke is there a very costly dish and excellent faire and swéete flesh and as by experience it is found it farre surpasseth all other flesh so that the sicke are forbidden to eate any kinde of flesh but onely Porke because of the excellency thereof MOssambique signifieth two places one which is a whole kingdome lying in Africa behinde the cape of Bona Speranza betweene Monomotapa Quiloa the other certaine Ilands herafter drawne and described lying on the south side of the Equinoctiall line vnder 14. degrees and a halfe whereof the greatest is called Mossambique the other two Saint Iacob and Saint George These Ilands lie almost in the mouth of a riuer which in Africa is called Moghincats About Mossambique is a verie great a safe hauen fit to receiue and harbour all ships that come and goe both to from Portingal the Indies and although both the Kingdome and the Iland are not very great yet are they very rich and abundant in all kinde of thinges as appeareth in the description of the same Mossambique the chiefe greatest of them is inhabited by two maner of people Christians and Mahometanes the Christians are Portingales or of the Portingales race there is also a castle wherin the Portingales keepe garrison from whence also all other castles and fortes thereabouts are supplied with their necessaries speciallie Sofala where the rich mine of Gold lieth there the Portingale ships doe vse to harbour in winter time when of wind or by meanes of foule weather they cannot accoÌ„plish their voiage The Indian ships doe likewise in that place take in new victuals and fresh water This Iland beeing first discouered by the Portingales was the only meanes that they found the Indies for that froÌ„ thence they vsed to take Pilots which taught them the way touching the manner and customes of these people read the Authors description at large they are good shooters in musket and caliuer and expert Fishermen Sayling along further by the coast towardes the Indies you passe by Quiloa which in times past was called Rapta not great but verie faire by reason of the great trees that grow there which are alwaies fresh and greene as also for the diuersities of victuals it is also an Ilande lying about the mouth of the great Riuer Coauo which hath her head or spring out of the same lake from whence Nilus doth issue This Iland is inhabited by Mahometans and they are all most white apparelled in silk and clothes of cotton wooll their women weare bracelets of gold and precious stones about their neckes and armes they haue great quantitie of siluer workes are not so browne as the men well membered their houses are commonly made of stone chalke and wood with pleasant gardens of all kind of fruit and sweet flowers from this Iland the kingdome taketh his name This point asketh a larger discourse which you shal finde in the leafe following They haue no swéet water in this Iland to drinke but they fetch it from the firme land out of a place called by the Portingales Cabaser and they vse in their houses great pots which come out of India to kéepe their water in The Portingales haue therein a verie faire and strong castle which now about 10. or 12. yeares past was fullie
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
you may well passe running along by the Iland for it is a faire and great Channel or if you will you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them you shall holde the course as I heere set downe Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan or of Canton and fourteene miles North-northwestward from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye also from thence the land runneth East for the space of fyue miles where it maketh an end reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North from whence againe it putteth outward to the East to Macau in this land that stretcheth North there is a small Creeke from whence you runne Eastward to Comaye it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins which are the barks and Lighters of China that carie the Marchandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton three miles beyond the aforesaid small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton which is called Camon it is a verie good entrie for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal to the seaward and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand which you must shunne and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal there is the other mouth or entrie where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins which by the Portingales is called As Orelhas de Lebre that is the Hares eares because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe which may easily be seene from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles you runne along by the land thorough a small shallow Channel which is but a fadome and a half deepe at high water the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd lyeth North and South with the middle of the Channel from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward like Taaquinton and they lie north and South from each other This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make is faire and good muddie ground therein to anker and you anker close by the Iland of Faria in the midde way where it is good fresh water from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd to the poynt of Taaquinton there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground the deepest part thereof is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid and being past that you haue more depthes if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau you haue two wayes whereof the safest is outward through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria running to seaward along by the Ilandes like those that come outward from the sea the other way is East through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria and béeing at the end thereof about foure miles Northeastward you shall see the hauen of Lampacon which is two great and high Ilandes with manie trees lying East and West The mouth or entrie of this hauen which is betweene the Ilandes aforesayd hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe of verie soft muddie ground therefore it is hard ankering there and besides there runneth a great streame at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe right in the middle of the mouth such as desire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water muddy ground on the South part of these 2. Ilands there is an other great high Iland which reacheth northeast southwest betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south the south point of this Iland lieth East and west with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon and the chānell that runneth betwéene these 2. Ilands which reach Northward it is déepe and faire hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon lieth a round stony cliffe and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Iland reaching on the north side east and west and on the west side northwest southeast the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe from this stonie cliffe South-eastward ther is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea al sandy ground with 3 fadome déepe through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon and desire to be outward what way soeuer they go for on the west side it is shalow as I said before Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau al these Ilandes ly on your south side and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands the firm land as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes yet it is all ouer bankie ground for the déepest part therof is but 2. fadome which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton called the hares eares runneth along by the Ilands of the hauen of Macau but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria comming right ouer against the end thereof there you haue an other high round Iland and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward and beyond this Iland there is a row of other Ilands which reach to the mouth or Channel where you passe through when you come out of the sea to Macau and lie Eastnortheast all this Channell or passage that runneth betwéen them out of the sea is faire and good way and there is nothing to be feared but that you sée before your eyes you must run along by these Ilandes leauing them on the south side on the north side hauing the Ilands of Lampacon and when you are right against them northeastward you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land of very white sand to the which point you shal goe for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke the déepest part thereof being along by this point by the which you shal run along within the length of a shot of a great peece and when you are past this point run Northeast and then on the Northwest side there wil be a great high Iland which lyeth
began to haue more depth yet very slowly that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hardly forward but because the water ranne very hollow whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered wherein we onely put our trust at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground and then â—0 and 75. fadome with small thin sand and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde At that casting the ground was somewhat greater sande and because as wee made account wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma I presently tooke in the maine toy and myssen in contrary to the opinion of some Pilots euery quarter or â—atch in the night cast the Lead continually ouâ— and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe sailing so for a little time we saw land which was part of the Island Meaxuma although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto but therein they were as perfect as in all the rest of their iudgements This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande lying lowest to the Southwest and when you are right against it at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a Fortresse it was told vs that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water whereupon the water breaketh This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like womens breasts or like a saddle the other two Islandes or likenes thereof in the middle way are like great Cliffes with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast sheweth like a verie long but not ouer high cliffe we ranne along by the Island holding our course Northeast about two miles beyond it and when we left Meaxuma because the winde ranne Southeast then we ranne Northeast Northeast and by East and East Northeast and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula and being to Leeward we espied a great thicke land lying close by the Island Cabexuma This Island Cabexâ—ma is long flat land verie smooth on the North side hauing a Cliffe this was the last of Iuly and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langasâ—que which is the Hauen place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke The 37. Chapter The right markes of the Island Meaxuma as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of Iâ—pan FIrst when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water you must go right vpon the middle of the Island and seeing Land at that depth it will be a high plaine steepe land but not verie great on the vppermost part thereof hauing two pâ—ps and when you goe néere it you shall presently sée another long land béeing flat and euen on the toppe betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes with many small lying togither which you saile close by about two miles from them this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe and a little further to Seaward from it there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water whereon the Sea breaketh and at the Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe You must vnderstand that comming to Iapon and finding more depthes then aforesaid and séeing land then it is not the Island of Meaxuma but rather the Island called Sancta clara if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome then it is Meaxuma but then it will bée on the Starrebord side The Island of Meaxuma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2 â— Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it he must runne Northeast and Northeast and by East hauing a full wind but if you saile by the winde you must rather saile East Northeast with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexuma which you shall presently sée and if you desire to be put into Langasaque then you must holde along by the cliffes aforesaid to Seaward from them and béeing past those cliffes you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées you must put towardes that point and when you are right against it you shall not presently fall vpon it because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury which commonly you find most certainly in that place and when you find those billowes you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on for there you haue no cause of feare and when you begin to put in then you shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Cauallos so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe then onely to runne in through the middle thereof till you be in the Rode where you must anker hauing foure fadome and ½ and fiue fadome water which is when a trée that is right against the great and principallest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church and you ouer against it then you are at the right place and it is a very good place to anker in but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church you must take care to kéepe on the left hand thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point and so anker as aforesaid And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome as some ancient Pilots aduise you in danger of an East wind then my opinion is that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma and certaine Islands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will so that you may anker there at twelue or fiftéene fadome which you will vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caffury wherby you are safe from the northeast to the Southeast and South béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in which is a verie good channell of ten fadome déepe you néed but passe right thorough the middle and to be the
teates of a womans dugs and to put into it you must keepe your course along by the houell If you depart from the Point aforesaid with the winds called Brisas then you shall hold your course to the Cliffes called â—ortugas that is the Torteaux as winde serueth and you must see what depth you find for if there you finde fortie fadome water then you are on the South-side thereof and finding 30. fadome then you are East and West right against it and being at any of these depths you shal hold your course South South-west vntil you see the land which you shall discouer from the field or Hauen thereof and if you see a Land that is somewhat high hauing some Hils and Dales that shewe like the fingers of a mans hand then it is the land â—aâ—â—d Narugo from thence you shal runne to Hâ—eaâ—a holding your course along by the coast Sayling out of Hauana to the Martirs you shall hold your course Northeast by the which course you shall see the Point which is three small Islandes whereof that in the middle is the greatest the vttermost being the East coast and the inwardest the North-east and South-west coast From thence North-east-ward to the Cape De Canauerales that is y e point of Reedes the coast stretcheth North and South and North-east-ward you shall see no land and being vnder fiue and twentie degrees then you are in the mouth of the channel which to passe through you must hold your course Northeast and if you see not the Cape de Canauerales being vnder 28. degrees and â— 2. then you are without the channell Sayling out of the Hauana with the windes called Brisas to the channell you must runne outwards till it be noone and after noone you shall make to Landward that towards euening you may bee by it and to vse the Windes called Terreinhos which are Windes that blowe by night from off the land running in this manner along by the coast vntill you bee North and South with the Houell called El Pan de Matancas that is the loafe of Matancas being North and South with y e same loafe you must runne Northeast if the winde will permit if not you must put to the coast of Florida where the winde will driue you doing your best in that way to goe out of your course as little as you may for the streames runne with great force towards that Lande and when you thinke it time then you shall put to the other side as the winde will leade you till you see the Lande and when you sée it then winde in this sort running through and being vnder 28. degrées and ½ then you are out of the Channell hereof I aduise that the strikes you make in lauering towards the land of Florida must be short and those towardes the Coast of Minare long for the streames driue you to the Lande of Florida The Hils of Chupiona come out by the loafe of Matancas and are certaine not too high and euen Hils flat on the toppe with certaine white shining houels The loafe of Matancas is a high Houell flat aboue stretching northeast and South-west and on both sides as well North-eastward as southwestward it hath two low Points lower then y e said loafe which shew like the heads of Torteaux On the North-east side the Lande stretcheth lowe and from thence Northward it maketh a small Point Behinde this Point lyeth the Hauen of Matancas and to enter therein you must run Northeast and Southwest right against the said loafe and then the Hauen will bee South from you and you must runne southward to it it is a great Bay and there you haue no Road but close by the Land comming out you leaue the loafe on the South-side and you must hold your course north-east till you be out And being out of the Channell if it bée in Winter you shall run East wherwith you shall holde East and by North by the winding or declining of the compasse By the which course you shall passe on the South-side of the Islands and Cliffes of Bermuda and this course you shall holde till you bee vnder the heigth of the Island Fayael one of the Flemish Islands which is a great Island stretching North-west and Southeast on the Southeast side hauing a thicke Land and on the northeast side somewhat lower land To saile from thence to the Island of Tercera you shall hold your course outward of the Island of S. George east and east by North. The Island of S. George is a high Lande stretching East and West as also Tercera which on the Southside hath a clouen hill called O Brasil and a little eastward from thence there lieth thrée cliffes The Iland of S. Michael is a great high Island stretching East and West on the West side being lowe and on the East side high It hath likewise a clouen hil lying at the end on the East side This Island lyeth vnder 38. degrées The 64. Chapter The course and right markes from the Island La Desseada to the lande and coast of Carthagena Nombre de Dios new Spain and from the channell of Hauana IF you desire to sayle through the Channell that runneth betwéene the Island La Antigua La Desleada towards the coast you must holde your course West to the Island of Montecerratte running along by the Island of Guadalupe which is an Island clouen through the middle higher on the West then on the East side The Island La Antigua that is the old Island you shal find on the Northside of Guadalupe stretching in length East and West and hath Hils with outward shew like Ilands and lieth vnder 16. degrées and 1 â— The markes of the Island Montecerratte are these It is round and high like the Island La Gomera in the Canaries and hath some Hilles with certaine Water beakes Sailing from this Island Montecerratte you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the Island Sancta Crus but you must not runne too close by it for there it is foule and no cleare ground it stretcheth East and West and is Hilly but not verie high beeing higher on the West then on the East side in the middlest hath a rent or partition and on the East side there is a Roade where you may anker for there it is faire sandye ground To sayle from Sancta Crus to the Island of Puerto Riquo that is the Iland of the rich Hauen on the Southside you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the hill called Sierta de Loquillo and from thence to Cabo Roxo you shall sayle West and West and by North keeping along by the land vntill you be by the cape aforesaide which is the vttermost part of the same Island This point called Cabo Roxo that is the red point is a thin and lowe lande on the sea side hauing certaine redde shining downes and on the North-west side you sée the hils called I as Sierras de
S. German which are very high but not so high as those of Loquillo From this point of Cabo Roxo you must hold your course west and west and by North whereby you shal discouer the Island called De la mona that is the Island of the ape and you must run along by the southside thereof The Island La Mona is a low land and reacheth East and West on the sea side being a plaine land descending downward on the north-side it hath a Cliffe or small Island called Monica or the little ape Betwéene it and the Island you may passe On the West side of Mona there is a Roade of faire and good ground hauing likewise such another Roade by the Point that lyeth Southwest From the Island De la Mona to the Island De la Sahona if that it be by day you shall hold your course Southwest and by night West and West and by South and you must vnderstand that the Point called Cabo de Enganno that is the deceitfull Point is altogether like the Point of Sahona hauing a clouen houell on the vpper part of the Island being betweene the lowest Lande thereof that lieth on the Sea side Betwéene Cabo del Enganno and Sahona lyeth a small Island called the little S. Catalyna the reason why you must there runne West and South is because the Streames runne towards the Créeke The markes of the Island Sahona are these It is a lowe Island full of Trees so that as you come towardes it you first sée the Trées before you perceaue the land thereof it stretcheth East Northeast and West Southwest on the South side it hath certaine Riffes which run halfe a mile into the Sea if you fall vpon this lande comming out of the Sea and that ouer the Islandes you sée certaine hilles then they are the hils of Niquea which you shall likewise sée betwéen great Sancta Catalina and La Sahona this Island Sahona on the West side hath a Rode of eight or ten fadome deep to saile from Sahona to Santo Domingos it beeing thrée miles to seaward from Sahona you shall hold your course Northwest and Northwest and by West From thence to Santo Domingos it is altogither low land on the sea side descending downward and is the land which in that place reacheth furthest East and West The markes of Santo Domingos are these that when you are Northwest and Southeast with the old mines then you are North and South with the riuer of Santo Domingos and ouer the riuer you shall see two houels which shewe like the teates of a womans breastes when those houels are North and North and by west from you then you are to loofeward from the riuer so that by those teates you shall knowe whether you be past or to Loofeward from it On the East point of the entrie of the Riuer standeth a Tower which serueth for a guarde or beakon for the shippes that come out of the sea From this point aforesaide runneth a hidden cliffe which you must shunne and so you must runne in but go not to neere the Al Matadero that is the Slaughter house for there it is shallow and being within the aforesaid hidden cliffe you haue foure fadome déepe and so you shall holde your course to the Sandie strand lying on the East side shunning the Cliffes of the fortresse and going from the Fortresse inward then you must let fall your ankers right against the Admiraltie in the middle of the riuer where the best place and Rode is From Santo Domingo being 4. miles to Seaward you shall holde your course Southwest and Southwest and by west vntill you be North and South with the Island of Niqueo and to goe from thence to the hauen of Oquoa leaue not the coast but run close by it with all your sailes till you be past the riuer for if you get off frō it without touching the Palma which is a certaine banke so called where the ships vse to anker then you must not anker being in the riuer you must looke wel before you that when you anker to make your ship fast with an anker both out to Landward and to Seaward and then you are safe Sayling from this Hauen and Bay of Oquoa you shall runne outwarde to the South vntill you be about the point and thrée miles into the sea and then you shall hold your course Southwest and Southwest and by South wherby you shall discouer an Island called De la Beata that is the blessed Island which is a lowe Island stretching East and west Two miles Westwarde from Beata lieth an Island or cliffe called Altobello which by night sheweth like a ship when you are past Beata and Altobello then you must runne West and West and by North to the point called Cabo de Tubaron that is the point of the hedge In this créeke are thrée or foure Islands or rocks which are called Los Frayles that is the Friers Before you come to Cabo de Tubaron there is a Créeke wherein lieth an Island called Iabaque with more cliffes and Riffes lying about it being foule ground Behind this Island you see certaine hilles called Las Sierras de dona Maria otherwise Las Sierras de Sabana when you are right against Iabaque then you must run West Northwest The Cabo de Tubaron is a blacke shining Houell on the sea side being clouen vpon it hauing certaine white places like water beakes Within this point or Cape lieth a riuer of fresh water where you haue stones for Ballast as you haue in the Riuer of Mynijcka From thence to the point of Cabo de Crus you must hold your course Northwest vntill you are past the Island of Nabassa running on the North side thereof and if the streames chaunce to driue you on the south side then you must obserue certain times if you be in a great ship holding a good way into the Northwest from it to shun the sands that sticke out from the point de Morante and reach betweene this point and Nabassa there in some places you haue aboue foure fadome déepe and at the end thereof you may run from 15. to 20. fadome déepe Nabassa is a round and lowe Island on the Sea side being all flat and plain land running on the North side of this Island you shall hold your course Northwest and Northwest and by West and if you desire to passe along by the Cape De Crus it is a point sticking out which as you come toward it out of the sea sheweth as if on the top it were full of Trées but it is inward to Lande On the East side of this Point lyeth the hauen of Cabo de Crus Now to sayle to the Island De Pinos you must runne West Northwest wherby you shall discouer the Island This Island De Pinos is a low land ful of Trées so that as you come out of the Sea you sée the Trées before you sée the land it stretcheth East and West and
of the Portingales into the East Indies from thence to Malacca China Iapon Iaua and Sunda And from China to the Westerne or Spanish Indies and all the Coast of Brasilia c. The Fourth and last Treatise is A most true exact Summarie of all the Rents Demaynes Tolles Taxes Imposts Tributes Tenths Third-pennies and generally all the Reuenues of the King of Spayne arising out of all his Kingdomes Lands Prouinces and Lordships as well of Portugall as of Spayne collected out of the Originall Registers of his seuerall Chambers of Accompts together with a briefe description of the gouernment and Pedegree of the Kinges of Portugall I doo not doubt but yet I doo most hartely pray and wish that this poore Translation may worke in our English Nation a further desire and increase of Honour ouer all Countreys of the World and as it hath hitherto mightily aduanced the Credite of the Realme by defending the same with our Wodden Walles as Themistocles called the Ships of Athens· So it would employ the same in forraine partes aswell for the dispersing and planting true Religion and Ciuill Conuersation therein As also for the further benefite and commodity of this Land by exportation of such thinges wherein we doe abound and importation of those Necessities whereof we stand in Neede as Hercules did when hee fetched away the Golden Apples out of the Garden of the Hesperides Iason when with his lustie troupe of couragious Argonautes hee atchieued the Golden Fleece in Colchos Farewell THE FIRST BOOKE CHAPTER I. The Voyage and trauailes of Iohn Hugen van Linschoten into the East or Portingales Indies Setting downe a briefe discourse of the said Landes and sea coastes with the principall Hauens Riuers Creekes and other places of the same as yet not knowne nor discouered by the Portingales Describing withall not onely the manner of apparrell of the Portingales inhabiting therin but also of the naturall borne Indians their Temples Idols houses trees Fruites Hearbes Spices and such like Together with the customes of those countries as well for their manner of Idolatrous religion and worshipping of Images as also for their policie and gouernment of their houses their trade and traffique in Marchandise how and from whence their wares are sold brought thether With a collection of the most memorable and worthiest thinges happened in the time of his beeing in the same countries very profitable and pleasant to all such as are welwillers or desirous to heare and read of strange thinges BEeing young and liuing idlelye in my natiue Countrie sometimes applying my selfe to the reading of Histories and straunge aduentures wherein I tooke no small delight I found my minde so much addicted to sée trauaile into strange Countries thereby to séeke some aduenture that in the end to satisfie my selfe I determined was fully resolued for a time to leaue my Natiue Countrie and my friendes although it gréeued me yet the hope I had to accomplish my desire together with the resolution taken in the end ouercame my affection and put me in good comfort to take the matter vpon me trusting in God that he would further my intent Which done being resolued thereupon I tooke leaue of my Parents who as then dwelt at Enckhuysen and beeing ready to imbarke my selfe I went to a Fléet of ships that as then lay before the Tassell staying the winde to sayle for Spaine and Portingale where I imbarked my selfe in a ship that was bound for S. Lucas de Barameda beeing determined to trauaile vnto Siuill where as then I had two bretheren that had continued there certaine yeares before so to helpe my selfe the better by their meanes to know the manner and custome of those Countries as also to learne the Spanish tongue And the 6. of December in the yere of our Lord 1576 we put out of y e Tassel being in all about 80. ships set our course for Spain and the ninth of the same month wee passed betwéene Douer and Callis within thrée dayes after wee had the sight of the Cape of Finisterra and the fiftéene of the same moneth we saw the land of Sintra otherwise called the Cape Roexent from whence the riuer Tegio or Tagus runneth into the maine Sea vppon the which riuer lieth the famous citie of Lisbone where some of our Fleet put in and left vs. The 17. day wee saw the Cape S. Vincent vppon Christmas day after we entred into the riuer of S. Lucas de Barameda where I stayed two or thrée dayes and then trauailed to Siuill the first day of Ianuarie following I entred into the citie where I found one of my brethren but the other was newly ridden to the Court lying as then in Madrill And although I had a speciall desire presently to trauaile further yet for want of the Spanish tongue without the which men can hardlie passe the countrie I was constrained to stay there to learne some part of their language meane time it chanced that Don Henry the last King of Portingale died by which meanes a great contention and debate hapned as then in Portingale by reason that the said King by his Will and Testament made Phillip King of Spaine his Sisters Sonne lawfull Heire vnto the Crowne of Portingal Notwithstanding y e Portingals alwaies deadly enemies to the Spaniards were wholly against it and elected for their king Don Antonio Prior de Ocrato brothers Son to the King that died before Don Henry which the King of Spaine hearing presently prepared himselfe in person to goe into Portingale to receaue the Crowne sending before him the Duke of Alua with a troupe of men to cease their strife and pacifie the matter so that in the end partly by force and partly by mony hee brought the Countrie vnder his subiection Whereupon diuers men went out of Siuill and other places into Portingale as it is commonlie séene that men are often addicted to changes and new alterations among the which my Brother by other mens counsels was one First trauelling to the borders of Spaine being a cittie called Badaios standing in the frontiers of Portingale where they hoped to finde some better meanes and they were no sooner ariued there but they heard news that all was quiet in Portingale and that Don Antonio was driuen out of the countrie and Phillip by consent of the Land receyued for King Wherevpon my Brother presently changed his minde of trauelling for Portingale and entred into seruice with an Ambassador that on the Kings behalfe was to goe into Italie with whome he rode and ariuing in Salamanca hee fell sicke of a disease called Tauardilha which at that time raigned throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine whereof many thousands died and among the rest my Brother was one This sicknesse being very contagious raigned not onely in Spaine but also in Italie Germany and almost throughout all Christendome whereof I my selfe was sicke being as then in Italie and by them it
their daylie liuing occupations as it shal be shewed at large and yet there are continuall pyracies committed on the sea what order soeuer they take wherby poore marchaÌ„ts are taken prisoners robbed of all they haue The land throughout is very fruitfull gréene and pleasant to beholde but hath a very noysome and pestiferous ayre for such as are not borne in the countrie and yet pepper doth onely growe on this coast although some groweth by Mallacca in certaÌ„e parts of the land but not so much for from hence is it laden and conueyed throughout the whole world The 13. Chapter Of the Ilands called Maldyua otherwise Maldyua RIght ouer against the cape of Comoriin 60. miles into the sea westward the Ilands called Maldyua doe begin and from this cape on the North syde they lie vnder 7. degrées so reach south south east till they come vnder 3. degrées on the south side which is 140. myles Some say there are 11000. Ilands but it is not certainely knowne yet it is most true they are so many that they can not be numbred The Inhabitants are like the Malabares some of these Ilands are inhabited and some not inhabited for they are very lowe ground like the countrie of Cochin Cranganor c. and some of them are so lowe that they are commonlie couered with the sea the Malabares say that those Ilandes in time past did ioyne fast vnto the firme land of Malabar were part of the same land and that the Sea in processe of tyme hath eaten them away so separated them from the firme land There is no merchandize to be had in them but only coquen which are Indian nuttes and cayro which are the shelles of the same nuts that is the Indian hemp wherof they mak ropes cables and other such like commodities those are there to be found in so great aboundance that with them they serue the whole country of India and al the oriental coast of the wood of the same trées they make themselues boats after their manner with all things to them belonging of the leaues they make sayles sowed together with strings made of the nutshelles without any iron nayles and so being laden with the nuttes and other parts of the said trées they come and trafficke with those of the firme land their victuals in the ship being the fruite of the same trée so that to conclude the boate with all her furnitures their marchandises and their victuals is all of this palme trée and that maintaineth all the inhabitants of the Ilands of Maldyua and therewith they trafficke throughout India there are some of these nuttes in the said Iland that are more estéemed then all the nuttes in India for that they are good against all poyson which are verie faire and great and blackish I saw some that were preseÌ„ted vnto the vice roy of India as great as a vessell of 2. tuÌ„nes Indian measure and cost aboue 300. Pardawen which were to send vnto the King of Spaine Of this trée and her fruites together with the vsage thereof I will discourse more at large in the declaring of the Indian trées fruites meane time I will returne to the description of the coasts with their situations From the cape of Comoriin the coast beginneth North east to turne inwards again till you come to the Cape of Negapatan which lyes vnder 11. degrées and is 60. myles distant from the cape of Comoriin From the cape of Comoriin South east by South about 40 miles into the sea lieth the furthest corner of the great Iland of Seylon and so reacheth North and by east vntill you come right ouer against the cape of Negapatan being distant from the firme land the same cape 10. miles and betwéene the firme land and that Iland there lyeth some drie groundes or lytle Ilands whereby it is manie times dangerous for the Shippes that sayle vnto Bengala and the coast of Choâ—amandel which commonly passe through that way The Iland of Seylon is in length 60. miles and in breadth 40. miles from the first and vttermost corner North by east about 18. miles vnder 7. degrées and an halfe lyeth a fort belonging to the Portingals called Columbo which by méere force great charges is holden and maintained for that they haue no other place or péece of ground no not one foot but that in all the Iland it is but a small fort yet very strong and well guarded The soldiers that are therein are commonly such as are banished for some offence by them coÌ„mitted or such as haue deserued death and some dishonest women for some euill fact are put in there to beare them company They fetch al their necessaries out of India and are often times assailed by their enemies the Inhabitants of the Iland and often times besieged but alwaies valiantly defend themselues The 14. Chapter Of the Iland of Seylon THe Iland of Seylon is said to be one of the best Ilands that in our time hath béene discouered and the fruitfullest vnder the heauens well built with houses and inhabited with people called Cingalas and are almost of shape and manners like to those of Malabar with long wyde eares but not so blacke of colour they goe naked onely their members couered they were wont to haue but one King but hauing murdered their king they deuided their countrie into manie kingdomes and not long since a simple barber murthered their chief king with great tyrannie brought the kingdome vnder his subiection driuing the other kings out of the countrie whereof one that was a Christian fled into India and dwelleth at Goa where he is kept maintained at the kings charge This barber as it is said hath made himselfe king and the whole Iland vnder his subiection his name was Raju he liueth verie warily and is verie subtill a good soldier but trusting no man the Chingalans are not his good friends yet they liue in obedieÌ„ce vnder him more through force and feare then for loue or good wil for that he causeth them with great tyrannie to be executed so that no man dareth stirre against him he is likewise a deadly enemie to the Portingall and about a yeare before I came from India he had besieged the fort of Columbo with a great nuÌ„ber of Elephants and men but by meanes of y e Portingals that came thither out of India he was constrayned to breake vp his siege before the fortresse The Iland is full of hils and there is one hill so high that it is reported to be the highest hill in all India and is called Picode Adam The Indians hold for certane that Paradice was in that place and that Adam was created therein saying that yet vntill this daye there are some of his footsteps fouÌ„d vpon that hill which are within the stones as if they were ingrauen and neuer goe out The Iland is full of all sorts of Indian fruites and of al kind of wild beasts as
they know full well howe to bring to passe for that there is not any thing from whence they will not sucke or draw out some profit or aduantage or else they haue the slight and cunning how to get it as well from the King and from other Noblemen and estates as also from the common people it séemeth in a manner that they bewitch men with their subtill practises and deuises and are so wel practised and experimented in trade of marchandises that they surpasse all worldly men To conclude there is not any commoditie to be had or reaped thoroughout all India but they haue their part therein so that the other orders and Religious persons as also the common people doe much murmur thereat and séeme to dislike of their couetous humors A little beyond Iapon vnder 34. and 35. degrées not farre from the coast of China lyeth an other great Iland called Insula de Core whereof as yet there is no certaine knowledge neither of the greatnesse of the countrie people nor wares that are there to be found From Makau East Northeast distant aboue 90. miles lye certaine Ilandes called Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and lye about 20. miles distant from the firme land of China and 90. miles farther in the same course lye other Ilands called Lequeo Maior or great Lequeo All these Ilandes are trauelled vnto and inhabited by those of China whereof we will now cease to speake till an other time hauing particularly made a briefe discourse in an other place of all their manners customes wares and marchandises according to the truest instructions I could find and so will returne againe to the description of Goa together with the places bordering about the same The 27. Chapter A short relation of the land lying behind Goa in the iurisdiction whereof lyeth the said towne of Goa and of the Originall of their Kings and Gouernours with their names by true information giuen by the inhabitants themselues together with their Histories BEfore I begin to write of the towne and Ilande of Goa with the coastes superstitions and other customes of the countrie lying behinde and rounde about Goa as well where the Portingales inhabit as where the natiue countrie men are resident I thought it conuenient to begin with the same somwhat further off then at the present time the better to vnderstand the originall of the people together with the principall causes of the diuisions of the same countries and nations as also their Kings names and surnames Then you must vnderstand that about 300. yeares past there was a mightie King of the countrie of Deli which lyeth within the land behind Goa on the Northside and bordereth vpon the land of Coracone belonging to the King of Persia wherein are made the rich Couerlets and hangings by the Portingales called Alcatyffas which land of Deli is verie colde and hath Snow and Ice in it like the Netherlands This king of Deli brought vnder his subiection all the countries bordering about him among the which were Decam Cuncam Ballagate and the lande of Goa At the same time the countrie of Cambaia which is distant from Goa about 100. miles Northward was ouerrunne and taken fâ—rcibly by the Moores Mahometans and brought the naturall countrimen called Reysbutos being heathens with great tyranie vnder their subiection The land of Ballagate and Decam was before inhabited by heathens that were verie mightie and of great power whose successors are now called Venesares and others that yet dwell within the countrie called Colles which Colles Venesares and Reysbutos of Cambaia doe yet liue by robbing and stealing and those of Cambaia pay tribute to the saide Reysbutos because they should not robbe and spoyle them but suffer them to liue in peace The Colles and Venesares also receiue tribute of the men of Decam and Ballagate for that the Kings could neuer as yet ouercome them although they make no shew thereof but still dissemble with them for that of what soeuer they robbe and steale they haue their parts After this King of Deli had brought all these kingdomes and countries vnder his subiection then came the Tartarians which the Indians call Mogoren and ouercame most part of the countrie of Deli. At the same time there dwelt in the kingdome of Bengalen a Noble Gentleman whose brother the King of Bengallen had wrongfully put to death whereby this Gentleman sought and deuised all the meanes hee could to bee reuenged and did not onely bring it to passe by bereauing the King of his life but also tooke the whole kingdome from him and brought it vnder his subiection and being in this sorte become absolute Lord and King of Bengalla was not therewith content but desiring to augment his kingdome and thereby to win great fame did inuade the countrie of Deli bordering vpon him with a great armie of men and by force draue the Tartarians or Mogoros out of the countrie and so conquered both that lande and all the countries bordering thereabouts as Decam Ballagate and Cuncam as farre as to the kingdome of Cambaia and for a time was the greatest Prince in all those quarters For the Indians affirme that hee had in Compasse vnder his subiection aboue 800. miles of land This King raigning for a time ouer al these lands and countries in the end desiring to liue quietly and to returne vnto his kingdom of Bengala thinking it too troublesome for him to rule so great a countrie did inuest one of his cosins with the countries of Decam Ballagate and Cuncam with the land of Goa and the countries bordering about the same which done he returned into his land of Bengala leauing his saide cosin King and commander of the aforesaid countries This man was alwaies a great friende and wel-willer to strange nations as Arabians Turkes Ruynes and Corasones parted his countries among Gouernours and Captaines to on whereof beeing called Idalham whome the Portingales call Hidalcam he gaue the Gouernment of Angedina which lyeth 12. miles from Goa Southwards stretching towards the North till you come to a place called Siffardan which are 60. miles wherein is contained the towne and Iland of Goa to an other Captaine called Nisa Maluco hee gaue the coast of Siffardan stretching Northwards to Negotana which are 20. miles and lyeth inwards to the land of Cambaia so that those two Captaines had their gouernments in the countrie of Cuncam which lyeth on the Sea coast and seperateth it selfe from the land of Decam by great and high hils called Guate These hils are verie high and haue many corners and hookes of land and doe stretch towardes Cambaia to the Cape de Comorin and from thence backe againe to the coast of Choramandel The hill of Guate is so high that men may easily sée it within Goa and all the coast along though commonly it is couered with clouds and it is the more to bee wondred at for this respect because all other hils are vneuen high and low
and this is faire and flat land on the top with great goodly fields is by the Indians called Ballagate that is to say aboue the hill for Balla is aboue and Gate is a hill whereby the Portingals doe commonly cal the whole countrie Ballagate although the principall part and the land it selfe is called Decam and also Canara wherof the inhabitants are called Decanijns and Canaras as the Kings also in times past vsed to beare titles and call themselues Kings of Decam But returning to the diuision of the rest of the countries he deuided likewise the land of Ballagate or Decam into Prouinces giuing one part to Imademaluco by the Portingales called Madremaluco and an other part to Cotalmoluco and an other to Melique Verido All the said Captaines were strangers as Turkes Ruines and Corasones except Nisamalucode who was Sonne to a Gentleman of the Kings house and because the King had laine with the mother of Nisamaluco therefore hee boasted himselfe to be of the linage of the king of Decam all the other Captaines were slaues and seruants which the King had brought and placed in those roomes as putting great trust in them thinking that they would acknowledge it and bee thankfull vnto him for the same But it fell out otherwise as wee see it commonly doth and that good is requited with euill for these Captaines in time getting credite authoritie and power were in great estimation and as it were absolute Kings and Gouernours of their Prouinces for that the king neuer troubled himselfe therwith but layde all the charge vppon them whereby they beganne to bee puffed vp with pride and determined to vsurpe the Prouinces vnder him for them and their successors And because it grieued them to be in subiection to an other and at his commaundement they all met together and among them agréed to take their Lord and King prisoner and so euery one of them to be sole commanders of the coūtries they had in charge which they easily brought to effect for that they had all the meanes they would wish or desire as did honour them with the name of Xa which is to say a King whereby they had the names of Adelxa Nisamoxa and Contumixa and all the Kings continued so with the name of Xa which in Persia is a King and Ismael is a proper name whereby Xa Ismael and Xa Thamas are as much to say as King Ismael and King Thamas and of the Turkes and Rumes are called Suffy or Soffy which signifieth a great Captaine The Kings of Decam also haue a custome when they will honor a man or recompence their seruice done and rayse him to dignitie and honour They giue him the title of Nayque which signifieth a Captaine as Salua Nayque and Acem Nayque And whē they will giue a man an honourable title or salutation they call him Rau as Chitarau which is to say strong King and such like titles which among them is a great honour Also Adelham or Hidelcam is called Sabayo which signifieth Seigneur or Lord for the Iland of Goa had a Captaine or Gouernour that was Lord of the towne when the Portingales wanne it first called Sabayo as the Portingales Chronicles of their Indian conquests doe make mention whose house or Palace to this day in the Cittie of Goa is the inquisition house and a place which standeth betwéene the great Church and the same house is as yet called the Pallace of Sabayo The 28. Chapter Of the towne and Ilande of Goa chiefe Cittie of India THe Citie of Goa is the Metropolitan or chiefe Cittie of all the Orientall Indies where the Portingales haue their traffique where also the Viceroye the Arch bishop the Kings Councel and Chauncerie haue their residence and from thence are all places in the Orientall Indies gouerned and ruled There is likewise the staple for all Indian commodities whether all sorts of Marchants doe resort comming thether both to buy and sell as out of Arabia Armenia Persia Cambaia Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca Iaua Molucca China c. The Cittie and Iland of Goa lyeth vnder 15. degrees on the North side and is distant from the Equinoctiall by the way that the Portingales shippes do come thether from Mossambique 400. miles It is an Iland wholly compassed about with a riuer and is aboue thrée miles great it lyeth within the coast of the firme lande so that the Iland with the Sea coast of the firme land doe both reach as farre each as other into the Sea It is only seperated from the firme land by an arme of the Sea or of the ryuer that runneth in by the North side of the towne and so round about the Iland to the South side where it entereth againe into the Sea and is in forme almost like a halfe Moone The ryuer runneth euen vnto the Towne and is indifferent broade there are betwéene the firme land and the Iland certaine small Ilandes that are all inhabited by the naturall borne countrimen and on the other side of the town the ryuer is there so small that in Summer time by wading to the knées in water a man may passe it ouer on foote On the which side the Iland hath a wall with certaine Bulwarkes which y e Portingales of late yeares haue caused to be made to defend them from the firme land in time of warre as it often happeneth for it hath diuers times béene besieged by Dialcan or Hidalcam at the mouth and the entrie of the ryuer On the North side lyeth the land of Bardes which is high land vnder which land the Portingales doe Anker safely out of all danger and there they haue a place to lade and vnlade their wares This land of Bardes is also vnder the Portingall subiection and is full of Villages inhabited with people that are of the firme land lying aboue it called Canarijns who for the most part are Christians but obserue their owne manner of apparell which is to goe all naked their priuie members onely couered This land is full of Indian Palme trées whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocos doe grow as also all the other Ilands lying in the ryuer This land of Bardes is seperated from the firme land by a small riuer which is so little that it cannot almost be discerned from the firme land On the South side of the Iland of Goa wher the riuer runneth againe into the Sea there commeth euen out with the coast a land called Salsette which is also vnder the subiection of the Portingales and is inhabited and planted both with people and fruite like the land of Bardes and is likewise parted with a little ryuer from the firme land Betwéene this land of Salsette the Iland of Goa lie also some small Ilands all full of Indian Palme trées and by the mouth or issue of the ryuer lyeth an Iland which is called Goa Velha that is old Goa from whence there commeth no speciall thing neither is it much inhabited Those lands of Bardes
which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza the S. Anthonie and the S. Christopher being Admiral that had arriued there â—0 daies before and the Conception which came thether but the day before vs so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas and by the signes and tokens that we and the other ships had séene at Sea we presumed it to be lost as after we vnderstoode for it was neuer seene after for the other shippes had seene Mastes Deales Fattes Chestes many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards with a thousand other such like signs Our Admiral likewise had béene in great danger of casting away for although it was a new ship this the first Viage it had made yet it was so eaten with Wormes that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods ouer bord into the Sea and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes both night and day and neuer holde still and being before the Iland of S. Helena had ther also sunke to the ground if the other ships had noâ— holpen her The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus with the goods men that remained in the S. Saluador that had béene saued by the Portingal armie vpon the coast of Abex and brought vnto Ormus as in an other place I haue declared That ship had wintered in Mosambique and had passed verie soone by the Cape so sayled without any companie vnto Portingall hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland as the maner is which the next ships that came thether must take into them These gaue vs intelligence that about foure monthes before our arriuall there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Helena which had sayled through the Straights of Magelâ—anaes and through the south seas from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas and had passed through the Straights of Sunda that lyeth beyond Malacca betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua in the which way she had taken a shippe of China such as they call Iunckos laden with Siluer and Golde and all kind of Silkes and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca telling him that shee sent him that of friendship meaning to come her selfe and visite him Out of that ship of China they tooke a Portingall Pilot so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and came to the Iland of Saint Helena where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword which the Portingales at our arriual found there yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper one Gerrit van Afhuysen borne in Antwarpe and dwelling in Lisbone who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before for that they staied in Malacca at the least fourtéene Monthes by reason of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie vntill Malacca was relieued as I saide before whereby they had passed great miserie and béene at great charges And because it is a very vnwholesome countrie together with y e constraint of lying there so long of 200. men that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship there were but 18. or 20. left aliue and all the rest dyed so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca to bring the shippe home This Gerrard van Afhuysen being of mine acquaintance and my good friend before my departure out of Portingall for India maruelled and ioyed much to find me there little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place and there we discoursed of our trauels past And of him among diuers other things I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca as of the countries and Ilands lying about it both for their manner of dealing in trade of Marchandise as in other memorable things By the pictures following you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena and of the thrée sides therof as we passed by it and as we sayled about it to the road as also of the Iland of Ascention The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne as I my selfe could marke the same The 94. Chapter A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena SANCTA HELENA THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named because the Portingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles little more or lesse and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles from Brasilia 510. miles These are the two néerest lands adioyning to it It is a verie high and hillie countrie so that it commonly reacheth vnto the cloudes the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie also all the trees that are therein whereof there are great store grow of themselues in the woodes are little worth but only to burne for it hath no special substance but sheweth as if it were halfe consumed so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone hath in times past béene in that Iland as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone When the Portingales first discouered it there was not any beasts nor fruite at all within the Iland but onely great store of fresh water which is excellent good and falleth downe from the mountaines and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley where the Church standeth and from thence by small chanels into the Sea where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh water and wash their clothes so that it is a great benefit for them and a pleasant sight to behold how cleare in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley which may bee thought a myracle considering the drinesse of the country together with the stonie Rockes and hilles therein The Portingales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites which haue growne there in so great abundance that it is almost incredible For it is so full of Goates Buckes wild Hogges Hennes Partridges and Doues by thousands so that any man that will may hunt and take them ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient although there came as many shippes more
meanes we could to saue him yet we could not doe it by reason wee sayled before the winde The same day at night wee saw the Iland of Ascention and lauered all that night because we would not passe the Iland In the Morning the 28. of May we sayled about the Iland to sée if there were any ground to Anker on because the Admirall was so leake that shee could no longer holde out and the men desired the Officers of the shippe that they would lay the goods on land in the Iland of Ascention and there leaue it with good watch and necessaries for them that keepe it and so sayle with the emptie ship to Portingall and there procure some other shippe to fetch the goods thinking it was sufficient to haue it well watched and kept there for that there commeth not a ship in twentie yeares into that Iland because there is nothing in it to be had We went close vnto it by a verie white and faire Sand where the Admirall and all the shippes cast out the Lead and found from eightie to fiftie and 4â— Fadomes water and although they might haue gone closer to the land yet the Officers excused themselues saying that they coulde not goe neerer and that it was too deepe and verie dangerous for them to Anker there Which they said to pacifie the men desiring that they might borow two Pumpes nore of the other shippes and so without doubt they woulde bring the shippe safe vnto Portingall and although it would bee great paine and labour for them to doe it yet they must of force content themselues for that the Admirall and all the Gentlemen that were in the shippe pumped both day and night as their turnes came about as well as the meanest in the shippe onely to encourage the people They borowed one Pumpe of the Saint Mary and sent to desire vs to lend them another and although our ship was none of the best among the Fleet we were of opinion not to lend him any as not knowing what neede wee should haue our selues hauing so long a way to sayle yet in the end seeing the great necessitie they were in we lent them one the rather because they sayd that the Admirals meaning was if it were calme wether to discharge some of their wares into other shippes thereby to lighten themselues but it fell not out as they thought so that with great miserie and labor they ouercame their iournie The 95. Chapter Of the Iland called the Ascention THis Iland was discouered vpon Ascention daye and in shew séemeth as great as the Iland of Saint Hellena but not so high It is ful of hilles and dales lying vnder eight degrées and a halfe on the South-side of the Equinoctiall line and lyeth Northwest distant from Saint Helena 19â— Spanish miles and from the Equiâ—octiall line 140. miles There is not any fresh water in the Iland nor one greene leafe or branch It hath many hilles of a reddish colour which shew like a certaine Earth in Spaine called Almagro and is full of stonie hilles and dryed land it is like Saint Helena There hath beene some shippes there that missed Saint Helena and sought for fresh water in that Iland but could find none It hath certaine faire and white Sandes about it and great store of Fish wherein it surpasseth S. Helena but in it there are no beastes at all onely by reason of the great quantitie of Fishes Ther are so many Birds in it y t it is strange and they are of the bignesse of young Geese came by thousands flying about our ships crying and making great noyse and ranne vp and downe in the shippe some leaping and sitting on our shoulders and armes not once fearing vs so that wee tooke many of them and wrung of their neckes but they are not good to eate because they taste morish I thinke the cause they are so tame is because they see but few men and some desire to goe to them About that Iland and the Iland of Saint Helena vnto the Equinoctiall line there are flying Fishes as great as Herings which flie by great flockes together two or thrée Fadome aboue the water and flie in that manner at the least a quarter of a mile vntill their wings or finnes be drie and then they can flie no longer but fall into the water and there wet themselues and then flie againe aboue the water The cause why they flie in that sort is because they are chased by the great fishes that eate them and to escape from them they flie aboue the water and some times into the shippes for many of them fell into our ship which flew too high for wheÌ„ their wings are drie they must needes fall From that Island of Ascention the shippes held their course Northwest and by West til they be a degree past the Equinoctiall line on the North side where there lyeth a cliffe called Penedo de Sam Pedro which many times they sée and to it from the Islande of Ascention are 300. miles The 5. of Iune we passed againe the Equinoctiall line and then again began we to see the North starre which we had lost vnder ten degrées on this side Cochijn and now began to lose the sight of the South starre and there we had the sun in the South at twelue of the clocke at noone in which on the other side of the line at the same time is in the North. The 8. of Iune being 4. degrées in the North we lost our generall South east winde that had serued vs from the Cape de bona Speranza thether then began the raines and calmes for as then we began to come neare the coast of Guinea which continueth to 9. degrees These calmes and raines helde vs till 11. degrées being the 20 of Iune whereby the ships seperated themselues by reason of the calmes which made them not able to stéerre and in the 11. degrees they met againe and there we had a North east wind which is called the generall winde because it floweth continually in those Countries and holdeth to 30. and â—2 degrées beginning many times at 6. and 7. degrees but wee had it not till wee were vnder 1â— degrées This wind is somewhat scant for wee must of force saile in the wind because our chiefe course is Northwest and by North. The 23. of Iune we passed the point of Capo Verde which is vnder 15. degrées and the 26. of the same month we passed the Islands of Capo Verde which are ten in number They beginne vnder 15. degrées and end in 19. degrées and are distant from the firme land of Capo Verde from 70. to 1â—0 miles inwards to the sea Then wee entred into the sea called Sergasso which is all couered with hearbes so that it séemeth to be like a gréene fielde so thicke that a man can not see the water neyther can the ships passe through them but with great labour vnlesse they haue a strong wind The
out of Portingall to Tercera being halfe the Seas ouer met with foure of the Queenes ships their General being S. Iohn Hawkins that stayed them but let them goe again without doing them any harme The Netherlanders reported that each of the Queenes ships had 80 peeces of Ordinance and that Captaine Drake lay with 40 shippes in the English Channell watching for the Army of the Carunho and likewise that there lay at the Cape S. Vincent tenne other English shippes that if any shippes escaped from the Ilandes they might take them Those tidings put the Ilanders in great feare least if they fayled of the Spanish Fleet and got nothing by them that theÌ„ they would fall vpon the Ilands because they would not returne emptie home whereupon they held straight watch sending aduise vnto the king what newes they heard The first of September there came to the Iland of S. Michael a Portingall shippe out of the Hauen of Pernanbuco in Brasilia which brought newes that the Admirall of the Portingall fleet that came from India hauing missed the IaÌ„ld of S. Helena was of necessitie constrayned to put in Parnanbuco although the King had expressie vnder a great penaltie forbidden him so to doe because of the wormes that there doe spoile the ships The same ship wherin Bernaldin Rybero was Admirall the yeare before 1589 sayled out of Lisbone into the Indies with 5. ships in her company whereof but 4. got into India the 5 was neuer heard of so y t it was thought to be cast away The other foure returned safe againe into Portingale though the Admirall was much spoiled because he met with two English ships that fought long with him and slew many of his men but yet he escaped from them The 5. of the same moneth there arriued in Tercera a caruell of the Island of Corâ—o and brought with her 50. men that had been spoiled by the english men who had set them on shore in the Iland of Corâ—o being taken out of a shippe that came from the Spanish Indies they brought tydinges that the english men had taken foure more of the Indian ships and a caruell with the king of Spaines letters of aduise for the ships comming out of y e Portingal Indies that with those which they had taken they were at the least fourty English shippes together so that not one Barke escaped them but fel into their hands and that therefore the Portingall ships comming out of India durst not put into the Ilands but tooke their course vnder 40. and 42. degrees and from thence sayled to Lisbon shunning likewise y e cape S. Vincent otherwise they could not haue had a prosperous iourney of it for that as then the sea was ful of English ships Whereupon the king aduised the fleet lying in Hauana in the Spanish Indies ready to come for Spain that they should stay there all that yeare till the next yeare because of the great danger they might fal into by the EnglishmeÌ„ which was no small charge and hinderance to the Fléet for that the ships that lie there doe consume themselues in a manner eat vp one an other by reason of the great number of people together with the scarsetie of al things so that many ships chose rather one by one to aduenture theÌ„selues alone to get home then to stay there all which fell into the English mens hands whereof diuers of the men were brought into Tercera for that a whole day we could sée nothing els but spoyled men set on shore some out of one ship some out of an other that pittie it was to see al of them cursing the EnglishmeÌ„ and their owne fortunes with those that had bin the causes to prouoke the Englishmen to fight and complayning of the small remedie and order taken therein by the king of Spaines Officers The 19 of the same month there came to Tercera a Caruel of Lisbon with one of the kings officers to cause the goods that were saued out of the ship which came from Malacca for the which we stayed there to be laden and sent to Lisbon And at the same tyme there put out of the Carunha one Don Alonso de Bassan with 4 great shippes of warre to come vnto the IlaÌ„ds ther to watch for the fleet of the Spanish Portingall Indies and the goods of the Malacca ship being laden they were to conuoy them all together into the riuer of Lisbon but being certaine daies at sea alwaies hauing a contrary wind they could not get vnto the Ilands only two of them that were scattered from the fleet arriued at Tercera not finding the fleet they presently returned backe to seek them in the meane time the King changed his mind and caused the fleet to stay in India as I said before therfore he sent word vnto Don AloÌ„so de Bassan that he shuld return again to y e Carunho which he presently did without doing any thing nor once approching neere the IlaÌ„ds sauing only the 2 foresaid ships for he wel knew y t the EnglishmeÌ„ lay by the Iland of Coâ—uo but he would not visit them and so he returned to the haueÌ„ of Carunha wherby our goods that came from Malacca were yet to ship and trussed vp again and forced to stay a more fortunat time w t patieÌ„ce pâ—rforce The 23 of Octob. there arriued in Tercera a Caruel with aduise out of Portingâ—le y t of 5 ships which in the yere 159â— wer ladeÌ„ in Lisbon for y e Indes 4 of them wer turned again to portin after they had bin 4 moÌ„ths abrod that the Admiral wherin the Viceroy called Mathias d' Alburkerke sayled had only gotteÌ„ to India as afterward news therof was brought ouer lande hauing beene at y e least 11. monthes at sea and neuer saw land came in great miserie to Malacca In this shippe there dyed by the way 280. men according to a note by himselfe made and sent to the Cardinal at Lisbone w t the names surnames of euery man together w t a description of his voyage the miserie they had indured which was only done because he wold not lose y e gouernment of India for that cause he had sworne eyther to lose his life or to arriue in India as in déede he did afterwardes but to the great daunger losse and hinderance of his companie that were forced to buy it with their liues and onely for want of prouision as it may well be thought for hee knew full wel that if he had returned backe againe into Portingal as the other shippes did he should haue béene cassiered from his Indian regiment because the people beganne alreadie to murmure at him for his proude and loftie mind And among other things that shewed his pride the more behind aboue the gallery of his ship he caused Fortune to be painted his owne picture with a staffe standing by her as it were threatening Fortune with this posie Queroque
vpon Acornes flesh of Darts fish and oysters peacocks and other foules All their meate is broyled vpon coales making it somewhat hard by reason of the smoke and extreame heate among other meate they are verie desirous of Crocodiles flesh which sheweth very white and faire like veale but tasteth like rotten Moschus if any man be sicke in stéed of letting bloud their priests do suck the place where their paine lyeth vntil the bloud doth issue forth The women in Florida are great and verie wise and coloured like men and pinked on their bodies legges and armes putting such colour into the places that will not easily come forth but the women kind when they come first into the world are not so blacke but verie white the blacke yellowish colour is made vpon them by a certaine oyntment as the Tartarians and other heathens vse to do which oyntment they vse to make of a certaine ceremoniall oyle by them vsed Their colour likewise changeth because they go naked and with the burning heate of the sunne The women likewise are verie quicke and subtile like the women of Egypt and can swim ouer great riuers holding their children fast vnder one of their armes and will likewise climbe vppe the highest trees that are in all those countries The chiefe prouinces in Florida which the Spaniards both in the beginning and since at other times haue founde out are these first Panuca lying on the borders of Noua Spaigna discouered by Franco de Gray in An. 1518. who left many spaniards bohind him being slaine eaten and deuoured by the wild people whose skinnes being dryed they hung for a memorie and euerlasting triumph in their Iools Temples Those people are verie vnchaste and helde open stewes where by night they meete and lie together They bore holes in their noses and also in their eares to hang rings at theÌ„ they scrape their teeth to make them cleane and marrie not before they be fortie yeares of age although their daughters are deflowred at the age of ten or twelue yeeres There are in Florida other prouinces as Anauares Albardaosia Iaguasia Apalachia Autia Samouia and diuers others al obseruing one kinde of religion customes wholly without any feare of God pollicie manlinesse or reason The best and fruitfullest part of Florida bordereth on Noua Spaigna to the riuer and prouince of Panuca which riuer runneth with so great a streame into the sea that it is a verie good hauen for ships Here followeth the description of the coast of Florida forasmuch as is contained in the Carde hereunto annexed THe length of the furthest poynt of Terra di Laborador vnto the Cape of Saint Elena lying in Florida is before declared nowe shall follow that which is furder sette downe in the Carde beginning from Saint Elena which lyeth vnder 32. degrees This is a verie faire and broade riuer surpassing al others whatsoeuer in the north coastes wherefore by the Frenchmen it is called Porto Real or kingly hauen hauing found it to be tenne seadom water about this riuer there are many woods of Dakes and Ceder trées wherein are many Harts and other wilde beastes and Peacocks The mouth of the riuer is three miles broade and hath two Capes or hookes of land one stretching West the other North vppon this riuer the Frenchmen haue built a fort called Charles for t some say this riuer runneth vnto the riuer Iordan and so into the other sea Betwéene both these hookes of lande in the mouth of the Riuer there lieth a fayre Island full of trees from Saint Elena to Rio Secco is fortie Spanish miles whereof seuentéene and a halfe make a degree and this Riuer lieth vnder 31. degrees from Rio Secco to Santa Cioce and from thence to the point of Cannaueral which lyeth vnder 20. degrées are forty miles Here I must pause a while follow the Frenchmens rule because this countrey was likewise discouered and also described by them So then the Frenchmen recon from Saint Elena sayling southward along the coast foure French miles where you come to the Riuer Magnus or Grandis that is the great Riuer then Guade or as it is in our Carde Guate and further Bellum or Bellus from thence to Gironda then to Garumna and so to Charenta from Charenta to Ligetim or the Loire sixe miles from Loire to Axona in the mouth whereof lyeth an Island in our Carde called Rio di S. Pero from Axona to Sequana or Seine because it was like the riuer that runneth throgh Paris vnto Roan lieth sixe miles and all these nine riuers lie within the space of sixtie French miles leauing the Seine and sailing southward by the shore you passe certaine small Riuers as Ay Serrauahi then you come to the great Riuer Maius so called by the Frenchmen that is the Riuer of May because it was found by one Landometo vpon the first day of May and is distant from Sequana or Seine 14. miles thereabout grew certaine redde and white mulberie trées vppon the highest branches whereof hung great numbers of silke wormes from this riuer you come to a gulfe that reacheth somewhat inward into the land beeing the place where Landonerius first arriued when hee sayled out of France into those countreyes and there hee saw in the mouth of a certaine riuer many sea Swine or Dolphins wherevpon he called the same Riuer by the name of those Dolphins on the South side of the gulfe lyeth the French Cape about thirtie degrees from the line so called because the Frenchmen did first land there This Cape is not high but a flatte strand al ful of high trees and thick woods From the French Cape you come to Cannaueral another Cape fiue thirtie miles distant taking the name form the reeds that grow thereon The Spaniards and also our Carde doo not set downe many of these Riuers and the greatest parte of them that are described are altered in their names for the Riuer of May by them is called Maranca the Seine Saint Augustin the Gaâ—â—mna S. Matheo the great riuer S. Pero From Cannauerâ—l to the cape of Florida are fortie miles and betweene these two Capes lie many flats The cape of Florida lyeth vnder fiue and twentie degrees and before it lie many cliffes which they name Martires or Maâ—tiâ—s and on the other sides litle Islands called Testudines that is Torteaux because they are in forme like those kindes of beasts The Cape of Florida is in breadth twentie miles and from thence to Ancon Bâ—xo are 100. miles and lieth fifty miles east and west from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida The description of some Islands that lie ouer against the coast of Florida FIrst you most note that the whole coast of Florida is ful of Islands cliffes banks flattes and such like dangerous places and as touching the Islandes they are at the least foure hundreth in number besides the great Island called Lucaâ—ae that giueth the name to al
manners and customes in planting hunting c. Besides this these people take great pleasure in twoo things that is dancing and drinking often times spending eight dayes together in banquetting dancing and drinking themselues drunke besides their ordinarie dancings and meeting together at the feasts and coronations of their Kings and Lordes or in common assemblies and publike bankets many of them meete together euerie one drest in a seueral maner some with crowns of feathers others with shelles or fruits about their legges like Iuglers heere in our countrey vsing al kinds of toyes and deuices some straight others crooked some backwards some forwards grinning laughing counterfetting the deafe blind and lame man fishing weauing and doing al kinde of workes and that for the space of fiue or sixe howres together for that hee which continueth longest in that manner is the best man and he that drinketh wel is a lustie fellow hauing danced they sitte down crosse legged like a Taylor and make good cheare drinking themselues drunke at the kings charges of which their dancing I haue spoken in another place so that to speake any more thereof it were needlesse They are great Idolaters praying to the Sunne and the Moone thinking them to bee man and wife and to be great Gods They feare the Sunne verie much when it thundereth or lightneth saying that it is angry with them they fast when there is any eclipse of the Moone specially the women for the married women plucke theyr haires and scratch their faces with theyr nailes thâ— maides thrust thornes of fishes into their armes and therwith draw bloud thinking that when the Moone is in the full they thinke it is to be shot or hurt by the sunne by reason of some anger or greefe he hath conceiued against it when any blazing star appeereth they make a great noise with Drummes and hallowing thinking by that meanes it will bee gone for they thinke a blazing starre signifieth some great hurt or euill fortune Among many Idols and figures which they honour and inuoke for Gods they haue a certaine thing like a Burguinion Crosse which they hang vpon their new borne children thinking thereby they are preserued in the night from all euill things Their priests are called Pâ—aces who in those countries haue the maiden-heades of their Daughters when they marrie Their office likewise is to heale the sicke and to say truth to call vppon the the diuel and to conclude they are skilful in the blacke art and coniurers They heale with hearbes and rootes both sodden and raw beaten and miâ—â—ed with fat of birdes fish or beasts with wood and other things vnknowne to the simple men vsing certain darke wordes and sentences which they themselues do not vnderstand They sucke and sicke the place where the paineâ—s therby to draw out the euil humours and if the paine or feuer increaseth the priests say that their patients are possessed with euil spirits wherewith they rubbe their bodyes all ouer with their handes vsing certaine wordes of coniuracion and charmes sucking after that very hard often making them beleeue that by that meanes they cal the spirit which done they take a certaine wood wherof no man knoweth the vertue but onely themselues wherewith they rub their mouthes and throats so long vntil they cast al whatsoâ—uâ—r they haue within their stomackes and with so great force that ofteÌ„ times they cast forth bloud mean time stamping stammering calling and knocking with theyr feete against the earth with a thousande other toyes needlesse to rehearse Cubâ—gua or Margaritha CVbagua or Margaritha is the Island of pearles and is in compasse three miles lying vnder twelue degrees and a halfe vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line foure miles from the point 〈◊〉 a countâ—â— wherein there is much salt although the grounde is both flat and euen yet it is vnfruitfull and drie both without water and trees and wherein there is little els found then onely Comes and some Sea foules The inhabitants paint theyr bodies they eate the oysters wherein the Pearles are founde and fetch all their fresh water from the firme land giuing pearles for it there is not any Island in the world so smal as it is that hath raised so much profit and made both the inhabitants and strangers rich as this hath doone for that the pearles which in few yeares hath bin brought from thence doe amount vnto aboue two millions of gold although thereby many Spaniards and slaues haue lost their liues From the point â— Arya to the Cape de Salines that is to the poynte of the Salt pans are seuentie miles between them lyeth Caâ—be and the Cape de tres Puntas which is the Cape of three poynts from the Cape de Salines to Punto Auegado that is the drowned hauen are more then seuentie miles and the ceast running along by the gulfe of Paâ—a the lande maketh with the Island Trinidad Paria IN the mouth of the gulfe of Paria lyeth the Island la Trinidad taking the name from a certaine promise made by Columbus in his second voyage in An. 1497. being in danger or because he first perceiued three hilles seeking for fresh water his people in a maner dying with thirst The mouth of this gulf was called os Draconis y t is the Dragons mouth because of the great streame that runneth therein The whole countrey and shore of Paria stretching towardes the South is the goodliest country in all India and the fruitfullest as Benzo and Columbus both doe witnesse so that by some it is called the earthly Paradice it is a great flatte and euen land ouerflowing and aboundant of all things alwaies bring forth flowers of sweete and vnsweete sauour The trees continually greene as it were in May or lent but not many fruitfull or wholsome trees and in some places thereof is great aboundance of Cassia Fistula the whole countrey is generally hot and moist whereby there are diuers wormes among the which are many Mytes which by night fall verie heauily vpon the people and many grashoppers that doo much hurt the inhabitants beare there members in a goord or reede as it were in a sheath letting their stones hang out before the Spaniards came into the countrey they wore such kind of codpeeces bordered with gold pearles and such like things which custome the Spaniards made them to leaue the marrted women couer their secret parts with an apron by them called Pampanillas and the maides tie a peece of cotten before their bellies their kings haue as many wiues as they will yet one of them is accounted for the right Queene and hath commandement ouer all the rest the common people haue three or foure as they think good and when they are olde they put them away and take yong for them They likewise let theyr Piacchos or priests he with their gentlewomen and their maids the first night of the marriage This people as also most part of the Indians maintaine themselues
the poynt is a land which is not ouer lowe where you sée certayne Downes as aforesaide ¶ Here followeth the Nauigation from the Line to the Towne of the Kings called Lyma FRom hence forwarde wee haue declared the coast of Panama in the South sea til you come to the hauen of Quixinus which lieth in the Countrey of Peru now I will goe forward with the course that lieth betweene Quixinus and the towne of Kings so then departing from the poynt de Passos the coast stretcheth south and south and by weast to the hauen called Porto veio or the Old Hauen and before you come thither there lieth the strand called Charaqui wher the ships may put in without any daunger and it is so safe a strand that they may there lay their ships on shoare and mend them if they neede be they neuer so great for it is a good hauen of entraunce onely that in the midle of the entry there lieth certain stones or rugged Islands but the shippes may enter at which side they wil and passe by them without any danger for there is nothing to be shunned but onely that which you sée before your eyes the Olde Hauen lieth vnder one degrée on the south side of the Equinoctiall line and is one of the fiue Townes which the christians or Spaniardes haue built in the flat land of Peru so that Porto Veio signifieth the towne and countrey lying thereabouts which is much ouerrunne wasted because it is a poore vnwholesome country yet it hath certain mines of Sinaragdes which they held long time hidden and by no meanes would discouer them as to this day they yet do They had likewise in times past many golde and siluer vessels which are by the Spaniardes all taken and carried away but now by the kings letters patents being made frée they pay to theyr superiour lords but onely the tenth parte of all their fruits whereby many Spaniards withdrawe themselues from thence séeing their profite to decay The Countrey about Porto Veio was rich of golde where the people made their houses in the trées like birdes nests and because the coast is moorish there is no being for horses whereby it was not so soone subdued by the Spaniardes as also because that out of theyr nests they threw stones iauelines pottes with hot water and whatsoeuer came next to hand whereby they killed many Spaniards wherewith they were forced to couer themselues with boordes and so cut downe the trees before they could ouercome them as also because the Countrey is so rough sharpe and wilde that they could hardely finde prouision for their army there is yet much country thereabouts vnhabited By the Old Hauen two miles within the land is the towne of saint Iacob or Iago which for houses and inhabitants is not inferiour to Porto Veâ—o and thereabouts is the passage of Gainacaua by the Spaniards so called for this occasion that Gaâ—â—acaua the father of Attabalida vpon a certain time sent one of his Captainâ—â— â—â—th a great army to subdue that countrey who minding to passe his people ouer the riuer commanded them to make a bridge of péeces of wood that so they might passe Which being made when his people with their armor and weapons were vppon it the ennemy cutte the ropes wherewith the péeces of wood were fastned together whereby many of them that were vpon it by force of the streame were drowned in the riuer and the rest spoyled by the enemy Which Gainacapa vnderstanding assembled a great number of souldiers and with them departed from Quito and being in the plaine field in open battell he ouercame those people after the which victorie minding to make a passage ouer the riuer that men might passe ouer on foote to the same end he causâ— great numbers of stones and earth to be brought thither and threw them into the riuer being twentie foote broad but whatsoeuer he threw in al wold not preuaile by reason of the great deapth and swiftnesse of the riuer that carried it away by force of the streame which hee perceiuing left off his worke and so departed and therfore the Spaniards haue giuen this place the name of the passage of Gainacaua about the which passage lieth the towne of saint Iacob builded by them About a Spanish mile and a half distant from this town of saint Iacob towardes the south lyeth a round hil by them called Christs Hil. From Porto veâ—o further forward the same course almost foure miles distant in the south lieth the poynt of saint Laurence and two miles and a quarter from thence southwest lieth an Island of the same name which is full a mile in compasse wherein the Indians or Peruuians of the firme land in times past vsed to make their sacrifices and offerings killing many lambes shéepe and some children offering their blood vnto their idolles or diuelles whose figures were made and carued in stone to whome they doe vsually pray When Franciscus Pizarius with his thirteene companions trauelled to discouer Peru they entred likewise into this Island where they found certaine iewells of siluer and golde many cloakes and shertes of very faire and fine wooll so that from that time forwards and for the same cause this Island was called Siluer The poynt of saint Laurence lieth vnder one degrée on the south side of the line And as I sayde before Peru beginneth at the line and stretcheth southwarde vnto Chile The people that dwell vnder the line and thereabouts haue the customes and manners of the Iewes Whereby many men are of opinion that they are issued from the Iews or of the race of Cham they speake hoarsely and in the mouth like the Moores and are much giuen to vncleannesse especially that which is wholy against nature whereby they do not well agree with their wiues but rather despise them The women weare neither hayre nor apparell but onely a certaine aprone before their priuities They plant sowe reape and thrash the corne and wheate meale whereof they make breade which wheate in Peru is called Zara the men weare short shertes without sleeues downe to their nauelles their members being vncouered and some goe naked paint their bodies with a black colour their haire being shauen and cut almost like Friars but they leaue no haire neyther before nor behinde their heades but onely vppon the sides it is likewise a common custome with them to weare many Iewels of golde both in their eares and noses specially emerauldes such as are found in those Countries And although the inhabitants will not discouer the mines yet hath it beene perceiued by certaine rough stones on their arms and legs they weare many beades of gold siluer and small tourqueses also of white and red Teekens and Huyzkens but will not haue their wiues to weare anye such touching the situation of the Countrey it is very hote and vnwholesome and there they haue certayne sore biles that issue out vpon their faces and other partes of theyr
Cunha wind or lay the needle of the compasse a stryke and a half Northeastward and when it is an hower after twelue of the Clocke by the compasse it is then by the Astrolabium but full twelue of the Clocke and to know when you are hard by the Ilandes you shall find it by this that you shall see certaine Birds flying fiue and fiue in ranks together then you are hard by them and from thence forward certaine birdes will follow you by the Portingales called Feigions full of blacke and white spottes whereby they are easy to bee knowne béeing South and North ouer this Iland you shall see certaine thinges driue in the sea by the Portingalles called Sargoslo and is almost like the weedes that is found by Vieâ—inghen in Holland From these Ilandes of â—rulan de Cunha to the cape de bona Speranza being in this countrie about the eight of Iune you shall see in driuing the sea certaine weedes called Sargollo and Trombas like peeces of thicke reedes those reedes are short and full of branches and are not so long as those that are found by the Cape de bona Speranza here you must kéepe on your course till you finde them to increase and be not abashed thereat for it commeth by this meanes that the more it stormeth and is foule weather in the Ilands the more of those reedes weedes are smitteÌ„ down which w t the water the wind that commeth both from behind and ouer the Iland driue towardes the Cape de bona Speranza wherefore I aduertise you that if you find those réedes and weedes to keepe 150. miles further from the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha for they are signes of that I told you of before When you come vnder the hight of 35. degrees full or scarse to the Cape de bona Speranza you shall see Trombas or péeces of thicke reedes in the water and when you see them assure your selfe they come from the Cape de bona Speranza and you are then past those of the Ilands when you find those Trombas then you are but 3â— or â—0 miles from the Cape de bona speranza Those peeces of reedes are long almost like Basuynen but when you are vnder 35. degrées and a half then you see them no more but certaine birds as great as Rauens with white and flat billes with blacke feathers those flie not past 20. or 30 miles from the Cape de bona speranza and some gray birdes by the Portingalles called Alcatiases these are the right tokens you finde from the Cape de Bona Speranza to the Cape das Agulhas you must likewise vnderstand that the trauersing or crosse way from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza is much shorter or lesse theÌ„ is placed in the sea cards but let no man seeke to know the cause thereof as hauing no great matter consisting therein coÌ„cerning the vosage though there were yet it is not coÌ„uenient y t other nations and strangers should vnderstand it you find likewise betwéen the Ilands of Tristan de Cunha and the Cape de bona Speranza certaine sea wolues but being in that couÌ„try about the last of Iune it may be you shal not sée them for then they withdraw themselues from thence because of the cold kéepe vnder the land but if you chaÌ„ce to be by those IlaÌ„ds of Tristan de Cunha about the 10 of May then you shal not passe aboue 35 degrées because at that time the West windes do there blow w t most great fury tempests specially with a new Moone least it happen to you as it did to the shippe called the Bon Iesus which was ouerwhelmed in the sea by the great waues that the windes raised as I my self sayth Diego Afonso haue seene beeing in the shippe called S. Clare of the Cape de bona Speranza y t shall sée certaine birds in the water called Antenas which are great speckled fowle then you are by Cape das Agulhas you shall likewise finde some fish bones or cuttle bones such as the Goldsmithes vse driuing vppon the water and when you haue the sight of land vnder the degrees aforesaid beeing thirtie miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza as also comming vnder the 36. degrées you shall finde those birdes called Antenales and when you are past the Cape de Bona Speranza and haue séene land whether it be y e Cape de Bona Speranza or the cape das Agulhas either beyond or on this side then kéepe aloofe from the land at the least 30. miles into the Sea and if you meane to goe to Mosambique then you must saile North East that is to the Baixos or droughts of India In the course from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza many birdes follow after you but as soone as you come within y e sight of the cape de bona Speranza they leaue you manie times the blacke Rauens aforesaid that you may be sure to be within the Cape that is on the east side of India you shall perceiue the waues of the sea that follow you from the Cape out of the East into the West doe presentlie leaue you as soone as you are past the Cape das Agulhas inwardes vntill you come to others out of the South West that is inward from the Cape also by this Cape the needle of the compasse is right and euen so that when it is noone by the Astrolobie it is likewise noone by the sunne diall or the compasse both agréeing in one which is a good signe that you are North and South with the Cape das Agulhas or betweene both that is the Cape de Bona Speranza and the Cape das Agulhas and this is a great signe as well from Portingall into India as from India to Portingall but sayling from Portingall to India then the néedle of the compasse turneth Northeastward again 30 miles froÌ„ the Cape das Agulhas towards Mosambique The coast runneth East and West and you must bee carefull being past the Cape das Agulhas sixe or seauen miles into the sea from the land called Auagda de Sanbras not to take the way towardes the Cape but towardes the South West and South West and by West because it is necessarie so to doe to saue a great deale of way by reason of the streames and waters that runne inwardes towardes the land If it chance you passe the Cape a farre off and so see not any of these signes theÌ„ take the height of the sunne and looke on your diall but you must doe it aduisedly and with a straight thread and then if you be 150. miles beyond the cape inward it being noone by the Astrolabie The shadow of the sunne diall will not be vpon noone but wil want a strike and when it is noone by the diall then it will be halfe a degree past the Astrolabe which if you find to be so then assure your selues you are 150. miles inwards beyond the cape de Bona
further in the shew of an other thicke Houell with trées and kéeping on your course til you come right ouer against y e riuer theÌ„ the houels séem to be right ouer against the other thicke laÌ„d it sheweth thus when you are about a myle ½ to the sea ward from it froÌ„ this riuer to the first Pagode or Idole there is about three or foure myles and from this Pagode forward you finde no more high hils like that you haue past before and passing straight from thence some of them shew as if they had tables or plaines vpoÌ„ them this Pagode lieth ful vnder 20 degr your best way is alwaies to looke out for it as being requisite for you thereby to make a good voiage beyoÌ„d this first Pagode there staÌ„deth an other Pagode as great as the first with 2 or 3 small Pagodes standing somewhat further from y e first Pagode to y e secoÌ„d is about 4 miles and the coast from the one to the other lyeth East and West here you must not kéepe too close to the shore for you shall hardly put off again because it maketh a créeke likewise before you come to the first Pagode you must kéepe off from the land because two miles before you come at it there lyeth a small drougth stretching a mile into the Sea From the first Pagode to the seconde you sée certaine houels and trées and from the second Pagode to Sataguan it is a lower land all waste and wilde ground being altogether bare to the point called a Punta das Palmerias that is the point of the Palme trees and you run West along the coast from the Pagode aforesaid to a point with a Riffe lying 12. miles from the point of Palmerias there lyeth a riuer the point aforesaide reacheth a great halfe mile into the Sea you runne along the coast Northeast and from the aforesaid Riffe point to the Palmerias the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and to knowe the Riffe and the lande thereof you must vnderstand that the land of the Riffe is greater and thicker then the other land of the Cliffe and maketh show of an Iland and presently somwhat further you shall see nine or ten trees shewing like round houels from the Pagode to this Riffe are about 12. miles from thence forward you shall runne along the coast at nine ten fadome deepe vntill you come to the said Palmerias whereof the fore part of the land is verie low hauing a bare houel which sheweth it selfe like the Arenas Gordas or redde Downes lying by Saint Lucas de Barameda in the coast of Spaine froÌ„ this donne or houel to the Palmerias it is altogether a low and bare land without any trees or bushes the Palmerias were wont to be ten or twelue Palme trees now there is but one hard by the same Palmerias on the side of Sataguan there stande certaine Houels and from thence forwards you haue no pointes hookes trees nor any more bushes but the land for a mile way is nothing but like a Riffe And when you see the point of Palmerias then you shall holde your course East vntill you bee 12. Fadome deepe and from thence Northeast till you find eight Fadome and a halfe and being in the daye time you shall presently see land which shal be beneath all the Riffes and if the land be couered with any dampes or mistes you shall then not see it before you bee at 4. fadome deepe This course you shall hold with a Compasse that faileth not for if it doth you must make your reckening thereafter this land whereby you shall passe is a flat low land without either bush or tree and passing forward along the coast you shall vpon the East side perceiue a long blacke Houel like a Champana without a Mast which is an Indian Caruell and somewhat further from this Houell there are a companie of trées which are about thrée or foure that shew greater then the houell these trees stand somewhat low and a little from these trees beginneth the Riffe of the countrie of Orixa which hauing seene you shal presently see the water to Seaward breake which is vpon the drougthes of Bengalen for there the Chanell is smalest and behind you leaue many Riffes on the side of Bengalen which doe all lie to Sea ward wherefore you cannot see them and passing by them you approach the Riffe of the land of Orixa for although you sayle close by you neede not feare other then that you see before your eyes the depth is three Fadome with small blacke Sand in the bottome On Bengalen side you shall haue foure or fiue fadome water with muddie grounde on the which side you must not goe for that beyond that muddie ground you should come to a banke of Saâ—â— comming from Bengalen when you find this ground you shall if néed be come Northeast and by North vntil you be at thrée fadome for this is the right way the aforesaid Riffe of Orixa being past you shall presently find more depth and if you desire to runne along by the land of Orixa then set your course right vpon the first point that you sée before you the least depth you shall find is thrée fadome which is the right way vntill you be close by the land where you shal find 5. or 6. fadome déepe and if you néede any wood to burne then goe on the other side of the land of Bengalen for there the wood is better then on the side of Orixa but hauing done you must again put to the side of Orixa vntill you bee past two ryuers lying on the same side of Orixa whereof the first is liker a Créeke then a ryuer the other lyeth about a mile further in which hath a great mouth or entrie two or thrée miles further beyond that Riuer there are some flowing Beken with trees a mile beyond them there is woode or wildernesse full of thicke trees like Palme trees from the beginning whereof you must crosse ouer to the other side of the land called Guinette right vppon a tree standing on the same side which is higher then all the rest and standeth on the left side of the riuer called Chandecan from thence forwarde it is all shallowes wherefore you must passe further therabouts with a ful sea if you desire to passe through the channell of the land you shall take your course as I said before from Palmieras to the Northeast you may runne at fiue fadome and being by day you shall runne at thrée fadomes and running at this depth along by the land although you come sometime to lesse depth yet you néede not feare with the which course you shall sée the Riffe of Orixa and when you sée it you shal make towardes it and make 2 â— parts of the way towards the land and a third part towards the Riffe and so you haue the right way as aforesaid The 12. Chapter An other description of the
same course from India to Porto Piqueno or the small Hauen of Bengalen set downe by an other Pilot large and better described with the whole situation and course thereof SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Piqueno in the kingdom of Bengalen outward about the Ilande of Zeylon you shall take your course along the coast of India till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin which is the furthest point of the land of India from thence taking your way crosse ouer for from thence forward it is a good countrie and make the shortest crosse you can thereby to goe sure and not to fall inwards or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon and when you sée Barreias which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fiftéene or twentie myles and from thence forward you shall shorten your way as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées and being there you shall sayle Eastwarde as much as you thinke conuenient that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side lying vnder sixe degrees when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle to be assured thereof make towards the Iland to know it before you come to the drougths betwéene Tanadare which is fyue myles from Punta de Gualla and the first drouth where commonlie all the shippes know the land such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen or to any of the Hauens thereof as Porto Piqueno or Porto Grande that is the small or the great Hauen where the Portingalles doe traffique and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie goe as close vnto it as you will but not passing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore whereof we know not certainely the danger besides the sandes betwéene the which and the land you may passe through as hereafter shal be shewed and sayling thus as I haue sayd along the shore you must vnderstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land and when you are further to landward in you begin to see certaine hilles that is thrée great hilles right against it and then you shall presently sée the first drougth betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland run through that way in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe of faire in some places stony ground and you néed not feare any thing but onelie that you see before your eyes This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land you see a houell standing alone and no more in all that country to be séene 6 miles further from that first great drougth there lieth an other small drougth which is distant Northeast Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and southwest and by West this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼ about 2 miles from the land and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land you may well doe it for it is ◠or 6 fadome déepe at low water with sandie ground which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes as well going as comming backe again but if your ship be great then it is better to sayle about further into the sea Those drougths or sandes béeing past then runne along by the land and neuer put from it for it is your best course to goe close by it and passing by the Iland of the hilles and the high land you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest This hill is called O Capello de Frade that is the Fryers coule and lieth full vnder 8 degrées I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade because you come vpon no direct line this fryers coule maketh a point of lād frō y e whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles and you run by the coast north and south which is all low land with a bankie ground and from thence you shall see no land but the land that lieth inward fiue miles Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer Trinquanamale is a great hauen beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth all low land but very déepe round about he that will anker therein may lie vnder certaine Ilands and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua the other to it is all low land to know Trinquanamale a farre off at the mouth thereof on the north side lieth a yellow Sandie Downe and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes two long hilles rising vp and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie and no other high land neither behinde them nor before thē in all that coast comming by Trinquanamale and hauing knowne it you must then presently crosse ouer for there it is best to follow your course and from thence you must runne North and North and by east alwaies reckning the declining or winding of the compasse and if it be in the monsons of the winds in the month of August then you shall sayle full north because as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Guado variin lying on the coast of Choramandel which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa and being vnder 17. degrees from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land to make a good voiage alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées ½ without séeing land because that vnder 19. degrées there lieth a riuer called Puacota frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship which may easily be seene for it lieth aboue the water you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes all this coast from the point of Guadovariin is altogether great thicke land and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles and you runne by the coast Northeast and Southwest aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill called a Seira de Palura that is the hill of Palura which is the highest hill in all that coast This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira
terra alta that is the last high land you keep the same course along the shore and is in length seauen miles and lieth full vnder ninetéene degrees and ⅔ I set downe this description of the last high land because such as sayle along by the coast may vnderstand that there all the hilles and high landes doe end and from thence forward it is altogether low land and sandie strandes till you come to the place called as Palmerias or Palme trées from the last high land or Derradeira terra alta to the riuer called Rio de Manicapatan the coast runneth northeast and southwest and reacheth 5. miles and to know when you are right against the Riuer of Manicapatan you shall sée a high trée standing alone vpon the sea side and is a very flat land on the sea side hauing a bankie and shallow ground the trée standeth on the left hand of the entrey into the riuer from Manicapatan you runne along the coast East Northeast and west southwest to the Pagode de Iorganate that is the Idoll or temple of Iorganate and reacheth thrée miles This Pagode of Iorganate lieth vnder 20. degrées and ¼ from this Pagode of Iorganate to another great blacke Pagode or Idoll the coast runneth east and west somewhat east and by north and west by south and reacheth 7. miles This blacke Pagode lieth not full vnder 20. degrees and ½ from this blacke Pagode to the riuer of Cayegare the coast runneth northeast and southwest and somwhat northeast and by east and south west and by west and reacheth 10 miles the riuer of Cayegare lieth not full vnder 21 degrees and about 4. miles before you come to it there lieth 5. houels which shew like a Hauen of the Sea built with Cottages in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid there lieth two sandes running a good mile southwestward and at the entrey therof lieth a Riffe running along by the coast for halfe a mile into the sea the entrie of the riuer is 4. fadome déep and you goe in and come forth northwest and southeast the sandes aforesaid as you enter lie on your left hand and there the depth runneth along To know Cayegare a farre off you must vnderstand that when you haue passed the houels aforesaid then Cayegare sheweth like an Iland hauing three or foure trées higher then the rest and a little beyond it standeth a small Pagode and somewhat beyond this Pagode there is a little wood verie thicke with trées which séemeth to bée part of Cayegare and other wood there is none beyond it by the saide Pagode there standeth some Sandie Downes of red colour with some water Beecken from the Riuer of Cayegare to the point called a punta das Palmeiras the Coast runneth northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest by west and reacheth eleauen miles 2. miles before you come to the point of Palmerias you shall sée certaine blacke houels standing vppon a land that is higher then all the land there abouts and from thence to the point it beginneth againe to be low ground and right ouer against the houels you shall sée some small but not ouer white sandie Downes the markes and tokens which you shall finde being right against the point de Palmerias are that vpon the point there is neyther trée nor bush and although it hath the name of the point of Palmtrees it hath notwithstanding right forth but one Palme trée If you fall vppon it by day being by Caijagate and desire to follow your way then saile at the depth of twelue fadomes northeast northeast and by east alwaies with your lead ready in the hand with good care and diligence and being at 16. fadome you shall presentlie winde northeast vntill againe you finde 12. fadome alwaies keeping at that depth till you finde but 7. fadome and lie thereon by night where you shall anker till it be day and then hoise vp anker running the same course of Northeast and northeast and by north till you come to foure fadome and comming thether you shall send a man into the top to know the land This coast reacheth East northeast till you come to a houell which sheweth like a Champana without a mast with a boat following it those Champanas are Caruels of India wherewith they sayle in the sea and along the coast this is the best marke you finde vpon the coast of Orixa and alwaies take good héed to your depthes and if they begin to increase that is aboue fiue fadome then you shal presently turne againe to 3. and 3. fadome and ½ scarse and this is the right course for that if you saile still at 5. and 6. fadome you should in the end come on ground when you see the houell called Chāpana as I said before you shal runne along by it till you sée thrée trées standing together yet somewhat distant each from other which trées are called as Aruores da Conhecensa that is the trées of Markes Right against those trées lieth the riffe of Orixa and being to seaward you shall sée the water breake vppon it on Bengalen side and you cannot sée the markes aforesaid but in cleare weather and if it be mistie darke or cloudy weather then haue the lead readie without neglecting it for you must runne at 3. and ½ and 4. fadome déepe and you must vnderstand that on the side of Bengalen you finde hard sandie ground and on the side of Orixa muddie and small blacke sand I set this downe because I my selfe haue passed ouer it with great ships being past the riffe of Orixa and Bengalen you shall sée the Iland called a Ilha dos Gallos that is the Ilands of Cocks you must runne right vpon it without feare for it is deepe inough and on the other side of Orixa it is all banks therfore I counsell you to goe neere to the Iland of Cocks sayling along by it whereby you shall presently come to a riuer called Rio de Chamdequan which hauing past you shall from thence crosse ouer to the side of Orixa where you shall see a hooke or point of the riuer Angellijn this point of land will lie northward and comming thether you shal alwaies haue your lead in hand and the depth that you shall finde in those places are 3.3 ½ and 4. fadome but beeing full sea it is deeper which wil continue till you be right against the riuer of Angelijn for from thence forward you haue many depthes and being right against the riuer of Angelijn you shall runne along the shore till you come to a riuer called Gilingoa being right against that riuer I wish you not put too farre from the shore towards the right hand for there you finde a sand drougth whereon Bartholomeus Rodriges de Moraiis was cast away with a ship full laden as hee put out therefore I aduise you to keepe on the left hand for there it is deepe enough from this riuer
to certaine high Beecken or downe falles of water you may haue wood to burne and from those Beeckens you must crosse ouer on the other side of Guijnette where you shall presentlie sée 5. or 6. trées higher then the rest vntill you be close to the other side Those trées stand at the mouth of the riuer Chandequā on the east side the depthes you shall finde vppon those bankes are 2. ½ and thrée fadome déepe till you be on the other side for there you finde manie depthes from this place forward you néede no other aduise for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should bee you shall passe ouer the water with halfe flood but I aduise you once againe that if you saile in the morning by the aforesaid riuer of Cayegare then runne along the coast till you come to the point das Palmerias and from thence to 17. fadome deepe frō thence holding your course northwest and northwest and by north this way must be folowed with a Compasse that yeeldeth one strike till you come to 12. fadome deepe and then running the same course till you come to 4. and three fadome and ½ wherewith if it bee cleare weather you shall presentlie see the lād of Orixa but if it be darke and mistie weather then runne no more towards the land keeping still at 4. and 3. fadome and ½ runrunning East for the leade and the depthes will bring you well in and take héede you come not into many depthes kéeping still as I saide before at the small depthes and if it bee night being at seuentéene fadome then runne towards the 2. Ilands and see you anker not for it is badde ankering there and passing by the aforesaide Punta das Palmeiras running in by night you shal then not passe aboue 7. or 8. fadome vntill it be day wherewith as then you may go in if you chance to be there with a small shippe then keepe at 2. and 2. fadome and ½ till you be in the sight of the riffe of Orixa and when you begin to be right against it then runne within the length of a great shot neere vnto for it is deepe enough and from the side of Orixa it is all banks and shallow ground The riffe aforesaid shall bee on your right hande that is to seaward from you and from thence you must make right with the Island A Ylha dos Gallos or if you will to the point of the Riuer Angelijn where you may freely sayle for there you shall find two and a halfe and thrée fadome déepe but it must bee with a small ship as I said before The 13. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Aracan which is the same way that you hold to Porto Grande or the great hauen lying in the countrie of Bengalen SAyling from India or Cochijn to the hauen of Aracan you must holde your course to the Islande of Seylon in manner aforesaid as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno running so to the pointe or ende of the sandes or droughtes lying full vnder 6. degrées and vppon the point of the lande which runneth East and West comming by this point or hooke you shall from thence put off from the land running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward to come out vnder the Islande and then let your course be Northeast and Northeast by North till you be vnder 12. degrées and that Manacosta be southwest from you and from thence you shall runne Northeast till you be almost vnder 20. degrées which is the height of Aracan and if then you sée no land you shall runne East vnto Aracan vnder the same height of 20. degrées thrée or four miles from the land there lyeth a riffe whervpon the water breaketh and at low water is vncouered it is in greatnesse and length about the length of seuen ships both waies and when you sée it you must take heed of it and goe no nearer then the shotte of a great peece The hauen of Aracan lyeth vnder 20. degrees and being fiue or sixe miles to seawarde from it you shall there find twentie fadome deepe sandie grounde and being at 19. degrees and ½ toward the lande you shall find deepe muddie ground at the least 6 miles from the shore and being but three or four miles from the land thirtie fadome déepe muddy ground you must be careful at 19 degrees and ½ not to runne in with the lande but do as I said before The 14. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Martauan lying in the kingdome of Pegu with the situation of the coastes SAyling from India to Martauan or to y e kingdome of Pegu you shall hold your course till you be past the Island of Seylon as they doe that saile to Bengalen and being about the Island you shal make to the Ilands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon whereof the first Iland lyeth south vnder 11. degrées and the furthest land in the North vnder 14. degrées you runne on the East side of them Northeast and Southwest from the Ilands d' Andemaon to the firme lande are aboue 60. miles and running to Andemaon you shall vse all the meanes you can to passe by them vpon the North side and being past you must as I said before make towardes Martauan which lyeth vnder 16. degrees and when you are at 14. degrées you shall make with the lande but better at 13. degrees because of the creeke or winding in of Martauan where you finde a very strong streame alwayes drawing Northwest and if you make with the lande being at 14. degrees you shall sée many Islands which you may freely passe close by for it is all ouer very deepe for there it is 12. and 13. déepe muddie ground close by the shore besides the Island Pulo Comudo which is about 6. or 7. miles from the hauen of Martauan betweene this Island and the firme lande there lyeth many riffes notwithstanding if you chance to fall betwéene those Islandes you shall make towardes the side of the Islande but not too close where you shall find a channell of thrée fadome deep and on the side of the firme land you haue many sands and shallowes passing from thence to the hauen of Martauan being past that Iland you shall passe along the shore where you shall see certaine cliffes lying towards the sea which shew like Almadias which are Indian Scutes by them vsed in y e riuers which cliffes lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towardes Martauan and right ouer against these cliffes you haue on the firme lande a point or hooke of high land and on the North side of this point there lyeth a sandie strand vpon the low land this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum that is in Pegu spéech the Lord of Vegarum for Xemiin is Lord and Vegarum the name of the land from thence Northward the land is high in some places hauing créekes cliffes and Islandes before you come to the
hauen of Martauan there is a white houell or land that serueth for a marke hauing close by it two Palme trees and about two miles further you shall see a thicke top of lande vppon the end whereof towardes the sea lyeth an Iland which cannot be séen nor discerned from the land till you be right against it and that you haue discouered the Riuer within where the hauen of Martauan lyeth and being past this Iland you shall sée a white houel which lyeth likewise on the South side within the Iland there is a lake that hath good fish and before you come to the hauen comming from the Ilande of Comudo about a mile or a mile and a halfe to seawarde from the land you shall see a round Islande full of bushes called A Ilhas de Cebollas that is the Island of Onions by the which Island on the south side thereof there lyeth a cliffe whereon you sée the sea breake from this Island to the hauen of Martauan there are about two miles comming from Pulo Comudo you must put off from it towards the land holding your course as aforesaid as not hauing any cause of feare but onely of that which you sée before your eyes you must likewise vnderstande that from the Islande Das Cebollas forward towards the North there is no other Ilands nor cliffes which is a verie good marke of this creeke for that being on this side thereof you are no sooner past one Iland but you see another but from thence forward you see not any as I said before but you must bee sure not to passe beyond the hauen of Martauan for that being at twelue fadome not long after you should fal vpon the drought This hauen of Martauan is about a mile or a half and a half broad hauing on the North side a low flat land euen with the sea and is an Iland called Momua you may see it as you passe along the shore from Pulo Comuda towardes the hauen you must still keepe at twelue fadome and comming to 8. or 9. fadome then you shall anker for then you are in the hauen and put no neerer to the shore neither runne not further from the creeke to the banke for then you shall find lesse depth this riuer of Martauan runneth Northeast Southwest both out and in but you may not enter therein without a Pilot for that within the Riuer vpon the East side it hath a stone cliffe or rock which draweth the water vnto it therefore you cannot enter without a Pilot also in the entrie of this riuer and hauen on the right hand there lyeth a sandie banke where in the middle way there runneth a channell of sixe or seuen fadome deepe which you shal knowe by this that is in the deepest parte thereof it hath much fish which you may see and this hauen of Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrees and ◠4 and the towne of Martauan vnder sixteene degrees vpon the furthest end of the Iland of Andeman on the North side there lyeth two Ilands betweene the which and the Iland of Andeman you may safelie passe also on the furthest point of the South side of the Ilande of Andeman lying vnder 11. degrees there lyeth some Ilandes and from thence to the Ilandes of As Ilhas de Nicobar southwarde there reacheth an Iland also as you put off from the Ilandes of Andeman towardes the coast meeting with some gatheringes of water you neede not feare them for it is nothing but the water it selfe without any sands although there lyeth some vpon the coast there lyeth onely in the middle way an Ilande which the inhabitantes call Viacondam which is a small Iland hauing faire ground round about it but very little fresh water and nothing els but Pine trees wherefore you neede not go into it The 15. Chapter The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca HE that will saile to Malacca in the great Monson which is the principall time when the windes serue to go thether in the Month of Aprill then to make a good voyage you must set saile from Cochiin vppon the sixe and twentith of Aprill and being out of the hauen you must hold your course southward till you be vnder 7. degrées and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees and being vnder that height then you shall runne Southeast almost to fiue degrées and from thence East vntill you are past the Ilande of Seylon and being there you shall keepe on your course till you be vnder 5. and ⅓ and 5. degrees and ◠from thence you shall make towardes the Ilands of Gomespola which lie vnder 6. degrées by the point of Achiin in the Ilande Sumatra and comming to the Iland of Gomespola if you feare not the Acherins which are subiects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra and deadly enemies to the Portingals then take your course along by the Iland of Sumatra to the Cape called Taniamburo lying on the same coast of the Iland almost 30. miles from the Ilandes of Gomespola and from thence you shall take your course towardes the coast of Malacca running as farre to loofewarde as possible you may to discouer Pulo Sambilao which is an Ilande lying close vpon the coast vnder 4. degrées and ⅔ and distant from Malacca 40. miles Northwest and by North for that such as discouer and come to this Iland maketh a quicke voyage to Malacca and those that fall to leeward towardes Pulo Pinan which is an other Iland vnder fiue degrées and ½ lying with Pulo Sambilao North and by West 12. miles neere Pulo Batun there is another Iland lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles vnder 6. deg might peraduenture find Southeast windes which blow much on that coast therefore he that goeth late to saile hath a long voyage wherefore it is best to depart earlie from Cochiin to make a better voyage The 16. Chapter An other larger descriptiō of the course to saile from Goa in India to Malacca with the description of the coasts SVch as desire to saile from Goa or out of India to Malacca must put 20. miles into the sea that he may saile without y e Ilande of Seylon vnto the Ilandes called As Ilhas de Nicobar through the middle of the channell which lyeth vnder 7. degrees and ½ and in that countrey you must looke to the streame because with a west wind they run towards the Gulfe of Bengalen and with an East wind into the sea about 20. or 30. miles frō the Ilandes there is such a concourse breaking of water and streames as if there were sands Whē you com to y e middle of y e Ilands of Nicobar ther you find a channel lying vnder 6. degrees and ½ the Ilands being distant one from the other about a mile and a halfe where you may passe through without feare as hauing nothing to fear but y t you sée before you the depth you find there is 12.
you shall haue Pulo Sambilao right against it so you fall not from the Islandes towards Samatra holding your course as aforesaide towardes Pulo Sambilao without feare because the monson or time of the windes do as then blow from the land into the Sea and if herein you chaunce to bee negligent you shall doe your selfe great hurt and procure great hinderance in your Voyage the depthes and ground that you finde from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao and from 27. to 40. fadome muddie ground and in some places sand and passing by the Iland of d'Aru then you find from 40. to 50. fadome déepe from the Islandes of Pulo Sambilao to th Islands of Pulo Pinao you shall kéepe along by the shore not once putting from it shunning a banke lying right ouer against the land called Barus betwéene Pulo Sambilao and Pulo Pinao which is muddie ground and it is saide that there you haue thrée fadome water you shall still vse your lead and runne not nearer then fiftéene fadome to the land nor further then thirtie fadome to Sea ward because diuers times there commeth great blasts out of the hilles of Queda from Northeast and north northeast and sometimes sharper many times runne further from the coast as I said before and so you shall holde your course without danger from the coast of the Iland Samatra where in the monson you haue greatest cause to feare and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao and being by them or at the heigth and length of them and hauing the monson that is the winde which as then bloweth and is good for you you may then put from the land doing your best to kéepe too loofeward off Pulo Pera which is a good course but if the winde serue you to make towards Pulo Batum it is better for from this place you must take your course towards the channell vnder 7. degrées and ½ but hauing the monson as aforesaid although it be somewhat backeward you shall loose your time for the monson at the first is sometimes sharpe and after that beginneth to be larger as you turne or winde from the land or coast With this course you shall runne to the channell and passe it vnder seauen degrées and ◠2 and before you come vnder seauen degrées and 1 2 to seauen and 2 ◠or lesse hauing past the Ilands you shall alwaies kéepe vnder the aforesaide seauen degrees and ½ because in that gulfe or countrie many times the winde is north and north Northeast in your course towards the Island of Seylon you shall runne vnder seauen degrees and ½ and vnder seauen degrees with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon to a place called Matecalou which lieth too loofeward off the sands there you haue no ground but within two miles of the land you must likewise vnderstand that from the middle of the Gulfe to the Island of Seylon the water and the streames in this time of monson runne outward into the sea likewise the compasse yéeldeth more to the Northwest whereunto you must haue great regard and béeing at the Island Seylon hauing it in sight you shall not loose it but kéep your ground from thirtie fadome looking well before you and taking heede of the droughtes that are very dangerous the foremost of them béeing of stone Cliffes the length of a Galley without any other then only those you sée to fourtéene and sixtéene fadome and in the halfe way or middle thereof and the land you shall finde the depth aforesaid and another Sand that lyeth behind you which is the first and cannot bee séene but that the Sea breaketh vppon it and they say you may passe with small Shippes betweene it and the land béeing foure fadome déepe but I thinke it is better to put from it to sea ward it is from thence to the land a mile and you may goe neare it at sixtéene eightéene fadome and if you fall vppon it by night you must saile onlie with your Foukesayle when you are in sight of vnknowne land kéeping at eightéene fadome neare the land and not aboue thirtie fadome to Seaward from this sand you shall runne along y e coast at fiftéene sixtéene twentie twentie fiue and thirtie fadome but in such manner that you loose not ground for you may haue a Calme and so by that loosing of ground the water and streames might driue you to the Islandes of Maldiua wherefore you must haue good regard vntill you come to Negumbo which is in the Island of Seylon and from thence it is good to crosse ouer to the Firme land and comming to Negumbo you shall not put off from the land vnlesse it bee from the fiftéene of Februarie for from that time forwardes then the streame and waters beginne againe to runne inwardes and being from the fiftéene of Februarie forwardes you may put from the shore that is from the Island of Verberyn which lyeth close vppon the Coast of Seylon to the Portingales Fort called Columbo as it falleth out best for you least it happen to you as it hath done to many other shippes that for want of care were driuen to the Ilands of Maldyua from this last sand to Tanadare and to the poynt called A Punta de Gualla along the Coast and sea side the Countrie is almost all of one higth and right ouer against the sandes aforesaid inwards to the land you see 3 high trees and from thēce to Tanadare you haue sandie strands and you may still runne along the shore without feare till you sée Tanadare which is verie well knowne and deceaue not your self for that outwardlie it sheweth like Punta de Gualla but the markes and right tokens thereof are that it hath a thyn point of land striking out in forme lyke a tongue with a stone riffe hanging from it towards the sea as farre as you may throw a stone this point of land or tongue striking out is full of Indian Palme trees which shew verie faire and a myle or two before you come at it this poynt or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palme trees further into the sea but the Palme trees are thicke and shew verie faire and before you come to Tanadare you haue two or three sandie bayes not necessarie to be described and whē you come right against the wood or bushe of Palme trees in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indians Idoles from this Pagode towardes the North syde you shall see certaine downes of white and redde earth which are good markes and the right knowledge of that Countrey you must not goe too close vnto the shore for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea but not farre when you see the downes aforesayd then you must runne at eyghtéene twentie fadome déepe for that if the wind beginneth to calme and your ground to
Earth along the Sea side inward to the land there appeareth certaine high hilles whereof one of them lying most Northward hath a Houell striking out of the toppe thereof which séemeth to bee a blocke house being of redde Earth You may passe betwéene the first Sand and the land at seuen or eight Fadome déepe alwaies kéeping as farre from the land as from the Sand for they are a good myle distant and running about by the Sea you shall find Sandie ground round about it this Sand lyeth vnder 6. degrees and from this first Sand about 6. or 7. miles southward there is yet an other Sand and the course from this one to the other is east Northeast and West southwest along the coast this second Sand lyeth scarce vnder 6. degrées betwéene the which and the Firme land are 12 and 13. Fadome déepe all good ground and from the last Sand to a Créeke called Aâ—alla the coast runneth East and West and East and by North and West and by South 4. or 5. miles further forward froÌ„ this Créeke there lieth an other Créeke called Hulpulam from whence to Tanadare are about 7 miles Tanadare is a point of the land whereon there standeth a woode of Palme trees and when you are right ouer against it you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indian Idoles and on the North side of this Pagode stand certaine Houels of white and red Earth and passing before it you shal not goe to close to the shore for there abouts are certaine Sands and beeing past this point then goe presently at 20. Fadome deepe for it is al good and cleare ground and if it should be calme there you may Anker From Tana dare to Belliguon are about sixe myles Belliguon is a verie great Creeke on the South side wherof are certaine Houels of red Earth that stand within the Creeke for that you cannot see them before you haue fully discouered the Creeke and on the North side it hath two Ilands lying close by the land on the South side of those Ilands along ther lyeth a Riffe or Sand. From Belliguon to Gualle are fiue myles all this way from the one to the other the land is altogether close and full of trees along the Sea side about halfe a mile from Belliguon to Gualle there lyeth a stonie Iland close by the land and an other on the South side of Gualle and making towards it you shall sée a high flat land full of trées and an euen wildernesse and on the North side of the bay there standeth a great wood of Palme trées vppon the Sea coast and within the Hauen you shall see a white house which is a small Chappell of the Virgin Marie passing from Belliguon to Gualle and comming right against this point on the South side towards the Bay you must put to Seaward thereby to shunne a Sand wheron you shall sée the Sea breake and to Anker you shal runne North North Northwest in such manner that you may alwaies sée certaine Cliffes that lie on the North side and inwards from the Bay you shall sée the Palme trées which will be vpon the south side towards Belliguon which lay hidden by the point there you shall finde 14. and 15. fadome water and running till you come to 13. fadome finding sandie ground you may Anker for to Seaward it is altogether stones From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualle which are twelue miles the course is Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by West and southeast and by East this Hauen of Gualle lieth vnder 5. degrées and 1 â— from thence passing along the coast you sayle about the Portingalles Fort called Columbo this course I haue already sufficiently declared in the Nauigation from Malacca to India therefore it is néedlesse here to be rehearsed The 20. Chapter The righr course from Malacca to Macau in China with the stretchings of the coasts DEparting from Malacca to the Straights of Sincapura and so to China you must set your course to the Ilands called Ilha Grande lying thrée miles from the Hauen of Malacca passing for more securitie without about the Ilands from those Ilands to the ryuer called Muar are thrée miles which hath for a marke a Houel full of trées on the south east side without any other high land thereabouts From the riuer of Muar to the riuer called Rio Fermoso you run along the coast Northwest and southeast and Northwest and by West and southeast and by East the course is nine miles this riuer of Fermoso is great and faire hauing in the entrie 6. and 7. Fadome déepe and also within you enter into it by the foote of a high hill on the South southeast side and it lyeth on the South side of Malacca it hath certaine bankes sticking out into the Sea from the point lying North east which is a flat plaine countrie which you must shunne From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon the coast runneth the same course southeast and by East and the Iland Pulo Picon lieth halfe a mile from the coast hauing thrée Ilands by it two on the Sea side and one vpon the land side but you must not passe betwéene it and the land for there are many Sands it is distant seuen miles southeastward towards the Sea from Pulo Picon there lyeth a great and a verie high Iland with many Ilands about it called Pulo Carimon along by the West side of the same Iland towards the straight of Sabon which is the way to Sunda and the Iland of Iaua the nauigation and course whereof I will in an other place set downe therefore for this time it shall not be touched and will procéede to our matter aforesaide From this Iland of Pulo Picon to a pointe of land that stretcheth out called Taniamburo you runne East ward by the coast being about thrée miles this point maketh a hooke and from thence forward the coast turneth inward like an arme running froÌ„ thence right southward about a mile froÌ„ this point lyeth a riuer and a little mile further forward there is an other ryuer with a great mouth where there lyeth an Iland called old Sincapura being deepe and faire ground this ryuer issueth out againe in the Hauen of Iantana where Antonio Mello by chance did once enter with a ship of eight hundreth Bhares great each Bhar waighing thrée Quintals and a halfe Portingall waight came out againe at the ryuer of Iantana from this ryuer the land runneth downe towards the South as I saide before which maketh a hooke where the mouth or entrie of the first straight y t you must passe through beginneth The land on the North side of this entrie is higher then the South which is low and flat hauing a Houell of trées striking out about all the rest there is the end or furthest point of that land for that going Eastward on then you finde Ilands and stonie Cliffes which first reach
southward and thē againe come Eastward out making the forme of an arme from the said point of Taniamburo to the mouth or entrie of this straight the course is 5. miles East West at 7. and 8. fadome déepe Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of y e month of Iuly he must go néere to the side of the great Iland Carymon because y e winds of the Monson of Iaua which are at y e time doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon and being past it you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you with y e marks aforesaid in this way you find manie depths passing along by Taniamburo thē the land of y e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other which is a common and certaine marke but hold you to loofeward the better to enter at your plesure This first straight at y e entry hath two riffs on each side one which come from the point or hooke of the land the land on the south side from the entry thereof is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward which make the straight to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10 9. fadom deepe and being so far in that the land on the South side which are Ilands make but one point then on the other side before you you shall see a hooke or point whereon there standeth a small red Houell which when you see then you shall turne from the right hand towards that smal Houell because it is the first Iland which you then haue past from that Iland forward there beginneth an other Iland between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe or Sand which with a low water is part vncouered reacheth into the middle of y e chanell where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand which will shew you where you are comming to the point aforesaid of the small Houell then put to the land on the right side which is Ilands as I saide before for it hath only betweene the Iland aforesaid the said Riffe and then you shall run Eastward about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome from thence forward y e row of Ilands whereby you sayle reach South Eastward and presently somewhat further on the right hand of the same Iland you shall see a round Iland running a little out from the other which will bee vpon your right hand by the which you shall passe along with good watch there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe muddie ground The land on the left hand which is the North side is Creeks and open ground and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you you shall kéepe from this North side which is nothing but Creekes for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes running as I said before along by the Ilands on the right hand comming by the aforesaid round Iland on the right hand at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe you shal sée a smal flat Iland with afew trées hauing a white sandystrand which lieth east and west with the mouth of y e straight of Sincapura which you shal make towards when you beginne to come néere it then the straight beginneth to open discouer it selfe you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow so to auoid the riffes shallowes of the North side as also not to fal towards y e south side of the mouth of the straight with the ride that runneth ther for you haue many depths and foule ground you must alwaies hold on y e North side where there is a sandie strand of the length of the shotte of a great péece at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground to Anker in if need be and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y e straight which you haue not passing further frō then◠for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground lying on the South side thereof as aforesaid once againe I aduise you not to passe frō the end of the strand to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes as aforesaide The mouth or entrie of this straight entreth betwéene two high hils being as broad as a man may cast a stone and reacheth Eastward is in length about the shot of a great péece y e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½ déepe in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe which sheweth like a Piller this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it the Varella of China on the South side a good way from the mouth therof it maketh a créeke in the midle wherof lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side the length of a small shot it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea making an Iland this opening is shallow all ouer seruing only for smal Foists to passe through in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is lieth a Cliffe or stonie place two fadome vnder water which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke as the point of the land reacheth and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell being past this Creek the land hath a hooke of a houell faling downward where the straight endeth in passing about this there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground when you haue past about it y e land from thence reacheth southeast on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end there are thrée Créeks whereof the two first are small the third great it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y e red Houel where the straight endeth this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered reacheth frō the one point to the other you must be carefull not to fall vpon it all that which lieth on the North side and without y e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground without danger In y e issuing of the straight beeing without it you haue two Riffes whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight about the shot of a great péece towards y e East cōming from the land on the north side
stretching southward the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight reaching Eastward so y t they make a crosse one throgh the other and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them the chanel y t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe the ground within y e chanel is muddie without sand This I haue particularly noted vnto you for their instructions y t hereafter shal passe through that way for that the discriptions of the Nauigation or course thereof heretofore written set downe are very short and obscure for such as haue not past through that way wherby many ships haue run on grounde stricken passed many dangers some cast away but returning to our matter and folowing y e course aforesaid whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side because of the sands aforesaid that lie within y e straights alwaies with your Lead in your hand looking rounde about you for y t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel it is 4. fadom and ½ also because it is so narrow y t you can hardly cast out your Lead me thinketh it is your surest way vpon each Sand to set a Scute or other mark that may serue you for Beakens so to auoide them and going a little further by the Creeke which hath the opening that commeth out of y e other side of the Sea wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water then kéepe presently towards the houel on y e right hand that maketh the point of the Creeke aforesaid wher also runing along by your Cōpasse as before by the land on the left hand somwhat neerer to it thē on the other side til you be out of y e straight alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side right against this Houel for it is ful of stones and Cliffs as I said before likewise you must shun the east side right against the issuing of the straight for that the shot of a great peece from thence it is altogether cliffes as aforesaid whē you are out of the straight desire to Anker then make towards the South side along by the land that you may get out of the streame you must Anker at 6. fadome for if you stay in the streame of the straight you may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y e ship or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand at this road you are right ouer against a strand where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth being out of the straight in manner as aforesaid you shal take your course along by the land vpon the right hand alwaies casting out the lead and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom neither to the land nor towards the sea and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes that stand at the end thereof and a sandie bay lying against the houel being half way frō the other houel which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay behind the which that opening which is in y e straight commeth out again then hold your course eastward at 4. fadome not turning to the one nor the other side for you should presentlie find both drougthes sands the channel is muddy ground and you must still haue the Leade in your hand vntill you finde other depth which wil not continue long and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel for it will shew you both the channels whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome thē beware of the south side vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome frō thence to dry lād for it is al riffes sand this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana which is the North syde and you run along east west it is in distance about 8 miles but you must not passe betwéen it the land the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire good ground at 15. fadom sandy groūd in the middle of this way from the straight to the Ilands or litle more or lesse lieth the riuer of Iantana which hath a great mouth the entry thereof being along the land on the east side where great shippes haue many times entred on the West side where there standeth a houell of red earth it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer reaching about half a mile into the sea vpon the which many ships haue fallen wherfore take héed of it from the point of the Iland abouesaid lying at the end of the land of Iantana there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea well 2. great miles and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it which is presently séen and discerned and when it is rough wether then the water breaketh all ouer betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell all stonie groūd and the shallowest place that I found therein was 5. fadome ½ and then to 7. fadome 1 ◠and then againe I found 6. or 8. fadome ½ and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece right ouer if you will passe this Channell you must runne half a myle of from the Iland come no néerer to it for if you should you would run on ground it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it vnlesse they were compelled thereunto as it happened to Francisco Dagmar that there ranne on ground and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe because he ranne to néer the Riffes and that the wind scanted two myles from these Ilandes Southsoutheast lyeth Pedra Branca that is White stone which is an Iland of white stone rockes and cliffes and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes on the South side thereof on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton which is verie long in the middle whereof there is a high houel wherevpon there is déepe ground but not good to anker for such as come from China round about Pedra Branca and close by it there are 6. fadome déepe good ground but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it I haue alreadie told you that in passing through the straight when you are ouer the sandes at 15 fadome in manner as aforesaid you must sayle Eastward towardes the Ilandes which you shall presentlie see as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana
and when you begin to come neere them theÌ„ you shall keep towards Pedra BraÌ„ca and looke that you kéep half a mile from it taking heede you come not neere the syde of the Ilandes for two causes the one because the windes at that tyme when you sayle to China doe alwaies blow off from the syde of Binton which is the Monson that commeth out of the South southwest and if the winde should scant and fall into the Southeast as often tymes in those countries it happeneth being on the syde of the Ilandes you could not passe by the Riffes whereby you should bee compelled to passe through the channell that runneth betweene Pedra Branca and the Ilandes or els you should spend so much tyme in staying there and that the Monson that is the tyme of your voyage to China would bee spent the other is that if you chance to bee there with a slow wind and tyde or with few sailes spred then the streames would driue you vpoÌ„ the Riffes before you could auoyde them as it happened to the shippe of Don Diego de Meneses whose Pilot was Goâ—â—alo Vieâ—a who by the water was driueÌ„ vpoÌ„ 10. fadome where he ankered and then after he came to 7. fadom where he spent 3 dayes by ankering to get out againe for the which 2 causes I aduise you to keepe on the side of Pedra Branca or the white cliffes aforesaid FroÌ„ Pedra Branca to the IlaÌ„d Pulo Tâ—nge y t run north south north by east south and by west the course is 13. miles this IlaÌ„d is high and rouÌ„d hauing in the middle a high sharp hil ful of trées it lieth by the coast of the firm land betwéene it y e firm land there is good sayling but it is not Oorbaer this IlaÌ„d lieth with Pulo TimoÌ„ northeast southwest and are distant about 7. miles to sayle to Pulo Tinge you shall take your course from Pedra Branca a great myle Eastward and from thence North and north and by East alwaies with the lead in your hand till you be past the Riffes being at 14 fadome being as you gesse in that country you shal presently kéepe off from it into the sea being before it you néed not feare any thing but y t you sée before your eyes in this course to Pulo Tinge in the sight of the Iland there lieth 4 or 5 Ilands which shal lie on the land side froÌ„ you and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge then you shal presently sée Pulo Timon the IlaÌ„d of Pulo Timon is great high and on the side whereunto you sayl are two eares of land which are ful of great high trées to make small mastes ankers because in those countries they vse such kind of wooddeÌ„ ankers and it is commonly couered with mistes clouds and hath all ouer a cleane muddy ground therein are 2 places wher you find good fresh water one being on the side of the land in the middle of a long strand a little inward to the land where you find a good réed but wheÌ„ you come early thereunto as in the Moneth of Iune and the beginning of Iuly it is dangerous to anker there because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries therefore I thinke it better to run to the other place where you likewise find fresh water on the East side towards the sea ruÌ„ning right vpon the face of the Iland along by the East side and being past a certain houel that maketh a hooke you shal find a sandy Bay where you must enter into the land and when the point or hooke lieth southeast you may anker where you may lie for the Momson and there you shal haue 20 fadome déepe there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish and in the same bay there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea also on that syde you haue much better wood néerer to fetch there you ly safe from west winds on that side of the land you haue certain IlaÌ„ds along the coast from the north point of this IlaÌ„d Pulo TimoÌ„ about the shot of a great péece there lieth an other Iland and by the South point an other likewise about 3 miles south eastward ther lieth 3 other Ilands wherof y e one is great rouÌ„d y e other 2 being somwhat smaller are called Pulo Laor the Iland of Pulo TimoÌ„ lieth vnder 2 degr â…” on y e north side of the Equinoctial 12 miles northwest ward stroÌ„ it lieth the riuer Pan in the firme land ouer against the which about 2 miles to seaward there lieth a small Iland hauing an euen round trée in the middle half a mile froÌ„ it it is 6 fadom déep grouÌ„d FroÌ„ Pulo TimoÌ„ to Pulo Condor the course is North northeast Westsouthwest 115 miles Pulo CoÌ„dor lieth vnder 8 degr â…” it is a great IlaÌ„d with high hils hauing close by it 5 or 6 Ilands and on the northeast side it hath a smal Iland or stony cliffe which sheweth farre off like a ship vnder sayle it is ouer al good grouÌ„d at 10 or 12 fadome déepe and on the Northwest side it hath a place of fresh water it lieth north and south with the riuer of Camboia which is called the hauen of Malaios 12. miles distant but you are not sure to haue fresh water ther for wheÌ„ it is late in the yere you haue there the winds at north and northwest w t some thunder whereby you may not stay with one sayle only for that being without sayles it would strike you to ground and cast your ship away when it is early in the yeare theÌ„ you haue East winds From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor y u shal alwaies find ground at 35 38 fadome and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor you shall sayl north northeast not accounting any winding of the compas for if y u should do so you should run on the south side to seaward and run by without séeing it which is an euill course for that y e winds alwaies in this course doe blow froÌ„ the side of the land and if it chance that before you sée the IlaÌ„d Pulo Condor you find y e water thicke troubled foule then cast out your lead you shal find 18 or 19 fadome water with a soft muddy ground so runne half a strike in that course til you come to 17 fadome and being there then rune northeast and being at 1 1 6 fadome before you sée the Iland theÌ„ hold your course East East and by north alwaies at 16 fadome déepe whereby you shall land on the south side of the Iland wher you must take héed of 2 Ilands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor full of bushes a mile or thereabouts distant from each other and if it be possible you shall
the Varella being past the Iland you shall presently be neere the land where you haue a great strande with faire grounde This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller which may be seen far off therfore it is by the Portingalles called Varella that is a Cape Backe or marke at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in all of muddy ground 15. fadome deepe you cannot sée it far off because the one lande runneth through the other but as you passe by the strand aforesaid and beginne to come neere the Varella then the creeke beginneth to open which hath a verie faire entrie and within hath two running streames of verie good fresh water hee that commeth thither with a ship by my aduise shall not put in there because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again for there the wind is scant you may wel anker without at y e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had that stand on the other side of the hill towards the North at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea endeth where you begin to find a verie great strand to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill and as you run along towardes it when you compasse it about you shall see a small sandie bay with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering where you may anker when you will for it hath good anker grounde but it hath a great inconuenience and mischiefe which is that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portingalles and sea Rouers therefore you must keep good watch with great care when you fetch fresh water as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées this land of Varella is a hooke and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North and north and by West for the space of 48. miles from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower then that you haue past hauing in many places sandie strandes where men may anker ten miles from Varella forward a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground in the middle of the Iland on the lande side there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh water where if need be you may anker for it is good ground and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altogether faire being a small mile in length from this Island about twelue miles Northward the land maketh a point and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth which from this point inwarde runneth to the West it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fadome deepe within the hauen hauing sandie ground with a great mouth or entrie and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe this riuer runneth further into the land 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village where you may haue great store of victualles and other necessaries in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell and on the West side a low sandie strande you must enter right forth in the middle and although it is verie wide yet being within you must make your self sure w c ankers cables specially from the west side for y t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer in this Riuer is much fish also in the land there is much wild flesh with Swine Tigers Rhinoceros and such like beastes the countrey people were of good nature but we haue giuen them cause of suspition by our bad dealing with them fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land and you may passe betweene them and the lande twelue miles from these Ilandes there lyeth other Ilandes by the lande where there are some places of rounde sande with a sandie strande and there is a small Riuer where you haue much Catte that is Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it growgroweth and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton wherewith many haue deceiued thēselues that runne crosse ouer when they saw it and tanne on ground Pulo Caton is a long Island with two high hilles at the ende thereof and in the middle low so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes stretching northwest and southeast on the southeast side it hath a Riffe where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further into the Sea on the land side it hath fresh water and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles and ◠2 the channell betwéene both hath thirtie and thirtie fiue fadome déepe with good ground right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer with a great mouth or entrey being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe it is verie well inhabited and built with houses in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔ and North Northwest a mile and a halfe from it there lieth another small low Island and you may passe betwéene them both North Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello full vnder 16. degrées and ⅔ this Iland Champello is great and high hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out it lieth north northwest and south southeast it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle that in the southeast being much higher then the other it hath likewise many trées on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water and is distant from the Coast about two miles it is a very low land along the sea strand and West Northwest from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe in the Hauen it is sandie ground where much traffique is vsed but the people are not much to bee trusted from this Iland of Champello Northwest for two or three miles it is full of trées two miles further the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees and thrée miles beyond this point lieth a great créeke which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or closure and is all cleare ground where you haue much victuals
of Enseada dos Ladroins or créek of Rouers 7. miles southeastward This Iland Sanchoan is great high and full of hils among the which there is a crooked hill with high houels on the top thereof like the ioints of a mans fingers when his hand is closed which is a sure and good marke This Iland hath many trées great creeks hayes where in times past men vsed to traffique betwéen this Iland and the Firme land lieth 4. or 5. other high Ilands without bushes or trées which lie vnder one course with the Firme land and the Iland Sanchoan in such sorte that Sanchoan maketh the furthest hook or end outward and from thence reacheth towards the land northwest and southeast so that a farre off it séemeth to bee all one land these are the first Ilands of Canton which lie vnder 21. degrees and 1 ◠from thence to Lamon you saile outward about the Ilands east northeast and from Sanchoan to the land there runneth 3. channels or passages which make those Ilands through the which you may passe with ships the best channel is that which runneth along by the Iland of Sanchoan which is the furthest outward to the sea of 6. and 7. fadome déepe it hath in the entry therof vpon the same Iland a small Iland full of bushes and on the northwest side lieth two great high Ilands which make the mouth or entry and at the entry along by the strand there lieth some small Ilands and hillocks before the Ilands aforesaid towards y e land lieth an other Iland making another mouth or entry betweene this and the two Ilands aforesaid from this Iland to the land is the third mouth or entry through these two entries great ships doe passe with the tides it is altogether soft muddie ground to know the Iland of Sanchoan besides the markes aforesaid or to know if those Ilands lie before or behind you must remember that Sanchoan maketh a point lying outward and that from thence you runne towards the land northwest and southeast from thence further east north east and west south west and marke the course with your compasse and you shall presently know whether you be forward or backeward and if you be so far to seaward that you sée the one coast reacheth east north east and the other northwest then you are right ouer against it by this meanes I found it out for I was the first that marked it and such as know it learned it of me The course from Pulo Caton towards China is thus you shall not saile aboue 2. or 3. mile at the furthest to seaward for the causes afore rehearsed and being past then runne north northwest or northwest vntill you finde an opening betwéene the Iland and the Firme land and as it beginneth to open then runne halfe a strike north north east towards the point of the Iland Aynon and passing betwéene the Iland Pulo Caton and the Firme land you shall keepe the same course because the streame in that monson runneth towards the créeke of Cauchinchina and with this course you shall sée Aynon being 7. or 8. miles to seaward from thence and it may bee that if you come thether at a spring tide or with a slacke winde that you will be driuen further inward when you perceiue the land then marke your compasse and if the coast reacheth east northeast then kéep that course vntill you thinke you to bee past it and if the coast stretch northeast and north east and by east as the Iland lieth then run so till you may wel discerne the land being 5. or 6. miles from thence that from thence you desire to sayle to Sanchoan then runne with the same course for halfe a strike north northeast whereby you shall sée Pulo Tio if you be 4. or 5. miles frō thence to seaward then runne northeast northeast by north and if you be but two miles from thence thē run your course for halfe a strike betwéene northeast northeast by north with this course you shal come to the Iland of Sanchoan shall sée the Iland called Do Mandoriin which is a small round and high land lieth 5. or 6. miles from the Ilands if you desire to put into the Hauen of Macau then runne north east east and by north running to seaward 5. or 6. miles from Sanchoan when you are within 15. or 20. miles of the Ilandes then you shall finde muddie ground at 25. fadome déepe when you sée the Ilandes looke well to your selfe as I saide before you must goe neere them and run along by them about a mile distant from Sanchoan to Macau are 18. miles there are fiue channels or passages the first betwéene the Iland Sanchoan the Island Vasco de Faria about 5. miles broad This Iland of Vasco de Faria lieth nearer the land thē Sanchoan hath a high pointed hil on the sea side a high round houell being betwéene it and the hill very low land so that a farre off it sheweth like two Ilands when you are hard by it and that you begin to discouer the flat land it sheweth like a channell and not farre from it towardes the 〈◊〉 it hath two or thrée small Ilands This Iland lieth north and south with Sanchoan a mile from it lieth a small long Iland without bushes which all along the Iland hath a crooked rigge or backe descending at the end this Iland is called Pulo Baby by this Iland along by the land of Sanchoan lieth a Rocke somewhat aboue the water I here place all these markes and tokens of this channell because it should the better be knowne to such as haue occasion to passe through it which they may boldly do being past the Ilands of the Iland Vasco de Faria the first that you then come to sée is in the fourth mouth or entrie which openeth not because an Ilād lieth right before it 4. or 5. miles forward lie other Ilandes along by the Iland which you shall leaue on the West southwest side all vpon a row and a farre off séeme to runne one through the other but when you are right ouer against them then they lie as I saide before they are fiue or sixe in all both great and little from these Ilands about two miles East northeast there lieth two Ilands close together stretching North and South by these you haue others vpon the same row towards the land all in the same strike or course in the entrey hard by those two Ilands there lieth a great high and round Iland betwéene the aforesaid row of Ilandes the Ilands aforesaid there is a good hold or opening through the which you haue the nearest way to Macau for the better knowledge wherof about three or foure miles further east north east there are thrée Ilands distant from each other which from the land all in a row doe reach into the Sea whereby they lie further outward then
the other which you passe along by so that they ly right ouer against you and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau and begin to put into it it is altogether opeÌ„ without any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed about sayling right towards the firme lande which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence where the mouth or entry is whereby you goe to Caton by the Portingalles called Aâ— Orelhas de Lebre that is the hares eares In this entery it is 8.9 and 10. fadome déepe and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide the streame runneth so strong stiffe that no wind will serue to get vp therfore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side so inward shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water putting to seaward for that you cannot passe betweene it and the Ilands with any ship also you shall finde anoâ—â—er Cliffe vpon the west side being in the middle way séeing right before you a small and low Iland lying in the same rowe of Ilandes in the East as you goe then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chaÌ„nell that runneth to Macau This entery reacheth East and West and may be about a mile broad you must make to that smal Iland and leauing it vpon the North side you must hold your course betwéene it and the other Ilands and so put in alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland where the depth will begin to lessen and much more wheÌ„ you are past it for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground the land lying vpon the south side of the channell is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other which reach east and west and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite and hath a créeke or bay that strecheth Northward at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side betwéene which and the Iland it is drie and shallow ground and before you come to this Iland there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the water to seaward towards the middle of the chaÌ„nell therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker theÌ„ you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen kéeping close to it till you be in where you shall find foure fadome and ½ or 5. fadome déepe shunning the west side for there it is all ouer bankes and sands and along by the point you finde muddy ground this point or hooke is a high land and from thence inward about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of saÌ„d and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses and before you come to it in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe therefore you must hold vpon the east side and runne along by it till you anker it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe The 21. Chapter The course from the Kingdome of Sion to China with the situation of the places DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Sion or Sian you shall holde your course Westward and comming to it you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Bancolea two miles from the land and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fadome déepe notwithstanding you must passe without it as farre aboue it as you can this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest and by west and being against the coast you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid The Coast vpon the shore is low land hauing inward a small houell stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward This low land maketh a point reaching outward lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land which séemeth to runne inward to the sea but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees and comming to the aforesaid land you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east and west inwards to the land hauing manie sharpe rockes there the land maketh a point or end which is commonly called the point of Cuy thetherto the lande reacheth Southeast this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. degrees and â…” and betweene it and the aforesaid thicke land that lieth behind you you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground when you are past or about this point of Cuy then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles and then you must sayle south east and southeast and by south whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands being long flat ful of trees lieth ful vnder 10. degrees which will be on the east side all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward and being by this Iland aforesaid you shall run southeast and rather hold aloofe to the south then to fall to the west because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed towards the sea side Eastwarde it descendeth towardes a black lande which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place lying full vnder 9. degrees ½ This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy southeast northwest and so you must runne 25. miles Pulo Wy are two Ilandes whereof the greatest reacheth North and South hauing a high houell on the South side and on the North side two low houels with a valley in the middle thus the West side sheweth but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde with a small valley in the middle making 2. rocks shewing like two men the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side somewhat distant from the other making a channell betwéene both where you may passe through for it is fayre grounde this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe which you must auoide for all the other places are good and faire being twelue fadome déep close by the Iland and in the greatest Iland on the south West side
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
you shal still sayl with your lead in hand and when you find 15. or 16. fadom thē you are at the end of the riffe and it may be that as thē you can not sée Pedra Branca and comming to 18. fadome then put no further to the sea and running in that sort till you sée Pedra Branca running as then to the poynt of the land that you shall sée on the land of Iantana which is the land on the North side which you shall passe along by till you come to see redde Houels lying at the Hauen of Ior and before you come to the hauen of Ior you shall hold off from it not putting into the hauen for there lyeth a Banke but you must passe the redde Houels and runne towardes the land which is a sandie strand and as you passe along to the mouth or entrie of the straight of Singapura you must be carefull that as soone as you are within Pedra Branca you runne to the land of Iantana without turning to the other side for there it is verie bad ground and the wind would hinder you to get ouer and if you desire to run on the inside of the Iland Pulo Tymon you may wel doe it The 25. Chapter The course from Malacca to Sunda lying in the Iland of Iaua Maior with the situation of the countrie SAyling from the great Iland lying 3. myles southeast from Malacca to the Riuer called Rio Fermosa your course lieth Northwest Southeast and Northwest and by west and southeast and by east which is 13. miles all this way if you will you may anker and it is not aboue 30. fadome déepe good muddy ground This Rio Fermoso lyeth on the Coast of Malacca within the entry on the Southeast side hath high land and on the Northwest side low land it is in the Hauen sixe or seuen fadome deepe when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast syde keeping from the Northwest for ther you shall find shallowes From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon which lyeth in the same Coast a myle from the land aforesayd you runne Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by north and Southwest and by south betwéene this Iland and the firme land it is shalow groūd and the course is 6 miles from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon which is a great and high land with trees with some Ilands round about it you runne North and south and north and by west and South and by east and are distant 5. miles from the Iland Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra you must make towardes this Iland and from thence run along by it on the west syde for it is good way On the south point of this Iland Carymon lyeth certain Ilandes from these Ilandes two myles forward lieth an other smal long Iland called Pulo Alonalon there the channell is at the narrowest From this Iland beginneth the straight called Estrecho de Sabon that is y e straight or narrow passage of Sabon and being as farre as that Iland you shall hold about half a mile from it from Alonalon to the great Iland of Sabon are about 2 miles in the middle of this channel there lieth other smal Ilands that shall all lie on the East side from you hauing good regard not to fall vpon them whē you run through this channel you must be aduertised that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliffe vnder the water whereon a ship did once strike with her Ruther Comming by the Iland Alanolon on the Southwest thereof that is on the syde of Sumatra you shal see two small Ilands with an other somewhat lesse full of trées bee all rampard with certaine cliffes lying by them and whē those Ilandes are southwest south west by west frō you thē you shal hold your course South where you shall find nyne fadome water alwaies keeping off from the Coast of Sabon which is the east syde for it is shallow but run in the middle of the channel for it is good ground half a mile off from the Iland Sabon lieth a small Iland called Pulo Pandha this Iland in the middle hath a stonie cliffe and when you are so farre that Pulo Pandha lyeth Eastsoutheast from you thē hold your course southward and you shal find 9. fadome deepe running half a myle distant from the Iland of Sabon the Iland and cliffe aforesaid being past you shall find hard ground holding your course South vntill the Iland Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anker if you will and when the aforesayd Cliffe lyeth from you as aforesayd then on the West syde you shall see two Ilandes or Cliffes whereof the first hath some trees and the other which lyeth nearest to the mouth of Campar in the Iland of Sumatra hath no trées they close one to the other from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffes when you come to passe by these Ilandes that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra you shall runne through the middle of the channell betwéene the Ilandes and the coast of Sabon southward as I saide before holding your course along the coast of Sabon about halfe a mile from it where you shall alwayes finde eyght fadome muddy ground vntill you come to a small Iland lying hard by the coast of Sabon hauing many Cliffes round about it and as you passe by it you shall keepe outwarde from it leauing it on the side of Sabon there likewise you haue muddie ground and the shot of a great péece further off the depthes will presently begin to lessen to seuen and sixe fadome and ½ from thence you shall runne to a point of the Island Sabon lying right ouer against one of the mouthes of Campar those mouthes or holes ly on the coast of Sumatra right in the face of this point about two bowes shot from the land there lyeth two Cliffes which at full sea cannot be séene they are called Batotinge betwéene them and the land are sixe or seuen fadome deepe and betwéene them both nyne fadome you may passe with a shippe betweene them and to seawarde from them towards Sumatra you finde hard by 12. and 13. fadome déepe to make towards these cliffes and also to passe by them you shall take your course as soone as you sée the aforesaide Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do passing along by Sabon with your lead in your hand at seuen sixe ½ ◠fadom deep and thether the depths will lessen being all muddie ground which you shall haue vntill you come right against the highest houell of those that stande vppon the point of Sabon and with a point of the lande of Sumatra being one of the sides of the mouthes of Campar called As Bocas de Campar from whence the one land lyeth with the other East and West in this country are
by this point you shall sée another point which is distant from the first point 4. miles and the course from the one to the other is east southeast west northwest and beeing at this second point about a mile beyond it on the same coast lieth a small riuer and betwéene this point and the riuer you runne halfe a mile of the shore or coast of Samatra alwaies with your lead in hand From this riuer aforesaid you shall put from the coast from this Riuer to another point lying 5 miles forward it is altogether bankes and shallowes with muddie ground therefore you shall still saile with your lead in hand goe no nearer then 5. fadome to the coast of Samatra for if you doe you run on ground and at this depth you shall run to the aforesaid point that lieth before you right against it on the other side of the Iland Banca hath a point or hooke of high land where the channell is at the smalest and comming by this point aforesaid you shall presently finde more depthes When you come to this point aforesaid then runne south southeast holding that course till you come to the Iland of Lasapara which lieth right before you being distant from the saide point 9. miles This Iland is small and low land being round about full of sands and shallowes and when you sée it then runne South and South and by east within two miles of the land on the south side of Samatra and sixe and seauen fadome for it is your right way and course to passe before that Iland and if you finde ten or twelue fadome then turne againe to the coast of Samatra séeking for fiue fadome that you may runne at sixe and seauen fadome and beeing there keepe that course leauing the Iland of Lasapara on the east side and when you begin to enter therein then run southward and being right against the Iland then your depthes will begin to lessen to 5. fadome but bee not abashed for it is the right depthes you find in that place and when the Iland is Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it from the Iland Lasapara twelue miles forward there is an Iland lying close by the Land of Samatra that maketh a smal créeke or bay and for a marke it hath this token that the trees thereof are higher then those of the coast and séeme little woodes you runne from this Iland to Lasapara North North east and south southwest from the which Iland there runneth a Riffe reaching two miles and a halfe into the sea therefore if you desire to saile thether being in the night time you shall run southward with your lead in hand at 8. and 9. fadome and though you come to 11. fadome yet your course is good but you shall not runne vnder 7. fadome and as you thinke you are past by the Iland then you shall take your course againe towardes the land and there you shall finde 8. and 9. fadome comming to this Iland in the daie time you shall put so far from it into the sea that you may onely sée the toppes and vpper parts of the trees and when it lieth Northwest from you then you are past the Riffe then againe runne in with the land at 8. and 9 fadome déepe as aforesaid for the right way and course is alwaies along the Coast beyond this Ilād forward there lieth a gréene creeke vpon the coast which you shall shun for there it is altogether shallowes and the corner therof towards the south hath a thick point of land that sticketh further out then al the rest that are there abouts within this hooke toward the créeke lieth a Riuer from whence there commeth a banke reaching 2. miles into the sea and is foure fadome deepe all hard sand in that countrie where I haue passed therfore I aduise you not to leaue the depthes of 8. 9. fadome which is the right course and you passe from this Iland to the aforesaid Riffe south southwest and North Northeast being distant ten miles from this point of the creeke to two Ilandes lying on the same coast of Samatra forward you run in the same course of north northeast and south southwest and is in course ten miles in all this way you shall finde 9.10 and 11. fadome These Ilandes are distant from the land 3. or 4. miles and comming to these Ilandes then the land and coast of Samatra maketh a thicke crooked ridge or backe and if it be cleare weather you shall sée right before you two high landes wherof one lieth southwestward from you which is the land of Samatra and the other southward which is the land of Sanda part of the Iland Iaua Maior From the two Ilands aforesaid you shall alwaies hold your course along by this crooked thicke ridge of the coast of Samatra being at the point thereof then the land beginneth againe to be low and then you begin clearely to sée the two foresaid lands Betweene those two high landes there runneth a channell or straight inward to the sea betwéene the land of Samatra and Iaua Maior which is called the straight of Sunda beeing past the great thick ridge of the coast of Samatra and comming againe by the low land then runne no longer by the coast but if you haue a good forewind then presently crosse ouer holding your course south southeast to the land of Sunda to the southeast side of a point or hooke of that land by the which lieth the way to Sunda therefore I aduertise you hauing a good forewind to crosse ouer for that if the winde should begin eyther to be calme in the middle way the tide being with you the streame would driue you to the channell which is no good course for the least depth of the channell is 40. fadome and more the streames and tydes therein runne very stiffe both out and in and if they should driue you in as the streame commeth forth being with a Northeast or east winde you should finde the waues of the sea hollow and full that no cable would be strong enough to hold against them by force would driue you out againe which would be no small labour and paine to you I say this because I my selfe haue found it so comming into it by mine owne vnaduisednes in crossing ouer to the high land lying on the side of Sunda and held our course right vpon the midle thereof but the streame draue you ouerthwart before we perceiued it therfore I aduise you that you runne southeast to it for the more you runne eastward the lesse depth you shall haue to anker in if the winde should calme and it is good ground and being by the land aforesaid close by it you shall presently sée a great flat Iland full of trées with many hilles hauing to seaward from it or toward the northeast another flat Iland and from thence to the hauen of Sunda it is
about 4. miles you shall hold your course to the Hauen along by the Iland that lieth on the coast keeping to seaward or halfe a mile from it for it is all faire and good ground at 6 and 7. fadome deepe and so you shall runne along to the end therof and being there about a mile southeastward you shall sée a small Iland full of trees which you shall leaue on the southeast side running inward from it right to a high pointed hill that standeth within the land and when you begin to come néere it then you shall see the houses of the towne which lieth along by the strand and there you may anker at 4. and 3. fadome as you thinke good for it is all muddie ground and if you desire to runne into the Hauen through a Channell which passeth betweene the great Iland and the high land of Sunda you may well doe it alwaies running along by the land vntill you be by the Hauen for you shall leaue the Iland aforesaid and six Ilands more that are somewhat further to seaward but you finde but two fadome and ½ stonie ground wherefore the way passing about is the best as I said before The 26. Chapter The course from the Hauen of Bantam to the Hauen Calapa called Sunda Calapa both lying on the north side of the Iland Iaua Maior SAyling from the Hauen of Bantam to Sunda Calapa you should holde your course betweene the little Iland and the Iland lying right ouer against the crooked point because the streames runne towardes the Channell or straights sayling about the shot of a great peece from all the Ilands or along by them for it is all good way at fiue and sixe fadome deepe muddie ground because that froÌ„ the hooke of the bow or crooked point there runneth a great banke or sand and being about this hooke you shall run 6. or 7. fadome deepe till you be a good mile from it for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land it is altogether bankie shallow sandie ground and to seaward from this point lyeth a long Iland called Pulo Tunda and three or foure miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of Ilands both great and small which are al vnder the same course at the end of those Ilands which are foure one great and thrée smal they are ioyned together with Riffes and along by those Riffes you shall finde twentie foure twenty fiue fadome deepe and you shall leaue al those Ilandes standing on a row to seaward from you from the point aforesaid called the crooked hooke All the coast vnto Calapa runneth East and somewhat East and by south you runne along by it at 7. and 8. fadome for if you put further to seaward then the streames run too stiffe towards the straight or the channell that runneth outwardes betweene Iaua and Samatra which is against you and is of manie depthes â—oure miles froÌ„ the crooked hooke or point forward then the coast hath another point of land where right ouer against it about a mile to seaward from it there lieth a round Iland but you must not passe betweene it and the land for it is very shallow stonie ground only small fusts may passe through it but you shall runne about halfe a mile to seaward from it for it is all along nothing but stones a little mile beyond this Iland there is another Iland and then yet a little further close by there lyeth another little Iland from these two Ilandes a mile southeastward close by the land there lyeth two other Ilands betwéene the two first Ilands and these two Ilands there is a channell of 6. or 7. fadome deepe which passing through you shall runne nerest to the Ilands that lie most to seaward if you will not passe through then run about to seaward from them at 12.13 and 15. fadome déepe from this long Iland northward endeth the Ilands that lie to seaward hauing the Riffs as I said before and make a mouth or opening of a channel of a great mile long you shall here run nearest to the Ilandes that lye closest to the land for that running by to the Ilands that lie to seaward you shall presently sée the Riffes which with a low water are most part vncouered being past this long Iland the other that lieth the shot of a great péece from it as also the two that lie further forward the land of the coast that hath the point then somewhat beyond this point 4. other Ilands betwéene the which and the land you may by no meanes passe a small mile further eastward there lieth other 4. Ilands two and two together at the end whereof to seaward there is a white saÌ„d that alwaies lieth vncouered all these Islandes you shall leaue on your right hand on the land side and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand you shall sée two high hils within the land which lie east west one from the other at the foote of the east hill lieth the hauen of Calapa where you shall anker if you wil enter into the hauen being past the foresaid sands an Iland that lyeth from thence toward the land then there wil foure Ilandes lie southeastward from you which teach towards the land another close by he land then you shal take heed of a sand lying north east close by the hauen which you may alwaies see and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood you shal runne towardes these Islandes which lie to seaward from the hauen béeing day time to shunne the droughtes aforesaid The 27. Chapter The course from the Iland Pulo Timon to the Hauen of Sunda in the Iland of Iaua Maior FRom the Iland of Pulo Timon you run to the Iland of Binton to a point of land that from the same Iland runneth almost Eastward into the sea south Southeast and North Northwest and hard by this point lieth certaine Riffes of small rockes and cliffes and on the north side of this point it hath an opening or mouth wherein there lieth a great Iland with two hilles and a vallie in the middle and along by this point lesse then halfe a mile from the land there are eight fadome deepe of flatte and cleare sandy ground and hath no foulenes but the stone Cliffes Rockes that lie close by the land from this point aforesaid of the Iland of Binton to the Southeast point of the Iland Pulo Panion which hath an Iland lying to seaward from it you runne Southeast and Northwest Southeast and by east and Northwest and by West betweene this Iland Pulo Panion and the Iland of Binton lieth an opening which in the middle way hath two flat small Ilands full of trées and if you cannot passe Pulo Panion on the east side then you may passe inward betwéene it and the land it hath fiue and sixe fadome déepe good
ground and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you This Iland of Pulo Panion lieth close to the land of Binton and if you fortune to be so neare the land that you may not passe by it on the sea side then you must runne to the northwest point where there lieth a rouÌ„d Iland which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland not running betwéene it and the Iland but round about it close to the land for it is faire running so inward along by the Ilands as I said before on the southeast point of this Iland Panion there lieth many Ilands and Cliffes and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands towards the Iland of Linga which is a faire cleare way and sea and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland for it is good way from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe about the length of the shot of a great péece and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered yet you may sée the water breake vpon them which you must shun From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga lying close on the East side of the same Iland you shall holde your course South and South and by East and runne Southward outward alwaies along the Ilandes which shall lie Westward from you and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest which is almost of forme like the Iland das Iarras lying by Malacca and foure miles before you come at it you shall sée two other smal round Ilands lying along by the land and seperated from the rest but not far and when you are as farre as the first round Iland béeing cleare weather then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga lying West Southwestward from you aboue or beyond the Ilandes whereby you passe which are all low houels and vallies and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands comming about thrée miles beyond the round Island you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land which at the first sheweth like two Cliffes and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a créeke called a Enseada de Linga and when you are as farre as this small Island then West Northwestward you shall sée the high land of Linga which sheweth like two high rockes or hils seperated from each other and reach North and South that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares and Westward you shall sée another Land which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground to the point or end of these Islands and by it you shall haue twentie eight fadome and comming by this point where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you to goe to Pulo Pon which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles on the North side hauing two small Ilandes and when you are on the Northeast side it séemeth to be round with a sharpe hill in the middle and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle as in effect it is then you must runne South Southwest and being thrée or foure miles forward you shal sée the Iland of Pulo Pon lie before you in it you haue fresh water and round about it is fayre ground when you see it you shall make towards it on the West side and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep and being by it runne South and south and by East with the which course you shall sée the hill of Manopijn lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca where the straight of Palimbon beginneth and the seuen Ilands called Pulo Tayo shall lie southeastwarde from you which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom then you are on the East side and hauing ten fadome then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca and finding 8. fadome you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra and as soone as you sée Manopijn then runne within two miles thereof before you enter into the straight or channell in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra shunning a great créek lying Northwest froÌ„ y e mouthes of PalimboÌ„ vpon y e same coast of Sumatra which hath a verie great hauen and entrie whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein it hath no shallowes and presently as you passe along the coast you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe The 28. Chapter The course along the coast of Sumatra fâ—oÌ„ the outside beginning at the fâ—rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees on the North side of the Equinoctiall to the straight of Sunda and so to the Islande Iaua Maior with the situation of the coasts BEing by the furthest point or ende of the Island of Sumatra on the out side then you must runne south along the coast it is a very high and pleasant country to behold with many great créekes and Bayes along by the coast From this first further point called Achein 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea the coast runneth South and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde that is the sandes of Trystan de Tayde you must runne along the coast Southeast and southeast and by south the course is fiftie miles by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde there are many sandes and shallows that lie round about them on the west Northwest and North sides with many Ilandes and Cliffes on the same sides these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the Ilandes of Pulo Sambilon lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro that is the gold Ilandes whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea they lie vnder two degrées and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda hauing many Ilandes all along as you passe as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe on the southside of the Equinoctiall East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra called Cabo das Correntes that is the point of the streame because
right ouer against it in y e Ilande of Banca there lyeth an other hooke or point of land where the channell is at the narrowest it is from the one land to the other about three miles from the first point to the second the course is North and South from the seconde poynt sixe miles forwarde there is another point vppon the coast of Sumatra which you must runne with the other poynt North Northwest and South southeast and betwéene them both it is altogether bankie and very shallow muddie ground which reacheth also about by the middle way of the channell being aboue foure miles in length along by the coast of Sumatra to a Riuer which you shall sée and being as farre as the aforesaid point be not negligent in casting forth your leade and there you shall come to fiue fadome muddie ground but runne no lower for then you shoulde presently bee at foure fadome you must rule your selfe according to your depthes alwaies holding your course on the coast of Sumatra not passing aboue seuen fadome and when you see the aforesaide Riuer and beginne to bee neere it then your depthes will presently begin to increase running close by it vntill you bee right against it being within halfe a mile of the point foure miles from this third point lyeth yet an other point which lyeth with the third point East Southeast and West Northwest holding your course along by the coast within halfe a mile of the lande at seuen and eight fadome déepe it is altogether to the fourth point muddie ground from this fourth point to y e first mouth or creek of Palimbon called A Premeira Boca de Palimbon is about two myles and you runne East and West and East and by South and West and by North and being about a mile beyonde this fourth point aforesaide you shall keepe off from the coast to seaward to shun the mouth of Palimbon aforesaid running two miles from it because of many sands and shallows that are thereabout alwayes with the lead in hand not running aboue sixe fadome néere the land to be the more assured for from 5. fadome you come presently to foure and then on ground and runne not too néere towardes the side of the Islande Banca for there you find stones and rockes whereupon the Iunco that is the shippe of Antam de Payua did runne which was at fiftéene fadome and strake with his rother vpon stones cliffes therefore I aduise you not to runne aboue 8. fadome nor vnder sixe or fiue fadome and ½ from the second mouth or creeke called A Secunda Boca de Palumbon close by the third mouth for when the hill of Manopiâ—n that is the point of the Iland Banca lyeth full Eastward from you then you shal crosse ouer kéeping your course two miles from it to auoide a Riffe that lyeth southeast from it being in this parte whereby the hill of Manopiâ—n lyeth southeastward from you then you shal run North and Northeast by east by y e which course you shal see 7 Ilands lying altogether by the country people called Pulo Taye which lie about 15. miles from Manopiâ—n these Ilands shall lie on the southeast side from you being right against these Ilands you shal see a little Iland lying in the Northeast which hath 2. houelles in forme like two men it lyeth about seuen miles froÌ„ the aforesaid Ilandes is called Pulo Pon. From these Ilands aforesaid then your course lyeth along by this Iland and if it be cleare wether beyond this Iland you shall perceiue the IlaÌ„d of Lingâ— which is very great hauing two high rockes lying north south from each other on the south rocke vpon the North poynt thereof it hath a high sharpe point with two houels stiking out like hares eares in this course you shall find 9. or 10. fadome water all muddy ground About 5. or 6. myles Northeastward from these aforesaid Ilands there lyeth an other Iland hard by the Iland of Banca you shall see 2. or 3. Ilands and wheÌ„ you see them then passe not by them for they are the Ilandes of Pulo Tayo which you séeke being by these IlaÌ„ds of Pulo Tayo as I said before you shall doe your best to runne closer to them then to the Iland Pulo Pon holding your course north and north by east whereby you shall see the Ilande of Binton and Pulo Panyon which is hard by on the East point making a smal channel betweene them both From this Iland Pulo Panyon about two miles southeastward lyeth a round Iland full of trees you may passe betwéene both the Ilandes or outward about the round Ilande for it is all faire and good ground shunning a riffe lying in the South about two miles from the rouÌ„d Iland wherevpon you shal sée the sea breake it is about the length of the shot of a great péece being beyond this Iland then runne North whereby you shal see Pedra Branca that is the white stone or cliffe which in the course from Malacca to China we haue oftentimes spoken of from thence forward you shal hold your course as I haue set it downe in the description of the course from Malacca to China therefore here again néedlesse to rehearse From the Iland Pulo Tayo aforesaid to the aforesaid Iland Pulo Panyon it may be about 37 miles litle more or lesse The 30. Chapter The course together with the descriptioÌ„ of the Iland of Canton with all the coasts hauens and pointes of the kingdom of China to Liampo Nanquin with the situation and stretchings of the same IN the description of the nauigation from Malacca to China we haue shewed the entrie of the Channelles of the first Ilandes called Canton lying vnder 21. degr â— which is the Iland called Ilha de Sanchoan and the other lying to landward from thence as also the IlaÌ„d of Valco de Faria you must vnderstand that from this Iland Sanchoan which as I said is the first furthest to the sea ward to a point lying 12. miles from the Iland Lamon you runne without all those Ilands eastnortheast westsouthwest these Ilandes reach about 38. or 39. miles along by the Iland of Sanchoan and from this Iland to Lampacon are 11. miles and in the hauen of Macau eighteene myles and from Macau to the end of the Ilands are twentie one miles these Ilands lying from Sanchoan to Macau from the seaward vpon the row are many and close one to the other which farre off séeme to be all one land from theÌ„ce forward they begin to lessen and to separate one from the other whereby they may easily be perceiued to be Ilands all this way to the end of them to seaward from them you need not feare any thing but that you see before your eyes onlie that you haue 10. or 12. Ilandes or stony cliffes lying 10. miles from Macau forward to seaward from an Iland betwéen the which Iland and cliffe
well on the Northeast as on the Southwest side in this Island you haue fresh water These Islands are called Chiocon it is all ouer very faire cléere ground only one stonie Cliffe whereupon you sée the water breake lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon and two myles from the land lyeth two Ilandes of white stonie Cliffes betweene the which and the land as also outward to Seaward it is all faire ground from these Islandes two myles forward and halfe a mile from the land there lyeth a high round island from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea whereon you sée the water breake which you must shun Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon lyeth a small Créeke where the shippes in the monson of China do anker All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land with deepe and faire ground onely the aforesaid riffe of the island The Hauen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath This high land or hill descendeth downewardes to a hooke or point of land and comming to the Northeast side from the sea it hath a great opening with certaine islands in the mouth thereof from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe and from thence it runneth West Northwest hauing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande in the same course on this land that reacheth from the point of the sea where the land lyeth West Northwest there is a long high island without trées or bushes stretching like the same land and is a small halfe mile distant from the land and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in In this island is good fresh water herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe you runne not on the South side of this island but about by the East side comming into the Hauen on the North side From this island a quarter of a mile further on there lyeth thrée islands stretching East and West one with the other from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands The Island that lyeth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the thrée these Islands are distant from the Northland about a great mile which land is very high ground The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South which on the West side hath a sandy bay and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land there is a good Road to anker in with very good ground where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and marchandises such as are there to bée had The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame the best place to anker and to lie safest is close by the South point to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand by the Créeke that lyeth Northward for it is shallowe Those that come from Liampo and Iapon put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée Islands which is faire at fiue or sixe fadome water which you likewise find along by the Islands as well on the land side as the Sea side onely at the sandy place aforesaid This Island by the Câ—mais is called Tantaa Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile which is altogither shallowe ground so that you can by no meanes passe nor a great way from thence to Sea ward From this Island Tantaa a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea which may bée halfe a myle broad on the South part it hath a point of land against the which on the other land Northward lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour thereabouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye and a myle from the aforesayd point of land inwards of the Riuer there lyeth an Island by the South side with certaine redde downes In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island wherein the Shippes anker and there you lye out of all the streames vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land It happeneth oftentimes that the Shippes by negligence lye drie because they runne close to the land yet it hurteth them not for it is soft muddy ground From this point aforesayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them where the Portingales haue often dressed their Shippes Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa doe not stay there if it bée foule weather but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather comming they presently hoise vp anker and come to anker by this Island in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay close by the South land all this way is fayre This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼ from the Island Tantaa and the Island of this hauen of Chinchon fiue miles East Northeast lyeth a point of land in the which there is a good Créeke against foule weather and the Monson of China called Lialoo The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa is altogether there along of a bankey and shallow ground and so continueth to the Island for that betwéene the said Island and the land it is altogether drie and shallow as aforesaid From this Créeke of Lialoo forward the land beginneth to bée lower without any high hils as the aforesaid land and hath but few bushes in many places none at all It is a very faire coast so that you néed feare nothing there but that you sée before your eies From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles and you runne
after ranne very stiffe into it made vs get in and with the glimsing of the euening and the light Moone wée entred into a verie great goulfe wherein lay the aforesaide Créeke on the North side and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trées lying about the shot of a base from the land Eastward from this Island the land hath a high houell and on the South side of the said houell there lyeth a great opening which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trées There is the Hauen called Minatto which is a riuer better than that of Batecola lying in the coast of Malabar On the North side of this houell about a small myle there is another opening béeing in a land that is somewhat lower as the houell with some trées This opening right in the middle hath an Island wherein is the place of Xibuxij which is a great village full of people and is a riuer of fresh water but it is shallowe for you can not put into it without a spring tide From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West all lowe land and sandie strandes for the space of two miles from thence it runneth Southward againe till it butteth vpon a high hill which is that which wée sawe comming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foote of the hill there lyeth a small riuer very shallow From this riuer the land runneth East againe to the mouth thereof which may bée about halfe a myle broad The ground of all this Créeke and entrie is sand and bad anker ground All this high land aforesaid is called Quimonsiquy From this Créeke of Xibuxij seuen myles East Northeast lyeth the Créeke of Tanora which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon you runne the coast East and East by North in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bay which at the first shewe séemeth to haue a good harbor but when you are right against it then you may verie well perceiue it for it hath many stonie Cliffes and Rockes and runneth somewhat to landward I heare set downe the description of this Créeke that no man should deceiue himselfe therby that desireth to goe vnto Tanora as wée should haue done Béeing past this small Créeke you shall presently sée that the land maketh an end or point of high lande from the which point forward the coast windeth inward where you shall sée a sandie strand with two Ilandes full of trées lying along by it At the end of these Islands you shall sée other smaller Islands that lye off from the land inward to the Sea with other great stones and rockes Within these Ilands and Stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into this Hauen you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea and béeing past them then on the Northeast side to Seaward there will lie a stonie Cliffe with an Island without bushes or trées béeing stéepe land reaching North and South betwéene this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anker for right ouer against it it is 25 fadome déepe but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the point and the end of the aforesaid Islands and Stones that sticke outward to Sea then you shall presently passe along thereby inward towards the land which you may freely doe without danger for it is faire and cléere holding your course Westward and a point of land will be vpon your right hand and béeing past this point you shall passe close by shunning the land on the West side and being there you are within the Hauen which is a long Créeke or Bay reaching North till you be in you may ancre in the middle thereof at foure fadome déepe and then you are inclosed with a round bowe it is there altogither muddy ground Departing from Tanora to Fyunga the coast runneth North to a point of land lying about fiue myles from Tanora betwéene this point of land and Tanora there lyeth two Hauens the one called Gico not farre from Tanora the other further forward by some stonie Cliffes and Islands called Vmbra These two Hauens are good harbors for East winds that blowe much on this coast from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga may be fiue miles more from whence the coast land doe turne in againe like a Créeke comming somewhat further Northward out this Créeke is a low land along by the Sea coast with sandy strands and a mile beyond y e aforesaid point of land the coast hath an opening and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round trée close by the Sea side here is a good Hauen which is called Vndo and further forward there lyeth another Hauen called Toconosuchy this land is higher then the other hauen on the Southside it hath some high and great Trées and on the Northside a low land the which farre off outward sheweth like small Islands with trees This hauen is not good to put in A mile beyond this hauen there is another Hauen called Myme which is a good hauen for small shippes to enter and hath two enteries which you presently sée béeing without and may well discerne them in the middle hauing a flat Island full of Trees these Trees make two openings and you may see ouer the Island on the land which is higher a great gréene trée the land on the South side hath a high land with a valey From this Hauen about two myles and a halfe lieth another small Island called Tomxyma beyond this Riuer a myle and a halfe endeth the low land and then again it beginneth to be high from thence two myles further the land maketh a point or hooke of high land and a farre off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ramos lying on y e coast of India by Goa Sailing about this point hard by there is a Riuer Northward called Camyco which is two fadome deepe in the Hauen this is the furthest land of the kingdome of Fiunga From y e point of land aforesaid fiue miles distant from Tanora to this point of Camico the lande is like a Créeke or breech the water therein making a crosse streame for along by the land the Water runneth alwaies Southward you runne this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South and North and by east and South and by West and are about eight miles distant along by this Bréech you may anker at twelue and fiftéene fadome deepe faire sandy ground From this point called Cabo de Camico forward the coast runneth north northwest and when you are right against this point then you shall presently sée Northeastward and Northeast and by East the land of Toca which is an island and is about fortie myles long and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South it hath
From thence to Xynaco are fiue myles From Xynaco to the Hauen of Vxymando are fiue myles From Vxymando to the Hauen of Muroo are fiue myles And this Hauen is about fiue myles more from the Hauen aforesaid Beyond the aforesaid point thrée or foure myles Eastward lyeth the Hauen of Fyongo and from thence sixe or seuen myles further is the Hauen and Bay of Sacay All this coast aforesaid is faire and cleare hauing all ouer anker ground These are as I said before all Portingale myles and two Iapon myles make iust a Portingall myle which is found to bée true by the Portingall Pilotes that haue therein taken the height of the Sunne and made their account after the Iapon myles The 32. Chapter The Nauigation from Lampaecon which lyeth by Macon in the coast of China to the Island of Iapon and from thence to the Island Firando with the description thereof by another Pilote SAyling from Lampacon to the Island of Iapon you must passe through the first issue or Channell of the South Island which reacheth South-eastward hauing a Cliffe or Island in the middle thereof betwéene the which and the point of the Island you must passe because of the scant winde making as neare as possiblie you can to the end of the Island alwayes with your Leade in hande And comming to the middle way of the Channell of the Island lying vnto Sea-warde you shall finde a sandie banke that in the middle hath not thrée fadome deepe You shall vse all the meanes you can to passe aboue a great and high Island which lyeth East Southeast from you Being about this Island with the other that lyeth to Sea-ward in the same rowe you shall passe along by the Island that lyeth to Seaward Six miles further from this Island you shall sée a row of Islands small Islands Cliffes and are nine reaching further out to seaward then all the rest that you passe by and lye North Northeast and South Southwest you cannot passe on the outside of them neither is it necessary but you must runne betwéene them and a great high Island full of Trées that lyeth to landward from you which Island as you come néere it sheweth as if it were round because you goe right vpon the point Notwithstanding it is long reaching as the coast doth Hauing past somwhat beyond it there is a channell that passeth betwéene it and another Island lying close by it Behind this last Island East Northeast there is a Hauen where some Ships come to lade certain Chinish wares and is not farre from the mouth or entry of Canton This Island aforesaid is by the Chinars called Tonquion From thence you shal runne East Northeast to sée the country that lyeth betwéene Chinchon and Chabaquon which is faire and cleare ground running two myles from it to shunne a Riffe that lyeth close by Chinchon which hath a round high Island lying close by the land you must runne the coast of Chaboqueo to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and northeast and by East and Southwest and by west and whē you are right against Chinchon then about two miles into the Sea you haue a high round Island and within the land a high hill with a stony rocke on the top thereof like Pulo Varella in the coast of Champa and the entry is through some Islands this round Island afore is by the Chinars called Toanthea When you are right against Chincheo as aforesaid then runne East Northeast vntill you are eight or ten myles from the coast to kéepe without all the Islands and being there then runne Northeast in which course you shall see the Island of Lequeo Pequeno that little Lequeo lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées it is a very high and long island about eightéen miles distant from the coast of China when you are past Lequeo Pequeno comming into fiue and twenty degrees and ½ If you desire to make to the land of Bungo then runne Northeast and Northeast and by East in which course you shall fall vpon the Islands lying on the South side of the Island Tanaxuma which Islands begin at 29 degrées and ½ and reach to thirtie degrées and ½ and are in all seuen high and small Islands which reach one with the other that is the thrée first Islands Northeast and southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South the other thrée East Northeast and West Southwest and one at the end of them North and South These seuen Ilands being past six miles further North northeast you shal sée two other ilands lying east and west with each other wherof the East island is the smallest the East end thereof hauing a high houell which descendeth eastward making a low point You may well passe betwéene these two islands for there is a good channell The greatest of these two islands which is high and long is called Icoo from the east point whereof foure or fiue miles Northward lyeth the island of Tanaxuma which is a long island reaching North and south of seuen or eight miles long In the middle way of the same island on the East side lieth the Hauen which is a small Créeke within certaine stony cliffes but it is not best to put into it West Northwestward from this Hauen about a mile and a halfe there lyeth a smal flat land that hath a houell in the middle seuen or eight myles Northward from Tanaxuma you shall sée a great high land which reacheth tenne miles east and West which is the land of Iapon and at the end or point of this coast on the West side lieth the Creeke of Cangoxuma and the hauen of Amango aboue it hauing a high pointed top and right against the island of Tanaxuma North and North and by East lyeth the Créeke of Xebuxy that is very great hauing within it the Hauens of Minato Eoxima and Xaboxy all thrée Riuers for small Ships And lying on the East side on the right hand as you come West-ward into the Créeke sixe or seuen myles further North Northeast along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Tanora which is the least Hauen of Iapon If you desire to put to the said hauen of Tanora then you shall holde close to the shoare sayling néere vnto it for it is faire ouer all but you haue no anker ground nor Roades because it is déepe and when you passe by it being beyond the Créeke of Xebury then you shall come to a small Créeke which at the first sight séemeth to haue good harbour but being right against it it sheweth what it hath that is many stones and rockes reaching somewhat inward to land I note it here because thereby no man should deceiue himselfe Being past this small Créeke you presently see a great thicke and high point of land From this point y e land windeth inward where you shall see a sandie strand and two Islands with Trées lying there along At the end of the which Islands there are other smaller
the Hauen of Macau along by the Island of China to the Island of Fyrando and the Islands lying about it to the Hauen of Vmbra in the coast of Iapon with a description of other Hauens lying thereabout where they ordinarily vse to trafficke IF you desire to Saile out of Macau towardes Iapon in the Monsons of Iune and Iulie and if in setting out you can not kéep to loofeward from a cliffe which you may easily perceiue lying by Macau which sheweth like a saile you neede not feare it for that leauing the Island Lanton on the Lée side you may runne whither you will for it is all faire and you need not feare any thing when yea are without the Island you shall hold your course towardes the Island Branco that is the white Island or the white Stonie Cliffes running East Northeast towardes the Island of Lamon and if you haue a faire winde and that you depart about Euening from the said Island then on the Firme land you shall sée a great high Land on the East side descending somewhat flat and in the middest thereof hauing a round houell like a loofe of bread The depthes all along by that coast about two miles from it is thirtie and fiue and thirtie fadome deepe being muddie ground From Ilha Branco to Lamon there are diuers small Islandes lying by the coast of the Firme Land In this place for twelue miles or thereabouts on this side Lamon and seuen or eight miles from the Firme land there is small black sand with some shels at seuen and twentie and eight and twentie fadomes water and being there you shall stil runne East Northeast although you see no land for that hauing the aforesaid depth and ground you passe fréely and safely from the Riffe of the island Lamon and if it so fall out that you see no land yet by the depthes and ground you may well know where you are for from the island Lamon to Macau the depthes of the aforesaid ground is from 25. to 28. fadome déepe and by Lamon and thereabouts the ground is white small and thinne with some blacke sande and if you chance to passe by it in close and darke weather then you shall hold your course as aforesaide East Northeast for it is the best way and when you make towardes the island of Lamon and finding the depthes of fifteene or sixtéene fadome it is a signe that you are farre to seaward for in that country the streame runneth very strong East Southeastward there as then you must runne Northeastward so to holde your right course And running at the depthes of fiue and twentie or eight and twentie fadome sandie ground it is a good way holding your course East Northeast for in that sort you are in the right way in the middle way from the channell when you are past the Island of Lamon towardes Chinchon then the streame runneth with you and hauing the wind of the Monson the next day you shall sée land on both sides whereof that you find on the Stearebord side is the end or point of the Island Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo and the beginning of the Island called Ilha Fermosa that is the faire Island and on the lareboord side the Lande lyeth in forme like a hooke although it is none but it is the Island of A Ilha dos Cauallos of the Island of Horses which is very high lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées and a third part on the one side about foure or fiue miles to Sea-ward from it hauing the Island of Baboxyn and hauing séene this Lande you must holde your course Northeastward which is a good way so to runne outward of all the Islands for that from this Island of Horses forward to the Cape of Sumbor there are many Islands reaching into the Sea wherfore this is your best course to goe to the Cabo de Sembor and as you thinke you are right against y e Cape of Sumbor although you sée it not you need not feare it for that as then you are about eight or ten myles from it Being in this country you shall holde your course Northeast so to sée the Island of Puloma or Meaxuma or the Island Guoto for it is a good course for the winds of the Monson or if you haue any stormes or contrary winde whereby you cannot holde your right course then you must gouerne your selfe in such manner that you may fall againe into your right course and so to sée some of those Islands This aforesaid Island of Puloma lyeth North North-east and South Southwest with the Island Guoto about tenne or twelue miles distant from each other and is deuided into foure or fiue parts with many holes péeces of ground round about it yet you need not feare for close by it there are many other péeces of ground which I knowe as hauing seene them all From this Island aforesaid to the Hauen of Vmbra or the Island of Firando you must runne your course of Northeast wherewith you shall sée the land lying beneath Vmbra which is very high hauing along y e coast many small Islands among the which are two Cliffes that sticke out with very hard sharpe Points like Diamonds From thence to Vmbra are sixe or seuen miles and being there about a mile from the Lande you shall holde your course North and so runne along by the coast and being by it you shall kéepe close to it to know the Lande and markes thereof which are these that when you are close by the Land on the right hand there is a Point of Land from whence there lyeth two Islandes to Seaward which is hard by the entry of Vmbra for from this Point inward you runne Northeast towards it Vpon this Hooke or point are three Pine Trees and being right against this point to Sea-ward from it on the left hand you shall sée a smal Island with a round cliffe you must runne within this Cliffe whereby right before you shall see the land of Vmbra When you perceiue a great Island or Cliffe which is very plaine and descending downeward lying inward to Sea then on the Lande side you shall sée great store of wéedes driuing vpon the Water This Island you must leaue on the Lareboord or left hand running betweene it and the Land for it is about halfe a myle broad From this Island to the mouth or entry of the channell are two miles with a Northeast course whereby you shall presentlye sée the entry which is very broad From this Island or Cliffe there runneth a stony rocke reaching to the mouth of the Riuer some part of it lying aboue water and part couered yet you may plainely sée it so that you néed not feare any thing but that you sée before your eies Betweene this Rocke and the Lande on the right hand in the middle way there is fiftéene or 18 fadome déep muddy ground when you see the mouth of the Channell you must put right
which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon If you faile of it at sometime it is not often it commeth and beginneth from one point and so runneth with a continuall storme almost about all the points in compasse blowing most stiffely whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande and in such sort that not any stormes throughout all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it and to chuse your times that by calmes sodainely you bee not vnaduisedly ouertaken as euery man that hath sayled those wayes can sufficiently showe you and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa then runne Northeast by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima which is a good way and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side and haue seuentie fiue fadome water then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma and hauing lesse depth then your course is not good but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better but being too loofeward it is good especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare which is a smal Island on the Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes and somewhat farther forward the Island Coâ—aquyn which is very great being deuided into thrée parts I haue passed by the land side thereof which is a very good way and there you néede not feare any thing but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island which you may easily perceiue for the Sea breaketh vpon them You must holde your course along by it leauing the stones on the larboorâ— side about the length of the shot of a Base from you and when you are past them then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea thereby to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer against the thicke and great Lande for betwéene them and it it is all full of Riffes And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa which is very great where the Créeke of Arima beginneth From thence North North westward from you you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma When you are right against Cabexuma somewhat beyond it you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side and then East-warde and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Sea side hath a great houell and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast which shew like two Ships vnder sayle Also further forward towards Firando there is two flat Islands lying along the coast called the Islands of Resting as that is the Islands of Riffes If when you come out of the Sea you haue cause to anker before you put into the Hauen being by the Islands or Cliffes then put out newe Cables making them fast that you loose not your ankers for there it is very déepe and sharpe Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos and when you are by it that is inward of the point You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water all the other Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque hauing nothing to feare then that you sée before your eyes for there you haue both Sea and ground as it is vpon the coast of Spaine The 36. Chapter A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe called the S. crus the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe lying East Southeast from thence but because the wind was so scant wee could not doe it so that we were forced to driue so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper being eightéene twenty fadome and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme that is the Island of the Harquebush This Island of Lanton as you make towards it hath a point where the wind fell very scarce in such manner that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward otherwise we had indured great labor and trouble to passe through the channell because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme the course wee held that night was East and East and by South because wee had a sharpe wind hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco or the white cliffe and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it The sixt of Iuly being Saterday we could not take the height of the sunne because it was right ouer our heads hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind with very hote weather by day but by night it was somewat colder we held our course East Northeast East and east and by North as the winde blewe and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground being in sight of lande and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of Lamon which is a long flat land like a Table or plaine field on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea and hard by against the thickest part thereof you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon to Seaward whereof lyeth thrée Cliffes Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon there wée call forth our Leade and found 27 fadome water with small white and some blacke sand with small shels among it being about seuen or eight miles from the
the greater it séemeth This Island is very high in the middle and descendeth downeward towards the end The Northeast point is lower then the southeast so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out which is very lowe From thence East Northeastward are certaine Islands shewing like cliffes The depth in that place is fiue and twenty fadome muddy ground Wednesday being the seuentéenth we had a North Northeast wind and then it came North-east and began to blowe so stiffe that we were forced to strike all our sailes letting the shippe driue all that day Southeastward and by night wee willed the man at the helme to steere northwest and about morning the winde began to blowe so stiffe with so great waues that we were forced to go with half our foukesaile with all our cords wel bound made fast and the storm or Tuffon was so great that wee were forced to bind all that wee had on boord els it was presently stricken in péeces This Tempest began first North Northeast and so ranne about till it was North Northwest At the departure whereof it was so boysterous that the waues séemed to touch the clowdes This was vpon Thursday being the two and twentith day of the new Moone the next night following the wind came west but because as then the Sea ranne verie high we let not our sailes fall but in the morning we had the wind southwest and then we let fall our sailes minding to follow on our course with great ioy throughout our ship thinking certainely wee had the windes of the Monson but towards night it was calme againe and then wee had a North wind holding our course eastward but not long after it was altogither calme notwithstanding the waues ranne out of the South so that about two of the clocke we had the wind southeast wherewith we hoised sailes running northeast and Northeast and by North and when it began to be day we saw the Island called Dos Reys Magos that is the thrée kings lying South about tenne or twelue miles from vs and there I found the heigth of the sunne to be 26 degrées and ⅔ being the one and twenty day of the Moone The day before wee sawe the Island Fermosa which is a very high Land and séemeth to reach vnto the cloudes there wee had fiue and fortie and fiftie fadome water muddy ground On friday at sunne rising we cast out our lead and found one and twentie fadome with blacke sande The first token that we had of the aforesaid Tempest was a small Raine-bowe close by the Horizon on the Sea side being a faire russet colour with two other greater Rainebowes whereof the point or end shewed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois that is Cats eyes which are small clouds which at the first shewe seeme no greater then a mans fist about the Cape De bona Speranza which by the sailors that saile in the East Indian Seas are much marked for they are tokens of suddaine falling Tempestes and cruell stormes as in the voyage from India to Portingale is alreadie partly declared wherefore it is good to bée aduertised thereof the better to looke vnto it and to watch for them to y e which end I thought it not from the matter to speake of them in this place But returning vnto our matter I aduertise you that when you are come into those countries as long as the winde commeth out of the North and so Southwest you are to make no account thereof for it will presently bée North Northeast and East but when it is calme then you shall haue a Southeast winde and then South and Southwest which are the monson and windes of that time but if it beginne againe to be calme it may so fall out that it will bée East Southeast but it will presently be southeast againe with faire weather which wée also found in this Monson of Iuly Anno 1585. Monday the two and twentie day wée tooke the height of the Sunne at 27. degrées and 1 ◠hauing a Southeast Southsoutheast winde with good weather and helde our course Northeast and as I gessed wée had runne after wée had faire weather and wind about two and twentie miles béeing from the lande of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. myles being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma and that day wée cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57. fadome water and sawe many blacke and white Sea foules that helde thereabout the blacke birdes by the Portingales being called Alcatrases The thrée and twentie beeing Tuesday wée had verie good weather in such manner that at that mealetide wée sailed about fiftéene miles béeing about twelue miles from the firme land of China In the morning we cast out the Lead and found one and fiftie fadome with white and blacke sand Wednesday being the four and twentie day wee had the height of the Sunne at 29. degrées with an East Southeast and Southeast winde and good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North and sometimes but not much Northeast and by East I made my account to haue holden Northeast and by North and so to haue sailed 16. miles being yet from the Island of Meaxuma about 70. miles lying Northeast from vs and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fadome déepe sandie muddy ground Thursday the 25. of Iuly wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wee lay driuing without sayles with an East wind winding Southward and so helde till the 26. day and draue Westward finding two fadome lesse in our depth The 26. we wound Northward without sailes yet not long after wee let our foresaile fall but wholly against my mind but onely at the importunate desire of the Chinish Pilat saying that the same day wee should haue the winde larger which was not so but cleane contrarie so that all the way wee made in that sort was more troublesome vnto bs wherefore it is better for such as finde themselues in those countries of 29. degrées to stay for Southeast windes and then to runne North Northeast Northeast and Northeast and by North because the waters and streames runne verie strong towards Liampo and when you are vnder 30. and 31. degrées hauing a South Southeast winde then you shall haue great labour and much paine to get the Island Meaxuma for so it happened vnto vs because the wind was so strong that we could beare but our foresaile and halfe the maine top-saile as also because the Sea ranne very high and hollow and put our shippe out of course and that the streames ranne Southeast This is about 25. or 30. miles from the Island Meaxuma But as soone as the winde came full whereby wee ranne East East and by North and East Northeast at 40. and 34. fadome water the ground being verie smal sand holding as much Eastward as possibly we might and sometimes east and by South wherby we
better assured you may send a boat in before you which shall lie there where y e riuer is narrowest thereby to serue you for a Baye or Sea-marke The 38. Chapter The right course to saile from the Island Meaxuma to the Hauen of Cochinochy and to Facunda with the scituation of the Places WHen you sée the Island Meaxuma go within a mile and a halfe or two miles néere it or somewhat closer if you will for there you néed feare nothing but what you sée before you and desiring to saile from thence to Cochinochy then you shall hold your course East and East and by North stil kéeping Eastward whereby you shall come to the Créeke of Arima and if it bée by night and that you desire to knowe when you are by the land then cast your Lead continually out and béeing at fortie fadome then you are about two miles and a halfe or thrée miles from the lande and béeing in the mouth of the Créeke you shall finde hard and great Sand and when you are at fortie fadome you may anker if the weather be faire if you thinke it bée falling water and so stay till it bée daye for there the streame runneth verie strong into the Sea your Lead will direct you what you shall doe If it bée day you shall presently sée the Lande of Cabexuma to Seawarde from you lyeth a Cliffe which sheweth like a Saile This Cliffe you can not sée but when you are close by the point to Léewarde from this point Northward lyeth certaine stonie cliffes but it is not best for you that you sée them when you goe to Cochinochy because they lie to Lée-warde as I saide before And wen you sée lande which is at fortie fadome water then you shall presently discouer the Créeke of Arima as also the point of Cabexuma on the one side and the lande of Amacusa and Xiquy on the other side which is very high This lande lyeth on the South side and Cabexuma on the North side when you sée the point of Cabexuma goe within a mile of it because of a stonie cliffe which lyeth in the mouth of the Creeke holding your course close by Cabexuma about a mile and a halfe from it or along by the land of Amacusa If the winde within this Créeke bée sharpe then stay vntill the floode commeth which shall bring you where you desire to be and being there you haue Cochinochy right before you where you shall haue Barks and Scutes great store to bring you in Hée that desireth to goe to Facunda must hold his course East Northeast and Northeast and by east and when you are close by the land you shall find the depths aforesaid and beeing to Léewarde from Cabexuma you shall there finde harde ground and if it be right ouer against the mouth of the creeke you shall haue sandie ground as aforesaid and when you see the point of Cabexuma then make towards the lande and by the lande about a mile distant you shall sée certaine stonie cliffes by the which you shall holde your course to Seaward from them by these first stonie cliffes lyeth a round Island with a trée in it and somewhat beyond this Island with one Trée there is another Island stretching Northwest and Southeast called Ilha dos Cauallos that is the Island of Horses you must make towards the Island to a point of land that lyeth out on the North side of the same Island This Island on the Northwest side hath for a marke certaine Pine trées when you are close by the aforesaid Northerly point then from thence hold East Northeast till you put in where you shall find a Creeke and right ouer against this Island North Northeast lieth a sharpe pointed Houell reaching to Seawarde which you must shun for half a mile from thence forward lieth two stones which you shall presently see when you enter into the creeke going within an Island or cliffe which will be East Northeast from you you must put towards it about the length of the shot of a great péece and so runne along by it till you be in and within on the right hand vpon the lande you shall sée certaine downes and on the left hand a groue hauing on the sea side as you passe along many stones like Kefell stones Right ouer against this Island on the left hand lie the two stones aforesaid which you can not see then with an ebbe of a spring tide and running in after this manner you shall see a crosse standing vpon a point of land and right ouer against this crosse is the Rode and from this crosse Eastward there is a verie good Hauen where you must make your ship fast and sure from the South side that is the Hauen of Facunda The 39. Chapter An instruction of the course out of the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache to the cape de Sumber in the coast of China where the Portingales are resident SAiling out of the hauen of Langâ—saque to China hauing a North wind if you haue cause to anker below by the thrée Islands or cliffes béeing right ouer against the Island dos Cauallos on the side of Facunda then anker there along for it is déepe enough all ouer as I with my lead haue prooued there you shall stay the first night that in the morning very early you may haue the winde from off the lande wherewith you shall set saile loosing as much as you can vntill you be gotten about the Island dos Cauallos for because we did it not being in the ship of Tristan Vaas da Veiga we were in danger not to haue béene able to get about the Island Béeing past the Island dos Cauallos you must hold your course West West and by South and West Southwest and if the wind be bigge then put not towards the Island Guoto for that there at that time you haue certaine South windes which I knowe for certaine because I haue béen there at other times in the ship of Manoel Trauassos in great trouble because it is crosse wind right vpoÌ„ the coast and there you haue no ground as also by night not to fall by the Pannellas which are called Pottes and by some Cliffes wherefore your best course is to runne to Loofeward from the Island Meaxuma Along by the Southwest side of the Island of Meaxuma lieth a cliffe from thence forwarde you shall holde your course West Southwest although you haue the wind scant yet you may hold that course for that being halfe way from the gulfe to the coast you shall without doubt finde the wind large enough In this way kéeping well to Loofewarde about 35. or 40. miles from the Cape de Sumbor you shall find a Banke of 35.37 and 38. fadome déepe which by such as knewe it not might bee taken for the ground of the land of China Being past this Banke you find more depthes but when after that the depthes begin to lessen then looke to your selfe for
haue stopped their mouthes with money There wée vnderstood that the Island of Guoto hath sixe or seuen Hauens that are very good running from the one side to the other but the Hauen aforesaid had no issue but so much pleasure it did vs that there we had the new Moone which was the first of March and the third day wee set sayle againe it being Shroue Tuesday with a North Northeast winde and a verie cléere morning and béeing out wée helde our course Southwest following on our course wherewith wée sawe the Island Meaxuma and the Pannellas or Pots lying South Southeast from vs wée tell right vpon the middle thereof Those Panellas are two small stones and Meaxuma is an Island and when you are Northeast and Southwest right ouer against it it sheweth like two or three Islands wherof that on the Northeast side is long and the greatest and sheweth as if it had a Cliffe This Island is the longest but not verie high and that in the middle is small hauing thrée sharp points like Organ pipes with a Cliffe likewise lying Northeastward The other Island on the Southwest side is round and plain stéepe lande shewing higher then all the other and séemeth to haue Cliffes round about it On the other side lie the Panellas aâ—oresaide and although I said before they are but two stones yet they are three two standing togither and the other somewhat further from them and lie with the Island Meaxuma Northwest and Southeast From thence forward wee held our course to China and Macau in such manner as I shewed in another place and hereafter once againe I will declare The 41. Chapter Another voiage made out of the Hauen of Langasaque from the Island of Iapon to Macau in China in the Santacrus the Gunner being Diricke Geriâ—son of Enckehusâ—n in Ann. 1586. THE 20. of March we departed out of the Hauen of Langasaque it being the first day of the newe Moone vpon a Thursday with a northeast and North Northeast winde and by nine of the clocke in the morning wée were as farre as the Island dos Cauallos running West Southwest and being two myles beyond the Island Dos Cauallos wee had a calme and then the wind came Northwest in such sort that wee ranne Southwest and Southwest and by west and sometimes halfe a strike with a slacke winde The next day in the morning we saw the Islands of Corequyn and Guoto and about eight of the clock in the forenoone we saw the Island Meaxumâ— so that we sawe those three Islands all at once and about twilight we were east Southeast and West Southwest with the Island of Meaxuma and so helde our course Southwest hauing a hard Northeast wind with raine the aire being very darke and close yet the Rackes came out of the Southwest Vpon Sunday we cast out the Leade and found somewhat more then forty fadome water muddye ground and was about forty myles from Meaxuma This depth is a banke lying in the middle way betwéene the Island Meaxuma and Cabo de Suâ—â—bor in the firme land of China Vpon munday the foure and twentith day wée tooke not the height of the sunne because we saw it not hauing so small a winde that the ship might stéere vpright and because we made little way wee cast out the lead and found forty fadome muddy ground this was at noone and at night about sunne setting we cast it out againe and founâ— fiue and fifty fadome whereby we perceiued that wee began to passe ouer a banke at that time we had all one wind being Northeast and North North-east with a good blast and yet the clouds came South-west and South South-west so strong that they put vs in feare doubting the wind would be there but we had certaine men in our shippe that had seene and found it so in that place and yet no alteration whereby they put vs in some comfort in such sort that wee followed on our course with that wind Vpon Tuesday at noone wée tooke the height of the Sunne not full nine and twenty degrées hauing not long before as I gessed marked one point in the Card and estéemed that wee had sayled a hundred myles from the Hauen of â—angasaque but by the Sunne it was not so The sixe and twenty being Wednesday wee tooke not the heigth of the sunne because it was a close day but wee had a good Northeast wind and made good way so that wee seemed to make thirtie myles â—n one mealetide but I made account but of fiue and twenty myles because wee thought the ship sailed not ouer fast that day we sawe many Cuttle bones driuing vpon the water held our course Southwest till morning and because the winde beganne to bee stiffe I thought it good to make towards the land to know it therefore as day appeared wee ran West till it was euening without knowing Land by reason of the mistineâ—â—e of the aire but by the depths our gessing wee thought wee were about 5 or 6 miles from the land our depth was 37 fadome and being towards night with cloudy weather we ran southwest and southwest and by south all that night and when day came being thursday wee gessed to bee ouer against the Lagaâ—to or Crocodille a cliffe so called about fiue or sixe miles to Seaward from it but wee found it to be somewhat more Thursday being the seuen and twenty as soone as day appeared we ranâ—e West towards the Land and about foure of the clocke in the afternoone we saw the land being the Islands Dos Camaroâ—s that is the Islands of Granata those Islanâ—s are not too high as soone as we saw them wee helde our course South Southwest and hauing sailed a little way we saw another round Island called Ilha do Bâ—boxâ—â— which lay right before vs as soone as wee saw it we presently ran South to shun it because we were not aboue a quarter of a mile from it there wee found so strong a streame and course of water which ranne with vs that in short time we were two or three myles from the aforesaid Island in such manner that all that night wee ranne South and South and by West and South Southwest and when the moone rose we held our course southwest The eight and twenty being Friday about morning we began to runne West Southwest west and west and by South and at noon or thereabouts we cast out the Lead and found nine and twenty fadome muddy ground and running so with that course for a little time we saw land but it was so close and misty that we could not know it but about two or three of y e clock in the afternoone it began to cleare vp and then we knew it to be the Island of Chinchon being North from vs and there wee cast out the Lead and found nineteene fadome water sandy ground and not long after we sawe the whole coast and firme Land of China and so we ran all
make thrée The second houell which lyeth in the middle is bare wholly discouered appearing through the rocks cliffes y t lie vpon the top of y e field called Dos Paâ—anas which is in the middle of the chanel being by the last houses of the town and when you are right against y e aforesaid houses then you shal presently discouer the 3. houel so that when you are right against y e sandy point lying close by y e Varella called Dos Mandorins then the said houel is almost wholly vncouered where you shall find four fadome and a halfe déepe with a full sea of a Spring tide and as soone as you are past the sandy Point then you beginne to find more depths that is fiue and fiue fadome and a halfe and running in that sort you shall go right vpon a broken land lying on the other side ouer against the Island called Ilha do Bugio that is the Island of sea Cats When you are at the depths aforesaid then southward from you you shall sée an opening called Enseada de Gonsato vaaz which within it hath a hil on the east side which sheweth like an Island or Cliffe and on the West side it hath two Points sticking out and when those two Points are right ouer against each other theÌ„ you are in the middle of the channell and you must be carefull to sée y t they lye one right against the other for by that marke you shall runne in the déepest and best place which is at 27 Spannes of water with a spring tide as I haue found it in the time of the Monson when you saile to Iapon hauing an East winde for with a North wind you haue lesse water there Now to know when you are as farre as the banke you must vnderstande that Northward towards the Island Do Bugio there lyeth a stony cliffe which sheweth like a houell which lieth most Northward of all the rest along by the strand it hath a clouen Rocke with two Points when you haue the aforesaid stony Cliffe like a houell right ouer against the middle of the aforesaid clouen rocke then you are vpon the aforesaid banke and when the aforesaid marke standeth vneuen on the one or other side then you shall presently find more depths which shall bee thus that as you run Southeast right vpon the thickest and greatest land on the other side vntill you be at foure and fiue fadome water which is the point called Varella and desiring to passe through the east channell then you must runne Southeast and East Southeast vntill you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro wholly by the end of the Island Do Bugio then it is not good for you to runne more southward to shun the stone lying right ouer against the Varella and when you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro as I said before then you must runne along by the aforesaid stone about two cables length from it there you shall haue the depth of 28. and nine and twenty spannes of water with a spring tide and to know when you are néerest the stone it is wheÌ„ you haue wholly discouered the first cliffe of two that lye on the Northside of the Island Do Lastro and then you are about a stones cast from the aforesaid-stone at the depth aforesaid and when you haue wholly discouered the second Cliffe then you are beyond the stone you may likewise know it by another marke which is a white vlacke standing vpon the Hill which you see ouer the Towne and hath a stone which sheweth like a mans head When you bring the aforesaid white vlacke in the middle of the top of the house of Don Ioan d Almeyda then you are right ouer against the aforesaid stone and wheÌ„ you are past it it is good to make towards the land on the Southside in such sort that you leaue the two third parts thereof on the side of the town and one third part on the Southside and running in that sort you shall haue more depths then in the middle way vntill you be vpon the banke which hath no more then sixe and twenty Spannes Water with high Water of a spring tide And desiring to knowe when you begin to be right against it it is when you haue the crosse part or dore of y e great church right against the toppe of a house that standeth on the strand which commeth vpon the same way of the same dore right to the strand so that y e dore is wholly discouered there you haue seuen twenty or eight and twenty Spannes water which shall bee when you sée or discouer the clocke house or top of S. Paules church with a hill that standeth behind the same church and as soone as the said clockhouse is couered then you shall presently finde more depths as two and thirtie spannes water which is foure fadome which is right ouer against the place where you fetch fresh Water and going somewhat further forward you shall finde foure fadome and a halfe fiue fadome at a spring tide this was the Road where the shippe called S. Crus of the burthen of fourteene or sixtéene tunnes did anker and when the said ship did wind with an ebbe then the Island Do Lastro lay vncouered although it was a good way from the Land You haue a very good token or marke to know when the land on the Southside is neerest to you then you must make to the Island Do Lastro and Northward from it there is two cliffes and when those two cliffes are one against the other then you are in the déepest of the channell vntill you bee ouer the banke The 44. Chapter Of the course and streames of the water in the way from Malacca in the time of the Monson when they ordinarily trauell thether FRom the Island Pulo Catao lying on the coast of Champa part of the Land of Camboia to the Varella which is a place lying in the way from Pulo catao towards Malacca in y e same coast of Champa or Camboia y e streames run very strong towards the south from the Island Pulo Catao fiue miles forward y e streams run very strong towards the Island Champello and the créeke called A Enseada de Cauchinchina And in the monson of China when you saile from Mallacca in the months of October Nouember and December theÌ„ the streames in that part run Northwest And from the Month of Ianuary forward they run southwest that is towards the sands therfore such as trauel that way must obserue certain times and that with good aduise and as they begin to goe néere the country where the sands lie that are right against the coast of Champa betwéene them and the entery of the coast the streames run as swiftly into the south as a stone slyeth out of a mans hand But I aduise you not to goe so néere the Island Aynao that you may sée it vnlesse it be with a Northwind for with an East wind you would be
the Sunne and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead couler and so darke that you may sée it round about not casting forth any beames it signifieth calme weather The like doth the Moone In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red then it signifieth North winds when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cotton being about a finger long then it signifieth tempests and foule weather This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake wherof there are many in y e place In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other till in the end they be northeast then it is certain it will be tempest foule weather If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor in the manson of the South and Southwest winds you find an East winde with great heate and same great droppes of water it signifieth foule weather The 48. Chapter In what dayes and moneths you find tempests and foule weather in the coast of China FRom the seuenth to the eleuenth of Iune often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests From the beginning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule weather for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather the wind neuer staying in one place but running round about the compasse From the 12. of August forward in the whole Moone of September to the end of October all that time there is continually foule weather The 49. Chapter Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China THe whole moneth of Iune except it be from the seuenth to the eleuenth day there is very litle soule weather for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid you haue the windes of the monson with faire and cléere weather without stormes to saile from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly and saile till the 12. of August and all that time you are without tempests In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo you haue alwaies West windes which blowe in Iapon in the moneths of Nouember and December The 50. Chapter A briefe description of the course from Macau in China to Noua Spaigna with the scituations of the countries PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may and hauing a contrarie winde runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course but if the winde be scant whereby you may not holde your course Northeast or Northeast and by North then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land and being there you must run 200. or more miles beyond Iapon and although you holde your course North yet you néed not feare any thing kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West for it might hinder you much running as often as you can Southeast or to Loofeward as also not leauing y e course of Northeast as often as you can vntill you be vnder the height In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds which is a signe that you are farre to Seaward and if you sée them about euening that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes then looke to your selfe for it signifieth foule weather When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land then you shall loose the sight of those birdes and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées and as then knowing the land which will lie hard by whē you see it first you must runne without it and beware you run not vpon the Island called Ilha de Sedros that is the Island of Cedar trées and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse for the Island of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas béeing verie false in the course because the land if it lay by it doth come more and likelier out then it doth towardes the South The Cape of Saint Lucas is a high land and sheweth when you are hard by it as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North and if you néed fresh water within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas there is a great sandie strande where you haue a verie good Rode to anker where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side vpon the Southeast bough without the Marias which is a better course then inward all the coast is faire and good so that you may well runne along by it vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima the marks wherof are those On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward if you be forced to put into it you must vnderstand that it hath a great mouth or entrie aboue two or thrée miles wide wherin you haue no cause to feare any thing but that you sée before your eies you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea where you shall find Spanish Fishermen if you desire to saile further you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land that is to the Hauen called El Puerto del Marques which a farre off sheweth like an Island but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones which shewe like white Runderen that goe in the way you may fréely runne towardes it till you begin to sée the mouth therof and then put into it This in briefe in my opinion is the best course that you may bold in this voiage which I would likewise haue holden if I
behinde them and sailed but foure in companie that of Nuno da Silua béeing one till they came to the Baye called Baya de las Islas that is the Baye of the Islands lying vnder nine and fortie degrées where it is said that Magellanes lay and wintered there with his Shippe when hée first discouered the Straight which now holdeth his name In this Bay being the twentie of Iune they entred and there ankered so close to the land that they might send to it with a Harquebush shot and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians that were apparelled with skinnes with their legges from the knées downwarde and their armes from the elbows downward couered all the rest of their bodies béeing naked with bowes and arrowes in their handes being subtill great and well formed people and strong and high of stature where sixe of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water and before they leapt on land foure of the Indians came vnto their boate to whome the English men gaue bread and wine and when the Indians had well eaten and drunke they departed thence and going somwhat farre from them one of the Indians cryed to them and saide Magallanes Esta heminha Terra that is Magallanes this is my countrey and because the English men followed them it séemed the Indians fledde-vpward into the lande and béeing somewhat farre off they turned backe againe and with their arrowes slewe two of the English Shippers one being an English man the other a Netherlander the rest came backe againe and saued themselues in the boate wherewith they presently put off from the shoare and there they stayed till the seuentéenth of August vpon the which day they set saile running along by the coast about a mile and a halfe from the lande for there it is all faire and good ground at twentie and fiue and twentie fadome déepe and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Straightes but because the winde was contrarie they stayed till the foure and twentie of August before they entred The entrie or mouth of the Straight is about a myle broad on both sides béeing bare and flat land on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires but on the South side they saw no people stirring The foure and twentie day aforesaide they beganne to enter into the straights with an East Northeast wind This Straight may be about an hundred and ten miles long and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Straight and halfe way into it it runneth right forth without any windings or turnings and from thence about eight or ten miles towardes the end it hath some boughes and windings among the which there is one so great a hooke or running in that it séemeth to runne into the other land and there it is lesse then a mile broad from one lande to the other and from thence forwarde it runneth straight out againe And although you finde some crookings yet they are nothing to speake of The issue of the Straight lieth westward and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end then the Straight beginneth to be broader and it is all high lande to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Straight for the first eight myles after you enter is low flat land as I saide before and in the entrie of the Straight you finde the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea and after they began to saile in with the East Northeast winde being entred they passed along without any let or hinderance either of wind or weather and because the high land on both sides lay couered with snow and that all the Straight is faire and cleare they held their course a Harquebush shot in length from off the North side hauing nine and ten fadome déepe with good ground as I said before where if neede require a man may anker the hilles on both sides béeing full of trées some of the hilles and trées reaching downe to the sea side in some places hauing plaine and euen land and there they saw not any great riueâ—s but some small riuers that issued out of the Riffes and Breaches of the lande and in the country where the great Bough or crooking is on the South side they saw certaine Indian Fishermen in their Canoas or Scutes being such as they sawe first on the North side but more people they saw not on the South side Beeing out of the Straight on the other side béeing vpon the sixt of September of the aforesaide yeere they held their course Northwest for the space of thrée dayes and the third day they had a northeast winde that by force draue them West Southwest which course they helde for the space of ten or twelue dayes with fewe sailes vp and because the winde began to be verie great they tooke in all their sailes and lay driuing till the last of September The foure and twentie day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of their pinnace which was about an hundred tunne then againe they hoised saile because they came better holding their course Northeast for the space of seuen dayes and at the end of the said seuen dayes they had the sight of certaine Islands which they made towards for to anker but the weather would not permit them and béeing there the winde fell Northwest whereby they sailed West Southwest The next day they lost the sight of another of their companie which ship was about three hundred and sixtie tunnes for it was very foule weather so that in the end the Admirals shippe was left alone for the Ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Baye where they wintered before they entred into the Straights and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen fiftie degrees where they entred into a Hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great peece from the land at twentie fadome deepe where they staied thrée or foure dayes and the winde comming Southward they hoysed anker holding their course Northward for the space of two dayes and then they espied a small vnhabited Island where béeing arriued they stroke sayles and hoised out their boat and there they tooke many birds and Sea wolues The next day they set saile againe holding their course North Northeast and North to â—nother Island lying fiue or six myles from the firme lande on the North side of the Straight where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the lande at twelue fadome water This Island is small and lowe lande and full of Indians the Island being altogither built and inhabited by them where they hoysed out their boate wherein the Admirall and twelue English men were entred going to fetch fresh water and to séeke for victuals and beeing landed vpon the Island the Indians in exchange of other things brought two Spanish shéepe and a little Mais
much different and from the matter taken in hand Touching the orientall parts neuerthelesse because it is vnknowne to our countrimen as also commonly sailed by the Portingales and Spaniards whose voyages and trauels I haue herein onely set downe it will not bee out of the matter but rather very necessary to be ioyned therevnto and as I thinke will bee wel accepted and esteemed off insomuch as that at this time our countrey men doe vse to Trafficke and trauell into those countries hoping it will bee an occasion of further increasing and augmenting of their trauels to the honour praise and glory of the Gospell of Christ and all Christian Princes and to the entiching and welfare of the Low countries The 65. Chapter The Nauigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Hauens of Brasilia to the Riuer called Rio de la Plata with the situation thereof SAyling from Cabo Verde that is the greene point to Brasilia you must saile south southeast Southeast and Southeast by South and being vnder fiue or sixe degrées or wheresoeuer you bee you shall take your degrées on the Southside and lessen them as much as you can and you must remember that as soone as you haue the generall winde blowing from the South-east then you shall runne Southwest and West Southwest and if the winde bee South and Southwest you must runne South-east but not too farre for it helpeth you not for that the more you kéepe that course the more way you loose and you shall vse all the meanes you can not to runne vnder the coast of Guinea nearer then sixtie or seuentye fadome from the Sandes called Os Baixos de Sant Anna for the winde will helpe you in such manner that you may sayle towards the Point of Brasilia And if with this course you will sayle to Pernanbuco It being from the Moneth of October forward and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de Noronha being vnder eight eight degrées and ½ You must runne West towards the Lande and if you sée Lande vnder eight degrées they will bee white downes and then you are on the North-side from whence you shall put to the South that is from October forward for as then the Northeast and east Northeast winds doe blowe and if you bee vnder the degrées aforesaid you shall see the said downes and when you see the end of them on the South-side and from thence not séeing any more then you are by Capigâ—aramirini and from thence to Pernanbuco are fiue or sixe myles And so if you bee vnder eight degrées and a halfe then you shall sée a flat Lande till you bee at tenne and twelue fadome déepe and the Lande on the Sea side will bee euen bare which is called Capiragua when you are East and West with this Lande being the Countrey whereof I speake at twelue fadome déepe it beeing in the Moneths of October or after Februarye then you néede not feare any thing but take héed you put not southwards for you must take héede of the Cape of S. Augustine and Northward you shal sée another point called A Punta d Olynda where the Towne of Olynda lieth and the coast of the same North Point is sailed North and South If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine then you shall sée a Hill inward to the land which sheweth like the backe of a Cammell on the Southside hauing thrée Houels along by the Sea side and the coast will stretch North-east and Southwest From this point of S. Augustine to the towne of Olynda Northward are twelue miles This point lyeth vnder 8 degrées and ½ and Olynda lyeth vnder 8. degrées and â…“ Pernanbuco vnder eight degrées this voyage is thus to bee sayled when you set sayle from Lisbon in the Moneths of October and Nouember But when you saile from Lisbon in February or March then you shall looke for land vnder nine degrées for from y e month of March forward then the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow and if you chance to bee by the land vnder the height aforesaid you néede not feare any thing but shall hold your course at seuentéene and eightéene fadome for it is faire and cléere and you haue nothing daungerous but the riffes lying close by the land whereon you sée the water breake running Northward if you finde certaine downes along by the sea side then feare not to run northward for therby you shal sée the point of S. Augustine This point lieth on the sea side being euen stéepe land shewing like the muzzell of a Whale in the toppe hauing a round Hill compassed with Trées and being at the depth aforesaid close by the Land you shall sée a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus From this Island to Cape S. Augustine are fiue or sixe miles and lyeth vnder 8 degrées ¾ The 57. chapter The course and Nauigation to the Hauen called A Bahia de todos os Santos or of all Saints in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to sayle to the Bahia de todos os Santos that is the bay of all Saints then obserue the course aforesaied taking the times of the yeare From the Month of March forward and from October as I said before This Bay of all Saints lyeth vnder thirteene degrées and being from October forward then you shall looke for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½ and being in sight thereof which will bee white sandy strands which shew like linnen that lieth too white then you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast vntill you be at the end of the said strands where you shall sée an Island lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Hauen called Tapoon From thence you runne along the coast West and West and South And comming to this Bay from the Month of March forward then you must not passe aboue 13 degrées and 1 â— Southward and when you are in sight of Land if it be not the aforesaid white strand then you shall vse all the means you can to run Northward and when you sée the sandye strand at 12 degrées and ½ Then you shall sée a hill standing along by the seaside and if you chance to be so néere the lande that you can find no meanes to get off from it then you shall know the Land well for on the sea side you shall sée a round houel called O Morro de san Paulo from the which houell to the bay are twelue myles along by this houell on the northwest side there is a very great riuer called Tinhare which is very good to put into if néed be and is six and seuen fadome déep and when you are at the aforesaid Point vnder 13 degrées ½ then put not to the Lande for it hath a créeke that is very dangerous And if you desire to saile from the Bay of
all Saints to Pernanbuco or to Portingale then hold your course Eastward and if the wind serue you hold East and East and by North for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrées for if you be vnder 11 degrées you wil fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Barâ—ys that is the Créeke of emptying of vessels and likewise when you come from Portingall hauing sight of land at eleuen degrées then put not towards it to shorten your way but rather holde your course Southward from it From this Bay of all Saints to Pernanbuco is a hundred miles and you runne along the coast northeast and southwest From thence to the Riuer Rio dos Ilhas or the riuer of Islands the coast runneth Southwest and Northeast and Southwest and by West and Northeast and by East The 58. Chapter The course or Nauigation to the riuer Rio dos Ilhas that is the riuer of the Islands in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the riuer of the Islands you must vnderstand that the Islands lie vnder 14. degrées and ¾ séeking to finde them from the moneth of March forward then you shall run to the height of 15. degrées and ½ and although you be vnder 15. degrées and 2 â— you néede not feare and séeing the land vnder these degrées then you shall see certaine high hilles called As Serras dos Aymores when you sée those hilles then you shall come along the coast Northwarde not fearing any thing for from thence Northward there are no shallows As soone as you sée the Ilands for there are no other then on the same coast you shall sée a rouÌ„d hill standing along by the Sea side on the North side whereof you put into the Riuer and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands kéeping from them and there by the said Islandes you may anker and if you be in that country when the Northeast winds doe blow then looke for land vnder 14. degrées and if you see a flat land then it is the Island called Camamuâ— by the which you shall run southward and being at the end of the flatte land then you shall sée a high land along by the sea side like the other aforesaid all along by the sea side In the place where this lande beginneth to shew high there lieth a small riuer called Rio das Contas that is the riuer of Beads but it is not to be entered and hath a white harde stone for a marke From thence to the Islands are 9. miles Southward and comming where the aforesaid high land endeth then you shall finde a great Créeke and being West Southwest you shall see another high land at the foot whereof which is almost in the middle way to the créeke you shall see certaine white houses which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Sugar is prepared and being there you shal presently see the Islands The 59. chapter How to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro that is the sure Hauen lying in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro in the time of the Southeast windes which is in March and so forward you shall not put higher then to 16. degrées ½ for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea and when you saile East West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times being by the land that you sée a long high hill like a sharpe point which is called Monte Pasqual froÌ„ thence you shall run Northward west the same hill is westward from you then you must hold towards the land yet with good regard and foresight And when you sée the land and that you perceiue a round Houell then Southward from the saide Houell you shall see a Hill with a great strand on the North side whereof lyeth the Hauen of Porto Seguro and running along by the coast aboue in the lande you find the towne of Porto Seguro This height is a white stonie rocke and on the North side of this stonie rocke there is a great vally when you are East and west with this stonie rocke then Northward you shall sée the water breake which is vpon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea on the South side whereof you are right ouer against the towne of Porto Seguro If you begin this voyage when the winds are northeast come to 15. degrees and â…” not seeing any hills then leaue not running along the coast when you are vnder 15. degrées the first high land you shall sée will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast if vnder that height you see a riuer then make not towardes the land for there it hath certaine dangerous shallowes called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio from thence Southward lyeth Porto Seguro and passing along the coast and séeing the water breake vpon the other sand lying two miles further inward to sea then you shall passe by it kéeping to seaward from it and when you are at the end thereof then the towne will be Westward from you you may well put to it alwaies hauing a care how you goe and anker vnder the height aforesaid Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro then you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands lying by the riuer called Rio Grande that is the great Riuer and when you are past Rio Grande then make towards the land againe to know it as aforesaid The 60. Chapter How to saile to the Hauen called Bahia dâ— Espirito Santo that is the Bay of the Holy Ghost lying in the coast of Brasilia SAiling to the hauen of Spirito Santo béeing past the Sandes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos vnder 19. degrées and ½ then you shall sée lande at 20. degrées for in this coast you haue no monsons or courses of certaine winds If you chance to sée land at 19. degrées and ½ and that it bée on the Northwest side from you being flat land then you are on the North side of the Hauen of Spirito Santo which is the land lying aboue Criquare and aboue y e riuer called Rio Dolce that is the riuer of Swéet or fresh water you shall holde your course along by the land vntill the land beginneth to rise hauing some Hilles but trust not to the first that you shall sée but you shall sée a high round hill which lyeth along by the sea side and is called La Sierra de Mestre Aluaro And when you come to this Hill on the North side you shall sée a riuer called Rio dos Reis Magos that is the riuer of the thrée Kings of Cullen and on the South side then the mouth of the Baye will presently
good aire without séeing the houses that stand vpon the same The most part of the land of the Riuer of good aire is a thicke land like a downe about thrée miles along by the sea side as soone as you sée this lande then you must make right towards the houses yet somwhat more towards the south side where there is a place where the shippes anker but if you desire to runne on the North side then you shall take your course from the Island las Flores or from Santa Horodio about a mile and a halfe from the land at three and ½ or foure fadome to the Islands of Saint Gabriel which are thrée smal Islands but they haue no good Rode and if you chance to anker there goe not a shore but verie warily because the inhabitants haue warres with the Spaniards and Portingales all along the riuer but the best course is on the South side from the fresh water inwards The 63. Chapter How to saile from the Island La Gomera one of the Islands of Canaria to the Antillas or sore Islandes of the Spanish Indies and from thence to the coast of the Firme land to Cartagena and Nombre de Dios as also the course from thence to the Hauana and the channell thereof and so to the Flemiâ—h Islands and from thence to Spaiâ—ne with the scituation of the places SAyling from the Island La Gomera to the Island called La Desseada that is the Desired Island being one of the Islandes of the Spanish Indies then you must holde your course South for the space of a mealetide so to get out of the calme from thence you must runne West Southwest till you be vnder 20. or 22. degrées and beeing there you must runne West and West and by South till you come vnder fifteene degrées and 1 â— which is the height of the Island La Desseada If when you are there you haue a West winde then run Southwest as farre as you thinke good thereby to get againe vnder fifteene degrées and ½ running on the wether side West Northwest to bring all to one point whereby you shall find helpe from North and South East and West because you are close by the lande holding your course West and west and by north because the compasse windeth a strike into the Northwest with the which course you shall see the Island la Desseada This Island lieth East and West and sheweth like a Gallie with her tilt vp on the east side it is a low land in forme like a bore-sprit of a shippe or galley from the West side it is high land shewing like the sterne of a gally and on the South side it sheweth like halfe an Island the hinder part thereof being like a horse shoe The Island called Maâ—galante is a low and flat land and reacheth East West being full of trées on the East side beeing highest and on the South side hauing certaine white downes on the West side about halfe a mile from the Island it hath a blacke shining cliffe This Island lyeth full vnder fifteene degrees The Island la Dominica is a great Island and reacheth Northwest and southeast when you sée it first beeing on the outside therof it sheweth like 2. Islands by reason of a great opening it hath in the middle but when you are close by it then you perceiue it to be all one Island it is full of hils on the Southeast side a lowe land hauing a small or thin point of land with a houell vpon it on the North-west side it is thicke high Land hauing a Hill that seemeth to bee seperated and to stand alone by it selfe although it is not alone Vpon this hil there is a rock which sheweth like a clock house without the aforesaid thicke high Land there is a Rocke or cliffe which runneth off froÌ„ y e thick point This Island lyeth vnder 15. degrées ½ The Islands called Los Santos are four Islands which are not very high lying in Triangle Betweene these Islands and the Island La Dominica there runneth a good channell to passe through Sayling from the Island La Dominica to the Point of Coquibocoa lying from the Firme Lande you shall holde your course West and West and by South vntill you bee by the point and if you sée it not then runne southwestward towards it or Southward vntill you sée it This Point of Coquibocoa is a low Land running into Seaward and within the lande it hath a rowe of Hilles which are called the Oile Hils which stretch along by Veuansuela where they end which vpon the coast of the Firme land From this Point you runne along the coast to the Point called Cabo de Vela and betwéene these two Points there are two hauens wherof one is called Bahya Honda that is the deepe Bay This lieth on the East side and on both sides where the Sea beateth it hath downes The other Hauen lying on the West side within it hath a high Land or Hill which reacheth North and South In both these Hauens you may enter with Ships of two hundred tunnes All this coast to Cabo de la Vela is cleare and safe The point Cabo de la Vela is a high land like a suger loafe and about half a mile from it there is a cliffe which sheweth like a ship vnder saile and therefore this Point is called Cabo de la Vela that is the point of the saile This Cliffe lieth Northeast and Southwest with y e Point aforesaid it is said you may well passe betwéene it and the lande and if you depart from the saied Point to saile to the Cliffe and Point called Cabo de la aguia that is the Point of the Néedle then you shall runne West South-west by the which course you shall see it They are foure Cliffes together which shewe in forme like a Horse shooe and the Lande that is right against it is a high Land Beeing inward to the Lande some what higher which is called Las Sierras Neuadas that is the Snowe Hils when these hils are Southward from you then you are right against the foure cliffes And comming to the beginning of the foure Cliffes hauing past the Riuer De Palomina lying by the last Cliffe then you shall see the Cabo de La aguia This Cape is a still Lande descending downeward to the Sea side but not very high on the toppe hauing a Dale which sheweth like a saddle It hath likewise on the out side close by it thrée blacke shining Cliffes which the water dooth almost flowe ouer they lye with the Cape aforesaid North and South The saied Cape is bare sheweth blackish and shining All this coast reacheth almost East and West From Cabo de Sancta Marta forward you must runne along by the coast alwaies looking to your course because of the Billowes and streames that come from the Lande which oftentimes fal vpon you When you discouer the land of Charthagena you shall sée two Cliffes
in the middle it hath thrée houels whereof that in y e middle is the greatest From this Island De Pinos to Cabo de Corrientes you must runne West Northwest by the which course you shall sée it This point on the sea side is a Lande running downeward vpon it hauing some palme Trées and on the West side a sandy strand where there is a Roade where you may lye Vpon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill which stretcheth further out theÌ„ all other points when from thence you put in you shall sée on the Lande righter ouer you a Lake of fresh water where if néede bee you may supply your want To saile from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Beeing two or thrée miles to Sea-ward you must runne West Northwest From the Island De Pinos to Cabo de S. Anton there are two great créekes one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico behind the Land inward you shall sée certaine Hils called Las Sierras Guaniguanico Cape de S. Anton is a long Point full of trées with some bushes with sandye strandes and from it there runneth a bank or sand for the space of 4. miles northwestward Sayling from the Point of S. Anton to new Spaigne in winter time y t is from August to March then you must hold your course without y e Islands and Cliffes called Las Alactanes west northwestward with y t which course hauing sailed 60. or 70. miles you shall find ground which shal be of shels or great saÌ„d This you shal find til you be vnder 24. degrées if you find ground at lesse then 40. fadome sailing with the same course then hold your course north northwest northwest by west when therewith you begin to increase in depth then turn againe to your first course of northwest and wheÌ„ you begin to lose land then for the space of 20. miles you must saile West wherwith you shall be north south with the Island Bermeia FroÌ„ thence you must saile southwest till you be vnder 20. degrées if you sée not land you shall run west for at that time it is not good to goe beneath y e heigth Vnder this height course you shal sée La torre Blanca y t is the white tower if you chance to discouer y e Riuer of S. Petro S. Paulo then beyond y e riuer you shal sée certaine gréene hils but not very high If you finde 35. fadome déepe with muddie ground with shelles in some places then from thence you shall hold your course South and South and by East vntill you bée right against the fieldes of Almeria if you come out of the Sea you shall séeke ground lower and finding 30. or 40. fadome with some muddy ground then you are East and West with the riuer of Almeria about seuen miles from the land and if in the Southwest you sée the hilles called las Sierras del Papalo and that they run one within the other then you are Northeast and Southwest from them From thence you shall bolde your course South and South and by West whereby the hilles of Papalo will begin to shew themselues which wil make two round hilles you shall likewise see Las Sierras de Calaquote which are certaine reddish hilles This rowe of Hilles commeth out to the sea side If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa that is the rich towne thrée miles from the land you shall finde 80. and 90. fadome deepe muddy ground The riuer of S. Peter and S. Paul lyeth vnder 21. degrées and los Campos d'Almeria that is the fields of Almeria vnder 20. degrées Villa Risa la Vieya that is olde Villa Risa lyeth vnder 19. degrees and 2 â— Villa Risa la Vieya is certaine hils whereof the one end reach vnto the Sea side they are not very high but make many openings or rents like the hilles of Abano called Organs stretching North and South if you chaunce to come out of the Sea and should see the Hilles of Villa Risa then you shoulde see that they stretch North and South and the hils of S. Martyn stretch East and West you may know them another way which is that if you make Westward towards them comming close to them they will shew to be lower then the Hils of S. Martyn which are greater and higher as you passe along the Sea coast by them and béeing thrée myles to Sea-ward from Villa Risa you shall find ground which by S. Martins you shall not find although you were but halfe a myle from them Lastly although you should haue no knowledge of Lande yet you might knowe it by the markes aforesaid To Léeward from Villa Risa lieth a Cliffe called N. Bernards which is in forme like a suger loafe From Villa Risa la Vieya or out of Villa Risa to S. Iohn de Luz you shall hold your course South and South and by East and you shal find ground of shels muddy ground at thirty fadome towards the Land By the Riuer of Vera Crus you shall find sandye ground and in some places muddye ground If you were without then you must knowe that from S. Christopher to S. Iohn de Luz it is all sandye strandes and being East and west with the point called Punta Gordâ— then you are North and South with the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and being North-east and South-west with the Island at lesse then forty fadome déepe towards the Land then you shall haue reddish ground and in some places shels and from forty fadomes forward white muddy ground If you come out of the sea and desire to know if you bee East and West with the Island then you must marke a high houell that runneth out from the hils of Vera Crus And when you are East and west with this Houell so are you likewise East and West with the Island you must likewise vnderstande that when the Hill of Sierra Neuada y t is the snowy hill lieth West west and by south from you then are you likewise east and west with the Island aforesaid then you shall presently sée the point called AntoÌ„ Niquardo as also Mendano Montuoso or the high Houell aforesaid and you shal likewise sée the sea-coast Medelâ—n and on the North-west side the Point of Punta Gorda if you desire with a North wind to be in the hauen then run at 18 20 fadome déepe whereby you shal passe to loofeward through the chanell going close to the bulwark yet shunning it you shall anker on the loofe side for to Léeward it hath no great depth If you depart from the Point of S. Anton in summer time towards new Spain then you must hold your course westward for
The 67. Chapter The course right marke of the nauigatioÌ„ from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to the riuer of Coâ—go in Angola southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia with the situation of the countries SAyling from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues which lyeth full vnder 1. deg on the south side of the Equinoctial line in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia the coast froÌ„ thence forward stretcheth northwest southeast being a flat long land you haue the depthes of 10. and 9. fadome déepe water towards the land being all ground like sand of sand lopers all through the country except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina where you haue great sand some stones if you will make any hast being vpon this coast and voyage then euery night you must anker till you haue the Terreintios which are the winds blowing from off the land holding your course in that manner till you haue the Viracoins which are y e winds out of the sea therwith again to make towards the land vntil it be calme or that y e are at 10. fadom déep theÌ„ you must anker til the comming of the land winds which come dayly at their times as aforesaid if the streames run w t the wind theÌ„ you may wind from the one bough to the other holding to léeward as aforesaid the coniunction or time wheÌ„ the streames run with the winds is with a new Moone about 2. dayes before or after and 3. dayes before it is ful if you desire to run from one bough to the other y t must rule your selfe in such maÌ„ner that you be euery morning by the coast to get before the winds that as then blow off the land the marks of the long land are these it hath certain great thicke houels called As Sierras de santo Espirito that is the hils of the holy Ghost and somwhat further you haue 2 other houels which are very easy to be knowne in this country you haue muddy ground further forward you shal sée a high hill within the créek called Palmella for that it is like to Palmela the which lyeth betweene Lisbon and Setuval you shal likewise sée somewhat further in the créeke a land which stretcheth North south as you passe along by it close by the strand it hath a thicke flat houel which is called Cascars because it is like Cascais by Lisbon you must vnderstand that before you hoyse vp anker in that countrie you must let fal your sayles to see if the shippe may get out and if it cannot get out then lie still till you haue the Viracoins that blow out of the sea for in those countries the streames runne very stronglie out of the riuer of Congo into the sea wherby the shippe can hardlie get out when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirinâ—a that is the woods of Palme trees then let your best anker fall for the groundes in this crosse way is stiffe muddy ground whereby the ankers oftentimes will hardly holde fast but ship out againe And when you are in the riuer of Congo being at the depth of 30. or 40 fadome then you shall loofe the ground then you shall turne your howreglasse and when it is runne out then cast out your lead and you shall find 10 or 12 fadome water on the other side of the riuer of Congo and you shal sayle about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land for otherwise you could not get into the riuer by meanes of the great force of the streames wherby many men are much troubled as being the greatest stroÌ„gest streams that are found in any place and run aboue 12. miles into the sea Sayling from Congo to Angola in maner aforesaid and being 35. miles on your way you shal sée a high hill by the which ther lieth an IlaÌ„d called A Ilha de Loanda but if you be not very close by y e laÌ„d you shal not sée the Iland for it is very low flat if you chance to be by the land at 6. 7. deg then you shal be at the mouth of the riuer of Congo and 10. myles to seaward from it you shal sée many tokens signes thereof as great streames thicke réeds herbs with many cutle bones and wheÌ„ you are by the land at 7. 8. degr ½ then you shall sée a flat land with trées al ouer it and in this country in euery place at 18. 20. fadome you shal haue good ground from 2. to two miles and a halfe from the land on the sea side you haue white downes which shew like sandy strandes the ground by it is sandy with some stones that is from 7. to 8. deg and you must vnderstand that the land from 5 deg southwarde is altogether high all the ground being muddy and a mile from it it is 30. and 35 fadom deepe good ground being a cleare and faire coast with cause of feare of more then is séen before your dayes that is from 7 to 9 deg and the land from 8. degrees southward is verie high if you come out of the sea to the land vnder 7. degr and ½ then you shal sée 7. hils or Houels which stretch Northwest and southeast called As sete serras that is the 7. hils if you come to the land vnder 8. degr ¼ then you shall see a hie land lying eastwarde from you this point in shew hath the forme of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spaine comming to the land not full vnder 9 degrées then north or northeast you shal sée the aforesaid point hauing vnder it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea but you need not feare them for it is faire and cleare and therefore you may fréely go neere the land theÌ„ better to know it being vnder the hight aforesaid of scarce 9 deg then eastwarde to land you shal see a round hil called monte Pasqual when the point aforesaid is northeast from you then the other land shall stretch southwest which is the furthest land lying without the Iland of Loanda the land that lyeth southwarde from you is a greate thicke land at the foot thereof hauing some red and white downes with certaine small trees vppon it which show like figge trees of Algaruen in Spaine now to runne within y e land of Loâ—ndâ— you must hold your course right vpon the land that lyeth southward so you may go close coâ—t about half a mile froÌ„ it being there southwestward from the Iland you shal discouer the Iland which is very flat and of white sand whereby you can hardlie see it but when you are close by it that is the hauen of Angola This Iland of Loanda is like an Iland called A Ilha das Caruns lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Maria in the land of Algaruen vpon the coast
Ryse such like are kept for those which are sicke yet they get but little thereof for that the officers kéepe it for themselues and spend it at their pleasures not letting much goe out of their fingers as for the dressing of their meate wood pots and pans euery man must make his owne prouision besides all this there is a Clarke and steward for the Kings souldiers that haue their parts by themselues as the saylers haue This is the order and manner of theyr voyage when they sayle vnto the Indies but when they returne againe they haue no more but each man a portion of Bisket and water vntill they come to the Cape de Bona Esperance and from thence home they must make their own prouisions The souldiers that are passengers haue nothing els but frée passage that is roome for a chest vnder hatches and a place for their bed in the or loope and may not come away without the Viceroyes passeport and yet they must haue béene fiue yeres souldiers in the Indies before they can haue licence but the slaues must pay fraught for their bodies custome to the King as in our voyage home againe we will at large declare The 15. of Aprill we espied the Iland of Madera and Porto Sancto where the ships vse to seperate themselues each ship kéeping on his course that they may get before each other into India for their most commodities and to dispatch the sooner whereby in the night and by tides they leaue each others company each following his owne way The 24. of Aprill we fell vpon the coaste of Guinea which beginneth at nine degrées and stretcheth vntill wee come vnder the Equinoctiall where wee haue much thunder lightning and many showers of raine with stormes of wind which passe swiftly ouer yet fall with such force that at euery shower we are forced to strike sayle let the maine yeard fall to the middle of the mast many times cleane down sometimes ten or twelue times eueryday there wee finde a most extreame heate so that all the water in the ship stinketh whereby men are forced to stop their noses when they drinke but when wee are past the Equinoctiall it is good againe the nearer wee are vnto the land the more it stormeth raineth thundreth and calmeth so that most commonly the shippes are at the least two monthes before they can passe the line Then they finde a winde which they name the generall winde and it is a South east winde but it is a side wind and we must alway lie side waies in the wind almost vntill wee come to the cape de Bona Speranza and because that vpon the coast of Brasillia about 18. degrées on the south side lieth great slakes or shallowes which the Portingales call Abraâ—hos that reach 70. miles into the sea on the right side to passe them the ships hold vp most vnto the coast of Guinea and so passe the said Flattes otherwise if they fall too low and keepe inwardes they are constrained to turne againe vnto Portingale and many times in danger to be lost as it hapned to our Admirall Saint Phillip which in the yeare 1582. fell by night vpon the Flats and was in great danger to be lost yet recouered againe sayled backe to Portingale and now this yeare to shunne the Flats shee kept so neare the coast of Guinea that by meanes of the great calmes and raynes shee was forced to driue vp and downe two months together before shee could passe the line came two months after the other ships into India Therefore men must take heed and kéepe themselues from comming too neare the coast to shun the calmes and stormes and also not to hold too farre of thereby to passe the Flats shallowes wherein consisteth the whole Indian Voyage The 15. of May being about fiftie miles beyond the Equinoctiall line Northwardes we espied a French ship which put vs all in great feare by reason that most of our men were sicke as it commonly hapneth in those countries through the excéeding heate further they are for the most part such as neuer haue beene at Sea before that time so that they are not able to do much yet we discharged certaine great shot at him wherewith he left vs after he had played with vs for a smal time and presently lost the sight of him wherewith our men were in better comfort The same day about euening wee discried a great shipâ— which wee iudged to bee of our Fleet as after wee perceiued for it made towards vs to speake with vs and it was the Saint Francisco wherewith wee were glad The â—6 of May wee passed the Equinoctiall line which runneth through the middle of the Iland of Saint Thomas by the coast of Guinea and then wee began to sée the south star and to loose the north star and founde the sunne at twelue of the clocke at noone to be in the north and after that wee had a south east wind called a general wind which in those partes bloweth all the yeare through The 29. of May being Whitsonday the ships of an ancient custome doe vse to chuse an Emperour among themselues and to change all the officers in the ship and to hold a great feast which continueth thrée or foure dayes together which wee obseruing chose an Emperour and being at our banket by meanes of certaine words that passed out of some of their mouthes there fell great strife and contention among vs which procéeded so farre that the tables were throwne downe and lay on the ground and at the least a hundred rapiers drawne without respecting the Captaine or any other for he lay vnder foote and they trod vpon him and had killed each other and thereby had cast the ship away if the Archbishop had not come out of his chaÌ„ber among them willing them to cease wherwith they stayed their hands who presently commaunded euery man on paine of death that all their Rapiers Poynyardes and other weapons should bee brought into his chamber which was done whereby all thinges were pacified the first and principall beginners being punished layd in irons by which meanes they were quiet The 12. of Iune we passed beyond the afore said Flats and shallowes of Brasillia whereof all our men were excéeding glad for thereby we were assured that we should not for that time put backe to Portingale againe as many doe and then the generall wind serued vs vntill wee came to the riuer of Rio de Plata where wee got before the wind to the cape de Bona Speranza The 20. of the same month the S. Fransiscus that so long had kept vs coÌ„pany was againe out of sight and the eleauenth of Iuly after our Master iudged vs to bee about 5â— miles from the cape de Bona Speranza wherefore he was desired by the Archbishop to kéepe in with the land that wee might sée the Cape It was then mistie weather so that as we
finished and standeth right against the first of the vnhabited little Ilands where the ships must come in and is one of the best and strongest built of all the Castles throughout the whole Indies yet haue they but small store of ordinance or munition as also not any souldiers more then the Captaine and his men that dwel therin But when occasion serueth the married Portingales that dwell in the Iland which are about 40. or 50. at the most are all bound to kéepe the Castle for that the Iland hath no other defence then onely that Castle the rest lieth open and is a flat sand Round about within the Castle are certaine whollie accustomed therunto as if they were Horses Moyles or Asses I haue spoken with men that came from thence and haue séen them and affirme it for a truth But returning to our matter of the gouernmement and vsage of the Portingales and their Captaine I say that the Captaine maketh the commoditie of his place within thrée yeares space that hee remaineth there which amounteth to the value of 300. thousand Duckets that is nine tunnes of golde as while we remained there the Captaine named Nuno Velio Perena himselfe shewed vs and it is most in gold that commeth from Sofala Monomotapa as I said before from Mossambique they carrie into India Gold Ambergris Eben wood and Iuorie and many slaues both men and women which are carried thether because they are the strongest Moores in all the East couÌ„tries to doe their filthiest and hardest labor wherein they onely vse them They sayle from thence into India but once euery year in the month of August till half September because that throughout the whole countries of India they must sayle with Monssoyns that is with the tides of the year which they name by the windes which blow certaine monthes in the yeare whereby they make their account to goe and come from the one place to the other the time that men may commonly sayle betwéene Mossambique and India is 30. dayes little more or lesse and then they stay in India till the month of Aprill when the winde or Monssoyn commeth againe to serue them for Mossambique so that euery yeare once there goeth and commeth one shippe for the Captaine that carrieth and bringeth his marchandise and no man may traffique from thence into India but only those that dwel and are married in Mossambique for that such as are vnmarried may not stay there by speciall priuiledge from the King of Portingall graunted vnto those that inhabite there to the end the Island should be peopled and therby kept and maintained Behind Mossambique lyeth the countrey of Prester Iohn which is called by them the countrey of Abexines wherevpon the coast of Mossambique vnto the red sea is commonly called the coast of Abex and diuers men of Prester Iohns land do send men of that country some being slaues and others tree into India which serue for Saylors in the Portingalles shippes that traffique in those countries froÌ„ place to place whose pictures counterfets as also their religioÌ„ maner of liuing and customes doeth hereafter follow in the pictures of India This coast of Abex is also by the Portingalles called the coast of Melinde because that vpon the same coast lyeth a towne and a Kingdome of that name which was the first towne and Kingdome that in the Portingals first discouerie of those countries did receiue them peaceably without treason or deceit and so to this day doth yet continue Wee stayed at Mossambique for the space of 15. dayes to prouide fresh water and victuails for the supplying of our wants in the which time diuers of our men fel sicke and died by reason of the vnaccustomed ayre of the place which of it selfe is an vnholsome land and an euill aire by meanes of the great and vnmeasurable heat The 20. of August wee set saile with all our companie that is our foure shippes of one fléete that came from Portingall and a shippe of the Captaines of Mossambique whose thrée yeares were then finished his name was Don Pedro de Castro in whose place the aforesaide Nuno Velio Pereira was then come The said Captain Don Pedro returned w t his wife family again into India for that the Kinges commandement and ordinance is that after the expiration of their thrée yeares office they must yet stay thrée years more in India at the commandement of the Vice Roy of India in the kings seruice at their owne charges before they must returne into Portingall vnlesse they bring a speciall patent from the King that after they haue continued thrée yeares in their office they may returne into Portingal againe which is very seldome séene vnlesse it be by speciall fauour and likewise no man may trauell out of India vnlesse hee haue the Vice Royes Pasport and without it they are not suffred to passe for it is very narrowly looked into The 24. of August in the morning wée descryed two Islandes which are called Insula de Comora and Insula de Don Ian de Castro The Islande Comora lyeth distant from Mossambique 60. miles Northwardes vnder 11. degrées on the South side is a very high land so high that in a whole dayes saile with a good winde wee could not lose the sight therof the same day the shippes seperated themselues againe according to the ancient manner for the occasions aforesaid The third of September we once againe passed the Equinoctiall line which runneth betwéene Melinde and Braua townes lying vppon the coast of Abex and the line is froÌ„ Mossambique Northwards 230. miles and from the line to the Cape de Quardafum are 190. miles and lyeth vnder 12. degrées on the North side of the Equinoctiall vpon this coast betwéene Mossambique and the Cape de Guardafum lyeth these townes Quiloa in time past called Rapta Mombassa which is a towne situate in a little Island of the same name which sheweth a farre off to be high sandie downes and hath a hauen with two fortes to defende it Melinde Pate Braua and Magadoxo each being a kingdome of it selfe holding the lawe of Mahomet the people are somewhat of a sallower colour then those of Mossambique with shining hayre gouerning their Citties after the manner of the Arabians and other Mahometanes This corner or Cape of Guardafum is the ende of the coast of Abex or Melinde and by this cape East Northeast 20. miles within the Sea lyeth the rich Island called Socotora where they find Aloes which taketh the name of the Islande being called Aloe Socotorina and is the verie best being close and fast and from thence is it carried and conueyed into al places By this corner and Island beginneth the mouth or enterance of the â—streito de Mecka for that within the same vpon the coast of Arabia lyeth the citie of Mecka where the body of Mahomet hangeth in the ayre in an iron chest vnder a sky made of Adamant stone which is greatly sought vnto
some after towards Portingall with whom my brother went because of his office in the shippe and I stayed with my maister in India certaine yeares to sée and learne the maners and customes of the said lands people fruites wares and merchandises with other thinges which when time serueth I wil in truth set downe as I my selfe for the most parte haue séene it with mine eyes and of credible persons both Indians and other inhabiters in those Countries learned and required to know as also the report and fame thereof is nowe sufficiently spread abroade throughout the world by diuers of our neighbour countries and landes which traffique and deale with them namely our countrey the East Countries England Fraunce c. which likewise are founde and knowne by the Portingalles themselues which dayly trafficke thither But before I beginne to describe Goa and the Indies concerning their manners traffiques fruites wares and other thinges the better to vnderstande the situation of the Countrey and of the coasts lying on the East side to the last and highest part of the borders of China which the Portingales haue trauelled and discouered together with their Ilandes I will first set downe a briefe note of the Orientall coastes beginning at the redde or the Arabian sea from the towne of Aden to Chinae and then the description of the coastes before named Chapter 5. The description of the coast of Arabia Felix or the red Sea to the Iland and fortresse of Ormus ADen is the strongest and fairest towne of Arabia Felix situate in a valley compassed about vpon the one side with strong mines on the other side with high mountaines there are in it fiue Castles laden with Ordinance and a continuall Garrison kept therein because of the great number of shippes that sayle before it the Towne hath about 6000. houses in it where the Indians Persians Aethiopians and Turkes doe trafique and because the Sunne is so extreame hotte in the daye time they make most of their bargaines by night About a stones cast from the towne there is a hill with a great Castle standing thereon wherein the Gouernor dwelleth In times past this towne stoode vpon the firme land but nowe by the labour industrie of man they haue made it an Iland Aden lieth on the North side at the entrie of the red Sea on the coast of Arabia Felix or fruitfull Arabia and reacheth 60. miles more inwards then the corner or Cape de Guardafum the farthest part or corner of Abex or Melinde as I said before but the coast of Arabia which taketh the beginning from Aden is much more inwarde Aden lieth vnder 13. degrées on the North side and from thence the coast lyeth Northeast and by East till you come to Cape de Rosalgate which lyeth vnder 22. degrées and is the further corner of the lande of Arabia Felix lying on the Indian Sea which is distant from Aden 240. miles the towne of Aden standeth by the hill called Darsira which men affirme to bee onely Cliffes of hard stones and red Marble where it neuer rayneth The people of this coast of Arabia are tawnie of colour almost like those of the coast of Abex or Melinde frō that Countrie they bring great numbers of good horses into India and also Frankensence Mirhe Balsam Balsam woode and fruite and some Manna with other swéete wares and Spices they hold the law of Mahomet after the Persians manner From the Cape of Rosalgate inwardes following the coast North-west to the Cape de Moncado in times past named Albora are 70. miles This point lyeth right against the Iland Ormus vnder 26. degrées There beginneth the entrance of the straights of Persia called Sinus Persicus and the Iland Ormus lyeth betwéene them both hauing on the one side Arabia and on the other side Northward the Countrie of Persia and is in breadth 20. miles From the Cape de Moncadon coasting the Arabian shore inwardes to the Iland of Barem are 80. miles and lyeth vnder 26. degrées a halfe There the Captaine of Ormus being a Portingal hath a factor for the King and there they fish for the best Pearles in all the East Indies and are the right orientall Pearle Coasting along this shore from Barem inwardes to the farthest and outermost corner of Persia or Sinus Persicus lyeth the towne of Balsora which are 60. miles this Towne lyeth vnder 30. degrées and a little about it the two ryuers Tigris and Euphrates do méete and ioyne in one and runne by Bassora into the aforesaide Sinus Persicus Thereabout do◠yet appeare the decayed buildings and auncient Ruines of old Babylon and as many learned men are of opinion thereabout stoode the earthly Paradice From the towne of Balsora the coast runneth againe Northward towards Ormus which is vnder the Dominion of the Persian this Sinus Persicus is about 40. miles broad not much more nor much lesse and hath diuers Ilands and in the mouth therof lyeth the rich Iland Ormus where the Portingales haue a Forte and dwell altogether in the I le among the naturall borne countrimen and haue a Captaine and other officers euery thrée yeares as they of Mossambique Chapter 6. Of the Iland and Towne of Ormus ORmus lyeth vpon the Iland Geru in times past called Ogyris and it is an Iland and a kingdom which the Portingales haue brought vnder their subiection whereas yet their King hath his residence that is to saye without the towne where the Portingales inhabite These people obserue Mahomets law and are white like the Persians And there they haue a common custome that he which is King doth presently cause al his brethren and his kinsmen of the Male kinde to haue their eyes put forth which done they are all richly kept and maintained during their liues for that there is a law in Ormus that no blinde man may bee their King nor Gouernour ouer them Therefore the King causeth them all to haue their eyes put out so to be more secure in their gouernmentes as also to auoide all strife and contention that might arise and to hold and maintaine their countrey in peace The Island is about thrée miles great very full of cliffes and rockes and altogether vnfruitfull It hath neyther gréene leafe nor hearbe in it nor any swéete water but onely rockes of salte stones whereof the walles of their houses are made it hath nothing of it selfe but only what it fetcheth from the firme lande on both sides as well out of Persia as from Arabia and from the Towne of Bassora but because of the situation and pleasantnes of the Iland there is al things therein to bee had in great abundance and greate traffique for that in it is the staple for all India Persia Arabia and Turkie and of all the places and Countries about the same commonly it is full of Persians Armenians Turkes and all nations as also Venetians which lie there to buy Spices and precious stones that in great abundance are brought
in all India and the principall enemies that the Portingalles haue and which trouble them continually But the better to know the situation of the countrey you must vnderstande that all the coast seuered from India is the low land lying 8. or 10. miles vpon the coast which is that whereof we speake and is called Cuncam and then there is a high or hilly Countrey which reacheth almost vnto the skies and stretcheth from the one ende vnto the other beginning at Daman or Cambaia to the Cape de Comoriin and the vttermost corner of India and all that followeth again on the other coast called Ghoramandel This high land on the top is very flatte and good to build vpon called Ballagatte and Decan and is inhabited and diuided among diuers Kings and gouernors The inhabitants and natural borne countrimen are commonly called Decaniins and Canaras as in the description of Goa and the territories thereof shal be particularly shewed with the shapes fashions and counterfeites of their bodies Churches houses trées Plantes and fruites c. The 11. Chapter Of the coast of India that is from Goa to the cape de Comoriin and the furthest corner of the lande which is called the coast of Malabar THe coast of Malabar beginneth from Cape de Ramos which lyeth frō Goa Southwardes ten myles and endeth at the Cape de Comoriin in time past called Corii which is 100. and 7. or 8. miles whereon lie the places hereafter following which are inhabited by the Portingals and kept with fortresses first from the said Cape de Ramos to the fortresse of Onor are tenne miles lying full vnder 14. degrées and is inhabited by the Portingalles There is great quantity of Pepper for that they are able euery yeare to lade a shippe with 7. or 8. thousand Quintalles of Pepper Portingal waight it is the best and fullest berries in all Malabar or India This land belongeth to a Quéene named Batycola which is a towne not farre from thence inwardes wherin she kéepeth her Court it is she that selleth the Pepper and deliuereth it vnto the Marchantes Factors that lie in Onor but they must alwaies deliuer their money sixe monthes before they receyue their Pepper otherwise they get it not then she deliuereth the Pepper which by one of the Factors is receyued and laid vp within the fortresse till the shippes of Portingall come thether to take in their lading of Pepper There is likewise much Ryce This fortresse is not much frequented but onely in the time of lading of their Pepper which within fewe yeares hath béene vsed to be laden there for before they vsed not to lade any in that place From Onor to the towne of Barselor are 15. miles and lyeth vnder 13. degrées it is also inhabited by Portingalles as Onor is there is great store of Ryce Pepper from Barselo◠to Mangalor are 9. miles and lyeth vnder twelue degrées and a halfe which also is a fortresse inhabited as the others are by Portingals and hath great store of Pepper and Ryce From Mangalor to Cananor are 15. myles which lyeth right vnder 11. degrées and a halfe This is the best fortresse that the Portingalles haue in all Malabar and there is much Pepper The Malabars without the fortresse haue a village with many houses therein built after their manner wherein there is a market holden euery day in the which all kindes of victuailes are to be had which is wonderfull altogether like the Hollanders markets There you find Hennes Egges Butter Hony Indian Oyle and Indian figges that are brought from Cananor which are very great and without exception the best in all India of the which sorts of victuailes with other such like they haue great quantities also very faire and long mastes for shippes such as better cannot be found in all Norway and that in so great numbers that they furnish all the countries rounde about them It is a very gréene and pleasant lande to beholde full of faire high trées and fruitfull of all thinges so is the whole coast from Malabar all along the shore Among these Malabars the white Mores do inhabite that beléeue in Mahomet and their greatest traffique is vnto the redde sea although they may not doe it neyther any other Indian without the Portingalles pasport otherwise the Portingals army which yearly saileth along the coasts to kéepe them cleare from sea rouers for the safetie of their marchants finding them or any other Indian or nation whatsoeuer at sea without a pasport woulde take them for a prize as oftentimes it happeneth that they bring shippes from Cambaia Malabar or from the I le of Sumatra and other places that traffique to the redde sea These Mores of Cananor kéepe friendshippe with the Portingalles because of the fortresse which holdeth them in subiection yet couertly are their deadly enemies and secretly contribute and pay great summes of money to the other Malabars to the ende that they shoulde mischiefe and trouble the Portingalles by all the meanes they can deuise whose forme and images do follow after those of Goa and Malabar From Cananor to Calecut are 8. miles which lyeth full vnder 11. degrées This towne of Calecut hath in times past béene the most famous Towne in all Malabar or India and it was the chiefe towne of Malabar where the Samoriin which is the Emperour holdeth his Court but because the Portingalles at their first comming and discouering of India were oftentimes deceyued by him they resorted to the King of Cochin who as then was subiect to the Samoriin being of small power But when the Portingals began to prosper in their enterprise and to get possession in the countrey and so became maisters of the sea Calecut beganne to decay and to lose both name and traffique and nowe at this time it is one of the townes of least account in all Malabar and Cochin to the contrarie their King being very rich and richer then the Samoriin so that now he careth noe for him by means of the fauour and help he findeth at the hands of the Portingalles From Calecut to Cranganor are tenne myles and lyeth vnder tenne degrées and a halfe there the Portingalles haue a Fortresse From Cranganor to Cochin are tenne miles and lyeth not full vnder tenne degrées The towne of Cochin is inhabited by Portingals and naturall borne Indians as Malabars and other Indians that are christened it is almost as great as Goa very populous and well built with faire houses Churches and cloysters and a fayre and most pleasant Riuer with a good channell and a hauen a little beyonde the towne towards the land runneth a small riuer or water where sometimes men may passe ouer dry footed on the further side whereof lyeth a place called Cochin Dacyma and it is aboue Cochin which is in the iurisdiction of the Malabars who as yet continue in their owne religion there the King kéepeth his Court It is very full and well built with houses after the Indian manner and
Caixa of the bignes of a HollaÌ„des doite but not half so thicke in the middle whereof is a hole to hang it on a string for that commonlie they put two hundreth or a thowsand vpon one string wherewith they knowe how to make their accounts which is as followeth 200 Caixas is a Sata and â— Satas are 1000 Caixas which is as much as a Crusado Portingale money or 3 Keysars guilders Netherlandish money Pepper of Sunda is solde by the sacke and each sacke wayeth 45 Catten waight of China euerie Catte is as much as 20 Portingale ounces and euerie sacke is worth as it is solde there 5000 Caixas and when it is at the highest 6 or 7 thowsand Caixas Mace Cloues nutmegges white and blaâ—k Beniamin Camphora are solde by the Bhar each Bhar of Sunda weigheth 330 Catten of China Mace that is good is commonlie worthe 100 or 120 thowsand Caixas and good Cloues after the rate but bad or foule Cloues of Baston are worth 70 or 80 thowsand Caixas the Bhar Nutmegges are commonly worth 20 or 25 thowsand Caixas the Bhar white and black Benioin is worthe 150 and 180 thowsand Caixas 200 thousand the Bhar The wares that are there by them desired in barter for their spices are as hereafter followeth diuers and different sorts and colours of cotton lynnen which come out of Cambaia Choramandel and Bengala as Sarasles de Gâ—baâ—es and painted Tapen from S. Thomas of fyue elles the péece they are clothes so called out of Bengala white Cotton lynnen viz Sarampuras Cassas Sateposas blacke Satopasen and some browne vnbleached lynnen out of Cambaia black Cannequiins red Turiaes which are all clothes of cotton lynnen red Beyramen great and litle which is verie like vnto Cambricke and I am perswaded if Clothe of Holland were there to be soulde it would be more estéemed then Cotton lynnen out of India These Iauens are of a verie fretfull and obstinate Nature of colour much like the Malayers brown and not much vnlike the men of Brasilla strong and well set big limmed flatte faces broad thicke chéekes great eyebrowes smal eyes little beard not past 3 or 4 hayres vpon the vpper lippe the chinne the hayre on their heades very thyn and short yet as blacke as pitche whose picture is to be séen by the picture of the Mâ—layen of Malacca because they dwell trafficke much together Returning againe vnto the coast East by south about 25 miles beyond Iaua Maior beginneth the IlaÌ„d of Iaua Minor or litle Iaua and somewhat further the Iland Tâ—or wher sanders groweth in great abundance and a thousand other Ilands bordering all about which I can not particularly set down yet are they all inhabited and full of people and are like the Iauer From Malacca they trauell to the Ilandes of Molucca Banda Amboyna where the Portingales haue both sorts captaines and trafficke with them their way is from Malacca south east and by south aboue 100 miles betwéene many Ilands and thâ—â—ugh many shallowes so that they must anker euerie night to auoyd danger of sandes which continueth almost all the waye to Molâ—cca and hauing in that sort passed those hundreth miles they set their course eastward and east and by north 250 miles to the Iland called Banda which lyeth vnder 5 degrées on the south side In this Iland the Portingales doe trafficke for in it are the best Nutmegges Flowers There likewise they doe preserue nutmegges and make oyle thereof which is brought to Malacca and from thence into all other places the trafficke there consisteth most in bartering as it doth in SuÌ„da Iaua but they are not to be trusted you must kéep good watch and goe not on land but stay abord the shippe whether the Ilanders bring their marchandises and deale with men as I said before for it happeneth diuers times that they deceaue the Portingales which trust them ouer much for that one of my acquaintance and my friend being there for captaine in a shippe the shippe being cast away vpon that coast was with all his men taken put in prison where for the space of two yeares he indured a most miserable life and in the end was ransomed All these voyages to Banda Moluca those Ilands and also any other way whatsoeuer in India may no man make without licence and speciall fauour of the King of Portingall and their offices are giuen them in recompence of their seruice in the Indies as also all other offices as in an other place shall be declared About 20 miles beyond Banda North west lieth the Iland called Amboyna where the Portingales haue a small for t this Iland hath not much spice but the shippes that sayle from Malacca to Maluco doe stay there and take in fresh water From this Iland Northwarde 70 miles lyeth the Iland Tydor vnder one degrée â—th and iâ— the first Iland of the Molucaâ— â—xe miles northward lyeth Malaco not farre thence Tarnate and the Ilands of Cloues The 21. Chapter Of the Iland of Malucâ— THe Ilandes of Maluco are fiue viz. Maluco Tarnate Tydor Geloulo and an other where the Portingales haue 2 forts that is in Tarnate and Tydor which long since were discouered and wonne where they trafficke from Malacca out of India The Spaniards haue sought diuers meanes to haue traffique there and came from thence out of Noua Spaigne into the Iland called Tarnate where in a storme they lost their shippe and so could not get from thence againe whereby they were by the Portingales most of them slayne and the rest taken and sent prisoners into Portingale whereupon the King of Spaine and Portingale had a long quarrell and contention touching the diuision of their Conquests and discouery of the seas which by the Popes meanes at the last was ended in such sort that at this present onely the Portingale trafickes to those Ilands These Ilands haue no other spice then cloues but in so great abundance that as it appeareth by them the whole world is filled therewith In this Iland are found â—ie hilles they are very dry burnt land they haue nothing els but victuals of flesh and fish but for Rice Corne Onyons Garlicke and such like and all other necessaries some are brought from Portingale and some from other places thereabout which they take and barter for cloues The bread which they haue there of their owne baking is of wood or rootes like the men of Brasillia and their cloathes are of wouen strawe or herbes faire to the eye in these Ilands onlie is found the bird which the Portingales call passaros de Sol that is Fowle of the Sunne the Italians call it Manu codiatas the Latinists Paradiseas by vs called Paradice birdes for y e beauty of their feathers which passe al other birds these birds are neuer séene aliue but being dead they are found vpon the Iland they flie as it is said alwaies into the Sunne and kéepe themselues
reason of the different kingdomes and nations consisting of diuers seuerall sortes of people which are alwaies enemies and neuer liue in peace and some of them being friends other enemies to the Portingales for the Portingales haue only some Townes places and fortresses with their Hauens on the sea coast without holding any thing within the land as in the description of the coast wee haue alreadie declared By the pictures hereafter following may be séene the formes and portraitures of the Portingales that are maried and of the souldiers in India as they walke in the streetes as also howe they ride not onely gentlemen but euery man that hath the abilitie to keepe a horse as well Marchantes as handicraftes men of what sort soeuer they bee and howe they cause themselues to bee carried in Pâ—llamkins in the streetes and throughout the townes when they will not ride nor goe on foote You may likewise sée their fustes wherwith they go to warre vpon the water which the Malabares their enimies doe likewise vse for they haue no other sorts of scutes nor shippes and doe much mischiefe therewith they are verie light as well to saue as to row they vse them also for Marchandise because of the fitnes of the same to passe from place to place The 31. Chapter Of the maner and customes of Portingale and Mesticos women in India THe Portingales Mesticos and Indian Christian women in India are little séene abroad but for the most part sit still within the house and goe but seldome forth vnlesse it be to Church or to visit their friends which is likewise but verie little and when they goe abroad they are well prouided not to be seene for they are carried in a Pallamkin couered with a mat or other cloth so that they cannot be seene When they goe to church or to visit any friend they put on very costly apparrell with bracelets of gold rings vpon their armes all beset with costly Iewels pearles and at their eares hang laces full of Iewels Their clothes are of Damaske Veluet and cloth of gold for silke is the worst thing they doe weare Within the house they goe bare headed with a wastcoate called Baju that from their shoulders couereth their nauels and is so fine that you may see al their body through it and downewards they haue nothing but a painted cloth wrapped three or foure times about their bodies These clothes are very faire some of them being very costly wrought with loome worke and diuers figures and flowers of all colours all the rest of the body is naked without any hose but onely bare footed in a paire of moyles or pantosâ—es and the men in like sort This is their manner in the house both old and young rich poore none excepted for they goe forth but very little and then they are both couered and carried and what they néed abroad that the slaues both men and women doe fetch in The women eate no bread or very little nor yet the slaues not that they refuse it for the dearenes or want of bread for they haue enough and great aboundance but they are so vsed to eate rice that they desire no other which they seeth with water and eate it with some salt fish or a kinde of salt fruit called Mangas or with some other composition both of fish and flesh with pottage which they powre vpon it and so eate it with their handes for there they eate nothing with spoones and if they should sée any man doe so they would laugh at him When they drinke they haue certaine pots made of blacke earth very fine and thin much like those that we vse in Holland for flower pottes hauing in the necke thereof a partition full of holes with a spout and these cruses are called Gorgoletta to this end that when they drinke they may hold the potte on high and touch it not with their mouthes but the water running from the spout falleth into their mouthes neuer spilling drop which they doe for cleanlinesse because no man should put it to his mouth when any man commeth newly out of Portingall and then beginneth to drinke after their manner because he is not vsed to that kinde of drinking he spilleth it in his bosome wherein they take great pleasure and laugh at him calling him Reynol which is a name giuen in iest to such as newlie come from Portingall know not how to behaue them selues in such graue manner and with such ceremonies as the Portingales vse therein India so that at the first they are much whooped and cried at in the stréets vntill by vse and practise they haue learned the Indian manner which they quicklie doe The men are very iealous of their wiues for they will neuer bring any man into their houses how speciall a friend soeuer hee bee that shall sée their wiues or their daughters vnlesse it bee some gossip or any other married man with his wife in companie When they will goe together to some place to sport and solace theÌ„selues they are alwaies well garded by their slaues both men and women both for their safety and seruice If any man commeth to the doore to aske for the master of the house presently the wiues and their daughters run to hide them and so leaue the man to answer him that standeth at the dore likewise they suffer no man to dwell within their houses where the women and daughters bee howe neere kinsman soeuer he be vnto them being once 15. yeares of age nor their owne sons but haue certaine chambers and places beneath or besides their house where they lye may in no sort come among the women and thether they send them their meate and other prouisions for it hath oftentimes béene séene in those countries that the vncles sonne hath laine by his aunt and the brother by the brothers wife and the brother with his sister whereof I haue knowne some that haue bin taken with the manner and that both they and the woman haue beene slaine by the husbands The women are verie luxurious and vnchaste for there are very few among them although they bee married but they haue besides their husbands one or two of those that are called souldiers with whome they take their pleasures which to effect they vse al the slights and practises they can deuise by sending out their slaues and baudes by night and at extraordinary times ouer walles hedges and ditches how narrowlie soeuer they are kept and looked vnto They haue likewise an hearbe called Deutroa which beareth a séed whereof brusing out the sap they put it into a cup or other vessell and giue it to their husbands eyther in meate or drinke and presently therewith the man is as though hee were halfe out of his wits and without feeling or els drunke doing nothing but laugh and sometime it taketh him sleeping whereby he lieth like a dead man so that in his presence they may doe what they will and
verie cunning and naturally subtill There are in the same steéet on the other side that haue all kindes of linnen and shirts with other clothes ready made for all sortes of persons as well slaues as Portingales and of all other linnen worke that may bee desired There are Heathens that sell all kindes of womens clothes and such like wares with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons which are like Canuas for sayles and sackes There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell that haue all kinds of wares out of Cambaia and all sortes of precious stones and are verie subtill and cunning to bore and make holes in all kinds of stones pearles and corrals on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens which sell all sortes of bedstéedes stooles and such like stuffe very cunningly couered ouer with Lacke most pleasant to behold and they can turne the Lacke into any colour that you wil desire There is also a stréet full of gold and Siluer Smithes that are Heathens which make all kinde of workes also diuers other handicrafts men as Coppersmithes Carpenters and such like occupations which are all heathens and euery one a stréet by themselues There are likewise other Marchantes that deale all by great with Corne Rice and other Indian wares and Marchandises as wood and such like Some of them farme the kinges rents and reuenewes so that they are skilfull euery way to make their profites There are also many Heathen Brokers very cunning and subtill in buying and selling and with their tongues to pleade on both sides The Heathens haue likewise their shops with all kinde of spices which they sell by retaile both by waight and measure as Grocers and Potticaries doe with vs and this is onely vsed among them They haue likewise of al sorts of wares whatsoeuer but yet with lesse curiositie then with vs for it is mingled with dust and garbish These are commonlie the Brainenes which serue likewise for Priestes and Idolatrous Ministers haue their shops throughout the Cittie In euerie place and corner and vnder pentises whereby euery man may haue to serue him at his néed There are likewise many barbers which in euery end of the streetes doe call to those that haue cause to vse them They kéepe no shoppes but for a small peece of money come In the Month of September when winter endeth the bankes of sand doe fléete and vade away out of the Riuer so that not onely smal shippes may come in and go out but also the great Portingall ships of 1600. tunnes may fréely enter without a Pilot for it is déepe enough and without daunger In winter it is a heauie and melancholike being there for there is no other exercise to be vsed but onely to sitte in their shirtes with a paire of linâ—en bréeches and goe passe the time away with their neighbours in playing and such exercises for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing The women and Mesticos take great pleasure in the winter time when it rayneth with their husbandes and slaues to go into the fieldes or some garden whether they carry good store of victuailes there in their gardens haue many Cesternes or pondes of water wherein they take their delightes to swimme and to bath themselues In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season The summer beginneth in September and continueth till the last of Aprill and is alwaies clear sky fair weather without once or very little raining Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to saile for all places as also the Kinges armie to kéepe the coast and to conuoy Marchantes and then the East winds beginne to blow from off the lande into the seas whereby they are called Terreinhos that is to say the land windes They blow very pleasantly coolly although at the first by chaunging of the weather they are very dangerous cause many great diseases which do commonly fall in India by y e chaunging of the time These winds blow alwaies in summer beginning at midnight and continue till noone but they neuer blowe aboue tenne miles into the sea from off the coast and presently after one of the clocke vntill midnight the west winde bloweth which commeth out of the sea into the lande and is called Vâ—rason These winds are so sure and certaine at their times as though men helde them in their handes whereby they make the land very temperate otherwise the heate would bee vnmeasurable It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter vpon the coast of India that is from Diâ— to the Cape de Comorin on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choramandel it is cleane contrarie so that there it is summer and yet they lye all vnder one height or degrées and there is but 70. miles by land betwéene both the coasts and in some places but 2â— miles and which is more as men trauel ouer land from Cochin to S. Thomas which lyeth on the same coast of Choramandel and comming by the hill of Ballagatte where men must passe ouer to goe from the one coast vnto the other on the one side of the hil to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sunne shining weather and going downe on the other side there is rayne winde thunder and lightning as if the worlde should end and be consumed which is to be vnderstood that it chaungeth from the one side to the other as the time falleth out so that on the one side of the hilles it is Winter and on the other side Summer and it is not onely so in that place and countrey but also at Ormus on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte where the shippes lie it is very still cleare and pleasant water and faire summer time and turning about the Cape on the other side it is raine and wind with great stormes and tempests which with the times of the yeare doe likewise change on the other side and so it is in many places of the Orientall countries The sicknesses and diseases in Goa and throughout India which are common come most with the changing of the times and the weather as it is said before there raigneth a sicknesse called Mordexim which stealeth vppon men and handleth them in such sorte that it weakeneth a man and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his bodie and many times his life withall This sicknesse is very common killeth many a man whereof they hardly or neuer escape The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and daungerous as the plague with vs. They haue many continuall feuers which are burning agues and consume mens bodies with extreame heate whereby within foure or fiue dayes they are eyther whole or dead This sicknes is common and very daungerous hath no remedie for the Portingalles but letting of blood but the Indians and heathens do cure themselues with hearbes Sanders
and other such like oyntments wherewith they ease themselues This sicknes consumeth many Portingalles euery yeare some because they haue little to eat lesse to drink of any meat or drink that is nourishing vse much company of womeÌ„ because y e land is naturall to prouoke theÌ„ thervnto as also y e most part of the soldiers by such means haue their liuing and their maintenance which often times costeth them both life and limme for although men were of iron or steele the vnchaste life of a woman with her vnsatiable lustes were able to grinde him to powder and swéep him away like dust which costeth many a mans life as the Kinges Hospitall can wel beare witnes wherein they lodge whensoeuer they are sicke where euery yeare at the least there entered 500. liue men and neuer come forth till they are dead and they are only Portingals for no other sick person may lodge therin I mean such as are called white men for the other Indians haue an Hospitall by themselues In this Hospitall they are verie well looked vnto by Iesuites and Gentlemen whereof euery month one of the best is chosen and appointed who personally is there by them and giueth the sicke persons whatsoeuer they will desire and sometimes spend more by foure or fiue hundred Duckats of their owne purses then the Kings allowance reacheth vnto which they doe more of pride and vaine glorie then for compassion onely to haue the praise and commendation of liberalitie It is no shame there to lie in the Hospitall for many men go thether willingly although they haue wherewith to keepe themselues in their houses and haue both wife and children These Hospitals in India are very necessarie for the Portingals otherwise they shold consume away like miserable men but by y e means they are relieued whatsoeuer they haue eyther sicknesse wounds secrete diseases pockes piles or any such like there they are healed and sometimes visited by the Viceroy himselfe when he thinketh vpon them and that his commodities come in He that wil not lie there and hath any woundes or priuie diseases may come thether twice euery day and be drest goe his way againe without any question or deniall When they die therein they are by two slaues carried into the Church yarde without eyther singing or ringing onely one man followeth after them throweth some holy water vppon the graue but if the sicke man chanceth to leaue any goods behind him and speaketh vnto the Priestes to bring him to his graue and to say Masses for his soule then they runne thither by heapes and burie him like a man of countenance eyther in the Church or chauncell according to his will and then hath hee singing and ringing enough But returning to our matter of sicknesse pockâ—s and piles with other secret diseases they are in those countries verie common not hidden or concealed for they thinke it no shame more then to haue any other disease They heale them with the roote China there are some that haue had them at the least thrée or foure times and are not any thing at all shunned or disliked for the same but dare both boast and bragge thereof It is not any thing perillous for the bodie insomuch that they had rather haue them and feare them lesse then any of the foresaid diseases The plague hath neuer béen in India neither is it known vnto the Indians but poysoning witchcraft such like whereby some lose their healthes and some their liues is their dayly exercise and very common with them The stone grauel and rupture raigneth much among them specially among married men by reason of the great quantitie of water that they drinke being giuen to all pleasure and riotousnes enioying all what their hearts desire sitting alwayes with their bellies open in their shirtes in a gallerie recreating themselues with the wind which cooleth them sometimes hauing a slaue to scratch and pare their nayles and féete another the head the third holds a Fan to driue away the flées Their is the common vse for two houres after noone where likewise they take an afternoones sléepe and euer as they haue thirst they bring him a dish of conserues or other comfets that the water shoulde not worke too much in his bodie but taste the better With such and the like exercises they do passe the day til night comes on so that commonly they haue all swollen bellies like Bacchus whereby the soldiers and other Indians call them Barrigois that is bellies or great bellies The day both Summer and Winter is there all of a length not much difference onely in the chaunge they haue about an houres difference The sunne riseth at sixe and setteth at sixe When it is noone commonly they haue the Sunne in the middle of the element iust ouer their heades and it giueth no shadowe although it stretcheth somewhat out as the Sunne taketh his course In Goa you may sée both the Poles of the world the North and South starres stande not farre aboue the Horizon And this shall suffice for the times and seasons of the yeare sicknesses and other diseases in India as breuitie requireth The 35. Chapter Of the money waight and measure of India and Goa THe principall and commonest money is called Pardaus Xeraphiins and is siluer but very brasse and is coyned in Goa They haue Saint Sebastian on the one side and thrée or foure arrowes in a bundle on the other side which is as much as thrée Testones or thrée hundred Reijs Portingall money and riseth and falleth little lesse or more according to the exchange There is also a kinde of reckoning of money which is called Tangas not that there is any such coined but are so named onely in telling fiue Tangas is one Pardaw or Xeraphin badde money for you must vnderstande that in telling they haue two kinds of money good and badde for foure Tangas good money are as much as fiue Tangas bad money Wherfore when they buy and sell they bargaine for good or badde money There is likewise a reckoning of Vintiins which is not likewise in coyne but onely named in telling of these foure good and fiue badde doe make a Tangas The lowest and smallest money is called Bazaruco these are fiftéene badde and eightéene good to a Vintiin and three Bazarucos are as much as two Reiâ—s Portingal money It is molten money of badde Tinne so that 375. Bazarucos are one Pardaw or Xeraphiin There is also a kinde of money out of Persia called Lariins which are long very good and fine siluer without any allay These are worth 105. and 108. Bazarucos as the exchaunge goeth little more or lesse They haue a kind of money called Pagodes which is of Gold of two or three sortes and are aboue eight Tangas in value They are Indian and Heathenish money with the picture of a Diuell vpon them and therefore are called Pagodes There is another kinde of gold money which
is called Venetianders some of Venice and some of Turkish coine and are commonly 2. Pardawes Xeraphins There is yet another kind of golde called S. Thomas because Saint Thomas is figured theron is worth about 7. eight Tangas There are likewise Rialles of 8. which are brought from Portingal and are called Paâ—dawes de Reales Other money of Portingall is not currant there They are worth at their first comming out of Portingall 436. Reyes of Portingall and after are raysed by exchaunge as they are sought for when men trauell for China but they are worth neither more nor lesse They vse in Goa in their buying and selling a certaine maner of reckoning or telling There are Pardawes Xeraphins and these are siluer They name likewise Pardawes of Gold and those are not in kinde or in coyne but onely so named in telling and reckoning for when they buy and sell Pearles stones golde siluer and horses they name but so many Pardawes and then you must vnderstand that one Pardaw is sixe Tangas but in other ware when you make not your bargaine before hand but plainely name Pardawes they are Pardawes Xeraphins of 5. Tangas the péece They vse also to say a Pardaw of Lariinâ— and are fiue Lariins for euery Pardaw This is the money and reckoning of Goa wherewith they buy sell receiue and pay Many of them know wel how to gaine by these kinds of moneys by exchanging buying and selling of them There is great falshoode in the Pardawes Xeraphins which is the principallest and currantest money wherefore there are in euery stréete and corner of the Cittie Iewes that are Christians called Xaraffes who for verie small profit looke vppon the moneyes are so perfect therein that as they let the money passe through their handes in telling they knowe the false peeces without once looking vpon them or taking them vp yea although it lay among a thousande peeces and if another should take it in their handes and tell it a thousande times yet coulde they neuer perceiue it but in ringing it a man may know it very well These are coyned in the firme lande by the Heathenish Indians to deceyue the Portingalles withall wherefore no man dares receiue money were it but halfe a Pardaw except he shew it to those Xaraffes They tell money very readily and swiftly and telling it do looke vpon it to sée if it be good and do giue their promise that if it be found too short or any false money therein after they haue tolde it they will make it good howe much soeuer it be They are also very ready to exchange money or to doe whatsoeuer men néede touching the same They sitte at the corners of the stréetes and before mens houses and a table with heapes of money standing before them euery heape being a Tanga which is â—5 Bazarucos when any man will change a Pardaw they giue him two or thrée sometimes 8. or 10. Bazarucos more then the 375. Bazarucos for they know how to make it vp againe and so do they with all other money according to the rate The waight of Goa is also in diuers kinds as in Portingal with Quintales Arrobas and poundes They haue likewise another wayght called Mao which is a Hand and is twelue pounds with the which they weigh Butter Hony Sugar and all kind of wares to be solde by waight They haue likewise a waight wherewith they weigh Pepper other spices called a Bhar and is as much as thrée Quintales a halfe Portingal waight They haue a measure called Medâ—da that is to say euen waight It is about a spanne high and halfe a finger broade whereof 24. measures are a Hand and 20. Handes are one Candâ—il and one Candâ—l is little more or lesse theÌ„ 14. bushels wherewith they measure Ryce Corne all graine or other commodities to be sold by measure and the ships are fraighted after the same rate for they say a shippe or sente of so many Candâ—ls or so many Pâ—lâ—râ— There is Rice which they sell by the â—rden it is broght in round bundels wrapped in strawe and bounde about with cordes Euerie Fardo is commonly thrée â—nd and a halfe This Rice is better then that which commeth not in Fardens and is called Gâ—rasall Ryce which is the best and beareth the highest price and there is another sorte which is of a lesse price slighter called Chambasal Ther are also diuers other sorts of Rice of a lesse price slighter then the other Ryce and is called Batte and is almost like Barley it hath but little huske This is commonly the dayly foode of the countreymen in the villages called Canariins of the common and poorer sort which stampe and beate it themselues It serueth also for Hennes and Doues to eate in stead of Barley There are diuers particular sortes of moneyes in many places of India and inwardes in the lande among the heathens which are currant onely among them euery coine in their seueral places For by Bengala they haue in place of Bâ—â—aruâ—os a small kinde of money called Amandeles wherewith they get their liuings and buy and sell therewith and diuers other such like coines in seuerall places of the Orientall countries but the money waights and measures aforesaid are those which they doe generally and ordinarily vse throughout all 〈◊〉 and principally in Goa being the heade towne and stapell of all the Orientall countries The 36 Chapter Of the Indians called Bramenes which are the ministers of the Pagodes Indian Idoles and of their manner of life THe Bramenes are the honestest and most estéemed nation amonge all the Indian heathens for they doe alwaies serue in y e chiefest places about the King as Receyuers Stewards Ambassadors and such like offices They are likewise the priestes and ministers of the Pagodes or diuelish Idoles They are of great authoritie among the Indian people for that the King doth nothing without their counsell and consent and that they may be knowne from other men they weare vppon their naked body from the shoulder crosse vnder the arme ouer their body downe to the girdle or the cloth that is wrapped about their middle â— or 4. strings like sealing thréede whereby they are knowne which they neuer put off although it shoulde cost them their liues for their profession religion will not permit it They go naked sauing onely that they haue a cloth bounde about their middles to hide their priuie members They wear sometimes when they go abroad a thinne cotton linnen gowne called Cabaâ—a lightly cast ouer their sholders and hanging downe to the grounde like some other Indians as Benianes Gusarates and Decaniins Vpon their heads they weare a white cloth wounde twice or thryce about therewith to hide their haires which they neuer cut off but weare it long turned vp as the women do They haue most commonly rounde rings of golde hanging at their ears as most of y e Indians haue They eat
liuing women burne themselues with their dead husbands what estate the Embassador of Hidaleam holdeth in Goa how he is caried in the stréets also a true description of the Canariin with his wife the manner how the Indian heathenish children are brought vp also of the soldier of Ballagate which is called Lascariin with the heathenish whore called Balliadera who is a dancer because shee is commonly vsed therevnto in any feast or open playes are ready to be hired for a small péece of mony whereof many of theÌ„ dwell in Goa with the maner of the dwellings houses of the Decaniins Canariins Corumbiins how they row in the riuers with their scutes whereby I haue placed the maner of the boats vsed by those of the Malabares in Cochin so that I shall not néede to make a seuerall Chapter of them by themselues The 40. Chapter Of the Arabians and Abexiins dwelling in India THere are many Arabians Abexiins in India The Arabians obserue Mahomets law the Abexiins some are Mahometans some christians after their manner for they are of Prester Iohns land which stretcheth behind Mosambique in Aethiopia vnto the red sea and the riuer Nilus in Egypt and by their common traffique and conference with the Moores and Mahometans there are diuers of them infected with the same sect There are many of them in India that are slaues and captiues both meÌ„ and women which are brought thether out of Aethiopia sold like other Oriental Nations the Abexiins that are christians haue on their faces 4. burnt markes in manner of a Crosse one ouer their nose in the middle of the forehead betwéene both their eyes on each of their chéekes one betwéene their eies and their eares and one vnder their neather lip downe to the chin and this is their Baptisme when they are made Christians which they vse in stead of water These Abexiins and Arabians such as are frée doe serue in al India for saylers and sea faring meÌ„ with such marchants as saile from Goa to China Iapon Bengala Mallaca Ormus and all the Oriental coast for that there they haue no other saylers nor there are no other because the Portingalles although they serue for Saylers in the Portingalles shippes that come into India and haue neuer bene other in Portingale but Saylers yet are they ashamed to liue in that order and thinke it a great discredite vnto them together with a great diminishing of their authorities estimations which they account themselues to hold in India so that they giue themselues out for maisters of shippes and by their captaines are also called Pilots and chief Botesonnes but not lower for if they should descend but one step lower it would be a great blot and blemish vnto them all their liues after which they would not indure for anie thing in the world These Abexijns and Arabians serue for small money and being hyred are verie lowlie and subiect so that often times they are beaten and smitten not as slaues but like dogs which they beare very patientlie not once speaking a word they coÌ„monlie haue their wiues and children with them in the shippe wherein they are hyred which continually stay with them what voyage soeuer they make and dresse their owne meat which is Rice sodden in water with salt fish among it The cause why the women sayle in the ship is for that in Summer and not else their shippes goe to sea wheÌ„ they alwayes haue calme water and faire weather with good windes they haue commonlie but one Portingale or two for Captaine maister and Pilote and they haue a chief Boteson which is an Arabian which they cal Mocadon and he is ruler of the Arabians Aberijns that are saylers whome he hath vnder his subiection euen as if they were his slaues or subiects This Mocadon is he that conditioneth and maketh bargaine with the owners of the ship to haue so manie saylers and he receiueth the monethlie money for their wages and accounteth with the saylers particularlie but for gouernment of the ship he hath not to doe neither troubleth himselfe therewith The shippes when they sayle vse no caske for water because there is not any throughout all India nor any made there saue onely such as come out of Portingall and vsed in the Portingall shippes but in stéed of pypes they vse a great foure cornered woodden cesterne y t staÌ„deth by the main maste at the very foote therof vpon the keele of the shippe which is verie well pitched and made fast wherein they lade as much water as they thinke will serue them for their voyage The captaine maister or Pilote Marchants and passingers haue euerie man their meat by themselues and their water in great Indian pots called Martauans whereof in y e description of Pegu I haue alreadie spoken These people are so seruiceable and willing to doe any thing that if there chanceth but a hat or any other thing to be blowen ouer or fall into the water they will presently leape cloathes and all into the sea to fetch it again for they swimme like fishes when the ships lie within the hauen or riuer and that they will all goe on land then they goe into the boate and so row to shore which done one of them roweth backe againe with the boate which he tyeth fast to the ship and swimmeth to land and when they will goe abord again if any of the saylers be vnwilling to swimme to fetch the boate they are by the Mocadon or the maister with strokes compelled to doe it but they coÌ„monlie neuer stay till it cometh so â—arre but rather striue who shall be first in the water to shew their diligence and when they doe any thing abord as hayling ropes and other things they sing answere each other very sweetlie so y t it séemeth to be very good Musick Their exercise on land is all the day to drinke and to sit in tipling houses with their wiues and children and then they goe hand in hand through the stréets réeling here and there making a great noise with singing and gaping after their manner there womeÌ„ weare breeches like the Arabians and Mahometans The 41. Chapter Of the blacke people of Mosambique which are called Caffares and of their manners and customes THe black people or Caâ—fares of the land of Mosambique and all the coast of Ethiopia and within the laÌ„d to the Cape de bona SperaÌ„za go al naked although those of Mosambique that is the women do a little couer themselues which they do by meanes of the daylie conuersation they haue with the Portingales who for Gold siluer and Iuory bones and such like doe exchange Cotton lynnen brought out of India that within the land and to the cape they vse in those countries otherwise they couer themselues with the like apparell that Adam and Eua did weare in Paradice They are all as black as pitch with curled and singed hayre both on their heads and beards
which is very little their noses broad flat and thicke at the end great bigge lippes some haue holes both aboue vnder in their lippes and some times besides their mouthes through their cheekes wherein they thrust small bones which they esteeme a bewtifying there are some among them that haue their faces and all their bodies ouer rased and seared with irons and al figured like rased Sattin or Damaske wherein they take great pride thinking there are no fairer people then they in all the world so that when they see any white people that weare apparell on their bodies they laugh and mocke at them thinking vs to be monsters and vgly people and when they will make any deuelish forme and picture then they inuent one atfer the forme of a white man in his apparell so that to conclude they thinke and verily perswade themselues that they are the right colour of men and that we haue a false and counterfait colour There are among them that file their téeth as sharp as nedles which they likewise estéeme for a great ornament Many of them hold the law of Mahomet that is to say such as dwell on the coast of Abex or Melinde and round about those places as also in Mosambique by reason the red sea is so néere vnto them together with the Arabian Mahometans with whome they dayly traffique as they also did in al places IlaÌ„ds throughout the Orientall countries before the Portingales discouery and conquest of India whereby all the Orientall countrie where they trafficked was infected with their deuelish law and their poyson spread and throwne abroad in all places which is one of the principall occasions that the Gospell taketh no better effect in those countries their pestiserous law beeing as it were rooted and ingrafted in their mindes There are some of them that are become Christians since the Portingales came thether but there is no great paines taken about it in those couÌ„tries because there is no profite to be had as also that it is an infectious and vnholesome countrie and therefore the Iesuites are wary inough not to make any houses or habitations therein for they sée no great profite to be reaped there for them as they doe in India the Ilands of Iapan in other places where they find great quantities of riches with the sap whereof they increase much and fill their beehyues therewith to satisfy their thirsty insatiable desires most part of the Caffares liue like beastes or wild men yet they haue their houses in troups or heaps like couÌ„try vilages wher they asseÌ„ble dwel together and in euery Village they haue a Lord or King to whome they are subiect and obedient they are commonly in warres one with an other and one place or Village against an other and haue law and Iustice among them with some small Policie concerning their worldly affaires and gouernment but as concerning Religion and faith they know not what it meaneth but liue like beastes without any knowledge of God or any likelyhoode or shadow thereof they maintaine themselues by hunting which they doe in the woods where they take all that they finde they eate Elephants flesh and all other kind of wild beastes and of the Elephants téeth they make their weapons instéede of Iron and Stéele they doe commonly make warre one against the other and some of them eate mens flesh and some there are also that eate it not but such as deale with the Portingals When they take any man prisoner in the warres they sell him to the Portingales or exchaunge and barter him for Cotton linnen and other Indian wares They haue a custome among them that when they goe to warre against their enemies if they win the battaile or ouerthrow each other he that taketh or killeth most men is holden and accounted for the best and brauest man among them and much respected and to witnesse the same before their Kings of as many as they haue slaine or taken prisoners they cut off their priuâ—e members that if they bee let goe againe they may no more beget children which in processe of time might mischiefe them and then they drie them well because they should not rot which being so dried they come before their Kings with great reuerence in the presence of the principall men in the Village and there take these members so dried one by one in their mouthes and spit them on the ground at the Kings feete which the King with great thankes accepteth and the more to reward and to recompence their valour causeth them all to bee taken vp and giuen to them againe for a signe and token of honour whereby euer after from that time forwards they are accounted as Knights and they take all those members wherewith the King hath thus honoured them and tie them all vpon a string like a Bracelet or Chaine and when they marrie or go to any wedding or feasts the Bride or wiues of those knights doe weare that Chaine of mens members about their neckes which among them is as great an honour as it is with vs to weare the golden Fléece or the Garter of England and the Brides of such Knightes are therewith as proude as if they were the mightiest Queenes in all the world From Mosambique great numbers of these Caffares are caried into India and many times they sell a man or woman that is growne to their full strength for two or three Ducats When the Portingales ships put in there for fresh water and other necessaries then they are dearer by reason of the great numbers of buyers the cause why so many slaues and Captaines of all nations are brought to sell in India is because that euerie ten or twelue miles or rather in euery Village and towne there is a seuerall King and ruler of the people one of them not like an other neither in law spéech nor manners whereby most part of them are in warres one against the other and those that on both sides are taken prisoners they kéepe for slaues and so fell each other like beastes hee whose euill fortune is such that hee is one of the captiues must be patient wherein they shew not much dislike for when they are asked how they can content themselues with that yoke of bondage they answere that they can beare it well enough séeing their Planet will haue it so and for that their friends and neighbours shall reuenge their cause against those that haue done it Also in time of pouertie or dearth the fathers may sell their children as it happened in my time that there was such a dearth and scarsitie of victualls in the firme lande and countries bordering vppon Goa that the men of India came to Goa and other places where the Portingales are resident to sell their children in great numbers and for small prices to buy them victuals I haue séene Boyes of eight or ten yeares giuen in exchange for fiue or sixe measures of Rice and some
700. thousand Ducats in Golde which the Viceroy for couetousnesse of the money was minded to doe But the Archbishop of Goa called Don Gaspar my Lords predicessor disswaded him from it saying that they being Christians ought not to giue it them againe being a thing whereby Idolatrie might be furthered and the Deuill worshipped but rather were bound by their profession to roote out and abolish all Idolatrie and superstition as much as in them lay By which meanes the Viceroy was perswaded to change his mind and flatly denied the Ambassadours request hauing in their presence first burnt the Apes tooth the Ashes whereof hee caused to bee throwne into the Sea Whereupon the Ambassadors fearing some further mischief tooke their leaue and departed being much astonished that hee refused so great a summe of money for a thing which hee so little estéemed that hee burnt it and threw the Ashes into the Sea Not long after there was a Beniane as the Benianes are full of subtiltie that had gotten an other Apes tooth and made the Indians and Heathens belieue that hee had miraculously found the same Apes tooth that the Viceroye had and that it was reuealed vnto him by a Pagode in a visâ—on that assured him it was the same which hee said the Portingales thought they had burned but that he had béene there inuisible and taken it away laying an other in the place Which the Heathens presently belieued so that it came vnto the King of Bisnagars eares who thereupon desired the Beniane to send it him and with great ioy receiued it giuing the Beniane a great summe of Golde for it where it was againe holden and kept in the same honour and estimation as the other that was burnt had béene In the kingdome of Narsinga or the coast called Châ—ramandel there standeth a Pagode that is verie great excéeding rich and holden in great estimation hauing manye Pilgrimages and visitations made vnto it from all the countries bordering about it where euerie yeare they haue many faires feastes and processions and there they haue a Wagon or a Carte which is so great and heauie that thrée or foure Elephants can hardly draw it and this is brought foorth at faires feastes and processions At this Carte hang likewise many Cables or Ropes wherat also all the countrie people both men and women of pure deuotion doe pull and hale In the vpper part of this Carte standeth a Tabernacle or seate wherein sitteth the Idoll and vnder it sit the Kings wiues which after their manner play on all instruments making a most swéete melodie and in that sort is the Carte drawne foorth with great deuotions and processions there are some of them that of great zeale and pure deuotion doe cut péeces of flesh out of their bodies and throwe them downe before the Pagode others laye themselues vnder the whéeles of the Carte and let the Carte runne ouer them whereby they are all crushed to péeces and pressed to death and they that thus die are accounted for holy and deuout Martyrs and from that time forwardes are kept and preserued for great and holy Reliques besides a thousand â—ther such like beastly superstitions which they vse as one of my Chamber fellowes that had seene it shewed me and it is also wel knowne throughout all India Vpon a time I and certaine Portingales my friends hauing licence from the Viceroy were at a banket and méeting about fiue or sixe miles within the firme land and with vs wee had certaine Decanijns and naturall borne Indians that were acquainted with the countrie the chiefe cause of our going was to see their manner of burning the deade Bramene and his wife with him being aliue because we had béene aduertised that such a thing was to be done And there among other strange deuises that we saw wee came into some Villages and places inhabited by the Indians where in the way and at euerie hil stonie Rocke or hole almost within a Pater noster length wee found a Carued Pagode or rather Deuils and monsters in hellish shapes At the last wee came into a Village where stoode a great Church of stone wherein wee entered and found nothing in it but a great Table that hung in the middle of the Church with the Image of a Pagode painted therein so mishaped and deformed that more monsterous was neuer séene for it had many hornes and long téeth that hung out of his mouth down to the knées and beneath his Nauel and belly it had an other such like face with many hornes and tuskes Vppon the head thereof stoode a triple Crowned Myter not much vnlike the Popes triple crown so that in effect it séemed to be a monster such as are described in the Apocalips It hung before a Wall which made a partition from an other Chamber in manner of a Quier yet was it close made vp without windowes or any place for light in the middle whereof was a little narrow close doore and on both sides of the doore stoode a small Furnace made within the wall wherein were certaine holes or Lattisses thereby to let the smoke or sauor of the fire to enter into that place when any offering should bee made Whereof wee found some there as Rice Corne. Fruites Hennes and such like things which the Indians dayly offered but there came so filthie a smoke and stincke out of the place that whosoeuer went néere it was almost readie to choke the said place being all black smerie and foule there with Before this doore being shut in the middle of the Church there stoode a Calfe of stone whereon one of our companie leaped and laughing began to crie out which the Bramene that kept the Church perceiuing began to call and crie for helpe so that presently many of the neighbours ranne thether to sée what the cause might bee but before the thrung of people came we dealt so well with the Bramene acknowledging our fault saying it was vnaduisedly done that he was well content the people went home againe Then wee desired the Bramene to open vs the doore that stoode shut which after much intreatie he yeelded vnto offering first to throw certaine Ashes vpon our foreheads which we refused so y t before hee would open vs the doore wee were forced to promise him that we would not enter further in theÌ„ to the doore The doore of their Sancta Sanctorum or rather Diaboloâ—uÌ„ being opened it shewed within like a Lime kill being close vaulted round about ouer the heade without either hole or window to cast in light but onely at the doore neither was ther any light in al the Church but that which came in at the doore we entered by Within the said cell or vault there hung at the least 10â— burning Lamps in the middle whereof stoode a little Altar and couered ouer with cloth made of cotton wool ouer that with pure golde vnder the which as the Bramene told vs sat the Pagode being of
grow in India many Iniamos and Batatas These Iniamos are as bigge as a yelow roote but somewhat thicker and suller of knots and as thicke on the one place as in the other they grow vnder the earth like earth Nuts and of a Dun colour and white within like earth Nuts but not so swéete Iniamos were this yeare brought hethâ— out of Guinea as bigge as a mans legge and all of a like thicknesse the outward part is Dun coloured within verie white rosted or sodden they are verie pleasant of taste and one of the principal meates of the Black-Moores The Batatas are somewhat red of colour and of fashion almost like the Iniamos but swéeter of taste like an earth Nut. These two fruits are verie plentifull specially Iniamos which is as common and necessarie a meate as the Figges they eate them for the most part rosted and vse them commonly for the last seruice on the boorde they â—eth them likewise in an other sort for â—orrage and sâ—eth them with flesh like Colwortes or Turnops the like doe they with Batatas The 56. Chapter Of the Palme trees whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocus doe grow THese Trées are commonlie called by most of the Indians Persians and Arabians Maro the nuts Nareâ— The Malabares call the Trees Tenga Maran and the fruite being ripe Tenga but vnripe and being as yet greene 〈◊〉 In Goa â—anha the Portingalls call this fruit Coquo by reason of the thrée holes that are therein like to a Munkies head Auicenna calleth these Iaâ—ial-Indi that is Indian nuts The Malayans of Malacca call the trees Trican and the fruit Nihor This is the most profitable tree of all India as in order I will declare vnto you the profit that ariseth thereby they grow most in the Islands of Maldiua and in Goa and the countries round about them as also through the whole coast of Malabar whereby they traffique with them into all places as to Cambaia Ormus c. The tree wareth very high and straight of the thickenes of a small spanne little more or lesse it hath no branches but in the vppermost part thereof in the top grow the leaues which spread like vnto Date trées and vnder the leaues close to the tree grow the Coquos together commonly ten or twelue one close by another but you shall seldome finde one of them growing alone by it self The blossome of this fruite is very like the blossome of a Chestnut The wood of the tree is very sappy like a spunge and is not firme they doe not grow but on the sea sides or bankes of riuers close by the strand and in sandie grounds for there groweth none within the land They haue no great rootes so that a man would thinke it were impossible for them to haue any fast hold within the earth and yet they stand so fast and grow so high that it maketh men scare to see men clime vppon them least they should fall downe The Canarijns clime as nimbly and as fast vpon them as if they were Apes for they make small steppes in the trées like staires whereon they step and so clime vp which the Portingales dare not veÌ„ter their planting is in this manner They first plant the Coquos or Nuts whereof the trees doe spring and when they are about the height of a man in winter time they plant them againe and dung them with ashes and in summer time water them They growe well about houses because commonlie there they haue good earth and beeing well looked vnto and husbanded they yeeld fruit in fewe yeares which is the Canarijns liuinges that dwell here and there among those trees and haue no other occupation but onely to dresse those trees which they farme of the Landlords and by the fruite thereof doe get their liuinges Those trees are more aboundant with them then Oliue trées in Spaine or willow trées in the Low countries The profits they reape thereby are these First the wood is very good for many things although it be spungious and â—appy by reason of the length of it for in the Islandes of Maldiua they make whole ships thereof without any iron nayles in them for they sow them together with the cordes that are made of the said Cocus or Nut the ropes and cables beeing likewise of the same tree as also the sayles which they make of the leaues which leaues are called Olas They serue likewise to make the Canarijns houses and for hattes which they vse to carrie ouer their heades for the sunne or the raine they make also mattes or Tents that lie ouer the Palamkins when it raineth to couer the women when they are caried abroad and such like thinges they likewise make thereof very fine Hattes that are much esteemed and cost three or foure Pardawes the péece which they weare in Summer for lightnes They farme or hire those trées for two causes one for the Coquos or fruit to eate it the other to presse wine out of them thereof to drinke The nuts are as great as an estrige egge some smaller and some greater and are outwardly couered with a Huske or Shell which as long as it groweth on the trée is gréene with out like an Acorne with his huske or cup. The Indian nuts are couered ouer with two sortes of huskes or shels whereof the vttermost is hayrie and of it they make Cairo that is all their cables and ropes and stop and make their ships close with it in stead of Ocam or tow for that it keepeth the ships closer in saltwater then our Ocam or Tow because in salt water it closeth and shutteth it selfe closer together Of the other they make not onelie drinking cups in India but here with vs also for that the common people beleeue there is a certaine vertue in them against stirring of the body but it is not so This Huske beeing drie and pulled off is haire like hempe whereof all the cordes and Cables that are vsed throughout al India are made as well vppon the land as in the ships it is of colour verie like the ropes of Sparta in Spaine they are very good but they must be kept in salt water whereby they continue very long but in fresh or raine water they doe presently rot because they are not drest with pitch and tarre as our ships are The ship wherein I came out of India into Portingall had no other ropes nor cables nor any such kinde of stuffe but such as were made of the Indian Cocus called Cayro which continued very good sauing only y t we were forced euery fourtéene dayes to wash our cables in the Sea whereby they serued vs as well as cables of hemp The fruit when it is almost ripe is called Lanha and within is full of water and then it is white of colour thin and soft and the longer the Cocus is on the tree the more the water groweth and changeth into white which is the meat of the nut within
Cinamon of Malabar is called Canella de Mato or wilde Cinamon and is forbidden to be carried into Portingale yet there is great quantity shipped but all vnder the name of Cinamon of Seylon whereby it passeth and the King hath his full custome as well for the good as for the bad When the â—on of Seylon is worth in India 50 or 60 Pardawes the Quintale the wilde Cinamon is worth but 10 or 12 Pardawes but it is all registred in India for Seylons Cinamon and payeth custome in Lisbon each Quintale 15 or 16 Milreyes as well the good as the bad and all other spices after the rate and there may be nothing shipped in India no not so much as the slaues but it must all be registred in Cochin and if there be any thing found to be brought into Portiâ—l and not registred there it is forfait to the King There groweth Cinamon also in the Ilands of Iaua and by Malacca but very little and not so good as that of Seylon The trees which they burne in India for wood some of them are like Cinamon in burning and smell Cinamon healeth it openeth streÌ„gtheneth all the inward parts it is somewhat attractiue stretcheth the mawe and digesteth the meate it is also vsed against all kinde of poyson that may hurt the hart Cinamon with Pennyâ—oy all and Biuoet water drunk driueth away the Volgher openeth the matrice and maketh women haue their flowers it is likewise good against Fusten and Catharres that fall downe from the head into the lower parts also against the Dropsie and breaking or stopping of the kidneyes c. The water and Oyle of Cinamon doe greatlie strengthen all the inward parts as head hart mawe and lyuer c. The 64. Chapter Of Ginger GInger groweth in manie places of India yet the best most caryed abroad is that which groweth in the coast of Malabar it groweth like thin and young Netherland reedes of two or thrée spannes high the roote whereof is the Ginger being greene it is much eaten in India for sallets as also sodden in Vineger which they call Achar as I said of pepper and other fruites that are vsed in that maÌ„ner throughout al India the time wheÌ„ they are most gathered and begun to be dried is in December and Ianuarie they drie it in this sort that is they couer it with pot-earth which they doe to stop and fill vp the holes and thereby to make it continue the fresher for the pot-earth preserueth it from wormes without the which it is presentlie consumed by them it is little estéemed in India notwithstanding there is much shipped as well to the red sea as to Ormus Arabia and Asia but little for Portingal because it will not saue y e fraught and custome onlie the gunner of the Indian shippes may lade and bring certaine Quintals without paying any custome which by the King of Portingale was of long tyme granted vnto them and is yet obserued and this they may fel to marchants and so by this meanes there is some brought otherwise but very little for that the most part of Ginger brought into Spain cometh from Cabo verde the Ilands of S. Thomas Brasiliâ— and the IlaÌ„d of S. Domingo in y e spanish Indies which is much trafficked withall in Spaine wherefore that of the Portingall Indies is little brought out of the couÌ„try because of the loÌ„g way great charges yet it is better theÌ„ other Ginger as also all other spices mettals and stones that are brought out of the Orientall Indies that is out of the Portingales Indies are for goodnesse and vertue better then any other which the continuall traffique hath sufficiently made knowne There is likewise much Ginger conserued in Suger which commeth out of the countrie of Bengala but the best commeth from China it is verie good to eate and much vsed in India broght out of Portingal into these countries Ginger by the Arabians Persians and Turkes is called Gengibil in Gusurate Decan and Bengala when it is freshe and greene Adrac and when it is dryed Sucte in Malabar both dryed green Imgi in Malayo Aliaa It groweth like water Lillies or Sword-hearbe but somewhat blacker with a stalke aboute two or three handfuls high and with a roote like a Lillie not spreading forth as Antonius Musa writeth and is not so sharpe specially that which groweth in Bacaim because of the ouer great moysture This roote is cut small and mixed with other rootes and so eaten for Sallets with oyle salt and Vineger it is also sodden with flesh and fish It goweth in all places of India and is sowed or Planted for that which commeth vp of it selfe is not so good The best and greatest store commeth out of Malabar and by the Arabians and Persians it is much desired next it is the Ginger of Bengala The third is that of Debut and Bacaim and of all the coast along in the wilde fields and inwardly within the land there is little found There is also some found in the Ilands of S. Laurence and Comaro The vertue and properties of Ginger is that it maketh a man to goe easily to the stoole and restoreth a mans strength that is decayed But it is found contrary in other Authors that Ginger stoppeth for that it causeth good digestion and so laskements proceeding of raw moystnesse is stopped It heateth a colde maw and is good against humors that darken the eyes and is vsed in many medicines The 65. Chapter Of Cloues CLoues are by the Turkes Persians Arabians and most part of the Indians called Caâ—aâ—â—r and in the Ilands of Maluco where they are only found and do grow Chamke These Ilands are fine lying vnder the Equinoctiall line as in the descriptions therof is declared They haue nothing else but Cloues which are caried froÌ„ thence through out the world the trees whereon they grow are like Bay-trées the blossomes at the first white then greene and at the last red and hard which are the Cloues and when the blossomes are gréene they haue the pleasantest smell in all the world The Cloues grow verie thicke together and in great numbers they are gathered and then dried their right colour when they are drie is a darke yelow and to giue them a blacke colour they are commonly smoked The Cloues that stay on the trée vngathered are thicke and stay on till the next yeare which are those that are called the mother of the Cloues And in the place where the trées stand there groweth not any grasse or gréene Hearbe at all but it is wholly drie for that those trees draw all the moysture vnto them That which the Portingals call Baston or with vs the stocke of the Cloue and is the stalke whereby they hang on the trees is gathered with the Cloues and so they are mingled together for that in Maluco they neuer garble their Cloues but in India they are many times parted though verie little for they are
is verie dangerous therefore it is good reason they should shunne them and surely the Pilots ought to haue great care specially such as are in the Indian ships for that the whole ship and safetie thereof lyeth in their hands and is onely ruled by them and that by expresse commaundement from the King so that no man may contrary them They being thus betwéene the lands and by all y e Saylors iudgements hard by the drowthes of India the Pilot tooke the height of the Sunne and made his account that they were past the shallowes commaunding the Master to make all the sayle hee could and freely to sayle to Mosambique without any let or stay And although there were diuers Saylors in the shippe that likewise had their Cardes some to learne other for their pleasures as diuers Officers the Master and the chiefe Boatwayne that said it was better to keepe alooffe specially by night and that it would be good to hold good watch for y t they found they had not as then past the shallowes yet the Pilot saide the contrary and would needes shew that he only had skill and power to commaunde as commonly the Portingales by pride do cast themselues away because they wil follow no mans counsell and be vnder no mans subiection specially when they haue authoritie as it happened to this Pilot that would heare no man speake nor tak◠my counsell but his owne therefore commaunded that they should doe as he appointed them whereupon they hoysted all their Sayles sayled in that sort till it was midnight both with good wind faire wether but the Moone not shining they fell full vpon the Shallowes being of cleare white Corall and so sharpe that with the force of wynd and water that draue the shippe vpon them it cut the shippe in two peeces as if it had beene sawed in sunder so that the keele and two Oarlops lay still vpon the ground and the vpper part being driuen somewhat further at the last stuck fast the maste beeing also broken wherewith you might haue heard so great a crie that all the aire did sound therewith for that in the shippe being Admiral there was at the least fyue hundreth persons among the wich were 30. women with manie Iesuites and Fryers so that as then there was nothing else to bee done but euery man to shrifte bidding each other farewel and asking al men forgiuenes with weeping and crying as it may well be thought The Admirall called Fernando de Mendosa the Maister the Pylot and ten or twelue more presentlie entred into the small boate keeping it with naked Rapiers that no more should enter saying they would goe see if there were anie drie place in the shallowes whereon they might worke to make a Boate of the peeces of the broken shippe therein to sayle vnto the shore and so to saue their liues wherewith they put them that were behind in some small comfort but not much But when they had rowed about and finding no drie place they durst not returne again vnto the Shippe least the boate would haue beene ouerladen and so drowned and in the Shippe they looked for no helpe wherefore in fyne they concluded to row to land hauing about 12 boxes of Marmalade with a pipe of wine and some Bisket which in hast they had thrown into the boat which they dealt among them as néed required and so commending themselues to God they rowed forwardes towards the coast and after they had béene 17 daies vpon the sea they fell with great hunger thirst and labor on the land where they saued themselues The rest that stayed in the ship séeing the boate came not againe it may wel be thought what case they were in At the last one side of the vpper part of the ship betwéene both the vpper Oarlops where the great boat lay burst out and the Boate being halfe burst began to come forth but because there was small hope to be had and fewe of them had little will to proue masteryes no man layd hand thereon but euerie man sate looking one vpon an other At the last an Italian called Cyprian Grimoaldo rose vp and taking courage vnto him sayd why are we thus abashed Let vs seeke to helpe our selues and see if there be any remedie to saue our liues wherewith presentlie he leapt into the boat with an instrument in his hand and began to make it cleane whereat some others began to take courage and to helpe him as well as they could with such things as first came to their handes so that in the end there leaped at the least foure score and ten persons into it and many hung by the handes vppon the boat swimming after it amōg the which were some women but because they would not sinke the boate they were forced to cut off the fingers handes and armes of such as held thereon and let them fall into the sea and manie they threw ouer bord being such as had not wherewith to defend themselues Which done they set forwards committing themselues to God with the greatest cry and pitifullest noyse that euer was heard as though heauen and earth had gone together when they tooke their leaue of such as stayed in the Shippe In which manner hauing rowed certaine dayes and hauing but small store of victuals for that they were so manie in the boate that it was readie to sinke it being likewise verie leake and not able to hold out in the ende they agreed among themselues to chuse a Captaine to whome they would obey and doe as he commanded and among the rest they chose a gentle man a Mestico of India and swore to obey him hee presentlie commanded to throwe some of them ouer bord such as at that tyme had least meanes or strength to helpe themselues among the which there was a Carpenter that had not long before holpen to dresse the Boate whoe seeing that the Lot fell vpon him desired them to giue him a peece of Marmalade and a Cuppe of wine which when they had done he willingly suffered himselfe to bee throwne ouer bord into the Sea and so was drowned There was an other of those that in Portingale are called New Christians he béeing allotted to be cast ouer bord into the Sea had a younger Brother in the same Boate that sodainelie rose vp and desired the Captaine that hee would pardon and make free his Brother and let him supplie his place saying My Brother is older and of better knowledge in the world then I and therefore more fit to liue in the world and to helpe my sisters and friendes in their need so that I had rather die for him then to liue without him At which request they let the elder Brother loose and threwe the younger at his owne request into the sea that swōme at the least sixe howers after the boate And although they held vp their hands with naked rapiers willing him that hee shuld not once come to touch the Boate
the seas and did great hurt to the ships and marchants of Bassora that traffiqued in Ormus whereby the trafique to the saide towne of Ormus was much hindered to the great losse and vndoing of many a marchant With this commission they set forwarde with their Lieuetenant and being come to Nicola where they ran their fustes on shore so that they lay halfe dry vpon the sand euery man in generall leaped on land without any order of battaile as in all their actions they vse to doe which the Lieuetenant perceiuing would haue vsed his authoritie and haue placed them in order as in warlike affaires is requisite to be done but they to the contrarie would not obay him saying hee was but a Bore that they were better Gentlemen soldiers then he and with these and such like presumptuous spéeches they went on their course scattering here there in all disorders like shéepe without a shepheard thinking all the world not sufficient to containe them and euery Portingall to bee a Hercules and so strong that they could beare the whole world vpon their sholders which the Arabians being within the land and most on horsebacke perceyuing and séeing their great disorder knowing most of their Fustes to lie drie vpon the strand and that without great payne and much labour they coulde not hastily set them on floate presently compassed them about and being ringed in manner of a halfe Moone they fell vpon them and in that sorte draue them away killing them as they list till they came vnto their Fustes and because they could not presently get their Fustes into the water through fear and shame they were complled to fight where likewise many of them were slaine and not aboue fiftie of them escaped that had set foote on land and so being gotten into their Fustes they rowed away In this ouerthrow there were slayne aboue 800. Portingalles of the oldest best soldiers in all India and among them was a Trumpetter being a Netherlander who being in the thickest of the fight not farre from the Portingalles ensigne and séeing the Ensigne-bearer throw downe his Ensigne the easier to escape and saue his life and that one of the Arabians had taken it vp casting his Trumpet at his backe he ranne in great furie and with his rapier killed the Arabian that held it and brought it againe among the Portingals saying it was a great shame for them to suffer it so to bee carryed away and in that manner he held it at the least a whole hower and spoyled many of the Arabians that sought to take it from him in such manner that he stood compassed about with deade men and although hee might haue saued himselfe if hee woulde haue left the Ensigne yet he would not doe it till in the ende there came so many vpon him that they killed him where he yeéelded vp the Ghost with the ensigne in his armes and so ended his dayes with honour which the Portingalles themselues did confesse and often acknowledged it commending his valour which I thought good to set downe in this place for a perpetuall memorie of his valiant mind The Lieuetenant perceyuing their disorder and how it would fall out wisely saued himselfe and got into the Fustes where hee behelde the ouerthrow and in the ende with the emptie vessels he turned againe to Ormus without doing any thing else to the great griefe and shame of all the Indian soldiers being the greatest ouerthrow that euer the Portingals had in those countries or wherein they lost so many Portingalles together among the which was the Archbishoppes brotherâ— and many other young and lustie Gâ—tlemen of the principallest in all Porâ—ngall At the same time the Queene of Oâ—mus came to Goa being of Mahomet religion as all her auncesters had beene before her and as then were contributarie to the Portingall She caused her selfe to be christened and was with great solemnitie brought into the Towne where the Viceroy was her Godfather and named her Donna Phillippa after the King of Spaines name being a faire white woman very tall and comely and with her likewise a brother of hers being verie young was also christened and then with one Mathias Dalburquerâ—k that had beene Captain of Ormus she sailed to Portingall to present her selfe to the king She had married with a Portingall Gentleman called Anton Dazeuedo Conâ—nho to whome the king in regarde of his mariage gaue the Captaine shippe of Ormus which is worth aboue two hundred thousande duckets as I said before This Gentleman after hee had beene maried to the Queene about halfe a yeare liuing very friendly and louingly with her hee caused a shippe to bee made therewith to saile to Ormus there to take order for the rentes and reuenewes belonging to the Queene his wife but his departure was so grieuous vnto her that she desired him to take her with him saying that without him she could not liue but because he thought it not as then conuenient hee desired her to be content promising to returne againe with all the speede he might Wherevppon hee went to Bardeâ— which is the vttermost parte of the Riuer entering into Goa about thrée myles off and while hee continued there staying for winde and weather The Quéene as it is saide tooke so great gréefe for his departure that she dyed the same day that her husbande set saile and put to sea to the great admiration of all the Countrey and no lesse sorrowe because shee was the first Quéene in those countries that had béene christened forsaking her kingdome and high estate rather to die a Christian and married with a meane Gentleman then to liue like a Quéene vnder the lawe of Mahomet and so was buried with great honor according to her estate In the month of August 1586 there ariued a man of Mosambique in Goa y t came from Portingal in y e ship y t shold saile to Malacca that brought newes vnto the Viceroy how the ship called the Boa Viagen that in the yeare before sailed from India towards Portingall was cast away by the cape de Bona Speranza where it burst in peeces beeing ouerladen for they do coÌ„monly ouerlade most of their ships â— affirmed that the ship had at the least â— haÌ„dfull high of water within it before it departed froÌ„ Cochiin althogh before their ships set sayle they put the Master and other Officers to their othes therby to make them confesse if the ship be strong and sufficient to performe the voyage or to let them know the faults which vpoÌ„ their said oathes is certefied by a protestation made wherunto the Officers set their handes yet though the ship haue neuer so many faultes they will neuer confesse them because they will not loose their places and profit of the Voyage yea although they doe assuredly knowe the ship is not able to continue the Voyage for that couetousnes ouerthrowing wisedome pollicie maketh them reiect all feare but when they fall
out of Portingall Their names were S. Antony S. Francisco our Lady of Nazareth and S. Alberto but of the S. Mary that came in company w c them from Portingall they had no newes but afterwards they heard that shee put backe againe to Portingal by reasoÌ„ of some defaults in her and also of the foule weather Eight dayes after the said 4. ships ariued in Goa where with great ioy they were receiued At the same time the Fort called Columbo which the Portingales hold in the Island of Seylon was besieged by the king of Seylon called Ram and in great danger to bee lost which to deliuer there was an armie of fustes and gallies sent from Goa whereof was Generall Barnaldin de Carualho And at the same time departed another armie of many ships fustes and gallies with great numbers of souldiers munition victuals and other warlike prouisions therewith to deliuer Malacca which as then was besieged and in great misery as I saide before thereof was generall Don Paulo de Lyma Pereira a valiant Gentleman and an olde souldier who not long before had bin Captaine of Chaul and being very fortunate in all his enterprises was therefore chosen to bée Generall of that fléet The last of Nouember the foure ships afore said departed from Goa to lade at Cochiin and from thence to saile for Portingale In December after while the Fort of Columbo in the Island of Seylon was still besieged the towne of Goa made out another great fléete of ships and gallies for the which they tooke vp many men within the Citie and compelled them to goe in the ships because they wanted men with a great contribution of mony raysed vpoÌ„ the Marchants and othrr inhabitants to furnish the same of the which armie was appointed general one Manuel de Sousa Courinho a braue gentle man and souldier who in times past had bin Captaine of the said Fort of Columbo and had withstood another besieging whereuppon the king put him in great credit and aduanced him much and after the Viceroyes death he was Viceroy of India as in time place we shall declare He with his armie ariued in the Isle of Seylon where hee ioyned with the other armie that went before and placed themselues in order to giue battaile to Raâ— who perceiuing the great number of his enemies brake vp his siege and forsooke the Fort to the great reioycing of the Portingales and hauing strengthned the Forte with men and victuals they returned againe to Goa where in the month of March Anno 1â—88 they were receiued with great ioy In the month of Aprill the same yeare the armie of Don Paulo de Lyma that went to Malacca ariued in Goa with victorie hauing fired Malacca and opened the passage againe to China and other places the maner whereof was this In their way as they passed the straight of Malacca they met with a ship belonging to the king of Achein in Samatra who was a deadly enemie to the Portingales and the principal cause of the besieging of Malacca In the same ship was the Daughter of the said king of Achein which he sent to be maried to the king of â—oor therby to make a new aliance with him against the Portingales and for a present sent him a goodly péece of Ordinance whereof the like was not to be found in all India and therefore it was afterwards sent into Portingale as a present to the king of Spaine in a ship of Malacca which after was cast away in the Island of â—eâ—cera one of the Flemmish Ilandes where the same peece with much labor was weighed vp and laid within the fortresse of the same Isle because it is so heauie that it can hardly be caried into Portingale But to the matter they tooke the ship with the kings daughter and made it al good prize and by it they were aduertised what had passed betweene the kings of Achein and Ioor so that presently they sent certaine souldiers on land and marching in order of battaile they set vppon the towne of Ioor that was sconsed and compassed about with woodden stakes most of the houses being of straw which wheÌ„ the people of the towne perceiued and saw the great number of men and also their resolution they were in great feare and as many as could fledde and saued themselues in the countrie to conclude the Portingales entred the towne and set it on fire vtterly spoyling and destroying it razing it eueÌ„ with the ground slaying al they fouÌ„d and taking some prisoners which they led away Captiues and found within the towne at the least 2500 brasse péeces great small which were al brought into India You must vnderstand that some of them were no greater than Muskets some greater and some very great being very cunningly wrought with figures and flowers which the Italians and Portingales that haue denyed their faith and become Mahometistes haue taught them whereof there are many in India and are those indéede that doe most hurt when they haue done any murther or other villanie fearing to be punished for the same to saue their liues they runne ouer by the firme land among the Heathens and Mores and there they haue great stipendes and wages of the Indian kinges and Captaines of the land Seauen or eight yeares before my comming into India there were in Goa certain TruÌ„peters and Cannonyers being Dutchmen Netherlanders and because they were reiected and scorned by the Portingales in India as they scorn all other nations in the world as also for that they could get no pay when they asked it they were presently abused and cast into the gallies and there compelled to serue In the end they tooke counsell together and seeing they could not get out of the countrie they secretly got into the firme land of Balagate and went vnto Hidalcan where they were gladly receiued and very well entertained with great payes liuing like Lords there being in dispaire denide their faithes although it is thought by some that they remaine still in their owne religion but it is most sure that they are maried in those countries with Heathen women and were liuing when I came from thence by this meanes are the Portingales the causes of their owne mischiefes onely through their pride hardines and make rods to scourge theÌ„selues withall w c I haue onely shewed in respect of those cast péeces other martiall weapons which the Indians haue learned of the Portingals and Christians whereof in times past they had no vnderstanding and although they had placed all those péeces in very good order yet it should seeme they knew not howe to shoote them off or to vse them as they should as it appeared hereby for that they presently forsooke them and left them for the Portingals With this victory the Portingals were very proude and with great glorie entred into Malacca wherein they were receyued with great triumph as it may well bee thought being by them deliuered from
this custome they obserued in this our nauigation for sodainely the cloud came with a most horrible storme and fell vppon them before they coulde preuent it whereby seuen or eight of them were sunke into the seas and neuer heard of againe and the rest with great hurt and much daunger escaped But from that time forwards they looked better to themselues and haue learned to know it so that at this present they watch for it and yet it giueth them worke enough to doe This storme falling ouer their heads in this sorte continueth through the whole Countrey of Terra Donatal vntil you passe the Cape de bona Speranza The 12. of March being vnder 31. degrees wée were right in the winde and had a calme whereupon we stroke all our sayles and so lay driuing 4. dayes together which the Portingalles call Payraes hauing a verie high sea which tossed our shippes in such sort that the Saylers estéemed it to be worse then a storme for that there the waues of the Sea mette in such sorte on all sides and clasped the shippe in such manner betwixt them that they made all her ribbes to cracke and in a manner to open so that it is very dangerous for the shippes We were in very great care for our Fouke-maste and therefore we bound our Mastes and all the shippes about with Cables as harde as possible wee might This continued till the 17. of March and then we had a little wind so that we hoised saile againe but it continued no longer then to the next day and then we fell againe into the wind and had a storme wherewith our maine yard brake and then againe wee stroke al our sails and so lay driuing or Payraering as the Portingalles call it In the meane time we mended our maine yard and so wee continued driuing without our sailes till the 20. of March with great risings of the waues of the sea which much tormented vs as in that place they commonly doe all the which time we were vnder 31. degrées and could not passe forward In that time we saw many birdes which the Portingals call Antenalen and are as bigge as Duckes The 2◠of March wee had a little winde but very sharpe yet we hoysed our sailes and sayled by the wind The next night after we had a calme which continued to the 22. day and then we fell againe into the winde with so great a storme that wee were compelled to strike all our sayles which wee coulde hardly pull in and could not stay the shippe in any sort it draue so fast whereby wee were in great daunger so that wee were compelled to binde the bonnet about the Fore-castle which was our sayle for other sayle we might not beare and so sayled backwarde whether the winde would driue vs thereby to haue some ease and yet we had enough to doe for wee were compelled to throwe our great Boate ouer bord with all the chests pots and vesselles that stoode vpon the Hatches with other wares such as came first to hand This storme continued for the space of two dayes three nights without ceasing The 25. of March being the day before Palme sunday we had a better wind and weather after we had giuen great almes to our blessed Ladie of the Annuntiation whose Feast was vppon that day and again hoysed vp our sayles keeping our course towards the Cape At the same time we had a disease in our ship that tooke vs in y e mouth lippes throate and tongue which tooke off the skin and made them swell whereby they could not eate but with great paine and not one in the ship but had it The eight of Aprill in the Morning after we had sayled fifteene daies before the winde towards the Cape we perceiued some signes of the land which is greene water but wee found no ground yet was it not aboue fortie miles from the land according to the Pilots iudgement We saw there also diuers of the Birds called Mangas de Velludo that is to say Veluet sleues for they haue vpon the ends of their wings blacke points like Veluet all the rest beeing white and somewhat gray which they hold for a certaine signe of land that lyeth within the Cape de Bona Speranza called Baya de la Goa or the Bay of the Lake and lyeth vnder thirtie thrée degrées a halfe from the coast that reacheth towards Mosambique The ninth of Aprill at night we were againe right in the winde being vnder thirtie fiue degrees and a halfe with a great storme and foule wether that continued till the 14. of the same Month so that we were compelled not being able to endure the force of the Sea with the continuall storme and foule wether to sayle back againe before the wind with the halfe of our Fouke sayle vp for that wee found our selues not strong enough to driue without sayles as the shippes commonly vse to doe which oftentimes is the cause of their casting away as it may well be iudged by reason of the great force and strength of the waues that runne there so that it seemeth almost impossible for a ship to beare out so great a force though it were of Iron And although we sayled before the winde yet wée had danger inough for that the Sea came behinde and ouer our shippe and filled all the Hatches whereby wee were compelled to binde our Mastes Cables and all the shippe round about with Ropes that with y e great force of the Sea it might not stirre and flye in péeces And forced wee were to Pumpe night and day hauing at each ende of the Fouke-yarde a rope that reached to the Pilot and at each rope there stoode fifteene or sixteene men the Pilot sitting in his seate and the vnder Pilot behinde vpon the sterne of the shippe to marke the course of the Sea and so to aduertise the other Pilot. At the ruther there stoode ten or twelue men and the other Saylers vpon the Hatches to rule the sayles as the waues came and couered the shippe the vnder Pilot called and then the chiefe Pilot spake to them at the Ruther to hold stiffe and commaunded the ropes that were at the Fouke yarde to bee pulled stiffe the Saylers likewise and the chiefe Boteswaine standing on the Hatches to keepe the ship right in the waues for if the waues had once gotten vs about that they had entred on the sides of the shippe it had certainly beene said of vs Requiescant in pace And it was there almost as cold as it is here with vs in winter when it freeseth not whereby wee were all sore toyled and in a manner out of hart so that wee esteemed our selues cleane cast away for we were forced by turnes to go to the ruther from thence to the pumpe not one excepted so that we had no time to sleepe rest eate nor cloath our selues and to help vs the better the staffe of our Ruther brake in péeces and had
with great deuotion promise of other wonderfull things when they came to land at the last God comforted vs and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of Aâ—â—ill the wether began to cleéere vp and therewith we were in better comfort The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne and found it to be â—6 degrées and againe we saw greene water and some birds which they call Alcatraces and many Sea-wolues which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona SperaÌ„za as we thought were hard by the land but yet saw none the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller and were in great hope to passe the Cape so that the men began to be in better comfort by reason of the signes we haue seene All that day we saw greene water till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice and in the night following we cast out the Lead and found no ground which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas or the cape of needles which lieth vnder 35 degrees and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza which lieth vnder 34 degrées a half And because that about this cape Das Agulhas there is ground found at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land we knew wee were past it as also by the colour of the water and the birds which are alwaies found in those countries and the better to assure vs thereof the great high sea left vs that had so long tormented vs and then we found a smoother water much differing from the former so that as theÌ„ we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice with so great ioy that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen and withall had a good winde though somewhat cold The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza with a great and generall gladnes it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin not once seeing any land or sand at all but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape which happened very seldome for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape and to know the land thereby to know certainlie that they are past it for then their degrees must lessen and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique as to the Iland of S. Helena for although they can well perceiue it by y e water yet is it necessary for them to see the land the better to set their course vnto S. Helena wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it if they leaue that course for if they once passe it they can not come to it again because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind which is South east and thus hauing passed the Cape we got before the wind The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bona Speranza according to the custome with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe for that as theÌ„ they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal and not to turne againe into India for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water at least 15 or â—â— miles from the land as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Feyâ—oins somewhat greater then sea mâ—wâ—s being white full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies very easie to be known from al other birds These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape and hauing passed it they set their course for S. Helena Northwest Northwest by west The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind and so continued till the next day and theÌ„ we had a calm being vnder 3â— degrees on Portingal side The â—9 of Apr. wâ— gâ—t before the wind which is the generall wind y t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere vntill y â— come to the Equinoctial line and is a Southeast wind so y t they may wel let their sayles stand lay them down to slâ—ep for in y e greatest wind y t bloweth there they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast The 12 of May in the morning betimes we discouered the IlaÌ„d of S. Helena whereat there was so great ioy in the ship as if we had bene in heauen as then we were about 2 miles from y e land the Iland lying from vs West south west whereunto we sayled so close that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore being hard by it we sayled about a corner of the land that from vs lay Northwest which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land West North west the land on that side beeing so high and still that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half and compassed about y e other corner that lay westward from vs which corner béeing compassed we presentlie perceiued the shippes that lay in the road which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner close vnder the land so that the land as then lieth South east from them and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe as if they were in a hauen for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards but lower it can not come and they lie so close vnder the land that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore There is good ground there at 25 and 30 fadomes deep but if they chance to put further out or to passe beyond it they must goe forward for they can get no more vnto y e land and for this cause we kept so close to the shore that the height of the laÌ„d took the wind froÌ„ vs the ship wold not steer without wind so that it draue vpon the land wherby our horesprit touched y e shore therwith we thought that shippe goods had all beene cast away but by reason of the great depth being 1â— fadomes water and with the help of the Boats and men off the other ships that came vnto vs we put off from the land without any hurt and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker which is right against a valley that lyeth betwéene two high hilles wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena There we found fiue shippes which were the ship that came from Malacca and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies
the officers are so pleased and vse no more delaies The eight of August the officers of the ships tooke counsell together with the Gouernour of the Island what they were best to doe thinking it not good to follow the kinges aduise considering their long staying and fearing some other hard fortune if they should stay and because a great Gallion being a maÌ„ of warre and very strong lay as then before the Island wherein was the Gouernour of Brasilâ—a who by foule weather had put in there they concluded that this Gallion being well appointed should sayle with them to Lisbone and although they did it without the aduise and commandement of the king yet bad they rather so to aduenture their liues vpon the seas then againe to stay the danger of the Hauen for that the winter did daylie more and more increase so that they were not to looke for any better weather and in that sort appointing themselues as well as they could and taking in all necessarie prouisions the same day they all set saile with no small feare to fall into some misfortune by the way but because many that were of the ship of Malacca stayed at Tercera to saue such goods as by any meanes might be saued and by that meanes to help themselues among the which was the Factor of the pepper béeing one of my acquaintance at whose request as also because the Pepper of that ship and of all the other ships belonged all to one Farmer by whom I was appointed Factor and séeing the necessitie he bad and that he alone could hardly dispatch so great a matter I tooke order for mine owne affaires and hauing dispatched it by other shippes I stayed there to help him till wee had further aduise and order from the Farmers of the Pepper and other spices and wares of the which goods we saued a great quantitie by meanes of Duckers and other Instruments that we vsed hauing aduise from the Farmers the King that it shuld not be long before they sent for vs willing vs to stay there and to looke vnto the goods This staying and fetching vs away continued as I said before for the space of two yeares and a halfe whereby you may consider the good order and pollicie of the Admiraltie of Portingall and with what diligence and care they séeke for the common profit of the land and the poore Marchantes of the Countrie whome they ought to fauor and help as much as possiblie they may but they do cleane contrarie as those which deale in Portingall doe well finde The 13. of August the ships came back againe vnto the Island of Tercera because they had a contrarie wind as also for want of fresh water but they ankered not The day before the Earle of Cumberland with â— or 7. ships of warre sayled by the Iland of Tercera to their great good fortune passed out of sight so that they dispatched themselues in all haste for the more securitie tooke with them 4. hundred Spaniards of those that lay in Garrison in the Island with theÌ„ they sayled towards Lisbon hauing a good wind so that within a 11. dayes after they arriued in the riuer of Lâ—sbone with great gladnes triumph for if they had stayed but one day longer before they had entred the riuer they had all béene taken by Captaine Drake who with 40. ships came before Cascalis at the same time that the Indian ships cast anker in the riuer of Lisbone being garded thither by diuers Gallies Now by the discourse of this long and perilous voiage you may sufficiently perceiue how that onely by the grace and speciall fauour of God the Indian ships doe performe their voiages yet with great miserie paine labour losse and hinderance wherby men may likewise consider the manner of their NauigatioÌ„ ordinances customes and gouernments of their ships so that in coÌ„parison of many other Voyages this present Voyage may be estéemed a happy prosperous voyage for oftentimes it chanceth that but one or two ships of the fiue that yearely saile to India come safe home as of late it hath bin séene some being taken and some lost altogether by their owne follies bad order as herin at large you may perceiue c. The 97. Chapter Of the description of the Islands of Acores of the Flemmish Islands THe Isles of Acores or the Flemmish Islands are â— that is Terceâ—a Saint Michael S. Mary S. George Gratiosa Pico Fayâ—el There are yet two Islands called Flores and Coraâ— which are not contained vnder the name of Acores but yet at this day are vnder the gouernment of the same Islands so that they are in all accounted â— Islands They are called Acores that is to say Sparhaukes or Haukes because that in their first discouerte they found many Sparhaukes in them whereof they hold the name although at this day there is not any there to be found They are also called the Flemmish Islands that is of the Neatherlanders because the first that inhabited the same were Neatherlanders whereof till this time there is a great number and ofspring remaining that in manner and behauiour are altogether like Neatherlanders and there is yet in the same Island a running water that issueth out of a hill so runneth into the sea where as yet those issues or ofspringes of NeatherlaÌ„ders inhabite is called Ariberâ—dos â—ramengos that is the Flemmish riuer The principall Iland of them al is that of Tercera called Iusuâ— de Iesus Câ—stus of Tercera It is betwéene 1â— or â—6 miles in compasse and is altogether a great Cliffe of land whereby in it there is little roome for it is as it were walled round about with Cliffes but where any strand or land is there standeth a sort It hath no Hauens nor entrance of waters for the securitie and safetie of the ships but only before the chiefe towne called Angra where it hath an open Hauen which in forme is like a halfe Moone by the Portingales called Angra whereof the towne hath her name It hath on the one side in manner of an elbow sticking forth two high hilles called Bresyl which stretch into the sea so y t a far off they séeme to bee deuided from the Iland Those hils are very high so that being vpon them a man may see at the least 10 12 and sometimes 15. miles into the sea being cleare weather Vpon these hils there stand two small stone pillers where there is a CeÌ„tinell placed that continually watcheth to 〈◊〉 what ships are at sea and so to aduertise those of the Island for that as many ships as hee séeth coÌ„ming out of the west that is from the Spanish Indies or Brasâ— Câ—bo vâ— Guinea and the Portingal Indies and all other waies lying south or west for euerie ship he setteth a flagge vppon the piller in the west and when the ships which he deserieth are more then 5. then hee setteth vp a great auncient betokening a whole fleet
of ships the like he doth vpon the other piller which standeth in the East for such Shippes as come from Portingall or other places out of the East or North partes these pillers may bee easily séene in all places of the towne by reason of the highnes of the hils so that there is not one ship or sayle that is at sea or maketh towards the Island but it is presently knowne throughout all the towne and ouer all the whole Iland for the watch is not holden onely vppon those two hils iutting into the sea but also vpon all corners hilles and cliffes throughout the Iland and as soone as they perceiue any ships the Gouerner and Rulers are presently aduertised therof that they may take such order therein as need requireth Vpon the furthest corner into the sea standeth a sort right against another fort that answereth it so that those two forts doe shut and defend the mouth or open hauen of the towne where the ships lie in the road and so no ship can either goe in or came forth without the licence or permission of those two forts This towne of 〈◊〉 is not only the chiefe towne of 〈◊〉 but also of al other townes within y e Ilands thereabouts Therein is resident the Bishop the Gouernour for the King and the chiefe place of iudgement or tribunall seate of all the Islands of Acores Three miles from this towne lieth another towne towards the North called Vâ— de Prava for Pâ— is as much to say as strand because it lieth hard by a great strand and for that cause there is little traffique thether as not hauing any conuenient place for ships to come at it yet some times there coÌ„meth some one that by reason of contrarie wind cannot get before the towne of Angrâ— and so by constraint discharge their goods in that Towne which from thence are carried by land to Angra and yet some part thereof is spent and vsed there It is walled and well housed but not many people 〈◊〉 and such as are in it doe get their liuings most by husbandrie for there are 〈…〉 corne lands The Island is likewise very fruitful and pleasant it hath much corne and wine but the Wine is not verie good to carrie into other Countries there abouts because it is small and will not long continue so that it is vsed in the Countrey by the common people but such as are of wealth for the most part drinke wines of Madera and Canaria It aboundeth in flesh fish all other necessaries and meats for mans body where with in time of neede they might helpe themselues Oyle there is none but it commeth out of Portugall Also Salt pottes pannes and all kinde of earthen vesselles Chalke and such like are brought thether out of other places for there they are not to bee founde for fruites they haue besides Peaches of diuers kindes and in so great abundance that it is strange Cherries Plummes Walnuttes Hasle nuttes Chesnuttes but those not very good of Apples Peares Oranges and Lemons with all such like fruites there are sufficient Of all sorts of Hearbs and plants as Cole worts Radishes and such like they haue at their certayne tunes of the yeare They haue likewise in that Island a certaine fruite that groweth vnder the earth like Radishes or other roots but the leaues or plants are trees like Vines but different in leaues and groweth long wise vpon the grounde it beareth a fruite called Baâ—aâ—as that is very good and is so great that it weigheth a pound some more some lesse but little esteemed and yet it is a great sustenance and foode for the common sort of people It is of good account in Portâ—gall for thether they vse to bring it for a present and those of the Ilande by reason of the great abundance doe little esteeme it There is also another kinde of stuffe that is sowed like corne and is a fruite it groweth vppon the roote of the grasse or leaues and is round and as bigge as a great Pease but not so rounde in eating it tasteth like Cardnuttes but harder to bite it is like wise a good meate and much esteemed in other places but by reason of the great quantitie thereof it is most vsed to fatten their Hogges and is called â—unâ— There is also in the Iland a certaine plant which is found in all places therof in the open fields it groweth as high as a man and beareth no fruite onely the roote thereof is a substance of the thâ—â—knesse of a mans two fiâ—tes and in shew as if it were natural golden hair and in handling like soft silke which is vsed there to stuffe and fill their beddes in steede of wooll and feathers and I do certainly beleeue if any man of vnderstanding woulde take it in hand it would well be wouen The principallest trafâ—â—â—ue of this Iland is their woad such as wee vse for â—â—ing where of much is made in that Iland and is fetched from thence by Englishmen Scottes and French men in barter for cloathes and other wares who continually traffique into that Iland and although by reason of the warres the Englishmen are forbidden to traffique thether yet vnder the names of Scots and French men they haue continuall trade there The Iland hath not any wilde beastes or fowles but very fewe sauing onely Canarie birdes which are there by thousands wher many birders take them and thereof make a dayly liuing by carying them into diuers places It hath also wonderfull many Quailes which they call Codâ—â—nisen of tame fowles as Hennes Gynny hens are there likewise great store Hunting is there little vsed but only for Cunnies which are very great Hares Harts Partridges Venison and such like are not there to be found because of the little respect or care the inhabitantes haue to breede any such thinges Fish is very plentifull and of diuers kindes and very good in Summer there is great store taken for in Winter they can hardly brooke the seas The chiefe monthes of winter weather for raine and stormes are Ianuarie Februarie March and Aprill and also the month of September is commonly very stormie all the other monthes it is commonly good weather The Countrey is verie hillie and in some places wooddy full of bushes and trees it is hard to trauel because their waies for the most parte are stony so that for a mile or a mile and a halfe together men can sée no ground but only stones which for sharpenesse and fashion shew like pointed Diamantes whereby one can hardly tread vpon it least it should cut through both shooes and feet and yet it is all planted with Vines so full and thick that in summer time you can hardly see through it for that the rootes thereof doe grow betweene the stones so that a man would think it impossible that any thing should grow therein and which is more in some places it seemeth impossible for a man to tread vpon it being so wilde
wounded both himself and diuers of his men whereby they were forced to depart without hauing any thing there From Tercera North northwest about seuen or eight myles lyeth the little Iland called Gratiosa is but 5. or 6. mile in compasse a very pleasaunt and fyne Island full of all fruites and all other victualles so that it not onley feedeth it self but also Tercera and the other Islandes about it and hath no other kinde of merchandise it is well built and inhabited by Portingales and hath no soldiers in it because it is not able to heare the charge The Earle of Comberland while I lay in Tercera came vnto that Iland where himself in person with seuen or eight in his company went on land asking certaine beastes Hennes and other Victuals with wyne and fresh water which they willinglie gaue him and therewith hee departed from thence without doing them anie hurt for the which the inhabitantes thanked him and commended him for his curtesie and keeping of his promise From Tercera West North West eight or nyne miles lyeth the Iland of S. George It is about twelue myles long but not aboue 2. or 3. myles at the furthest in breadth it is wooddie and full of hilles it hath no speciall traffique but onelie some Woad and yet verie little of it The inhabitants liue most by Cattell and tilling of the land and bring much victuals to sell in Tercera it hath likewise many Cedar trees and other kindes of wood that from thence are brought vnto Tercera and sold vnto the Ioyners which for that occasion dwell onlie in Tercera From S. George West Southwest â— miles lyeth the Iland called Fayael which is 17. or 18. miles in compasse it is one of the best Ilands next vnto Tercera and S. Michaels it aboundeth in all sorts of victuailes both flesh and fish so that from this Iland the most part of victuailes and necessaries commeth by whole Caruels vnto Tercera it hath likewise much Woad so that many English shippes doe traffique thether The principall road and place is the towne called Vitta dotta there the ships likewise doe lie in the open sea vnder the land as they do before al y e other IlaÌ„ds by this town there lieth a fortresse but of smal importance because the inhabitants of themselues do offer to defend the Iland against all enemies the soldiers were discharged from thence which which before that time lay in the fort complayning that they were not able to maintaine nor lodge them The same time that the Earle of Cumberland was in the Iland of Gratiosa he came likewise to Fayael where at the first time that he came they beganne to resist him but by reason of some controuersie among them they let him land where he rased the Castle to the ground and sunke all their Ordinance in the Sea taking with him certaine Caruels and ships that lay in the road with prouision of all things that he wanted and therewith departed againe to Sea Whereupon the King caused the principall actors therein to bee punished and sent a companie of Souldiers thether againe which went out of Tercera with all kind of warlike munition and great shotte making the fortresse vp againe the better to defend the Iland trusting no more in the Portingales In that Iland are the most part of the Netherlanders ofspring yet they vse the Portingales language by reason they haue béene so long conuersant among them and those that vsed the Dutch tongue are all dead they are greatly affected to the Netherlanders and strangers From Fayael Southeast thrée miles and from Saint George Southwest foure miles and from Tercera Southwest and by West twelue miles lyeth the Iland called Pico which is more then fiftéene miles in length It is so named of a high mountain that standeth therein called Pico which is so high â—t some thinke it is higher then the Pico of 〈◊〉 When it is cleare weather it may as perfectly beseene in Tercera as if it were not halfe a mile from thence and yet it lyeth aboue twentie fiue miles from it for it is at the furthest end of the Iland towards Fayael The toppe of it is seene cleare and bright but the nether part is couered with cloudes and with the Horizon whereby the Iland is much spoken of It is verie fruitfull of all kinds of victuals like Fayael and hath great store of woode as Cedars all other kinds and also the costly wood Teâ—xo There they build many Caruels and small ships from thence by reason of the abundance of woode they serue the other Ilands with woode It is also inhabited as the rest are their chiefe traffique being Cattle and husbandrie It hath much wine and the best in all those Ilands and it hath the sauorest and pleasantest Oranges that are throughout all Portingal so that they are brought into Tercera for a present as being ther verie much esteemed and in my iudgement they are the best that euer I tasted in any place And because the towne of Angra in the Iland of Tercera is the chiefe towne and ruler ouer al the Flemish Ilands I thought good to set it downe in this place in the full proportion with all the stréetes Forts and Road or open Hauen together with the hilles called Bresil where the sentinell is holden for all shippes that come into those Ilands al liuely described as in my simple skill I could comprehend and deuise it The 98. Chapter Of the Ilands of Coruo and Flores FRom Tercera westwarde to the Iland named Flores are seuentie miles it is aboute seauen miles compasse it is also inhabited by Portingales and hath no speciall marchandise but onely some wood it is full of Cattle and other necessarie prouisions and lyeth open to all the world and to whosoeuer will come thether as well Englishmen as others for that the inhabitants haue not the power to resist them A myle from thence Northward lyeth a little Iland of two or three miles in compasse called De Coruo The inhabitants are of the same people that dwel in Flores Betwéene those two Ilands and round about them the Englishmen doe commonly stay to watch the ships that come out of the West for those are the first Ilands that the shippes looke out for and descrie when they sayle vnto Tercera wherby the inhabitants doe but little prosper because they are at the pleasure and commaundement of all that will come vnto them and take their goods from them as oftentimes it happeneth Yet for all their pouertie not to loose both landes and goods they must content themselues and Sayle with euerie winde The I le of Tercera lyeth vnder thirtie nine degrees in the same height that Lisbone lyeth and is distant from Lisbone lying right East and West two hundred and fiftie Spanish miles This shall suffice for the description of the Flemmish Ilands called the Azores which by dayly traueling vnto them are sufficiently knowne for that at this time many
met with an English shippe that after they had fought long together tooke them both About 7. or 8. Monthes before there had béene an English shippe in Tercera that vnder the name of a Frenchman came to traffique in the Iland there to lade woode being discouered was both shippe and goods confiscated to the Kings vse and all the men kept prisoners yet went they vp and downe the streetes to get their liuings by labouring like slaues being in déede as safe in that Iland as if they had beene in prison But in the end vpon a Sunday all the Saylers went downe behind the hils called Bresil wher they found a Fisher boate whereinto they got rowed into the Sea to the Earle of Cumberlands ship which to their great fortune chanced at that time to come by the Iland and Ankered with his shippes about halfe a mile from the Road of Angra hard by two small Ilandes which lye about a Bases shot from the Iland and are full of Goates Buckes and shéepe belonging to the inhabitants of the Iland of Tercera Those Saylers knew it well and thereupon they rowed vnto them with their Boates and lying at Anker that day they fetched as many Goates and shéepe as they had neede of which those of the towne and of the Iland well saw and beheld yet durst not once goe forth so there remained no more on land but the Master the Marchant of the said English ship This Master had a brother in lawe dwelling in England who hauing newes of his brothers imprisonment in Tercera got licence of the Quéene of England to set forth a ship therewith to sée if hee could recouer his losses of the Spaniards by taking some of them and so to redéeme his brother that laye prisoner in Tercera and he it was that tooke the two Spanish ships before the towne The Master of the ship aforesaid standing on the shore by me and looking vpon them for he was my great acquaintance the ships being taken that were worth 300. thousand Ducats he sent all the men on land sauing only two of the principal Gentlemen which he kept a borde therby to ransome his brother and sent the Pilot of one of the Indian ships that were taken with a letter to the Gouernour of Tercera wherein hee wrote that he should deliuer him his brother and hée would send the two Gentlemen on land if not he would sayle with them into England as indeed he did because the Gouernor would not doe it saying that the Gentlemen might make that suite to the King of Spaine himselfe This Spanish Pilot we bid to supper with vs and the Englishmen likewise wher hee shewed vs all the manner of their fight much â—â—mmending the order and manner of the Englishmens fighting as also for their curteous vsing of him but in the end the English Pilote likewise stole away in a French ship without paying any ransome as yet In the month of Ianuarie 159â— there arriued one shippe alone in Tercera that came from the Spanish Indies brought newes that there was a Fleete of a hundreth shippes which put out from y e Firm land of the Spanish Indies and by a storme were driuen vpon the coast called Florida where they were all cast away she hauing only escaped wherin there were great riches many men lost as it may well be thought so that they made their account that of 22â— ships that for certaine were knowne to haue put out of Noua Spaâ—gâ—a Santo Domingo Hauana Capoverde Brasilia Guinea c. In the yeare 1589. to sayle for Spaine and Portingall there were not aboue fourteene or fiftéene of them arriued there in safetie all the rest being either drowned burst or taken In the same Moneth of Ianuarie there arriued in Tercera 15 or 16 shippes that came from Siuilia which were most Flie-boates of the lowe countries and some Britons that were arrested in Spain these came full of soldiers and well appointed with munition to lade the siluer that lay in Tercera and to fetch Aluares de Flores by the kings commandement into Spain And because that tyme of the yeare there is alwaies stormes about those Ilandes therefore they durst not enter into the road of Tercera for that as then it blew so great a storme that some of their shippes that had ankered were forced to cut downe their mastes and were in danger to be lost and among the rest a shippe of Bâ—lcay ranne against the land and was striken in péeces but al the men saued theÌ„selues The other shippes were forced to keepe the sea and separate themselues one from the other where wind and weather would driue them vntill the 15 of March for that in all that time they could not haue one day of faire weather to anker in whereby they indured much miserie cursing both the siluer and the Iland This storme being past they chanced to meet with a small English ship of about 40 tunnes in bignes which by reason of the great wind could not beare all her sayles so they set vpon her and tooke her and with the English flagge in their Admiralles stern they came as proudly into the hauen as if they had conquered all the Realme of England but as the Admirall that bare the English flagge vpon her sterne was entering into the road there came by chance two English shippes by the Iland that payd her so well for her paynes that they were forced to cry Misericordia and without all doubt had taken her if she had bene but a myle further in the sea but because she got vnder the Fortresse which also began to shoot at the Englishmen they were forced to leaue her and to put further into the sea hauing slayne 5. or 6. of the Spaniardes The English men that were taken in the small shippe were put vnder hatches and coupled in boltes and after they had beene prisoners three or foure dayes there was a Spanish Ensigne-bearer in the shippe that had a brother slayne in the fleet that came for England who as then mynding to reuenge his death and withal to shew his manhood to the English captiues that were in the English shippe which they had taken as is aforesayd tooke a poinyard in his hand and went downe vnder the hatches where finding the poore Englishmen sitting in boltes with the same poinyard hee stabbed sixe of them to the heart which two others of them perceyuing clasped each other about the middle because they would not bee murthered by him threw themselues into the sea and there were drowned This act was of all the Spaniardes much disliked and verie ill taken so that they caryed the Spaniard prisoner vnto Lisbon where béeing ariued the King of Spaine willed he should bee sent into England that the Queene of England might vse him as shee thought good which sentence his friends by intreaty got to be reuersed notwithstanding he commanded he should without all fauor be beheaded but vpon a good
Fryday the Cardinall going to Masse all the Captaines and Commanders made so great intreaty for him that in the end they got his pardon This I thought good to note that men might vnderstand the bloodie and honest mindes of the Spaniardes when they haue men vnder their subiection The same two English shippes which followed the Spanish Admirall till he had got vnder the Fort of Tercera as I said before put into the sea where they met with an other Spanish ship béeing of the same Fléet that had likewise bene scatered by the storme and was onlie missing for the rest lay in the road this small shippe the Englishmen tooke and sent all the men on shore not hurting any of them but if they had knowne what had beene done vnto the foresaid English captiues I beleeue they would soone haue reuenged themselues as afterwards manie an innocent soule payed for it This ship thus taken by the English men was the same that was kept and coÌ„fiscated in the Iland of Tercera by the English men that got out of the Iland in a fisher boate as I sayd before and was sold vnto the Spaniardes that as then came from the Indies wherewith they sayled to S. Lucas where it was also arrested by the Duke and appointed to goe in company to fetch the siluer in Tercera because it was a shippe that sayled well but among the spaniardes fleet it was the meanest of the company By this meanes it was taken from the Spaniards and caryed into England and the owners had it againe when they least thought of it The 19 of Marche the aforesaid shippes being 19 in nuÌ„ber set sayle hauing laden the Kings siluer and receiued in Aluaro Flores de Quiniones with his company and good prouision of necessaries munition and soldiers that were fullie resolued as they made shewe to fight valiantly to the last man before they would yeeld or lose their riches and although they set their course for S. Lucas the wind draue them vnto Lisbon which as it seemed was willing by his force to helpe them and to bring them thether in safetie although Aluaro de Flores hoth against the wind and weather would perforce haue sayled to Saint Lucas but being constrained by the wind and importunitie of the Saylers that protested they would require their losses and damages of him he was content to sayle to Lisbone from whence the Siluer was by land carried into Siuilia At Cape Saint Vincent there lay a Fleete of twentie English shippes to watch for the Armada so that if they had put into Saint Lucas they had fallen right into their handes which if the wind had serued they had done And therefore they may say that the wind had lent them a happie Viage for if the Englishmen had met with them they had surely beene in great danger and possibly but few of them had esâ—â—ped by reason of the feare wherewith they were possessed because fortune or rather God â—as wholly against them Which is a sufficient cause to make y e Spaniards out of hart to the contrarie to giue the Englishmen more courage and to make them bolder for that they are victorious stout and valiant and seeing al their enterprises doe take so good effect that thereby they are become Lordes and masters of the Sea and neede care for no man as it well appeareth by this briefe discourse In the month of March 15â—â— There was a blasing Starre with a tayle seene in 〈◊〉 that continued foure nights together stretching the taile towards the South In the Month of May a Caruel of Fayâ— arriued at Tercera in the Hauen or Roade of Angra laden with Oxen sheepe Hennes and all other kinds of victuals and full of people which by a storme had broken her Ruther whereby the Sea cast her about and therewith shee sunke and in her were drowned three children and a Frier Franciscan the rest of the men saued themselues by swimming and by helpe from the shore but all the Cattle and Hennes came drowned to land the Frier was buried with a great procession and solemnitie esteeming him for a Saint because hee was taken vp dead with his Booke between his armes for the which cause euery man came to looke on him as a myracle giuing gret offerings to say Masses for his soule The first of August the Gouernour of Tercera reeceiued aduise out of Portingall and Spaine that two yeares before the date of 〈…〉 there were sayled out of England 〈◊〉 great shippes wel apointed with full resolution to take their fourme seuen of them into the Portingall Indies and the other fiue to Maâ— of the which fiue two were cast away in passing the Straightes of Magellaneâ— and three sayled to Malacâ—â— but what they had done there was as then not knowne The other seuen passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and arriued in India where they put into the coast of Malabar and there tooke sixe Foistes of the Malabares but let them goe againe and two Turkish Gallies that came out of the Straightes of Mecca or the redde Sea to whome likewise they did no hurt And there they laded their shippes with Spices and returned backe againe on their way but where or in what place they had laden it was not certainely knowne sauing onely that thus much was written by the Gouernour of India and sent ouer land to Venice and from thence to Madâ— The seuenth of August a Nauie of English shippes was seene before Tercera being 20. in number and fiue of them the Quéenes shippes their Generall was one Martin Furbuâ—her as wee after had intelligence They came purposely to watch for the Fleet of the Spanish Indies and for the Indian shippes and the ships of the countries in the West which put the Ilanders in great feare specially those of Fayâ—el for that the Englishmen sent a Trumpet to the Gouernour to aske certaine wine flesh and other victuals for their mony and good friendship They of Fayael did not onely refuse to giue eare vnto them but with a shot killed their messenger or Trumpeter which the Englishmen tooke in euill part sending them word that they were best to looke to themselues stand vppon their gard for they ment to come and visite them whether they would or no. The Gouernor made them answere that he was there in the behalfe of his Maiestie of Spaine and that he would doe his best to keepe them out as he was bound but nothing was done althogh they of Fayael were in no litle feare sending to Tercera for aide from whence they had certaine Barkes with poulder and munition for warre with some Bisket and other necessarie prouision The 3. of August we receiued very certaine newes out of Portingal that ther were 80. ships put out of y e Câ—â—â—nlâ—o laden with victuals Munition money and Souldiers to goe for Britaine to aide the Catholicks and Leaguers of Fraunce against the King of Nauarre At the same time two Netherland Hulkes comming
rich Gentleman in England and had great yearely reuenewes of his owne inheritance but he was a man very vnquiet in his minde and greatly affected to warre in so much as of his owne priuate motion hee offered his seruice to the Queene he had performed many valiant actes and was greatlie feared in these Islands and knowne of euery man but of nature very seuere so that his owne people hated him for his fiercenes and spake verie hardly of him for when they first entred into the Fleete or Armado they had their great sayle in a readinesse and might possiblie enough haue sayled away for it was one of the best ships for sayle in England and the Master perceiuing that the other shippes had left them and followed not after commaÌ„ded the great sayle to be cut that they might make away but Sir Richard Greenefield threatned both him and all the rest that were in the ship that if any man laid hand vppon it he would cause him to be hanged and so by that occasion they were compelled to fight and in the end were taken He was of so hard a complection that as he continued among the Spanish Captaines while they were at dinner or supper with him he would carouse three or foure glasses of wine and in a brauerie take the glasses betweene his teeth and crash them in peeces and swallow them downe so that often times the blood ran out of his mouth without any harme at all vnto him and this was told me by diuers credible persons that many times stoode and behelde him The English men that were left in the ship as the captaine of the souldiers the Master and others were dispersed into diuers of the Spanish ships that had taken the where there had almost a new fight arisen betweene the Biscaines and the Portingales while ech of them would haue the honour to haue first borded her so that there grew a great noise and quarrell among them one taking the chiefe ancient the other the flagge and the Captaine and euerie one held his owne The ships that had borded her were altogether out of order and broken and many of their men hurt whereby they were compelled to come into the Island of Tercera there to repaire themselues where being ariued I my chaÌ„ber fellow to heare some newes went abord on of the ships being a great at Biscaine and one of the twelue Apostles whose Captaine was called Bertandono that had bin Generall of the Biscaynes in the fleete that went for England Hee séeing vs called vs vp into the gallerie where with great curtesie hee receiued vs beeing as then set at dinner with the English Captaine that sate by him and had on a sute of blacke veluet but he could not tell vs any thing for that he could speake no other language but English and Latine which Baâ—tandano also could a little speake The English Captaine got licence of the gouernour that hee might come on land with his weapon by his side and was in our lodging with the Englishman that was kept prisoner in the Iland being of that ship wherof the saylers got away as I said before The Gouernour of Tercera bad him to dinner shewed him great curtesâ—e The Master likewise with licence of Bartandano came on land and was in our lodging and had at the least ten or twelue woundes as well in his head as on his body whereof after that being at sea betwéene Lisbone the Ilands he died The Captaine wrote a letter wherein he declared all the manner of the fight and left it with the English Marchant that lay in our lodging to send it to the Lord Admiral of England This English Captaine comming vnto Lisbone was there well receiued and not any hurt done vnto him but with good conuoy sent to Sentinial from thence sayled into England with all the rest of the Englishmen that were taken prisoners The Spanish armie stated at the Island of 〈◊〉 til the last of September to assemble the rest of the fleet together which in the end were to the number of 14â— saile of ships partly comming from India and partly of the Army being altogether ready vnto saile to 〈◊〉 in good company there sodainely rose so hard and cruell a storme that those of the Island did affirme that in mans memorie there was neuer any such seen or heard of before for it seemed the sea would haue swallowed vp the Islands the water mounting higher than the Cliffes which are so high that it amaseth a man to beholde them but the sea reached aboue them and liuing fishes were throwne vppon the land This storme continued not only a day or two with one wind but seauen or eight dayes continually the wind turning round about in all places of the compasse at the least twice or thrice during that time and all alike with a continuall storme and tempest most terrible to behold euen to vs that were on shore much more then to such as were at sea so that only on the coastes and Cliffes of the Iland of Tercera there were aboue twelue ships cast away and not only vppon the one side but round about it in euery corner wherby nothing els was heard but complayning crying lamenting and telling here is a shippe broken in peeces against the Cliffes there another and all the men drowned so that for the space of 20. dayes after the storme they did nothing els but fish for dead men that continually came driuing on the shore Among the rest was the English ship called the Reuenge that was cast away vpon a Cliffe nere to the Iland of Tercera where it brake in a hundred péeces and sunke to the ground hauing in her â—â— men Gallegos Biscaines and others with some of the captiue Englishmen whereof but one was saued that got vp vpon the Cliffes aliue and had his body and head all wounded and hee being on shore brought vs the newes desiring to be shriuen thervpon presently died The Reuenge had in her diuers faire brasse péeces that were all sunke in the sea which they of the Island were in good hope to waigh vp againe The next summer after among these shippes that were cast away about Tercera was likewise a Flie boat one of those that had bin arested in Portugall to serue the king called the white Doue The Master of her was one Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland and there were in her one hundred souldiers as in euerie one of the rest there was He being ouer ruled by the Captaine that he could not be Master of his owne sayling here and there at the mercie of God as the storme droue him in the end came within the sight of the Island of Tercera which the Spaniards perceiuing thought al their safety only to consist in putting into the road compelling the Master and the Pilot to make towards the Island although the Master refused to doe it saying that they were most sure
wee receiue further aduise and order from his Maiestie of Spaine All this being thus past the Farmers of pepper and other Marchants that had their goods in Tercera which were taken out of the lost ship that came from Malacca seeing that the hope of any Armada or any ships in the kinges behalfe to be sent to fetch it was all in daine they made request vnto his Maiestie that he would grant them licence euery mâ—n particularly to ship his goods in what ship he would at his owne aduenture which in the end after long sute was granted vpon condition that euery man should put in suerties to deliuer the goods in the custome house at Liâ—bone to the end the king might be paâ—ed his custome as also that the goods that should bee deliuered vnto them in Tercera should all bee registred wherevpon the Farmers of pepper with other Marchants agreed with a Flushinger to fetch al the Cloues Nutmegs Mace and other spices and goods that belonged vnto them the Pepper onely excepted which as then the King would not graunt to lade The same shippe arriued in Tercera about the last of Nouember and because it was some what dangerous being the latter end of the yeare wee laded her with all the speed we could for as then the coast was cleare of Englishmen To bee short this Flushinger being laden with most part of the goods sauing the Pepper that was left behind we set saile for Liâ—bone passing some small stormes not once meeting with any ship but onely vppon the coast where wee saw ten Hollanders that fayled with corne towards 〈◊〉 and other places in Italie and so by Gods helpe vpon the second of Ianuarie Anno â—5â—â— we arriued in the riuer of Liâ—bone being nine yeares after my departure from thence and there I stayed till the mouth of Iulie to dispatch such things as I had to doe and vpon the seuenteenth of the same month I went to Sentinial where certaine Hollanders lay with whom I went for 〈◊〉 The 2â— of Julie wee set saile being in all twelue ships and because we had a contrarie winde we put out higher into the sea The 2â— of the same month wee had a lasting storme whereby wee ranne against another ship being both in a hundred dangers to bee sunke for we were within a spanne of touching one another but God holp vs and wee parted from each other which almost séemed impossible for that the bore sprite of the ship that came against vs strake vpon our Fankyard and there with brake in peeces and presently thereupon his Fouke-maste fell ouer borde whereby hee was forced to leaue the fléete Another also of our companie had a leake so that he made towardes the coast againe where to saue the men hee ran the ship on shore as afterwards we vnderstood and so we remained but ten in companie The 1. of August being 90. miles in the sea because the wind held contrarie so that we could not keepe our right course we espyed three strange shippes but were not long before we lost the sight of them againe The 4. of August there came three other shippes among our fléete which we perceiued to bee Biscaines whereupon wee made towardes them and shot certaine peeces at them and so they left vs. The 16. of August the winde being yet contrarie and because wee were about 15. passengers aborde our shippe our victuailes specially our drinke beganne to faile so that wee were constrained to keepe an order and to stint euery man to his portion being as then 120. miles from Heâ—ssant inwardes in the sea vnder 46. degrees which is called the half sea The 18. we had a storme whereby three of our fleet were left behind because they could not follow vs. The 24. of August we cast out the lead and found ground wherewith wee were all glad for it was the entrance into the channel betweene England and Fraunce The â—â— of August being in the channel there came two small English shippes to view our floete but presently put in againe to the coast of England The â—â— we descried land being loofeward from vs which was Goutsteâ— and Dâ—rtmouth The next day we passed by the Isle of Wight sayling alonge the coast The 30 of August we put into the head betwene Douer and Calleys where there laye one of the Queenes ships but she hoised anker and sailed to the coast of England without lookinge after vs so wee set fower men on shore and then we had a scant winde wherwith wee entred into the North sea not seeing any bodie The 1 of September being clowdie we had a storme out of the northwest wherby we could not descerne land but in the euening we met with two shippes that came out of the East countries which told vs they had seene land saying it was the Terel willing vs to follow them and so we discouered lande being the Vlie but wee thinking it to bee the Teâ—ell would no longer follow the other ships but put so neare vnto it that wee were in great danger and then we perceiued that we had deceiued our selues and saw the other ships to take another course towards the Terell but we had the wind so scant and were fallen so low that wee could hardly gette from the shore and withall we had a sodaine storme wherewith our Fouke maste brake our maine maste being alreadie crackt wherevppon wee were fully determined to anker there and stand vpon good comfort and hope in God and sodainely the wind came better so that with great paine and labour about Sunne setting wee entred the mouth of the Terel without any Pylot for that by reason of the great winde they durst not come out so that to conclude we got in and there with thankes giuen vnto God we ankered In the morning being the seconde of September our Gunner thinking to charge the Peeces and for ioy to shoote them off before the towne by fortune a ladle full of powder tooke fire and with the force thereof strake off all his right hande and burnt him in many places of his bodie wherewith our ioy was wholly quailed and abated The third of September wee ariued in Enchuisen where I founde my mother brother and sister all liuing and in good health it being twelue yeares nine monethes and a halfe after my departure from thence For the which God Almighty with his sonne Christ Jesus our Sauior be praised and blessed to whom belongeth al power honor and glorie now and for euermore Amen The end of the first booke THE SECOND BOOKE The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea Manicongo Angola Monomotapa and right ouer against them the Cape of S. Augustin in Brasilia with the compasse of the whole Ocean Seas together with the Ilands as S. Thomas S. Helena the Ascention with all their hauens channels depths shallows sands grounds Together also with diuers strange voyages made by the Hollanders also the description of the
inward partes of the same landes Likewise a further Description of the Carde of Madagascar otherwise called the Iland of S. Laurence with a discouery of all the shallows cliffes and numbers of Ilands in the Indian seas and the situation of the Countrey of the Cape de Bona Speranza passing along to Monomotapa Soffala and Mosambique and from thence to Quiloa Gorga Melinde Amara Barâ— Magadoxo Doara c. to the red sea and what further wanteth for the description thereof you shal find at large in Iohn Hughen of Linschotens book also the voâ—ages that the Portingall Pilots have made into â—ll pâ— of the Indies Extracted out of their sea Cardes bookes and notes of great experience And translated into Dutch by I. Hughen van Linschoten And now translated out of Dutch into English by W. â— THE KINGDOM OF CONGO LONDON Imprinted by John Wolfe 1598. THE SECOND BOOKE ¶ The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea Manâ—congo Angola Monomotapa and right ouer against them the Kape of Saint Augustine in Briâ—n with the compas of the whole Ocean Seas together with the Islands 〈…〉 S. Helena and the Aâ—enâ—iâ—n with all their Hauens 〈…〉 partes 〈…〉 Likewise a further description of the Card of Madaâ—ar â—herwise called the Island of S. Laurence with the discouery of all the 〈…〉 Chriâ—â— and numbers of Islands in the Indian Seas and the situation of the Countrie of the Cape de Bona Speranza passing along to Monâ—motapa Aeâ—ala Mosambâ—â—â—e and from thence to Quioloâ— Gorga Melinâ—e Amara â—aru Magadoâ—o Doara c. to the red Sea and what further wanteth for the description thereof you shall finde at large in Iohn Hughen of Linsâ—hotens booke Also the voyages that the Portingall pilots haue made into all places of the Indies extracted out of their Sea Cardes and bookes and translated into our mother tongue BEcause such as saile into India doo compasse the most part of Affrica therefore there are certaine Cardes placed in this booke which shewe those partes of that coast whereby the ships do saile and not speaking of the rich Islands of Canarâ—a and Cabo verde to al men well knewne and right ouer against them in Affrica the kingdomes of Gualata Tombuto and Meili whereof Gualata is very small and poore both of victuals and fruit hauing little else but Milie Tombuto great and populous abounding in corne beastes milke and butter but wanting salt Melli rich of corne flesh and cotten We will come lower towards Guineâ— a greater richer kingdome then the rest lying in Ethiopia or the Moores countrey which the better to vnderstand you must first knowe that the ancient Cosmographers haue diuided Affrica into foure partes as Barbaria Numidia Libia and Aethiopia or the Moores countrey not comprehending Egypt nor Abexin now called the land of Pâ—ester Iohn which are likewise Moores and the rightest as the scriptures wel declare and ought to be counted and numbred amongst the chiefe prouinces of Affrica which al Cosmographers and describers of the world may reade Touching the kingdome of Guinea wherein the Portingales and Frenchmen haue traffiked many yeares and whither our Countrymen in these dayes doe likewise trauel it bordureth on the kingdome of Meilâ— and vpon the riuer Niger in length fiue hundred Italian miles which are about one hundred Dutch miles in this country the Portingales hold a fort being the castle of the Mine vpon the golden coast There is also the coast of Melegete our countrey men that sailed thither this yeare did first put in to the land between the Cape de las Pâ—nas and the Cape de tres Puntas and found anker ground at twenty fadomes water and with their boat rowing on land they came to a place wherein stoode manâ— houses and a little fort placed vpon a rocke and many Moores about it and t◠〈…〉 so played vpon with shor 〈…〉 vnite off This village 〈…〉 and the lande 〈…〉 This sort is holden 〈…〉 bâ—â— is not strong before 〈…〉 about the lâ—ngth of twoo â—es 〈◊〉 â—nto the sea there lieâ—h â—1 cliffes so that you must passe right between them 〈…〉 vnto the â—ort lying in a boothe 〈…〉 This castle lieth about three or foure miles from the Cape de tres 〈…〉 not â—arre from it being a hilly and 〈◊〉 countrey with many trees some of 〈…〉 fadomes in compas 〈…〉 vilage called 〈◊〉 〈…〉 and 〈…〉 〈…〉 with the 〈…〉 〈…〉 cloth or mo◠〈…〉 and tempe◠〈…〉 by south towards 〈…〉 in two dayes could make â—t two degrees so that they sailed ech day one degree although it was indifferent cold by reason of the stormes that sel east northeast and ease and by north towardes the coast Also such as wil satie from the Colde hauens to the cape de Lopâ— G◠〈◊〉 to 〈◊〉 Island must keepe 〈…〉 southward as possibly they may 〈…〉 any wind but hold as neere aâ— they can and yet al litle enough or else fal beneath the cape de Rio â— Gabain that is the riuer of Gabain or elsewhere vnles then the winde be ful weâ—st or that they haue any 〈◊〉 out of the north and so compassed into the south otherwise it is not weâ— to be done for that there are some that haue bin 5. or 6. weekes sayling thither Here ye must note that the neerer ye 〈◊〉 to the Equinoctial line there you find 〈◊〉 southerne windes and when you 〈◊〉 the liâ—â—â—ou finde the winde south 〈…〉 and somewhat higher 〈…〉 â—wise vnderstand that when 〈…〉 â—ng fishes that then yee 〈…〉 of S. Thomas 〈…〉 with the people of 〈…〉 with such as are not ouer 〈…〉 the Portingales which 〈…〉 them slaues for 〈…〉 the countrey is 〈…〉 either knowing God 〈…〉 heathens and idolaters without gouernement or any order abundant in golde elephants teeth corne Ethiopian pepper rice barly cotten wool and many kindes of fruits whereof aboue a hundred sortes both vnknowne neuer written of were brought from thence vnto me besides this there groweth all sorts of great beanes some on trees in coddes as big as a mans elbow a handful broad others red and blacke like to the Turkiâ—h beanes but greater some white round euery one in a place by it self like 〈◊〉 others round and small as red as currall with blacke strikes like those that growe in Egypt where I haue â—â—ne of them and were called 〈◊〉 they are descrâ—bed by the learned doctor Pâ—er A in 〈◊〉 booke of Egyptian herbes There at â—â—wise others that are hard 〈…〉 â—ted like marble 〈…〉 and birds are there abound◠〈…〉 peacockes wilde hennes grâ—y 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 smal 〈…〉 very cunningly hang their nests vpon the braunches of the trees whereof some were brought me thereby to preserue their egs from wormes and snakes They haue â—o selfe abundance of fish so that to conclude there wanteth nothing in those countries but onely the knowledge of the Gospell thereby to bring them to the vnderstanding of the word of God and the pathway
mattes laid vpon the ground Their meat is made of great white rootes taken out of the earth called Iniamos very pleasant of taste like the spanish Baâ—at 〈…〉 or chesnuts They are both rosted and sodden with other rootes and sugar canes and Bananas which are a fruite of a tree like the Indian figges mentioned in this booke long like cucumbers with a tart sweetish but a pleasant taste sometimes likewise they eate both fish flesh which they lay al in one vessell togither and so sit round about it like a company of beastes and neuer drinke but after they haue done eating The gouernours eate alone out of a tin vessel the rest out of a filthie earthen vessel and sit vpon a mat spread vpon the ground The most worke that the women do is to fetch water and fruite and to dresse the meate they will by no meanes ease themselues vppon the ground esteeming that a great offence but haue great vessels made for the same purpose which are sette in the earth They vse no other weapons against their enemies but onely fistes and traues they that dwell by the mine are better appointed with bowes arrowes pikes and targets as long as a man made of barkes of trees and such like things Their Drums are broade aboue and narrow below they haue likewise Cornets of Elophants teeth of all these kindes of instruments and weapons I had some brought from thence Our men being in the Riuer of Gaban came vnto an Iland where they were carried on shore by a Moore that had a great tooth sticking in his vpper lip with a broade knife in his hand and all his body rased and pinked as I saide before where he brought them into a house among the Moores wherein were certaine couerlets made of the rinds or barkes of trees laide vppon the earth where they sate downe not making anie choyse and being sette he clapt them on the shoulders pointing vpwards with his fingers saying in his language Maâ—â—bam they not knowing what hee meant looked vp where they perceiued a blacke man sate vppon the top of a certaine paire of Staires like an image with many chaines of bones and rings hanging about him fearefull to beholde at his feete lay certaine blacke women with Elephants tailes in their handes to beare away the flies and to make winde whereby they vnderstood him to be the Lorde of the Island Wherupon they kneeled vpon one of their knees honouring him according to the custome of the lande clapping their hands vntill the Maâ—â— or Lord made signes vnto them clapping his handes which done they rose vp the Maâ—â— giuing them some of those mars made of barks as a princely present of the which with their linnen I can shew you others of the same ship taking their pinnace entred into another creeke in the same Riuer about two miles higher and there founde a great village lying on the same riuer so neere that they might throw a stone ouer the houses and being within two ships length or the shore they cast anker on the shore there stood at least 1000. Moores men women and children whereof some had pikes kniues and other wepons in thâ—ir hands crying with loude voyces 〈◊〉 and other wordes clapping their handes together which to them was strange both to heare and see Not long after a Moore that by them about foure or fiue miles froÌ„ thence had beene taken into their pinnace stepped into the water and went on shore where being on land the Moores specially the women hong about him in such numbers that he could hardly passe singing and throwing grasse vppon him that our men could neither heare nor see the man neuer ceasing to sing and make a noyse but still continuing dancing leaping and with their kniues cutting off al the grasse meane time there came one out of the village hauing a long staffe in his hand as â—f he were some officer willing them to leaue off theyr noyse driuing thâ—m from the shore but to no end 〈◊〉 reason of the great number of people that were there assembled at the last the Moore that went out of the pinace from our men with one of their Canuyten for so they called their boates came aboord bringing two men and an old woman that was one of the gouernors wiues hauing her breast painted greene and in each hande a branch of a tree shaking both her handes and the two men clapping with their hands giuing to vnderstand as our men conceiued according to their manner that they were welcome with them two of our men went on land whereat the Moores made great ioy with singing dancing leaping and such like pastimes and going vnto the gouernor diuers of them followed specially the women running both before and behinde them leaping and dancing like mad men most of them hauing of the great broade kniues in their handes striking them together in most feareful maner but it was no wonder to see them make so great ioy and shew so much pastime for that it was strange for them to see white men which they neuer had seene for that neuer any had beene or traffiked among them true it is that the Portingales had beene in the same Riuer but not so high for our men were at the least tenne or twelue miles from their shippe within the Riuer and the Riuer before that village called Crementun was about a mile broade hauing another village on the other side and 〈◊〉 with their pinnace before that village they shot off a peece whereat all the people â—ne backe being afraid but came presently againe and as our men went vnto the â—ouernour they led them by the armes singing and shewing great signes of ioy for the comming of these white men into their countrie and being at the Gouernours house which was made of reeds they stayed about halfe an howre before he came out meane time the people that followed theÌ„ neuer left singing making anoyseâ— and when hee came there were three mattes and two stools a great and a little brought with him by certain Moores that followed him All his body and his face was painted white either with chalk or some other painting a sacke of whiting bring likewise brought after him On his head he wore a cappe made of a skin stuck ful of feathers with chains made of bones aboue 100. times about his necke armes and legs being set vpon his stoole there came an old woman that gaue him some of the whiting wherewith hee made as if he had washt his hands the rest he threw vpon his face with that he held vp both his hands meane time his wise had whiting giuen her which done shee began to come forth of the house singing and dauncing al the other women following her doing the like with that the gouernour called the Moore that brought our meÌ„ with him from the place aforesaid saying vnto him that our men were welcome clapping his handes together and saying Fuio Fuio
according to their manner and after many other wordes hee willed them to bring some Iron saying they should haue teeth for it which hauing done he brought forth his teeth This riuer as I saide is verie broad and full of Crocodiles and sea horses it hath many creekes and as they sailed from Crementun it lyeth Southeast where in the night they lauered 2. or 3. houres and came twice on ground and â—â— sayling forwardes they passed by an Island called Caraceâ—â—bo lying in the mouth of the riuer as there are many being verie low and flat land and ful of trees From that Island there came a Caâ—utien aboord their ship and in it eighteene persons and with them they had a smal drum of a hollow stocke whereon they played and being by the ship foure or fiue of them stept in whereof one of them vppon his face breast and armes was al white he bore a greene branch of a tree with a little bel and some whiting in his hand which hee strowed about the ship ringing the bel when they or any of our men spake hee made shewe as it were to consecrate and blesse the ship which done sirting downe and stammering in his words like a man possessed with some sprite or one that had a shaking feuer There was a great pot of Palme wine brought forth whereof they dranke one vnto the other which continued for the space of halfe an houre which done they went into their scâ—te rowed to land making signes to our men to come on shore and to barter with them for their wares which they did carrying them some Iron and other marchandise and went into the gouernors house being in a village where among other things they saw a little cottage about three foote high couered with straw and opeÌ„ on the side vnder the which stood a little gibet wheron hung a little horne with certaine stuffe therein which they would not lette them see by no meanes and vnder the gibet stood a staffe with a dead childes scul fixed vpon it hauing in the one eye a bone much like the bone that is founde in the head of a â—addocke whereof with vs they make horses bridles and collars for degs at the foote of the staff lay al sorts of bones both of fishes and beasts and among the rest the â—awes of a Prisâ—â— which in our countrey is called a sword fish without teeth which the master tooke away brought it vnto me our men asking what y t might signifie they said there lay a dead carcas and being in another village as they passed forwarde they sawe at the least twentie men sitting at the doore of one of their houses whereof some seemed to bee of the principal commanders and within that house there was a noyse of singing both by great and smal that it made them muse whereupon they asked what it meant they saide there was one dead The women being in trauel are not any thing ashamed but euery one both yong and old men and women run vnto her the doore standing wide open but one thing is to be wondered at that the children are al circumcised and yet they haue neither law order nor knowledge of God The countrey is fruitful and ful of al strange fruites and abounding in al kinds of beasts and birds of diners formes both great and smal There are some trees where vpon one branch there hang at the least 100. birdes nests altogether most pleasant to behold They hang by certaine strawes made fast vnto the boughes because snakes should not creepe in and suck their egges many of those nests were brought vnto me This shall suffice for the discription of the coast of Guinea after the which followeth the mightie kingdome of Congo The ancient writers helde opinion that this lande was not inhabited calling it Torriâ—â—am Zonam that is a place in the earth that through the heate of the sunne is burnt vp but they were altogether deceiued for as Odoardus Lopez a Portingale witnesseth hauing with many other Portingales long time inhabited therein There is good dwelling and the aire coÌ„trarie to al mens iudgements very temperate and that in winter there is no extreame cold but onely such weather as it is in haruest time at Rome They vse no linings nor shirte bandes nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hilles then in the vallies but generally it is warmer with them in the winter then in the summer onely because of the continual raines specially about the middle of the day two houres before and as much after dinner which heat is very euill for our meÌ„ to endure The people of the countrie are black but part of the women fear what â—â—llow their haire for the most part is blacke and curled and some haue red haire they are of a mean stature therin not much vnlike the Portingales the balles of theyr eyes being of diuers colours blacke and sea colour their lips not so thicke as those of Nâ—bâ—a other Moores their faces of al proportions fat leane and indifferent betweene both like the Portingales and not like other Moores of Guinea that are foule and deformed The length of the day and night is in a maâ—er al one for that it differeth not one quarter of an houre to anie mans iudgement throughout the whole yeare their winter beginneth in our lent about the middle of March and their summer in the middle of September â— in winter it raigneth there continually for the space of fiue moneths that is Aprill May Iune Iuly August in which time there are but few faire daies and there the raine falleth in such great drops that it is wonderful which water is al dronke vp into the earth with the drienesse of the land in summer time wherein it raineth scarce once in sixe moneths with the raine likewise the riuer is filled with thick muddie water so that it floweth ouer the banks and moystneth the ground The windes that in summer doo continually blow in those countries are as Hippocrates and after him Iulius the first emperor of Rome naming them with a greek name Eâ—esâ—oâ— Northwest by the Portingales called Venâ—o Maestro or general wiâ—d as being ordinarie at that time of the yeare in all those countries which are likewise causes of the raines by driuing vp of mâ—stes and vapors vppon the tops of the hils which being there and resoluing into water doo fil the earth with raine and those continual raines are likewise causes of the growing and increasing of the great riuers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nylus and al the riuers there abouts some running into the Mediterranean others into y e great Ocean seas by reason of their slime fattines and because in our sumer which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countryes of Congo and Ethiopia it is not to be wondered at if the riuers be greater
the grasse that groweth on the riuers side and hath an head like an ore whereof there are some that weigh fiue hundred poundes the Fisher men that take them are bound vpon pain of death to bring them to the King There you finde an other hooke of land called Cabo di Padran and alittle from thence the riuer Lelunda which commeth out of a small lake lying within the land from whence more Riuers haue their off-spring specially one called Coanza wherof hereafter I will speake This riuer Lelunda when it rayneth not is very drie so that it may be passed ouer by foote it runneth vnder the hill whereon Congo the chiefe cittie doth stand and from thence to the riuer of Ambrizi which is a great riuer with a hauen and runneth not farre from the riuer of Congo into the sea a litle further you come to an other riuer called â—â—ze which hath no hauen and from thence to Onzo another riuer with a good hauen hauing her spring out of the same lake from whence the riuer Nylus doth issue and somwhat more to the south lieth the riuer Lemba but it hath no hauen nor yet saileable From thence you come to Damde a very great riuer wherin ships of two hundred tuns may saile out of this riuer there runneth an arme or braunche lying southward called Bengo which with Coanza another great riuer make the Island of Loanda both their streames meeting together driue foorth much filth and sand which make the Island greater Bengo is a great streame or riuer which may be sailed vppe at the least fiue and twenty Italian miles which are about fiue Dutch miles and betweene these two Islands as I saide before lieth the rich Island of Loanda with the hauen called by the name of the Island Loanda which is as much to lay euen or flat land without hilles This Island is about four miles long and somewhat lesse than a quarter of a mile broad and in some places not aboue a bowe shoote broad where there is a thing much to be wondered at that when it is ful sea if one dig but twoo or three handfuls deep into the grouÌ„d they shal find fresh water and digging in the same ground when it ebbeth the water is salt and brackish In this Island of Loanda are fished the Schulpekens which in the kingdome of Congo and other places borduring thereabouts are vsed for mony which fishing is done in this maner There are certayne women that being on the sea side goe alittle way into the water lading certayne baskets with sand which being filled they carry them on land wash the sand from the Schulpkens that are very small and in great numbers by them esteemed of twoo sortes some males other females which in shew and colour are the fairest and although many of them are found vpon the strand or shore of the riuer of Congo yet those of Loanda are the best fairest most esteemed of they are very shining and of an ash colour other colours are of no account for those Schulplikens you may buy any kinde of thing whether it be gold siluer or any kinde of victualles whereby you may perceiue that not onely in the kingdome of Congo and the countries about it but also in other places of Affrica and in the kingdome of Chyna and some part of India they haue vsed other kindes of things in steed of mony as we vse gold siluer copper and such like mixtures for in Ethiopia they vse pepper corns for mony In the kingdome of â—buâ—o about the riuer Niger Shuâ—penes and Porcelleten as also in China and Ben â—alen so that mettall is not so much esteemed of in most partes of the worlde as it is in Europa and other places circumtacent In this Island there are seauen or eight villages by them called Libatâ— whereof the principall is called the Holighost wherein the gouernour is resident being sent from Congo where he administreth Iustice and looketh sharpelye to the fishing of Schalpekens There are many beasts goates and wilde swine for that the tame become wilde and runne into the woods also therein groweth a great and strange tree called Enlanda being alwaies gréene of a strange form specially in the branches that grow very high and cast downe certaine small threedes which touching the earth do bring forth roots from whence other plants or trees do spring forth most aboundantly in great numbers vnder the first rhinde or barke of this tree groweth a certaine linnen which being beaten and made cleane and then stretched foorth in breadth and length it serueth to apparell the common people In this Island also they vse shipps made of palme or Indian nut trees the boordes being peeced together after the manner of the Portingale barkes wherein they vse both sailes and oâ—es and with them they fish in all the riuers thereabout which are very full of fish and with them likewise they row vnto the firme land On that side which reacheth towardes the firme land there are trees that growe in certaine deepe places on the shore vpon the rootes whereof the sea continually beateth where groweth oysters as broade as a mans hand verie good to be eaten and wel knowne to that countrey people which they call Ambiziamatare which is to say stone fish The Island at one ende is very neere vnto the firme land and the chanell is oftentimes swoome ouer by the countrey people and in the same chanel there are certaine smal Islandes which when it floweth are not seene but when it ebbeth they appeare aboue the water and being vncouered they finde the oysters lying at the rootes of the trees hare by the Island on the outwarde part swim many whales that are blacke and fight togither killing ech other wherof being fished taken vp by the Moores they make treane oile with the which and with pitch togither they dresse their ships the mouth of the â—auen lieth in the north in breadth aboue halfe an Italian mile being very deep and right ouer against it on the firme land lieth the village of S. Paul not very strongly fortified and inhabited by Portingales that are brought the thither with wife and children out of Portingale all the channell is very full of fish specially of Sardins and Enchâ—ones which in winter time are there in so great abundaunce that they leape vpon the shore also diuers other good fishes as soales sturgeons barbles and great creuiâ—hes which are very wholesome and are there found in great numbers whereby the common people doe liue Satling further from Loanda you come to the Riuer called Coanza which Riuer with Bengo and other Riuers aforesaide doe make the Island of Loanda so that Coanza also hath her off-spring from a little lake which maketh a Riuer that floweth out of the same greate lake from whence Nylus and other Riuers haue their issue which Lake in this Carde is called Zane or Zembre of the ancient fathers Tritoms Lanis because therein as it is saide
along the coast by the riuer of Cuama you come to a small kingdome liing vppon the sea side called Angoscia taking the name from certaine Islandes that beare the same name lying right against it inhabited by Mahometanes and Heathens which in small shippes doe traffike and deale in such wares as those of Sofala vse And sayling further you discouer the kingdome of Mosambique lying vnder fouretéene degrees and a halfe whereof I haue sufficient spoken heretofore as also of the Island lying behinde it called Quiloa and the great Island of S. Laurence making the chanell which in the entrance towards the west is three hundred and forty Italian miles broad and in the middle towardes Mosambique where it is narrowest a hundred and seauentie miles kéeping that breadth all along the coasts towards India containing many Islandes The shippes that saile from Spaine into India and from India into Spaine do commonly keepe their course through this channell vnlesse they be otherwise compelled by the winde and surely this Island deserueth to haue better people than it hath inhabiting therein because of the situation hauing many good and safe hauens togither with fayre riuers sweet fresh waters which cause the land to bring forth diuers kinds of fruits and spices as beans pease rice and corn oranges lemons and citrons and all sortes of flesh tame and wilde hennes swine and harts of very good and sweete flesh by reason of the fertilitie and excellent good fish The inhabitants are heathens and some of Mahomets sect of a fayre colour much giuen to war and to their weapons specially bowes and woodden holberts This Island is diuided into foure gouernments ech fighting against other Therein are many mines of gold siluer copper yron and other metals but the wilde people vse not to traffike out of their owne countrey but onely sayle in small scutes cut out of trées from one place of the Island to the other for the most parte not suffering any traffike in their Island with strangers yet the Portingales at this time traffike in some of their hauens but go not on land and from thence bring ambergreece ware siluer copper rice and diuers other wares In this chanel betwéen the firme land of Affrica and this Island there lieth many both great and small Islands al inhabited by Mahometanes among the which the chiefe is S. Christofer then the Holyghost another called Magliaglie as also Comoro Anzoame Maiotto and such like Returning againe vnto the coast and hauing passed Quiloa you sée the kingdome of Mombaza lying vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side taking the name from a certaine Island so called wherein lieth a faire towne with many goodly buildings beautiffied with diuers Images and figures the king being a Mahometane who withstanding the Portingales spéede like those of Quiloa taking it by force where they found much golde siluer pearles cotten linnen silkes and cloth of golde with other sortes of merchandises This Island bordureth on Quiloa and Melinde inhabited by heathens and Mahometanes and subiect to the king of Monemugi Sayling further you come to the kingdome of Melinde which is likewise verie small stretching along the sea coast till you come to the riuer Chimamchi lying vnder two degrees and a halfe and vpwardes by the riuer it runneth to a lake called Calice about a hundred Italian miles or twentie Dutch miles In this countrey about the sea side there is a very great towne most inhabited by white people al heathens and Mahometanes their houses are built almost like the houses in Portingale theyr sheepe are almost as bigge againe as those in Portingale with tailes which are accounted for a quarter of mutton weighing at the lest fiue and twenty or thirtie pound The women are white and dresse themselues after the manner of Arabia very prowdly and in great pompe al in silkes wearing about their neckes armes and legges iewels rings and bracelets of gold going with their faces couered like the Egyptian women not being seene or known but when it pleaseth them in this towne there is a good hauen for ships to lie in and for the most parte the people are friendly vpright in worde and déede holding good friendshippe with strangers specially with the Portingales giuing them much credit and neuer hurting them Betweene the ii heads of Mombaza and Melinde there lieth three Islands the first called Momsie the second Zanzibar and the third Pâ—mba all inhabited by Mahometanes white of colour very rich and abundant in wealth but not vsed to the warres only to til th earth In those Islands is much sugar which is by them brought in boates vnto the firme land with other fruites of those Islandes within the firme land Beyond those three kingdomes of Quiloa Melinde and Mumbaza lieth the great and large kingdome of Monemugi which on the south lieth vppon the kingdome of Molambique by the riuer of Coâ—uo and on the west vpon the riuer Nylus between the two lakes on the north vppon the Land of Pâ—esâ—eâ— lolin it liueth peaceably with the 3. kingdomes aforesaid traffiking with them for cotten linnen which is brought thither out of Cambaia w t such like wares brought out of India which they barter for gold siluer copper and iuory but on the other side towards Monomotapa it hath continuall warres and that so cruel and bloody that it can hardly be knowne who hath the victory because in that place there méeteth two mighty people and those that are most expert in armes throughout all Affrica for those of Monomotapa the women called Amazon whereof I spake before and for Monemugi the people by those of Mencongi called Giachi but in their owne spéech Agagi which in time past vsed much to inuade the kingdome of Congo nothing incomparable for strength and agillitie to the Amazons This people haue a custome with hote yrons to burne their faces especially their vpper lippes and so make strikes and lines in them also they turne their eye lids vpwards and round about They are blacke with shining skinnes The white of their eies being of so swart a colour that by their faces they seeme to be stange and cruel moÌ„sters they are il fauored great bodies liuing in the fields like beasts eate mans flesh In war they are most couragious setting most fiercely vpon their enemie their arms are darts wherin they are most cunning Comming again vnto the Coast hauing past the kingdome of Melinde to the Cape de Guarda fuy there are many other places inhabited by white Mahometanes where there are some good hauens whither diuers strange shippes and Marchants with their wares doe ordinarily resort wherof the chéefe is Pate the second Braua the third Magadoxo the fourth Amffion and behinde that reacheth the broade and wide head or Cape of Guarda Fuy which because of the greatnes issueth farre into the sea is knowne by many ships comming out of India Arabia Ormus other places And about this Cape the
the rest and Bahama which lie al north from Câ—ba and saint Doâ—inicâ— The common opinion is that these Islandes were all one land and ioyned to the great Island and by the force of the sea seperated one from the other as it is thought of Iâ—aly and Ciciâ—ia They lie vnder seuenteene and eighteene degrees the people of those Islands are whiter and better proportioned then those of Cuba and Spaignuola specially the women that are verie faire for the which cause many of the firme land went thither to dwel as from Florida Cachora and Iucatan because there they founde more pleasure among the people then in other Islands and great difference in their speech whereupon hath risen the common opinion that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell beeing women that burnt their right breasts the better to shoote in bowes when they went to fight against their enemies and that there was a fountaine that made olde women yong The men go naked onely when they go to wars and when they keepe any feastes or vse to dance then they put on a certaine cotten garment and other garments of diuers coloured feathers finely wrought with a great plume of feathers on their heades Touching the women they haue verie strange customes for the married women or such as haue had the company of a man they couer their priuie members from the Nauel downe to the knees with certaine mantils of cotten made in manner of nets wherein they sticke certaine leaues otherwise they go naked vntil such time as they first perceiue their flowers and then they inuite al their friendes and make a great feast or banket as if they were married with great signes of ioy and then they beginne to hang that kinde of mantle before them wearing the same as long as they are vnmarried They are in great subiection to their maisters in such maner as that if they should command them to throw themselues headlong from off a hil or to do any other thing whatsoeuer they wil not refuse to do it what danger soeuer consisteth therin not once asking wherefore they should doo it but only because the master commandeth it Here also you must note wherein their kings gouernment consisteth which reacheth no further then only concerning sowing or planting the ground hunting fishing for that whatsoeuer is sowed or planted hunted or fished in any respect is onelie in the kings power and done by his commandement which diuideth those kindes of labours among the people directing euerie man what he should do The fruit that is reaped and gathered is brought all into a place appointed and from thence it is yearely deliuered vnto euerie man according as his houshold and necessarie vse requireth so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees stuards distributers of the common goods of the countrey thinke then I beseech you what a golden time those people had where neither this is mine or this is thine was euer heard among them The only wel spring of strife contentioÌ„ Those in the east parts vsing nothing els but playing at the ball fishing and hunting where neither law nor processe was vsed nor decided where onely the kings will was a lawe and in all things were content to obey it They found certaine red stones in shels of fishes much esteemed and accounted of among theÌ„ which they weare at their cares and others more esteemed of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snailes whereof the flesh is very good to eate of a fire red colour cleare and so like rubies that they could hardly be discerned from them whereof the Snakes in their speech are called Cohoâ—o and the stones Cohibici They gather likewise in the sande vppon the sea side certaine cleare shining stones yellow blacke and other colours whereof they make necklaces and such like Iewels to weare about their necks armes and legs in many places of those Islands they haue no flesh nor eate it not their meate is fish breda of wheate rootes and some fruites The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba died there with eating flesh it beeing giuen them by the Spaniards In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons other birues which build their nestes in the Trees that many out of the firme land and also from the other Islands come thither and load whole scutes ful and take them with them the trees wherein they breed are like Youngarnet trees the barke hauing a certaine taste like Cinamon and somwhat better and hot like ginger smelling like cloues yet are they not accounted for spices among other fruites they haue a certaine kind by them called Iaâ—â—ma both sauorie and holsome about a span and a halfe long like a fig when it is greene the leafe likewise not much differing from the fig leafe and of the bignesse of a willow tree not close like other trees nor hollow like reedes but fast like Elders the leaues beeing excellent good to heale wounds as the Spaniards haue wel tryed To speake more hereof is needelesse those Islandes of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited for because they haue no gold The Spaniards carried many thousandes of them into other places and in seeking for Golde spoyled and destroyed them Hereafter followeth other Islands lying about that coast and first Cuba being one of the principal Islands vnder the Antillas CVba another verie great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by Columbus first foundout and discouered in An. 1492. which he called Fernandinam and Iâ—hannam as also Alpha and Omega as Peter Martin saith and by others the Island is called saint Iacob after the name of the cheefest towne therein which by reason of the great hauen as also the situation therof hath a verie great traffike as hauing on the East side the Islande of Saint Domingo on the West Iucatan on the North the great Cape of Florida and on the South the Island Iamaica all set downe in this Carde It is in forme like vnto a willow leafe because it is longer theÌ„ broad being in length from east to west three hundred miles and from north to south seuenty miles in breadth in some places but fifteene and in some nineteene miles The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19. degrees and in latitude or height twentie degrees It was long time accounted for firme land because of the greatnesse which is no maruaile for the inhabitants themselues knew no other but that it had no ende and also long after the Spaniards comming thither because the people are poore and naked contented with a little and with their own not seeking any further neither caring what their neighbours did and therefore knew not if there were any other lande vnder the heauens then that wherein they dwelt The ground is high rough and sharpe of hils the sea in many places being white and the riuers small and good water rich of golde and good copper the aire temperate
two streames like Englâ—nâ— and 〈…〉 so that it seemeth almost to be two Islands it hath many goodly hauens the naâ—◠〈◊〉 giuen it of our Lady of Guadalupe it is â—ul of villages each of twentie or thirtie houses all wood and rounde made of certaine great okes which they thrust into the earth and those serue for the doores of their houses then they place smaller which hold the rest from falling Their branches on the toppe being bound together like tents which they couer with Palme tree leaues to keep them from the raine within they fasten ropes made of cotten wool or of Bâ—esen wherupon they lay cotten mattresses and hanging beddes therein to sleepe This Island hath seuen faire riuers the inhabitants were called Caâ—ucâ—erum it hath verie great Parrots much differing from others being red both before and behind with long feathers the wings speckled with red some yellow some blew al mixed together whereof there are as great abundance as of Spree 〈…〉 er in our countryes there groweth in this Island a certaine gumme called A 〈…〉 m not much vnlike Amber the smoke or aire of this gumme being let vp into the head driueth out the colde the tree bringeth foorth a fruit like dates but of a spanne and a halfe long which beeing opened hath a certaine white and sweete meale This fruit they keepe for winter as we do chesnuts the trees are like figge trees they haue likewise in this Island al kind of orchard fruit and some are of opinion that al kindes of sweete fruites were first brought out of this Islande into the other Islandes round about it for they are hunters of men which hauing taken they eate them and for the same cause they trauaile abroade many hundreth miles both farre and neare and in their trauell whatsoeuer they finde they bring it home and plant it They are not friendly but fierce and cruell They indure no strangers among them both the men and the women are verie subtile and expert in shooting with their bowes and their arrowes being poysoned when the men are gone abroad the women keepe their places and countreyes most stoutly defending them from al inuasion to conclude al parts of that Islande both hils and dales are verie fruitfull and in the hollow trees and clifts of hilles and rocks they find home Desiada or Desiderataâ— ABout eighteene miles from Guadalupa towards the East lieth Desiada another Island being twentie miles great Desiada or Desiderata that is desire so called by reason of the fairenesse of the Island ten miles from Guadalupa towards the south lyeth Galanta being in compasse aboue thirtie miles it is an euen and faire country wherof the Island hath taken the name for Galanta in Spanish betokeneth faire Therein are diuers sweete smelling trees both in barks rootes leaues There are likewise many great Horsleaches Nine miles from Guadalupa towards the East there lieth six smal Ilands called Todos los Sanctos or al Saints and Barbara spokeÌ„ of before Those Islandes are verie full of cliffes stonie and vnfruitful which the Pilots are to looke vnto to auoyde the danger that may ensue A little further lyeth Dominica taking the name from the day because it was discouered vpon a sunday and also an Islande of Caniballes so ful and thicke of Trees that there is scant an elle of free land Thereabouts also is another Island called Madannina or the womens Islande where it is thought that women onely inhabited in maner of Amazons whither the Canibales often times resorted to lie with them and if they had daughters they kept them but boyes they sent vnto their fathers it lyeth fortie miles from Mons Serratu After that lyeth yet thrée Islands besides other little Islands and diuers cliffes called S. Vincent Granada and S. Lucia Comming further towards the coast of Florida where we left right against it there lyeth certaine smal cliffes called Martires and the little Ilands called Tortugas because they are like a Torteauxes From this poynt of Florida to Ancon Baxo are 100. miles and lyeth fiftie miles distant East and West from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida from Ancon Baxo 100. miles to Rio di Nieues from thence to the riuer Flores 20. miles and somewhat more from the riuer of Flores to the bay called Bahya del Spirito Sancto which is likewise called La Culata being in the entrance thereof thirtie miles broade from this Bahya which lyeth vnder 29. degrées are 70. miles to the riuer called Rio del Pescadores from Rio del Pescadores which lyeth vnder 28. degrees and halfe there is 100. miles to the Riuer called Rio de las Palmas from whence Tropicus Cancri beginnneth from Rio de las Palmas to the Riuer Panuco are 30. miles and from thence to Villa Rica or Vera Crus are seuentie miles in which space lyeth Almeria from Vera Crus that lyeth vnder 19. degrees to the riuer of Aluarado by the Island called Papa Doapan are thirtie miles from the riuer Aluarado to the riuer Coâ—zâ—coalco are fiftie miles from thence to the riuer Gritalâ—a are fortie miles The said two riuers lying about eighteene degrées from the riuer Gritalua to Cabo Redondo are eightie miles as the coast stretcheth along wherein are contained Champoton and Lazaro from Cabo Redondo to Cabo di Catoche or Iucatan are 90. miles and lyeth about 21. degrées so that there are in al nine hundred miles in the length of the coast of Florida to Iucatan which is another Cape or hooke which stretcheth from off the land northward and the further it reacheth into the sea the more it crooketh or windeth about and is sixtie miles from Cuba The Island whereof we haue alreadie spoken which doth almost inclose the sea that runneth betwéene Florida and Iucatan which sea by some men is called Golfo de Mexico of others Golfo de Florida and of some others Cortes the sea that runneth into this gulfe entreth betwéene Iucatan and Cuba with a mightie streame and runneth out againe betweene Florida and Cuba and hath no other course A breefe description of Noua Hispania or new Spaine THe second part of America is called Noua Spaigna or new Spaine it beginneth towards the North about the Riuer of Panuco vppon the borders of Florida on the South side it reacheth to the prouince Darienâ— where it is diuided from Peru on the East it hath the maine Sea and on the west the South sea called Mare Australe this whole Prouince was in times past by the Inhabitants called Cichemecan Cathuacan or Coâ—acan which peple came out of the land of Culhua which lieth aboue Xalisco made their habitation about the Moores of Tenuchtitlan where at this present lyeth the towne of Mexico which people hauing neither countrey nor dwelling place chose that for the best and most profitable therein building diuers houses and habitations and in that manner placed both their new and old villages vnder the commaundement of Culhuacan giuing the same name
occasion of the droughts and of the other townes and places which lie in the further description of the sea coast BEfore I returne to procéeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts from Lyma to Arequipa I thinke it not vnconuenient to declare why it raineth not in the plaine countrey of Peru lying on the sea side where neuertheles there is so great occasion giuen of raine because the Sea which commonly yeeldeth moysture lyeth vpon the one side and the hils whereon there is alwaies so great quantitie of water and snow vppon the other side you must vnderstand that vppon the hils summer beginneth in Aprill and continueth May Iune Iuly August and September and in October winter beginneth and continueth the other moneths til March not much differing from our Countries or froÌ„ Spain in that time they both plant build and gather in their fruites and seedes but day and night are al of a length onely that in Nouember they differ a little and in the plaine land it is contrary for when it is summer in the hils it is winter there so that in the plaine countrie summer beginneth in October and continueth til the moneth of Aprll where as then winter beginneth and surely it is a verie strange thing to thinke how so great difference should be in one countrey where a man may vppon one day in the morning trauaile from the hilles where it raineth and befoâ—e night bee in the plaine countrie where it neuer or verye seldome raineth for that from the beginning of October al the summer long it neuer raineth in that countrey onely there falleth certain dew which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sandes wherefore the inhabitants of the plaine countrey must continually water their groundes and not till nor plant any more lande then they can bring the water vnto in other places by reason of the vnfruitfulnesse of the country there is no grasse as beeing all drie sandie and stonie grounds the trees growing theron are vnfruitfull with verie few leaues there likewise groweth diuers thistles and thornes and in some places nothing at all when it is winter in the plaine countrie there are certaine thicke and close cloudes onely as if the aire hung full of raine from whence there onely proceedeth a certaine small miseling that can hardly lay the dust of the sande which notwithstanding is a verie strange and wonderfull thing that the ayre being in that sort so thicke and close there falleth no other moysture and yet the sunne for many daies because of the clouds cannot be seene and as the hilles are verie high and the coast low it appeareth that the hilles draw the cloudes vnto them not suffering them to fal vpon the plaine lande so that when the waters do naturally keepe their course it raineth much in the hils and not in the plaine countrie but therein causeth a great heat and when the dew falleth then it is cleare weather vpon the hils and raines not there likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the yeere ther bloweth but one kind of wind in the plain countrie that is southwest windes which although in other countries they are commonly moyst and causes of raine there they are cleane contrarie I thinke because they are suppressed by the high hilles from whence they blow that they draw no moysture or dampenesse out of the sea into the aire wherby any great raine should folow by these windes also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North and maketh a hard nauigation from Panama to Peru both against winde and streame in such sort that it cannot be done without lauering and striuing against the winde There is yet another thing to bee marked which is that vnder the line in some places it is moyst and in some places colde and moyst and in those plaine countries of Peru colde and drie and departing from thence to the other side it raineth continually Here followeth the description of the coast of the plaine countrey of Peru with the hauens and riuers lying therein between the towne of Lyma and the prouince of Dechia as also the degrees and the manner of the sayling on that coast THe Ships that saile from the towne of Lyma or of Kings take their course towards the south and so come to the hauen of Singalla which is verie great whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to haue built the town of kings in that place it lyeth distant from Lyma 2â— Spanish miles or 105. Italian miles whereof fiue make a Duch mile which is one and twentie Duch miles it lyeth not ful vnder fourteene degrees on the south side of the line Hard by the hauen of Sangalta lyeth an Island taking the name of the sea Wolues al the coast from thence forward is very low although in some places there are smal hils of plaine stone and some sandie downes wherein as yet neither before nor til this time it euer rained where also there falleth no other moysture then onely the smal dewe whereof I spake before about this Island of sea Wolues there are seuen or eight other Islandes which lie in Triangle wherof some are high some low and all vnhabited hauing neither water wood trees grasse nor any thing onely Sea Wolues and great store of sande The Peruuians of the firme land as they theÌ„selues say in times past vsed to goe into those Islands and there to offer sacrifices where it is thought much treasor lyeth hidden these Islands are distant from the firme land about three miles Further in the same course vnder 14. and 1 â— lyeth another Island of the same name and from thence sailing on and coasting along the shore southwest and southwest and by south and being 9. miles beyond the Island you come to a point called Nasca lying vnder fifteene degrees lesse ¼ vnder the which the shippes may anker but yet they cannot land with their boates neither throw foorth their Bocken following the same course vnder fifteene degrees 1 â— there is another head or poynt called S. Nicolas and from this cape the coast runneth southwest and when you haue sayled nine miles in that sort you come to a hauen called Hacan which lyeth vnder sixteene degrees from whence following on the coast you come to the riuer Diocouna on which side the coast is altogether wilde A little further there is another riuer called Camana and somewhat further the riuer Quilca and about halfe a mile beyonde it there is a verie good grounde where the ships may ride and anker which hauen is also called Quilca like the riuer and from thence as men put out they saile to the towne of Arequipa which lyeth 12. miles from this towne the hauen and the towne lying vnder seuenteene degrees ½ sayling along the coast of this hauen about three miles distant you see certaine Islands in the which certaine Indian fishermen of the firme lande doo
some narrower accounting the length from Quito to the towne Delia Platta in this country of Peru are thrée sorts of hilles wherein men cannot inhabite the first parte of the hilles are called Andes which are full of great Woods the country being vnfit and vnholsome to dwell in which likewise were not inhabited but beyonde the hilles the second parte of the hilles taketh her course from the Andes which are verie colde and are great snow hilles so that there also no man can dwell because of the great colde and aboundance of snow which maketh the ground so soft that nothing can grow therin The third parte of the hilles are the Sandie Downes which runne through the plaine land of Peru from Tumbez to Tarapaca where it is so hot that neither water trées grasse nor any liuing creature is seene thereon but onely certaine birdes that flye ouer them Nowe Peru beeing so long and scituate in this manner there are many wilde and desart places not inhabited for the causes before rehearsed and such as were inhabited were great vallies and dales that by reason of the hils are throwded and defended from the windes and snow wherby those vallies and great fields are verie fruitful so that whatsoeuer is plaÌ„ted therein yéeldeth fruit most aboundantly the woods about them bring vp manye beasts and birds the Peruuians that dwel betwéene these hils are wiser stronger and subtiller then those in the plaine countrey lying on the sea coast and apter to gouerne and for pollicy they dwel in houses made of stone whereof some are couered with earth others with strawe because of the raine whereof those in the plaine countrey by the sea side haue no care at all couering theyr houses thereby to keepe them from the sun with painted mattes or boughs of trees out of these vallies lying betweene the hilles there runneth many streames of good water into the south sea and moysten the plain countrey of Peru causing many fruitfull Trees corne and other things necessary for mans life to grow therein as I haue already declared Of the people and countries that are therein lieing from Pasto to Quito THe village of Pasto lieth in the vallie Atris which is in the land of Quillacinga people without shame and good manners as also they of Pasto little esteemed by their neighbours trauailing from Pasto you come to Funez and two miles and ¼ furder to Iles from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a halfe and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter in al these villages is very little maiz by reason of the colde although they are so neere vnto the line but much Papas and other rootes that are to be eaten from Ipiules you trauaile to Guaca but before you come at it you may see the Kings hie-way which is no lesse to be wondred at then the way that Hannibal made through the Alpes whereof hereafter I will speak also you passe hard by a riuer vpon the side whereof the King of Peru had made a fort from whence he made warre vpon those of Pasto and ouer this Riuer there is a bridge by nature so artificially made that arte coulde not possibly mend it it is of a high and thick rock in the midle whereof there is a hole through the which with great fury the streame passeth and vpon that rocke men may go ouer it this rocke in their speech is called Luâ—â—châ—ca that is a stone bridge about that place is a fountaine of warme water wherein a man cannot endure to holde his handes although the countrie about it and also the riuer are verie colde whereby it is hard trauailing by this bridge also the King of Peru ment to haue built another castle therin to keepe garrison but he was preuented by the Spaniardes ariuall in those countries in this countrie there groweth a certaine fruit as small as plumbs and blacke by them called Mortunnos whereof if any man eateth they are drunke and as it were out of their wittes for the space of foure and twentie houres From this small countrye of Guaca you come to â—usa where y e prouince of Pasâ—o endeth not farre from thence you come to a little hill wherevppon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Peruuians and going furder you come to the riuer of Mira where it is very hot an there are many kinds of fruits and certaine faire melons good connies turtle doues and partriges great aboundance of corne barley and maiz from this riuer you trauaile downe to the rich and costly houses of Carangue before you come thither you must first passe ouer a lake in India called Aguarcocia in our speech the opeÌ„ sea because Guianacapa king of Peru at the Spaniards ariuall caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled destroyed them all because they had displeased him and threw their bodies into that lake making the water red with their blood The houses of CaraÌ„gue are in a little place wherin there is a goodly fountaine made of costly stone and in the same countries are many faire houses belonging to the kings of Peru all made of stone and also a Temple of the same wherein there was alone 200. maides that serued the temple and are verie narrowly looked vnto that they commit no vncleanes if they did they were cruelly punished and hanged or buried quicke with them also were certaine priests y t offered sacrifices and offerings according to their religious manner This Temple of the sunne in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account being then very carefully looked vnto and greatly honoured wherein was many golde and siluer vessels iewels and treasure the walls being couered with plates of golde and siluer and although it is cleane destroyed yet by roums you may still behold the great magnificence thereof in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garison in the houses of Carangue with their Captaines who both in time of peace and warre continued there to punish offenders Departing from the houses of Carangue you come to Oâ—aballo which is also rich and mightie and from thence to Cosesqui and before you come thither you must passe certaine snowie hills where it is so colde that men trauaile ouer them with greate paine from Cosesqui you goe to Guallabamba which is three miles from Quito and because the countrie thereabout is lowe and almost vnder the line therefore it is there very hot yet not so hot that men cannot dwell therein or that it hindereth the fruitfulnes thereof by this discourse you may perceiue the eror of many ancient writers that say that vnder the line by reason of the great heate no man may dwell but to the contrary you see that after their maner they haue both summer and winter in some places colde and in some places hot as also that vnder it there dwelleth many people and there many fruites and seeds do grow In this way you passe
towne dwell on the other side the hill Carmenga where there stoode certaine small towers wherein they noted the course of the sunne in the middle where most of the people dwell was a great place from the which there passed foorth high wayes that went into the foure partes of the kingdome and this towne onely was orderly and fairely built with stone houses and richer and mightier then all the other Townes of Peru for that vpon paine of death no man might carrie any gold out of the same therein was the richest temple of the sunne in all the world which was called Curicanche in it was the high Priest by them called Villaona and part of this citie was inhabited by Mâ—timaes which are strangers that all were holden vnder good policie lawes ceremonies of their Idols most wonderfull to heare the Castle was made of so great foure squared stones that ten paires of oxen could hardly drawe one of them so that it cannot be imagined howe by mans handes those stones were brought thither hauing neither oxen horses nor any other beasts to draw withall The houses at this time inhabited by the Spaniards are most built by people of the countrie but are somewhat repaired and made greater in the time of their kings this citie was diuided into foure parts according to the foure partes of the worlde and hadde the names from the foure prouinces that lay vpon each corner of the Cittie and when the Kings were liuing no man dwelling in one quarter of the Citie might remooue houshold into another vppon great paine and punishments inflicted and although this Citie lyeth in a colde place yet it is very holsome and better prouided of all sortes of victuals and greater then any other thorowout all Peru round about it there vsed to be certaine mines of gold but now consumed and are left for the siluer mines of Potosi because now the profit is greater by siluer and lesse danger In this towne was great resort from the parts of Peru for till the nobilitie were forced to send their children thither vnder pretence of learning the speech and to serue the king but were there rather for pannes that in the meane time their fathers might not rise vp against the kings other people dwelling about it were forced to come thither to build houses to make cleane the Castles and to doo other kindes of workes whatsoeuer they should be commaunded about this Cittie there lyeth a great hil called Guanacaure of great account with the kings wher they offered both men and beasts and although in this Citie there were people of all nations as of Chile Pasto Cagnaâ—es Bâ—acamoâ—o Chacapoyas Guancas Charcas Collao c. yet euerie nation dwelt in a place by themselues appoynted for the purpose and helde the ceremonies of their auncetors onely that they were forced to pray vnto and honour the sun as the high God by them called Mocia There were likewise in this Cittie many great buildings vnder the earth wherein there dwelt certain coniurers southsayers and such as told fortunes who as yet are not all rooted out and in those holes there is daily found great quantities of treasor About the Citie are many temperate vallyes wherein there groweth certaine trees and corn although in times past euerie thing was brought thither in great aboundance Vpon the riuer that runneth through the towne they haue their corne milles nowe they haue likewise many Spanish capons and hens as good as any are in Spaine as also kine goates and other cattell although there are but fewe trees yet there groweth much pease beanes tares fitches and such like because therin was the most rich and sumptuous temple of the sunne and high priest I think it not vnconuenient to speak something of their Religion and of the Pettigree of the Kings of Peru and then in bréefe manner to go on with our course of shewing the â—ownes lying on hilles til you come to Arequipa as also the coast reaching to the straights of the Magellanes The Religion of the Peruuians TOuching their Religion they acknowledge and after their manner worshipped a creator of heauen and earth whome they caled Pachacama which signifieth creator a son of the Sun Moone like that in the vallie of Pachacama where they had made a great temple yet they accounted and held the Sun for the greatest God as a creator of all liuing creatures which in Cuscan speech they caled Ticebiracoce and although they had this knowledge and vnderstanding yet they vsed their olde customes not onely to pray vnto the Sunne and Moone but also to trées stones and other things the diuell through them giuing them answeres and because they had no certaine knowledge out of any writings or bookes of the scriptures or of the creation of the worlde neither yet of the floud therefore they obserue that which their forefathers told them which was that a notable and worthy man which they call Con in times past came out of the north into their countries with most swift pase that had no bones nor ioynts in his body neyther was it knit together by any kinde of substance that in one day could throwe downe or raise hilles and fill deep vallies and passe through a place where no wayes nor meanes to passe was found and that this man had made their predecessors giuing them hearbs and wilde fruits to liue vpon and that he being offended with the Peruuians inhabiting the plaine countrey conuerted their fruitfull land into sandie grounds and caused raine not to fall therein yet being moued with pittie because of the beasts and to water the drie fieldes hee opened diuers fountaines and riuers whereby the people might moisten theyr groundes This Con being sonne of the Sunne and Moone in times past they honoured for the highest God vntill an other came out of the south called Pachacama which signifieth Creator who also was ingendered by the Sunne and Moone and of greater power than Con at whose comming Con departed away and this Pachacama conuerted the people made by Con into Sea coltes Beares Lions Parats and other birdes and made other men that were the predecessors of the Peruuians now liuing and taught them the manner of planting and tilling the earth whome they after that esteemed for their God building Churches for him and praying vnto him and called a whole Prouince after his name Pachacama lying foure miles from Lyma as already is declared where in times past the Kings and noblemen of the land were commonly buried which theyr god Pachacama was long time worshipped by them til the comming of the Spaniardes into Peru and after that he was neuer séene Againe it is to be thought it was a Diuell who vsed that manner of subtiltie thereby to deceiue and blinde the people who in those times appeared in forme of a man as it is euident that before the Spaniards arriuall he shewd himselfe in that great costly temple in forme of a man and answered
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
Speranza or das Agulhas and marke it well for you shall finde it to be true and when you set your course to saile within the Island of saint Laurence you shall find some small white birdes in companies together they flie about twentie miles from the land towardes the droughtes of India and comming vnder twenty degrees you shall most certainely find the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases that are like Sea-mewes then you hold a good course and if you sée not any of those tokens looke well to your selfe for thē you are hard by the Island of S. Laurence or vpon the banks of the coast of Soffala and séeing many birdes you are but 10 miles from the droughtes of India then take your course North East and North East by North and so hold on till you come vnder 19. degrees and ¼ and from thence Sayle North East till you bee in eightéene degrées from thence you shall runne North and North and by East till you come to sixteene degrées and ¾ beeing vnder those degrees and séeing many birdes called Alcatrases in companies of 6.7.8 or 10. then you are but ten or fifteene miles from the Island of Ioan de Noua therefore vse all diligence both by day and night not to come néere it specially when it is with a new moone and saile North westward and then you will come by the Islandes named dos Angoxes and the more northward you run you shall keepe the better course towardes Mosambique being carefull not to come neerer the land then twentie fiue fadomes déepe for the coast is altogether droughtes shallowes where on Don Iohn Periera was cast away and yet is thirteene fadome déepe round about The 3. Chapter The Nauigation from Cauo das Correntes to the droughts called os Baixos de India from thence to Mosambique AND if you chance to sée the cape das Correntes being 6. or 7. miles from you and minding to saile to Mosambique then saile East Northeast hauing a sharpe wind and comming vnder 22. degrées vnder the which height the droughtes of India lie You shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus flying in companies and if you haue a full wind then saile Northeast to the height aforesaide to know if you be néere vnto the droughts you shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases flying together and if you sée many Alcatrases then you are néere the droughts but séeing the Garagiaus alone without Alcatrases then you are twentie fiue miles from thence Frō thence you must saile Northeast and Northeast by North to 19. degrées and 1 ◠and then saile Northeast to 18. degrees and from thence north north and by East to 16. degrées and 1 ◠and beeing vnder this height you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases and so assure your selfe to be hard by the Island of Ioan de Noua and if you see Alcatrases by 6. or 7. together then you are but 10. or 15. miles from thence because there they vse to fetch their foode therefore vse all diligence to get your selues out of that height of the Island which is 16 degrées and 1 ◠and to bee out of danger sayle Northwest whereby you come to the Islands of Angoxas which are close by the coasts towards Mosambique and the more Northerly you kéepe the nearer you come to Mosambique but as you sayle from the Islands of Angoxas to Mosambique beware you come not nearer then 25. fadome to y e Corals where Don Ioan Perreira was cast away and yet round about it is thirtéene fadomes water beeing past the Islandes of Angoxas Northeast then saile Northeast by East which is a good course alwaies kéeping at twenty fiue fadome as I said before The courses aforesaid from Cabo das Correntes forwards may bee done nearer and shorter if you haue the wind Southeast for then you may sayle along by the Islands lying vpon the bankes of Solfala the sooner to Mosambique and with an east wind vnder the degrées and with the signes aforesaide you must likewise shun the drought of India and the bankes of the Island of S. Laurence that lye towardes the drougths of India betwéen those two droughts it is 95. fadome deepe and if you desire to enter into the road of Mosambique in the entrance you must passe by the two Islands of S. George S. Iames and leaue them on the southwest side keepe aloofe from S. George about six or seuen fadome déepe and so running forward til you be in hauing care to keepe off from the bankes where you sée the water breake till you come close before the Island and fortresse of Mosambique The 4. Chapter The Nauigation from Mosambique to India WHEN you depart from Mosambique towardes India then saile Northeast whereby you shall discouer the Islande Alha da Comoro which is distant from Mosambique 94. miles or 11 degrées and ½ whereof the furthest point Northward is a verie high land 15. miles from thence you shall sée certaine birdes called Rabo◠de Iuncos that is tayles of stalkes of berries for that they haue a long narrow taile stretching out like the stalke of a berrie and by night you shall heare the birdes called Garagiaus sing or make a noyse following your course from this Iland or towards India you must vnderstand as soone as you discouer the vttermost point of the Iland of Saint Laurence towardes the North that the water and streames run North and Northwest toward the Cape of Guardafu and to the mouth or entrie of the straightes of Mecco or the redde sea and you must marke that if it chance that you sayle with a halfe winde and shoot full or sayle before the winde yet therefore you must not recken according to the course you hold but alwaies take a strike for abatement or cutting off and being by the winde two strikes because the water and streame driue you continually to the Northwest and looke wel before you that if you find many heights it is by reason y e water driues you as I said before to be assured to fal vpon the coast of India you must take héede to the needle of your compasse that yéeldeth a strike and more to the Northeast and if you recken your course according to the way the shippe maketh then you lose all that which the néedle or compasse yéeldeth towards the Northeast and that which the water driueth you towards the Northwest whereby you come too short and cannot get the coast of India The streame or drawing of the water towards the redde sea is from 4. to 7. degrées wherefore you must alwaies haue great care to be forward and not to come to short In those countries you shall alwayes sée many of the birds called Rabos de Iuncos and when you are néere vnto the coast and droughtes of Pandua then you see them no more but onely about 5◠miles in the sea you shal perceiue diuers
of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala and saw not one birde but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid then run no further North or North and by East vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼ vnder the which heights y e Islands As Ylhas Prinneras doe lie and somewhat more to the West for that holding your course Northeast the streame runneth so fast that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras trust not vnder that course for although you passe by them East Northeast yet it is false because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other till you come to a drie sand called A Coroa de Sanguase that is the Crowne of Sangase then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe but my opinion is if it be possible that it were better not to anker because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene if the water breake not vpon them The signes that are found within 14 miles from Mosambique is a great thicke land and a mile and a halfe from the coast lyeth a banke where you passe ouer with fifteene fadome water the land aforesaid is called Maginquale and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees like Pine-apple trees from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles and to Mocango 5. miles hauing all that way the aforesaid trees and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore Now to put into Mosambique you must take your course in the middle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera where you shal find 7.8 and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water and being as farre as the Iland so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George and that of Saint Iames are all one then you are right against the Islandes and from thence putting in you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio in the Iland of Mosambique vntil you be in a good depth which shal be a channel stretching North and South and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe then winde Northwarde alwaies keeping of the point called Noâ—â—a Senhora do Baluarte which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water without the fortresse of Mosambique and also from the sandes called Cabaciera which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro you must run northeast which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees 1 â— that is in the end of Southwest the course from this Island or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées and shall haue the wind Southeast and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south so you begin to come from India in the winter time from the Equinoctiall line or to the height of Coa that is vnder 15. degrées and 1 â— you must runne East Northeast and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa the signes you alwaies find in this way are alwaies about ten degrées in the night time you haue white and shining water and from those ten degrees to the coast of India sometimes you see many birdes that come from the shore that is from the coast of Arabia as Quartelles and other such like smal birds and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India then the Compasse beginneth to lessen in the Northwest for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest and 1 â— part and rather lesse then more The 6. Chapter To sayle from Goa to Cochin FRom Goa to Batecola you must saile two or three miles from the land from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep for it is deeper there then neerer to Cochin for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fadome deepe from thence it is good to runne Southeast and Southeast and by South to the fortresse of Barcelor and to know if you be by Barcelor or in the height thereof you must vnderstand that there are high hils which beginne at Batecola and continue to Barcelor and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde which standeth in the end of y e high hilles on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe about a mile and a halfe from the shore and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South southwest and somewhat more into the sea as the winde will permit you for there are other Islandes and cliffes being where you may passe by as I saide before at fourteen fadome water it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are nothing but Ilandes and cliffes which hauing past you come to see the Fort of Mangalor as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar which is â— miles let your course here be south southeast at 18. fadom deep from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles y e course is south southeast 18 fadome deepe from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles the course beeing south southeast and at twelue ten fadome deepe which is a good way The 17. Chapter The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall written by the said Rodriâ— de Ligos THe towne of Cochiin lieth vnder nine degrees and â— â— rather lesse than more and departing out of Cochiin towards Portingall you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come â— miles from Cochiin and being there you shall so set your course that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Maâ—ale you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes yet
to say truth there are none Those Islandes being past it is good to take your course Southwest till you come to foure degrees and from thence south southwest to three degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall from Cochin all the way aforesaid to this place The compasse lieth northwest a strike and a halfe beeing vnder three degrees on the south side of the line then you begin to haue the thunder out of the west and northwest with a stiffe winde and from thence you shall hold south and south by west to ten or twelue degrees in which you shal haue the wind southeast vnder these twelue degrees the compasse holdeth northwestward a strike and â— parts but shall not therfore be made any abatement in your reckoning for it is often found that the water or streame doth there run to the west which would then be two faults for that as I vnderstand it in this course you must account all that is said the ship hath gone because you shall likewise find streames that draw to the southeast being at 12 degrees as I said before til you be vnder 15. degrees theÌ„ you haue the winde sometime south southeast then you must not lie westward for it is not good but rather runne east and east southeast alwaies keeping good watch to the eightéenth degrée vnder the which lieth the droughtes called 〈◊〉 Baxios dos Garagiaus and hauing a south-East wind then it is good to hold your course southwest vntill you discouer the Island of Diego Rodâ—ges and if it lieth right before you then you shall sée some of the birdes called Alcatrases and some hearbes called Saâ— driuing in the water and there the compasse goeth no higher but beginneth from thence againe to diminish or lessen when you are past this Island or the point thereof then runne southwest and southwest and by west to 26. degrees vnder the which height lieth the first point of the Island of S. Laurence as soone as you are vnder this height then you shall hold your course west southwest to 29. degrees and from thence west and west and by south and to know when you are north and by south with the Island of Saint Laurence that is with the middle of the vttermost land on the south side then marke the compasse well and if you bee by the countrey aforesaid then your compasse will bee a strike and 1 â— one from the other northwestward from thence you shall hold your course as winde and weather serueth for being from about the 15. of Aprill till the last of May it is necessary to haue the Firme land on boarde for that there at those times you haue the winde North and northwest and being in the monthes of Februarie and March then the winde is east and south where you must rule your course as the wind serueth and being right with the land north south then the compasse shall leaue a strike rather more than lesse to the Northwest which is a certaine signe to bee right against it but if it be more then assure your selfe you are not by the land then beeing 30. or 40. miles from thence and though you be but 30 miles from the land you shall see gréene water but you finde no ground The compasse that I speake of shall be sixe and euen at the Cape das Agulhas with those that make them leane northeastward in Portingall a halfe strike rather lesse then more and when you come to the Cape das Agulhas and hetherwards as long as you haue not muddie ground you are not at the Cape das Agulhas wherefore spare not often to cast your lead for it will be for your owne good Passing the Cape das Agulhas to the cape de Bona Speranza it is not good to saile northwest as long as you haue ground for that therewith you should not passe the Cape de Bona Speranza but being past it then runne northwest til you come to 16. degrees vnder the which height the Island of Saint Helena doth lie or to 16. degrees and 1 â— and when you come to that height then run west and somewhat southerlie or the first meale tide west and by south because of the compasse of the sea in some streames for I thinke you shall finde no more heights although you should sayle west and by south and sayling on that course you shall continue it 50. miles further but no more and when you perceiue the Island and cannot reach it by day then strike all your small sayles holding about 5. miles from thence in such manner that in the night time you hold west and west and by north there the compasse beareth full northeast halfe a strike and as you make your reckinng well in your course from the cape de Bona Speranza to this Island with the aduantage of the compasse as it ought to be you shall find that it lieth aboue seauentie miles more westward then it standeth in the Sea Card departing from this Iland to saile to Portingall and to sée the Iland called Ascention you shall run northwest and northwest and by west for 70. miles then you shal goe somewhat Easternly as some doe then it wil be needful to saile 100. miles northwest and by west and from thence northwest vntill you come by the generall wind but come no nearer vnto the land for then you should not make a good voiage and although the south winde doth continue longer in this course which bringeth you to twelue fourtéene degrées on the north side yet leaue it not for that neyther put close vnder the coast of Guinea when you haue the general wind although you might more westernly neyther leaue off therefore to follow your course for it will be large enough althougl sometimes it scanteth because you are close by the land It is good to kéepe 150. or 200. miles from the coast for although that by the sea cardes you finde your selfe to bee two hundred miles from the land notwithstanding you are a good way nearer the reason whereof is that you sayle from the point of the Island of S. Helena which lieth in the sea carde and not from the Island that lieth 70. miles westward as aforesaid and although the pointes doe assuredly lie towards the Island Flores it therfore maketh no reason that it is not so as I say for that in the course through the sea where you finde the hearbe Sargosso the winde being there alwaies northeast the sea or streame runneth to the Antilhas or fore Iland of the Spanish Ilandes whereby the ships doe so little multiplie in the course of Sargosso if these waters and streames doe chance to meete the ships when they are in the course of Sargosso it happeneth often times that the ships beare too loofeward but very seldome and it happeneth oftentimes that by Guinea the streame runneth northward and being somewhat neere the land then the water draweth you presently to the land also the
winde comming most out of the northwest and north which letteth you from sayling northwest and being to Seaward you shal rather haue a northeast wind and although you haue many meanes to kéepe you from going close vnder the coast of Guinea I set this downe here because I haue noted it my selfe for that all the ships in what course soeuer they be which presently winde themselues to kéepe aloofe from the coast of Guinea being in the course of Sargosso they haue no full winde but onelie northeast windes and sometimes calmes which sailing to lee ward you find not where you haue the winde east and east southeast All the shippes that come from the Antilhas or Spanish Ilandes the scarsest windes that they finde are out of the East whereby you may vnderstand that when you hold farre off from Guinea it is no cause of hauing a longer Voyage but you shall the sooner finde a better and fuller winde and so when you come vnder twentie degrees and that the compasse keepeth steedie to twentie fiue degrees then you are not to lee ward there you beginne to sée the hearbe Sargosso whereby that hearbe is called Sargosso and make no reckning of being too loofeward or too léeward for there is no certaintie thereof so when you saile north and northeast and that the néedle of the compasse lieth not north westward thē be wel assured that the Iland Flores is right before you continuing so till you come to the Iland of Fayael which is one of the Flemmish Ilands called as Ilhas dos Alcores The compasse that within S. Helena was full halfe a strike Northeastward will be full if you marke it well and when you come vnder thirtie sire or thirtie nine degrees and ⅓ then you shall see the Iland Flores with some Torteaur in the water and being fortie miles from the Iland Flores towardes the coast then you shall sée the birdes Garagiaus and Duckers and the compasse will in a manner be euen and if there be any difference it will bee somewhat northeastward for from the Iland Flores to the Iland Fayael the compasse is full as six as I said before The 8. Chapter The course and Nauigation from India to the Cape de Bona Speranza set downe by another Portingall Pilot. WHEN you depart from Cochiin to sayle for Portingall you must doe your best to get vnder tenne degrees and a halfe till you be 50. miles West south west from it whereby you will bee scarse vnder 10. degrées vnder the which hight lyeth the Ilands Mamales for the streame will alwaies drawe you to the middle of the Channel betwéene these Ilands and the Ilands of Maldiua vnder 9. degrées a halfe you must passe full forward without séeing any of those Ilands and go shoare vnder 9. degrées a quarter although in the Cards they place many false Ilands And if you chaunce to set sayle from Cochin the 20. of Ianuarie little more or lesse then run so that you may passe the Ilands on the southwest and southwest and by south vntill you bee vnder the Equinoctial line because you go late to sayle and it may be that the wind and weather wil not serue you so well to holde to Sea ward from the Iland of Brandaon then you may hold your course betwéene the Ilands called Dos Irmaos lying vnder 4. degrées on the south and from thence you must take your course to the Ilands of Pedro Mascharenhas and so following your way if it chaunce being vnder 4. degrées southward you haue much thunder lightning and rayne because commonly it is found there in the moneth of Februarie as I my selfe haue tryed vntill 14. degrées then doe your best to get vnder 14. or 15. degrées for commonly vnder 15 or 16. degrées you shall find southeast winds and then put no further into the Sea but passe betweene the Iland Brandaon and the Iland of Lopo Soares which is a good course and as soone as you are past the Iland then take your course by the Iland of Ioan de Lisboa betwéene the which Iland and the Iland of Pedro Mascherenhas you haue a good way so that you come to passe 14. or 15 miles from the Iland of Saint Laurence from thence set your course West southwest till you come vnder 29. degrées and then run West and West and by South to 34. degrées or as farre as you will by this course running in this sort comming within 50. or 6◠miles of the land called Terra do Natal you shall see many Birdes and the more it stormeth is foule weather the more Birds you shall see and if you see many then be assured you are farre from the land and when you loose the sight of them then looke well to your selfe for the closer you are by the land you loose the sight of them altogether vnlesse it bee the blacke Rauens with white billes the neerer you are to the land the more you shall see of them although they are likewise seene at the least 20. miles from the shore but feare not when you begin to come to the Iland of S. Laurence but hold the course abouesaid and when you beginne to discouer the mouth of the Chanel betweene Saint Laurence and Mosambique then you presently find the runing of the streame towards the Cape de Bona Speranza and feare not in that country to hold your course southwest for commonly after you haue the wind south and as much as you haue runne west Northwest so much you haue furthered your way but take heede you keepe still from the coast and so you will make a better Viage for the streame will driue you to the Cape although the wind helpeth you not and this is to bee vnderstoode that when you come late from Cochin you shall alwaies thereabout finde great West windes also you must know that in March and Aprill all the way from the furthest point of Saint Laurence to the Cape commonly there bloweth North and Northeast winds and if for a day or two it bloweth out of the Southeast or South it is a great wonder therefore make no account of it for at those times they blowe verie seldome in all the way aforesaide to the Cape and the néerer you come to the Cape you find the more northerly windes but when the North wind commeth mist and fléet then be sure of West windes for it is the nature of them in those countries and you must vnderstand that if you arriue in those countries in a Schrickel yeare for they are much more dangerous then other years because the coniunction of the heauenly Planets and bodies as then are different as also the inferiour bodies that are subiect to the superiour whereby they are gouerned then you shall finde from 30. degrées vpwards that as soone as you haue a northerly winde with a small or miseling rayne that there followeth great and foule weather then looke well to your selfe and take great héede least it fall
halfe it is a small ryuer beeing at high water within the Hauen but thrée Fadome déepe and for a marke hath a high trée standing on the South side and along the shore some Sandie dounes which in sight shew like Ilands without trées on the North side lie certaine shallowes you enter into the Hauen Northwest on that is on the side where the trées stand and there as you are within the point you may Anker at fiue and sixe fadome déepe Quiloan or Quiloane lyeth vnder 20. degrées and a halfe and on the South side hath a high Palme trée and the land on the same side is like a hooke and if you desire to put into Quiloane although it were with a shippe of foure hundred tunnes you may well doe it being high water but you must take heede of a drougth lying thrée myles from the Hauen This Hauen at high water is fiue Fadome déepe and when you are in hard by the point of the ryuer you find fiue or sixe Fadome water with muddie ground you enter therein West Southwest and Southwest and by West and the drougthes aforesaide lie East Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane From Mataca or Mâ—nemone to Quiloane you shall see land at thirteene or fourteen fadome déepe and beeing vnder 21 degrees and 60 fadome deepe then you shall be fifteen myles from the land shall find Corall vpon the ground and from thence inward small sands sayling from Quiloane to Soffala you must runne North and north and by East without the poynt or hooke til you be at 12 or 13 fadome déepe and till you sée Soffala and if you desire to stay there then runne till you be vnder 6. or 7. fadome which is 6. or 7. miles from the land the Hauen of Soffala changeth euerie yeare therefore you can not put into it without one of the countrie Pilots and it hath for a marke a companie of palme trees standing together on the north side sailing froÌ„ thence to Mosambique you must runne East till you come to fourty fadome water and from thence East north east running fiftéene or sixtéene myles from the Ilandes Primeiras you shall alwaies in these countries all along the coast find smal thinne blacke sand mixed with the earth although you sayle close in sight of the land Soffala lieth vnder twentie degrees and the Hauen called Bango vnder nyntéene and ½ and the riuer of Cuama vnder eightéene and â— 4 and you runne along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama North East and South West beeing thirtie myles and if you haue occasion to enter into the Riuer of Cuama to take in fresh water you must enter with a small Boate for within it is all fresh water from Cuama to the Ilandes of Primeiras you runne along the coast east and West and somewhat East and by north and West and by South There are two sights of land and beeing vnder eighteene degrees you finde therne fyue fadome deepe in sight of land for the Bankes in those Countries are verie small the course is fiftie miles The Riuer called Dos Bonis Sinais or of good tokens lyeth vnder seuentéene degrees and ¾ and hath these markes that is vppon the North east syde at the mouth of the Hauen there standeth an heap of trées and on the south syde it hath a sandie strand and vppon the furthest poynt outwardes there is a sand Hill or Downes which farre off sheweth like an Iland the entrie is on the South West syde along by the sand the Hauen at the mouth with lowe water is two fadome and beeing within it you may ly at 6. or 7. fadome water you can not see the entrie as you are without but on the North West syde you see the begynning of the land that hath a heape of trees standing vppon it which a farre off showe like the Maste of a shippe and the neerer you drawe to the land the lesse you see thereof so that beeing in the Riuer you see nothing at all because it is hindered by the other branches The Channell of the Ilandes Primenas and of the Ilandes of Angoxas are all one and you sayle East North east and West south west and it is 30 myles with tenne or twelue fadome deepe and neerer to the Ilandes then to the firme land and if you will stay by one of these Ilandes with a West wind you may freelie inough goe close vnto it for it is deepe and passing good ground The first of y e Ilands of Primeiras lyeth vnder 17 degrees ½ if you desire to run betwéene them then runne Southwest from the Iland and you shall freelie enter the chanell without feare for it is déepe inough for the drougthes lye a myle and a half distant from the Iland and if you desire to put in there with a west wind then goe close to the Iland running to the middle therof towards the south syde where you may anker within the length of a great shot at 6 or 7 fadome déepe and desiring to passe either in or out betwéene the droughtes which lie Northeast you may very well doe it and though you beare all your sayles kéeping alwaies néerer the sand of the Iland then to the droughthes in the middle Iland for it is all one vpoÌ„ what syde of the Iland you sayle for there is no cause of feare but onlie where you sée the water breake and desiring to anker by the middle Iland you may fréely doe it and that close by it for it is 12 fadome déepe at low water with a West wind but not with an East wind in the middle way on that side which lyeth against the firme land there standeth a heape of trees by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serue you if necessitie requireth and lyeth a little inward from the strand and if you can not well goe farre inward to the lake doe but digge in the strand and you shall presentie find fresh water but it must be when it is an east wind for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force vpon the shore that you are not able to stay there with your boate The middle Iland which lyeth North east hath no passage at all to the sea but from thence to the drouthes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seuen miles and to the first Iland of Angoxa fyue miles and is all one course with the Ilandes you may fréelie passe by the land with what shippe so euer you will for it is déepe inough all the Ilandes of Angoxas haue thorow fares one running through the other al déep and good ground so that there is betwéene the Ilandes and the firme land at the least eight fadome déepe but you must alwaies sayle néerer the firme land then the Ilandes There lyeth a sandie drougth betwéene the Iland of Angoxa which likewise is to bee sayled on both sides These Ilandes of Angoxas are 4 and betwéen the two middle
Ilandes ly the aforesaid sand drougthes wherfore I wish you not to go too néere them for they are dangerous There lieth a sand drougth 4. miles from the first Iland of Angoxa towardes Mosambique which euerie springtide is couered with the sea hauing other sandes round about it that are alwaies couered with the sea therefore I wish you to take héed of them you may from thence runne along the shore where it is déepe water from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towardes Mosambique there is a haueÌ„ called Os Coaraias that is the Corales from the which hauen about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif which is very dangerous and which a man can hardly shunne till he be almost vpon it and with a Springtide the water breaketh not ouer it wherefore you must take héed vnto it for many shippes haue striken vpon it and Don Ioan Periera fell vpon it when you passe it you must put 3 miles from it into y e séa North east northeast by East being by night but by day you may sayl w t more securitie and looke about you yet nothing going neerer to the shore then 25 fadome déepe in this course you shall passe by the drouthes of Musicatte and following your course North east you shall come right vpon the Ilands of Mosambique if you haue occasion to anker before you come to Musicatte then keepe off from the cliffe towards the land til you be at 15 fadome and there you may anker for it is good grouÌ„d yet but in few places only vnder the point of Musicatte at 20 fadome and more you shall haue faire ground the point of Musicatte lieth with the Ilands of Angoxas North east and South west being 18 miles distant from theÌ„ce to Mosambique you runne North east along the coast the East side of the Iland Premeira lyeth with the drongthes Northeast South west and some what North east and by East and South west and by West the land of the Ilandes Premeiras on the side of Mosambique lyeth vnder 16 degrees and and ¾ you runne along by those Ilands and sands East and West and East by North and West by south and if there you find your self to bee inwards at 12 or 13 foote and lesse within a length of a great shot of the Ilands yet bee not abashed but beware of the outside which is full of stones and other filth whereby no meanes you can anker as being nothing but wood stonâ— if you chance to be in the middle way betwéene the Ilands the drougths with an East wind then you must passe in out betweene the first Iland the drougth which Iland lyeth in middle way from the Ilands Premieras on the side of Soâ—â—ala as also from the third Iland towardes Mosambique running along the West side at 7.10 12 fadome déepe the other drougthes lie in the middle way vnder the stone cliffes therefore you néed not feare them but betwéene the Iland from the trees that are vpon the East side you can by no meanes passe for it is all ouer nothing but droughthes and shallowes From the South west side of these Ilands Premieras and Northeast and south west with the first Iland 7 miles from it there lyeth a sand drougth of foure fadome déepe hoth in leÌ„gth breadth the cariage of a great shotte in length tenne or twelue myles from the Ilands Premieras lieth the Riuer Quilimani where the Coast reacheth East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south and you shall find 6 or 7 fadome déepe within three miles of the land where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani which you must take héed of for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea and if you find your self inwards from Cauo das Correntes you may at all times anker for it is good ground because you are vpon the banks and haue no cause to feare because the wind blowing from the land wil alwaies helpe you whereby you may put into the sea as you thinke good The 11. Chapter The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. Iago that is the smal hauen of S. Iacob which is the mouth of the Riuer Ganges lying in the kingdome of Bengala HE that desireth to sayle from India to Poâ—to Piqueno or the small hauen lying in BeÌ„gala I mean outward about the Iland of Seylon he must set sayle out of the Hauen of Cochiin betweene the which and the 20. of Aprill holding his course along the shore to a place called Briniao which lieth vpon the Cape or poynt of Comoriin that is the furthest poynt or end of the Indian coast southwestward from thence holding his course south till he be vnder 6 degrées ¾ and from thence South east to 5 degrées and â…” and being ther he must runne East till hee seeth the Iland of Seylon for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla that is the poynt of the Galley is the farthest land from thence lying in the south vnder 6 degrees therefore if you hold your course East till you be vnder 5 degrees and â…” you can not fayle to see the land of the Iland Seylon this way and course you must alwaies hold setting out of Cochâ—â— from the 10. of Aprill to the 20. of the same as I sayd before for yf you depart later from thence you must stay longer because as then the wind beginneth to blow stifly out of the South at other tymes hauing the wind Southwest and Northwest blowing verie strong and blustering wheÌ„ you sée the Iland Seylon you shall sayle along the coast East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south to the first drougth lying scarse vnder 6. degrees and the other drougths ly farther vnder 6 degr ½ 7 miles distant one from the other in the same course of East and West and East and by North and West and by south from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drougth are almost 28 miles Beeing 10 or 15 myles beyond the drougthes you shall sayle Northeast till you bee vnder 16 degrees and ½ from thence running North whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firme land about tenne or twelue myles from the land called O pagode de Iorganatte that is the Idole or Idoles Temple of Iorganatte which is a verie good course for this voyage when you perceiue this land which hath certaine high Hilles you shall see some round Houels that are rounder and higher then the Hilles standing vppon them called Palur by the which you shall passe along Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and Southwest and by south vntill you come to the thinne and low land and passing by it you shall come to a Riuer which hath for a marke a flat high field of sand and an other plaine with a houell hauing on the one side somewhat
the side of Malacca to 12. 13. fadome setting your course againe southeast southeast and by east if you finde your selfe to be at 10. fadome then turne againe to the southeast alwaies séeking to be at 10.12 13. fadom for it is the best ground and depth of y e channel when you see a round hil right before you which sheweth like an Ilande y t is Pulo Parselar to the which the droughts or sands aforesaid do stretch notwithstaÌ„ding you shal not let to passe on your way not coÌ„ming nearer to Pulo Parselar then 2. miles Northeastwarde for then you are past the drougthes aforesaid from thence forward put towards the lande about a mile distant holding your course southeast towardes y e point of Cabo Rachado before you come within 3. miles thereof you find a Riffe lying foure miles from the coast which is but 4. fadome deep at high water to seawarde froÌ„ thence there is a channel of 10. fadom deep running from the Island of de Aru to Pulo Parselar you shal vse all the meanes you can to haue the greatest Ilande de Aru Southwest and southwest by west from you holding your course southeast alwaies at 18. at the least 17 fadome if you wil put from Pulo Parselar to the Ilandes de Aru you shal let Parseâ—ar lie Northeast northeast by east from you running northwest Northwest and by West alwaies at 16.17 18. to 15 fadome deep this way is not otherwise to be done for I haue past so my selfe and founde it a very good way The 18. Chapter The course from Malacca to Goa with the stretchings and situations of the Coastes DEparting from Malacca to Goa or India your best course is to saile a mile or a mile and a halfe along by the coast of Malacca alwaies hauing in sight the strikes and neather partes of the Trées that stand vpon the land till you be at Pulo Parcelar and from thence you haue from 16. to 27. and 28. fadome déepe but you must remember not to passe aboue 14. fadome neyther on the one side nor the other and sailing from Malacca about two miles and ½ or 3. miles from thence you finde 2. or 3. droughts of stonie cliffes reaching about halfe a mile into the sea lying right ouer the cesterne or the Kinges Bath by the Portingales called Tanque del Rey you shall likewise looke that you goe not neere the chéeke of Cabo Rachado which Cape lieth vnder two degrees and ½ vppon the same Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North ten miles distant as well vpon the Southeast as the Northwest side and goe not neare the land by a mile at the least as I said before there you haue a good mile and a halfe to the principall part of the channell that runneth to Parcelar and passing by Pulo Pacelor and desiring to crosse ouer from the droughts you shall kéepe off from Pulo Parcelor about 2 miles because that from it there reacheth a banke that iutteth about halfe a mile into the sea being as I said about two miles froÌ„ the land to passe ouer the droughtes being with a flood then Pulo Parcelor shall lie Eastward from you and at an ebbe East Northeast therefore it is néedefull for you to haue great care of the tides that you be not deceiued comming in this sort into those parts you shall runne west Northwest kéeping either on the one side or the other as the tides fal and if you crosse ouer the sea Pulo Parcelor it is best for you to kéepe east and east and by south from it and being in the middle way to the Ilands of Daru lying close vpon the coast of Samatra vnder 3. degrees west Northwest and 30. miles from Malacca then if you see Pulo Pacelor let it be betwéen east southeast and east by south from you and yet you haue a good course and comming towards Pulo Parcelor you must haue it to lie northeast and southwest being two miles from it but when you leaue it to make towards the Ilands of d' Aru then it is best to haue it east and east and by south and being in the sight of the Iland of d' Aru making towards the great Iland you may run within a mile or two thereof safely and without danger for it is all deepe ground The depthes you shall finde by the droughts aforesaid passing through the Channell are from 10. to 11. fadome but not aboue and the greatest depthes you shall finde running through the channel are 12.13.14.15.16 and 17. fadome and although at 3. or 4. castinges you come to 10.9 8. fadome of small fine and blacke sand or muddy ground yet your course is good for you shall presently againe come to 12.13 and 14. fadome and hauing this depth and ground and holding the course aforesaid although at some castings you finde small fine white sand yet your course is good but if you finde great sand or shels then you are out of the channell and when you finde the ground full of black shels and great sand I counsell you to seeke againe for fine small and blacke sand or muddie ground for the ground of great sand and shels is out of the channell therefore you must not cease to cast out your lead to assure your selfe it is likewise good to know the depth with two leads vpon each side of the ship one with good and carefull ouersight alwaies hauing your ankers ready with a cable of 12. or 15. fadome long if need be therewith to help your selfe because herein there is mention many times made of Pulo Pacelor I thought it good likewise to set downe vnder what height it lieth although it is sufficiently set downe us the Sea Cardes it is a land that maketh a point like to a Cape lying on the Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North about fiftéene miles distant ful vnder thrée degrées also you must remember that taking your course from Pulo Parcelor to the Iland of d' Aru being in the middle way you must let Pulo Pacelor lie in East and East and by South from you and beeing somewhat nearer the Islands then Pulo Parcelor is from you almost East Southeast that is as you goe neere the Islandes for that running in this sort you haue a good course and are sure and safe from the droughtes and if by night you passe ouer the droughts then you shall marke the land in the day time as I said before hauing a good winde alwaies looking to your tides that they deceiue you not driuing you vpon the one or the other side for there the streame runneth verie strong as well in the flood and as in the ebbe alwaies ruling your selfe according to the tides and holding your course in such manner that you may cast out your lead and as the aforesaide great Island of d'Aru lieth Southwest from you béeing about two miles from it then
find the ground full of bankes for from Coulaon to Batecola that is by Onor not farre from Goa the ground is bankie and you may Anker at 8. fadome without feare from Batecola to Goa the ground in some places deeper whereby you may gouerne your selfe Touching your Ankerage from Cochijn to Cananor you néede not feare onely to take héede of the Iland called Ilha Cagado lying Southward from Cananor seuen miles and thrée miles Northward from the fortresse of Mangalor there lyeth a row of Ilands Cliffes and Rockes along the coast vntill you come to the fortresse of Barcelor from thence to Batecola you haue certaine Cliffes but they are close to the land and the two Ilands of Batecola you may passe betwéene the first of them and the Firme land without feare for it is 15. or 16. Fadome déepe a little further lyeth the Iland of Honor close to the Firme land then followeth the Ilandes of Angediua which reach as the coast doth and if it bee late in the yeare you shal not put farre into the Créeke of Ancola for as then there is no Terreinhos or land winds to driue you out againe therfore it is then better to runne something far from the coast for you haue many times the Viracoins or Sea winds somwhat farre off and being néere the shore they would not much helpe you This must be from the twentie of March forward If you chance to be by Angediua and had néede of a Road or harber you must enter into Angediua on the North side as far from that land as from the Firme land and rather somewhat néerer the Iland then the Firme land where you haue a good Road or harber for there many times diuers shippes doe winter being constrained therevnto within it is sixe fadome déepe a little further from Angediua lie foure or fiue Ilands from the ryuer Sanguisijn close by the Firme land and from thence about halfe a mile further forward lyeth the Iland of Goa Velha that is old Goa and then there are no other Ilands heerein to bee noted You must vnderstand that oftentimes it happeneth that along the coast you shall find the wind Northwest and North Northwest without chāging which bloweth very strong with the which wind I aduise you not to set sayle although it blow out of the North but if it be cleare day then you may hoyse Anker and put to Sea wards and if the wind commeth not about to Northeast being foure miles from the land and before noone about nine or ten of the clocke you shall Anker till it be noone till the Viracoins or Sea winds come therewith to sayle againe towards the land for in this sort you shall get aduantage to loofeward although it bee with paine and labour as likewise the time will shewe you what you shall doe I must further aduertise you that when you are by the coast of Seylon it being about the fifteene of Februarie or past then you néede not sayle further then to the Ilands Verberijn and from thence to the Cape de Comorijn for as then you néede neither to feare water nor streames to driue you outward yet you must not bee negligent therin for some yeares the stormes come later sometimes sooner as the winds blow whereof you must be carefull and being the fiftéene of Februarie or past you must remember not to runne inwards but kéepe out for as then the streames runne inwards which might deceiue you and the later it is in Februarie the stronger they draw inward comming to Cochijn betwéene the 15. and 20. of March you may wel get from thence to Goa although the Viage is some thing doubtfull but being past the twentie of March I would not counsell you to do it for that of late many years together there hath béene vpon the coast of India in Aprill and May diuers blustering stormes of crosse winds blowing towards the coast with darke and cloudie skies which would bring you in great danger therefore against that time it is best to chuse a good Hauen neuerthelesse God can send faire weather winds when it pleaseth him To put into the Hauen of the fortresse of Barcelor in the coast of Malabar aforesaide you must vnderstande that when you see a round Houell vppon the end of the hil of Batecola towards y e Northeast and Northeast and by East then you are right against the fortresse of Barcelor may put in at 7. fadome so you haue the fortresse East and halfe a stricke to East and by North from you and you shall sée all the Cliffes lying along the coast to the Ilands as Ilhas de Saint Maria which are altogether stonie Cliffes but they stand close to the land The 19. Chapter A description of all the Hauens places coastes and Sands vpon the East and South side of the Ilands Seylon with their heights courses stretchings situations with the course from thence to the fortresse of Columbo holden by the Portingales FIrst I will beginne with Trinquanamale which lyeth vnder nine degrées vppon the East side of the Iland Seylon eight myles from thence Southwarde lyeth a smal ryuer and before you come at it putting from Trinquanamale ther are some Ilands that with Birds fileings looke white and in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid lie two smal Ilands full of trées from Trinquanamale to this ryuer the course is North and South and North and by East and South and by West and running along the coast towards this ryuer then you shall leaue the Ilands aforesaid on the land side sayling without thē for that betwéene them and the land are many stones and Cliffes this ryuer and Trinquanamale lie distant from each other eight or nine miles at the furthest From the saide ryuer with the Ilands in the entrie thereof to the ryuer of Mataqualou are 12. myles and lieth vnder the hight of seuen degrées and 1 ◠The course from the one to the other is Northwest and Southeast being past this ryuer comming betwéene the Ilands the mouth therof you may go as néere the shore as you will for it is without danger within a great shotte of the land it is 20. fadome déepe From Mataqualou about fiue or sixe miles the course is North and South till you come to the point or hooke and from this point fiue or sixe miles further you runne along the coast North and South and North and by East and South and by West further forward towards the first Sand about fiue or sixe miles Northward there standeth a woode of Palme trées and comming right ouer against it the coast runneth North Northeast and South southwest and somewhat North and by East and South and by West from those fiue miles to the first sand the course is North East and southwest and Northeast and by East and Southwest and by West and before you come within foure or fiue miles of these Sandes you shall sée some Houels and hillockes of red
and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha this créeke was called the Enseada or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie it hath much wood verie good to make ships of fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of water all sandie ground in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether and to Champello you runne Northwest This Iland of Champello hath a good road and safe harbour but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest and although the wind commeth from the land notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous which reach as the land doth till you bee vnder 17. degrees and run nearer to the northeast at the end whereof in the way to China there lieth 8. Islandes three great fiue small all full of trées and sandie strandes but without fresh water betwéene them round about it is altogether flat and foule way so that as soone as you let fall the anker the cable is presently fretted in péeces betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe This information was giuen me by certaine people of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme because they ankered and all their cables brake from the ground they saued themselues in the boate run through all those Islandes to find fresh water and could sée none you run from the hooke or point of those sandes to Pulo Caton Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by east and southwest and by west for they lie like a bow therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Caton running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles but returning againe to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton for that if you come thether early in the yeare you haue the west windes so strong that if you should be far from the coast they would carrie you by force vpon the sands without any remedie as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton and if you chance to be on the side of the land you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth betwéene the Firme land and the Iland which is two mile and a halfe broad all faire and good ground as I said before Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Aynon North and South and North by east and South and by West somewhat more then 50. mile This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées and ½ reacheth from the point aforesaid southwestward 12. or 13. miles and from the East side lyeth the way from China which you run Northeast and north east and by north to 19. degrees and ½ and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees and ½ from the Northeast side in such manner that the Iland is in forme foure square the channell betwéene it and the Firme land is in the narrowest part 6. miles where there lieth a hauen called Anchio hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe seuen miles eastward From Anchion lieth a créeke with good harbour and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land there lieth a great Riffe and sandes but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen called Taalhio at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland and from this high land aforesaid it runneth 12. miles northwestward and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side and inward hilles and houels from the end of the land Aynon on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓ to the Iland Pulo Gom in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north are 8. miles and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land it is a high land in forme like a Bell and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour wherein the ship Santa Crus lay from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes called Pulo Tio in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north being fiue miles Pulo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small seperated one from the other without any Trees from thence the Coast reacheth Northeast and Northeast and by North to the Enseada dos Ladroins that is the Creeke of Rouers from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea and vpon the east side therof about halfe a mile from it there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer whether many ships doe saile and put in a little further from this Iland lieth another Riuer wherein I haue béene which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China and with a southwest winde is discouered and threre also runneth strong streames the entrie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land it is faire and good ground and being about this point of land you shall run till you come to a sand bay where you shall anker for within it is shallow and sandie on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land and from these 2. riuers 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground The land of this creeke on the north northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile it is shallow but muddie ground you goe to the Hauen of Comhay whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come it is like a créeke that is very great hauing another point or end of high land which reacheth North and South and right ouer against this hauen on y e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it and is distant from the aforesaid point
there is fresh water with a sandie bay and when you make towardes this Iland comming to it you shall finde thereaboutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground and if you find muddie grounde then you are hard by the land from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées and along by it it is banky and muddy grounde it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy East Northeast and West Southwest stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the hauen of Camboia which is twelue miles distant this hauen is called Dos Malyos that is of the Malaquiters or those of Malacca lying right ouer against Pulo Condor which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast and northwest by North and southeast and by South from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen on the side sandie grounde and in the middle muddie ground the Chinars that saile froÌ„ Sion to China passe by y e north side of Pulo Wy and when they are right ouer against it then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid running the same course to Pulo Condor which they see vppon the North side when you are right against this point or hooke then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde and somewhat further 13. fadome sandie ground but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land but rather kéep at 14. fadome for it is surer take heed of 2. Ilands that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor which will bee on the South side and right before you you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor lying vnder 8. degrées and â…” and you runne with Pulo Wy East West and somewhat east and by south and west and by North and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side and so it should be on your North side then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof alwaies taking héede of the aforesaid Riffe of the Ilandes â—â—king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor with good regard of the Ilandes the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point passing by the South side of Pulo Wy within 3. miles thereof you shall finde 16. fadome deep and keeping your course to Pulo Condor at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the Ilandes being 6. miles from Pulo Condor but rather take the depth for more securitie of scarce seuentéen fadome whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest and when you are in sight of the Ilands then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will leauing the Ilands on the North side if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa theÌ„ runne North Northeast and Northeast and by north which will bring you to the sea coast and to shunne the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell which lie 4. miles from the land if you runne along the shore at 13 fadome then you come vppon those sandes but when you are past them all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China the sands aforesaid lie vpon the coast of Champa runne with Pulo Condor North and South and North and by East and south and by West and almost halfe a strike more The 22. Chapter Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the hauen of Sian FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy there are about full 20. miles lying from each other East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by south and to go to Pulo Wy hold your course right west not reckening any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse and being founde what more theÌ„ halfe way you shal finde a banke of muddie ground of 8. or 9. fadome deepe and being northward in the sterne of the shippe you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande this banke aforesaid being past it will not bee long before you shall see Pulo Wy right ouer against you and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side you must vnderstand y t this land of Camboia maketh a point froÌ„ whence the banke aforesaid runneth of from this point to y e hauen of Sian you run along the coast north northwest by y t which lyeth many Ilands stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½ In this countrie ly the most and greatest Ilandes one by the other and there make a hooke for the land hath a créeke called A Ensâ—â—da de Lian which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½ the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾ and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth inwardes reacheth east northeast and hath many trees w t a sandy strand froÌ„ this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees you cannot passe beetweene the first Iland and the land for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second or the better to bee vnderstood betweene them both there is a small channell but very deep of 60. fadom water and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke little more or lesse about half a mile from the land on the inner side there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth which at low water may bee seene you run from this point to the hauen of Sian along by the land north and south the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along they are not ouer great neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile and nearer you shall not goe neither runne in betweene them and the land but let them lie on the east side comming to Pulo Wâ— vntill the tenth of February there you find much east wind whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands that ly along by the coast being sure not to put in betweene them keeping this course north northwest along the shore as I saide before and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland which is full vnder 12. deg without seeing any more Ilandes then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Lyon and being there you shall presentlie set your course Northwest Northwest and by North to get out of the creeke least the streame should driue you
inward with that course you shall come to sée the two Ilandes aforesaid lying on the north point of the aforesaid créeke it is in crossing ouer twelue miles as you begin to see the coast on the other side lying before the créeke northwarde the Iland stretching in that sort as I said before being past the point of the créeke you shall run thether being by it you shall sayle without it about halfe a mile from the shore these Ilands end about 10. miles before you come to the hauen of Sian as aforesaid and the last of them are 4. or 5. small Ilands one running through the other along the coast these Ilands haue no trees are of red earth and comming to the end of these Ilands then put to the shore vntill the Ilandes bee right south from you then take your course right North wherewith you shall see the hauen of Sian which lyeth froÌ„ these Ilands 10. miles distant The hauen of Sian lyeth in a low land ful of trees without any sandy strands but altogether of soft muddie ground dirte hath likewise a banke of muddie ground reaching two miles and a halfe southward wheÌ„ you enter first vpon this bank it is hard muddie ground you cannot enter into this hauen with any great ships but with a spring tide and although you shold fall vpon this muddie ground ther is no danger for you must come vpon drie land to put out or in with the tides comming from the Ilandes aforesaid to the hauen of Sian in manner as I said before sailing northward as they ly southward from you being in the night time you may boldly anker vpon the muddie grounde for the next morning you shal find your selfe right ouer against the hauen so that you shall plainly sée it for it is the mouth or entry of a great riuer you shall sayle therein passing ouer muddy ground all with the tides and south winds which will bring you vpwards at pleasure The 23. Chapter Of the course from the hauen of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Tymon Pedra Branqâ—â— DEparting from the point of y e haueÌ„ of Camboia being about halfe a mile or thereabouts in the sea you shal hold your course Southwest whereby you shall see two Ilandes lying betweene Pulo Coâ—dor and Pulo Wy from the which you shal saile about halfe a mile stil running southwest not once putting Southward because of y e strong streams y t run to y e Iland of Bornon and if the wind begin to be calme and that you desire to Anker in the middle of the gulfe you may well doe it for it is at the least 38. or 40. fadome déepe therfore leaue not sayling Southwest ward for with that course you shall come right vppon Pulo Tymon the Iland of Pulo Tymon is great high and full of trées and hath verie good fresh water and if you néede there you may haue it right ouer against it in an Iland lying in a Créeke of the same Iland when you put to this Iland of Pulo Tymon on the Northeast point you shall sée a round Iland and desiring to runne betwéen it and the Iland or betwéen it and the Firme land you may wel do it for you may passe fréely round about in euerie place and comming to Pulo Tymon you shall hold your course South and somwhat South and by West towards Pulo Tynge which is a verie high rounde Iland much like a Doune or a sheafe of Corne it hath some small Ilands lying by it in the same course of South and South and by West you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stonie Cliffe from thence you begin the course to Sincapura running about thrée or foure miles Westward The 24. Chapter Of the course out of the Hauen of Macau in China to the Iland of Pulo Tymon the straight of Sincapura WHen you depart from Macau to y e other coast you must put out at the East chanel if the wind bee Northwest if not then you cannot passe that way but you must sayle thorough the south west chanel which is a good way to passe out running from the point of Varella right vnto the land on the other side of Macau to shunne the cliffe of Belchior Dalmeida and when you are about a Harquebush shot from the other side then you shall runne along to a point of land which is the end thereof where the Iland of Castro lyeth from this point the banke hangeth off for the which cause you shall runne neerer to the land of Castro then to the point of land that you runne not on ground for in those countries you haue most of the shallowes in the land that lyeth on the left hand and the depthes on the right hand with a spring tide at this banke you find 4. fadome and a halfe and being without the banke you shall sayle vnto the mouth or hole running as then to the point of the banke to shunne the Cliffes which will presently bee seen for that the water breaketh vpon them vntill they be on your right hand being out of the mouth of this entrie you shall sayle the course hereafter following and hauing also departed from Varella being a Harquebush shot from thence you must run to the Iland called Do Bugio that of the Meercatte and being ouer against it passe close by it for it is a good way for the north winds which you find there abouts and because the wind on the other side is verie scarce the aforesaide Cliffe lyeth in the middle way of the chanell and you must runne on that side from the north along the coast to the Iland of Castro and when you are out of the chanell you shal keepe Southwest along by the Ilands if it bee cleare weather till you see the Iland of Sanchon and when you are within eight miles of it being to Seaward from it then you haue good sayling for I doe alwaies hold this course and passe well with it being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon you shall runne Southwest for the space of two miles or that you bee 12. miles as you gesse from the furthest hooke of the Iland of the Sands and being there you shal then runne Southwest so long as that you thinke that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon and then againe running South southwest and South South and by West by which course you shal come to see the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto which course I haue holden in this manner with a good and spéedie wind being in sight of the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir and hauing a bad wind not being North then the time will shew you what you haue to doe when you see those Ilands you may goe neere them if you will for it is faire cleare sandie ground at fifteene Fadome from thence to Pulo Cambir the coast runneth
the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge being here the depthes will presently beginne to increase to seauen and eight fadome which depthes you shall holde vntill the Cliffes lie behinde you and from thence putting to sea towards the side of Samatra leauing Sabon side being carefull to kéepe from it for you haue nothing els in that place that can hurt you but onely the cliffes which the streames runne vnto you shall likewise take heed on both sides as wel of Sabon as Sumatra for they are all ouer from thence along the coast full of bankes and shallowes These two Cliffes aforesaid being past which you shall almost leaue behinde you you shall presently runne to the land of Sumatra with the lead in your hand not passing lesse then fiue fadome nere vnto the land nor aboue seauen fadome to seaward with your lead neuer out of hand for in this countrie you must rule your selfe more by the lead and depthes then by the compasse When you are at the end of this Iland of Sabon then you haue another Island called Pulo Dure which reacheth to another Island called Pulo Boyon then another Iland called Pulo Buron which lie so close to Sumatra that they séeme to be all one land at the end of this Iland Dure lie 3. Ilands one great and two small This Iland Dure lieth with the point of Sabon where the two small Cliffes lie north northwest and south southeast they are in distance about sixe or seuen miles with 6.7 and 8. fadome water muddie ground when you are right ouer against the Iland called Pulo Buron which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra then run southeast and southeast by south and following that course vntil you come to tenne fadome then runne Southeast vntill you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro from this point to the Iland of Pulo Buron are three miles which is without the channell and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward frō you then run south and south and by east to the 3. Ilands called Calantigas whereof the first hath an Iland lying by it on the south side the middle Iland hath nothing at all and the third Iland that lieth most southward hath an Iland lying by it on the North side These Ilands as you passe by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanianbaro somewhat further lieth an other point called Tanianbaro which is very euen with the sea betwéene these 2. points lieth the Riuer of Andargyn and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the Ilands East and West betweene both the points are 9. miles When you sée this point then from thence forward you shall no more sée the land of Sumatra because there are many créekes from this point you make to the Ilands Calantigas Northwest and Southeast and is in length about seauen miles These Ilands lie vnder 1. degree vpon the south side of the Equinoctiall on the east side of these Ilands you haue many stonie cliffes both aboue vnder the water therefore you must put off from them to seaward for that betweene them the Iland of Linga it is very foule and dangerous if you will goe from the Islandes Calantigas to the Island Varella then hold your course Southeast and Southeast and by East whereby you shall come to it They are in distance 9. miles and in this way you shall finde seuen or eight fadome déepe and close by the land sixtéene and seuentéene fadome on the North side but on the South side it is lesse This Island hath fresh water it lieth right ouer against a point of the land of Samatra called Tanianbon from the which point to the Island are two miles and you runne North Northwest and South Southeast and you must passe betwéene this Island and the point leauing the Island to seaward On the backe bord side in the face of this point lieth thrée Islandes whereof the greatest is called Iambe but along by the land of Samatra you haue neyther Islandes nor Cliffes To runne from the Island Pulo Varella to the Straightes of Palimbon then run Southeast at seuen fadome muddy ground and with this course you shall sée the hill called Monte de Manopyn which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca When you sée this hill then you can hardlie sée the coast of Samatra because of the créekes and you shall kéepe the same course to the said hill runnning a mile and a halfe from it towards the coast of Samatra leauing the hill on the northeast side not comming any nearer to it for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it and when you are right against the hill Manopyn thē you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon lying vppon the Coast of Samatra a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon forward there lieth a smal or thin point of land and on the south side of the same point there are many cliffes rockes about a mile into the sea al lying vnder the water which make the riffes aforesaid wherefore I aduise you to kéep at the least a mile and a halfe or two miles from it be not deceiued by the great depthes that are along by those riffes for that from many depthes you will at the last fall on ground as it happened to a ship which sailing on that side close to the Island Banca at fiftéene fadome strak with his ruther vpon the stones You must likewise bee carefull not to kéepe too neere the land called as Bocas de Palimbon or the mouthes of Palimbon for they are altogether shallowes and sandes let your Lead be still in hand and goe no nearer then fiue fadome and ½ to the land vntill you be past them nor aboue eight fadome to seaward and if you come to eight fadome then rather kéepe at lesse depth as I said before You runne from this hill Manopyn which standeth in the Iland Banca to the mouthes or creekes of Palimbon that lie on the other side of Samatra north northeast south southwest and is in course fiue miles From thence beginneth the straight called Palimbon which reacheth southeastward and sometimes eastward and in other places southward till you be past through it being past the hill of Manopyn about two miles beyond it you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creeke of Palimbon with the Lead in hand keeping a mile from it at 5. fadome and ½ and goe no nearer to it for they are altogether shallowes and sandes wherefore I counsell you not to goe nearer then 5. fadome and ½ and towards Banca not nearer then 8. fadome holding your course in this manner till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon being there you shall make with the land of Samatra till you be within halfe a mile thereof where th◠land about a long mile right out before you maketh a point and being
there the streame runneth very strong towardes the Southwest wherefore there is no other remedy then onely to runne close by the shore if you desire to goe to the straight of Sunda you must be verie careful for there are so many Ilandes along by the coast that they are not to be numbred from the Iland of Tristan de Tayde to the Ilandes of Manancabo are about 100. miles and your course is Northwest and southeast somewhat Northwest and by North and southeast and by south you must run between the Ilandes As Ilhas d'Ouro and the lande by which course you shall come to the poynt O Cabo das Correntes which is verie high running into the sea further then all the rest of the land but you must not go too neere to the point for there are certaine sandes and cliffes sticking out from it this point lyeth vnder one degrée and â…” on the South side of the Equinoctiall I set down no other marke to know the countrie of Sumatra because the streames draue to seaward without all these Ilands so I could not take a better course then to put to the Iland called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo that is the golde Iland of Manancabo and I fel on it vpon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. daies along by it it is a verie high and faire Iland to behold so that you may easily iudge well perceyue that it hath Gold it is altogether of a smooth stéepe grounde along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length you run by it North south and somewhat north and bâ— West and south and by East it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Ilandes about a myle and a halfe distant from the land vnder thrée degrees which is the height that I found but they are distant from the firme lande of Sumatra 8. or 9. myles the Riuer of Manancabo lying on the land of Sumatra right ouer against this countrie I think it to be a verie great riuer for from thence there runneth a great streame and much wood and other trash driueth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea The best marke we found vpon this coast of Sumatra was that we neuer left the sight of land but ran along by it for by that course you come to the Iland Ilha de Ouro scarce to 3. and 3. degrées and ½ I write this because you shall not trust to the running of the streame that draweth Southwestward as I said before from the Iland Ilha de Ouro you run to the straight of Sâ—nda southeast and Southeast and by south and being past Ilha de Ouro there lyeth two Ilandes which reach North and south one from the other in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles nowe to runne to the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda you must not leaue the coast of the firme land hauing good respect to the Ilandes and cliffes whereof there are very many lying by it that you can hardly know where to find y e mouth of the straight but onely by the knowledge of the Islande which is very high lying right ouer against a point of the Iland of Sumatra on the north side this firme land of Sumatra endeth there where with the Iland of Iaua Maior it maketh the straight it hath on the Northwest side of this straight two or thrée Ilands lying about a mile from the land and vpon the Ilandes that lie néerest to the lande there was once a shippe taken with French men the great shotte being kept by the kinges of the Islande of Banda and Calâ—pa and aâ— mile southwarde from the lande lyeth the Iland that hath a high sharpe pointed hill as I saide before and on the North side of this high sharp hil or Iland are 4. Ilands whereof one is verie high reaching Northeast and southwest they lie somewhat further from it that is by the aforesaid Ilands close by the point on the Northeast side betweene al these Ilands the land there is a great créeke of manâ— hidden cliffes lying vnder the water whereof some are vncouered and thinke not to enter into this créeke vnlesse it be with a Fuste or a very small ship for it is better to runne towardes the Iland lying on the south side thereof along by the point which you neede not feare for it hath nothing that can hurt you and then you shall presently sée lying before you on the Northeast side a poynt of lande which sheweth to haue 2. or 3. Ilands at the end thereof along by this point lyeth the mouth or entrie of the straight of Sunda where you must passe through this point reacheth North and south hauing in the North a high houell the south side being the ende of the same land close by the mouth of the straight for a better marke Northeastward from you you sée a long Iland and on the southeast part a high land which land lyeth aboue Bantam a hauen in the Ilande of Iaua where the Portingalles lade Pepper which groweth is gathered in that Ilande and behind the aforesaide high lande lyeth the towne of Bantam and before you come to the said land that lyeth aboue Bantam you shall in the East Northeast perceiue two or thrée Ilands and if you desire to go to Bantam you may passe betweene these Ilands but I once againe aduise you of the Iland lying in the mouth or channell or straight of Sunda aforesaide which is for a marke of the said straight being very high and deepe withall and hath this token that when you are past or about the first point or hooke you may then anker at 20. and 25. fadome deepe as you haue occasion vnlesse it be close to the land where there lyeth many white stones and rockes and further to seawarde it is altogether muddie grounde at 20. and 25. fadome but it is best for you to anker as neere the lande as you may for your best securitie for there are many stiffe blastes that come out of the land this high Island or poynted hill lyeth vnder fiue degrees and ½ for there I haue often taken the height of the sunne as I lay at anker and the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda lyeth vnder y e same height to sea warde you haue these Ilandes as you passe to the mouth or entry of the straight the first Ilandes lying West to seaward from the aforesaid pointed high hill or Iland and West Southwest or seuen miles from thence there is a rowe of Ilandes with certaine Cliffes lying about them and Southward other sixe or seuen miles there lyeth other high and great Ilands and also Southwestward from thence there are other Ilandes betweene all these Ilandes there are many channelles which are so narrow that men can hardly get out of them the best channell to runne through I founde by the aforesaide high pointed
hill or Islande on the South-East side reaching Northeast and southwest in all these channels you neede feare nothing but that which lyeth before your eies The 29. Chapter To saile from Calapa in the Islande Iaua Maior to China with the courses and situations of the coasts particularly set downe SAyling out of the hauen of Calapa you shall runne to an Iland lying by the poynt of Carauon that lyeth néerest to the land wherby you shal presently see two points of sandie downes which reach towardes the Ilands that reach to seaward when they are on your right hande then you must put in betwéene the Ilandes through the channell where the winde giueth you best way for it is all fayre and good ground being past these Ilandes you shall runne along by the coast to the point of Carauon which lyeth Eastward about two and a halfe or thrée myles in length from thence to take your course crosse ouer to the Islande of Lusepara and from this point of Carauon lying on the coast of Iaua you runne North and South to the Iland of Lusepara or Lasapara and somewhat North and by West and South and by East the course being fiftie miles the course is holden in this manner because the East and East Southeast winds as then beginne to blowe in those countries that is as soone as the month of May commeth on and likewise as then the waters and streams beginne to runne with the Monson of the year which is the coniunction and time of the certaine winds towards the straight of Sunda the channell of Lampon which beginneth from the mouth reacheth to a thicke point and créeke with a Riffe lying on the coast of Sumatra about 18. or 19. miles from Lusepara in the Countrey aforesaide by the point Carauon which lyeth thrée myles froÌ„ the hauen of Calapa you shall take your course North Northeast for 8. or 9. miles whereby you shall sée a round Island which will lie on the side of the land of Sunda or Iaua and being past this Island Westwarde from thence you shall sée a rowe of Islandes that do all reach North and south passing by the countrey of the mouth or straight of Sunda by this aforesaid round Ilande you shall find ground at 20. fadom at the which depth you shall take your course North North and by West whereby you shall alwaies be within the sight of the aboue named Ilands to the ende of them with the aforesaid depth of 20. fadome when you beginne to lose the sight of these Ilandes being past them you shall presently come to 14. and 13. fadome and being at 13. fadome you shall runne the same course of North and North and by east vntill as you thinke you are within 15. or 16 miles neere the Iland of Lusepara and being there then run North and there the depthes will begin to lessen to 11. fadome which is a good course for that running at more depth you should go outward at Lusepara thus sayling North and at 1â— fadome as I saide before you are in your right course till you come to 9. fadom and being there then looke about you for you shall not runne long but you shall sée the Island of Lâ—separa which will open like two small houelles lying East and west one from the other y t in the east being greater theÌ„ the other in all this wâ—y in y e Month of May I found East east southeast windes as I said before and according to the times of the waters windes and streames you shall gouerne your selfe in such manner that in your course you alwaies run Northward for it is your right course best way from the point Carauon to the Island Lusepara and if you go later to saile hauing a ful wind without any abatement or cutting off you shall holde your course right North for it is very daungerous to saile without the Iland Lusepara therefore you shall take your course in such manner that the Ilande may ly Eastward from you because Lusepara lyeth twelue myles Eastwarde from the other Ilande which is called Lusepara falsa that is false or wrong Lusepara because many shippes haue been deceyued by it thinking it had béene the right Lusepara when they came from the Iland of Iaua and therefore they haue giuen it the name of Lusepara falsa you must take heede of it for that northward from it it hath a great creek lying in the Island of Banca and such as put into it can hardly gette out againe the right way for there the windes are very scant whereby you might indure great paine and daunger to get into the strayght as it hath happened to some shippes that were deceyued by Lusepara falsa therefore I aduise all men when they sayle to Lusepara that they put not in aboue eleuen fadome letting the Islande of Lusepara lie on the East side so assure them of their way And when you sée Lusepara being within 3. miles thereof you shall take heede you goe not right North and south towardes it for that on the North side as also on the south for more then two miles and a halfe it is altogether bankes and sands that are very dangerous therefore you shall hold on the Southwest side in such manner that you shall keep two miles from it towardes the lande of Sumatra I haue past within lesse then a mile from it whereby I discouered the whole strande and a white strande which banke lyeth on the North side and in this course I founde fiue fadome and ½ muddie ground but as soone as the Island was southeast froÌ„ vs we had but four fadome and ½ and 4. fadom and strake twice on grounde without rother but verie softly wee founde all ouer sandie ground but as soone as wee put to the land of Sumatra wee had presently deepe ground therefore I wish you to keepe two miles from the Ilande towardes Sumatra and when you beginne to come neere it you shall hardly find fiue fadome muddy grounde and when it lyeth Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it and then you shall presently see a point of the lande of Sumatra wherevnto you shall runne and there you shall find more depthes and running towardes the coast you may goe within halfe a myle neere the saide point of lande where you shall finde ten fadome deepe of harde flatte ground vntill you be a good way from the point you runne from the coast of Sumatra from the straight of Sunda to this point North Northeast and South South-West from this first pointe thrée miles further there is another poynt vpon the said coast of Sumatra and you shall make thether kéeping halfe a myle from the coast alwayes with the lead in your hande where you shall find the same depthes of 9. or 10. fadome harde ground as you begin to go néer to the aforesaid 2. point theÌ„ you shal find muddy ground
Northeast and Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence Northeast and Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further Northeast and Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
vnder 29. degrées and ◠accounting for one mealetide thirtéene miles so that I gessed as then to be 25. myles from China On Sonday after noone we held our course in the same sort East and East and by South for all that euening and the night following till the next day at noone with a still winde and water and had no Sunne to take the height but I made my account of eightéen miles for a meale tide at halfe a strike to the East and East and by North the wind being scant South From Monday at noon we still had a calme South wind which continued so that euening and all night and about Tuesday morning the wind was somwhat fuller till noone whē I tooke the height of the Sunne and found vs to be vnder 29. degrees and ¾ running East and East and by South for the space of 22. miles From Tuesday at noone being vnder the height aforesaid I willed them to saile east hauing the same wind but somewhat calmer all that night to Wednesday at noone and then we began to sée driuing in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones hauing sayled fiftéene myles making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma hauing neither Sunne nor Starres to take the heights From Wednesday at noone the wind began to blow somwhat full South Southwest and because it was signified vnto me that the streames in that countrey ranne towardes the Island of Lequeo and perceiuing likewise in some places a certaine yellowe skumme driuing vpon the water which appeared vnto vs like ripe Limons I willed them presently to holde East Northeast and about euening wée sawe many signes of land as péeces of réedes risen and such like things At night I badde them runne East and East and by North but the first watch béeing done when the Chinish Pilot should watch his course hée had gone a great way out of the course hauing runne Eastward till the morning when againe I willed them to sayle East and by North the winde béeing as it was till Thursday at ten of the clocke and then although it was darke and close weather wee beganne to sée a land that séemed verie cloudie and couered with dampie mistes lying Southeast from vs and were about thrée myles from it Along by the same lande there lay two Islandes wée holding our course in the same sort vntill by the first land Eastward wee sawe another great high and long lande and at the end of the aforesaid high land Eastward wée sawe two other Islandes whereof the one was verie great stretching Northeast and Southwest and the other close by it stretching North and South being the smallest with many pointes On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence there are fiue small Islands or stonie Cliffes vpon a rowe from the first Island that we sawe which is the last Island of those that are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters lying on the Northeast side to the aforesaid small Island with many pointes it may be about sixe myles Eastward as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stonie Cliffes it might bée about fiue houres after noone hauing run as we thought since wee had sight of land about twentie and foure miles The Thursday aforesaid in the morning wée tooke the height of the North Starre being vnder thirtie degrees and ⅙ Comming within two myles of the Island that wée saw first of the Islands of stonie Cliffes wee ranne Northeast and Northeast and by East and when wee were right against it whereby it laie Southward from vs béeing about thrée myles from it on the North side thereof wée sawe another great high and long Iland with many trees which as wée learned is called Icoo it reacheth East and West and wée were about three miles from it but by reason of the darke weather and mistes wee could not discerne it and comming somewhat néerer to it wée sawe another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Iland beeing lesse than the other and because wée were by the aforesaid West point betweene both wee were fully determined to runne through the channell that shewed betweene the said two Islandes but because there was no man in the shippe that had any knowledge thereof fearing Riffes and shallowes wee durst not aduenture but wound vp to the East point to passe by the winde about the high Island running as much as wée might with a Southerly winde hauing great waues that put vs to the lande and so wee sayled East Southeast hauing yet about two myles to passe by the Island but night came on beeing verie darke so that wee could discerne no land although wee were close by it and to keepe from it wee ranne the same course till about one of the clocke after midnight then the moone shined yet wée could not see the Island but made Northward towardes it with fewe Sailes to the Island of Tanaxuma which according to my account should lie right before vs wherewith wée passed ouer the rest of the night till the morning when we sawe the Island Tanaxuma that laye right before vs beeing about two myles from it it beeing verie cloudie and wée made Northward towardes it to passe by the West side thereof but wée could not doe it by reason that the winde was Southwest and wee were by the South point thereof running along by the East side about halfe a mile from it This Island reacheth North and South beeing long and lowe ground hauing white sandie strandes with a verie gréene countrey of valleyes it hath many Pine trees but they stand scattering from each other and verie open it is about seuen or eight myles long hauing in the middle way on the East side close by the land an Island or stonie Cliffe which farre off sheweth like a Foist vnder Saile This Island lyeth vnder thirtie degrees and ½ right in the middle it is all saire and cleare ground From this Island of Tanaxuma Northwarde wée sawe a verie great and high lande reaching East and West about eight miles making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast and Northeast and by North from Tanaxuma an opening which is the mouth of the creeke called Xabuxij This Créeke hath for a marke that the lande on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hooke or point of the Creeke beeing a flatte ground and on the West side the land is as high as the first that wee sawe lying North and South with Tanaxuma This coast aforesaid may lie distāt ouerthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about seuen or eight myles From the North point of this Island wee made towardes the Créeke and béeing in the middle of our way the wind fell West Southwest whereby wee were enforced to lye by it the weather béeing calme so that the water that with the flood ranne Eastward draue vs off that wée could hardly get the Hauen but the ebbe that
on the North side with the land of Iapon a straight or narrow passage which runneth to the Hauen of Saquay and the land of Miaco and from the side of the Island along by it there are many small Islands The course you must hold through this straight to the Hauen of Saquay or Sacay is altogether along the coast and the land of Iapon which hath many and good Hauens At the end of this straight both these lands haue each of them a point of land sticking out being from the one to the other about a mile by the point of the land of Toca it is banky ground and all the people of this land on the North side are not in any sort to bée trusted Likewise you may passe from the South side of this Island Toca to the land of Myaco where all along it is good sayling and there are very good Hauens The first hauen whereof lyeth on the first point of land on the West side of the Island which close by it hath certaine Islands and Cliffes this Hauen is called Focora it hath a good harbour for all windes but not for Rouers for there they haue many Foistes wherewith they roue and steale At the East end of this Island Toca lying with the land of Iapon right ouer against it there is another straight or passage like that on the West side where you runne to the Hauen and Town of Sacay In the middle way from the aforesaied East side of Toca lyeth a Hauen called Aâ—â— which is inhaâ—â—ted by a very fierce and stout people There is alwaies a great army of Foistes prepared for the warres wherewith they robbe and spoyle all the Coast along The Shippes and Foistes that desire to passe through it asking leaue they may passe without let or hinderance On the East side aforesaid the land of Iapon reacheth much southward making a hooke or end called Cumano and the coast that reacheth thether is called Bandol It hath some Hauens that were inhabited by very rich and mightie people but they are neither secure nor free The Hauen of Sacay lyeth from the booke or end of the Island of Toca Northeast about nine or tenne myles This Hauen of Sacay with a West wind is harborlesse which make many great tides and hath a shallow sandie ground For the which cause the Ships that come laden thether are presentlie vnladen and the people leape on land leauing the Shippe fast bound and sometimes draw it on land From the point O Cabo de Camico fiue myles to a point of land you runne along the coast North Northwest and in the way you haue foure or fiue Islands and cliffes along the coast and right ouer against the aforesaid point there lyeth two other Islands close by the land hauing betwéene them both a smal channel and close by both on the North and south-side sides there are many Islands and Cliffes both great and small These two Islands with the Islands and Cliffes lye East and West with the Hooke and the end of Toca vnder thrée and thirty degrées and 1 â— All this coast is high land with the Islands lying along by it and hath sixtie and seuentie fadome déepe close by the land From thence forward beginneth the straight or passage to be narrow betwéene this Island of Toca and the land of Bungo and if in this countrey you haue néede to anker then put to the land of Toca where you shall finde muddye ground When you are about the aforesaid point of two Islands then the land beginneth Westward to turne in all high land hauing within close on the South-side a small Island you must take héed of this Créeke that the streames drawe you not in being past this Créeke you shall in the middle way of the channell in the straight sée right before you a smal round Island which shall lye on the East side from you and along by the coast fiue miles you shall sée another Island lying hard by the land which to sea ward from it hath many stony cliffes and Rockes By this Island Northeastward about a myle and a halfe there lyeth two other Islands Beyond these two Islands another myle and a halfe lyeth another long Island with a flat plaine or field on the top thereof reaching Northwest and southeast the Southeast and thereof being the highest Within this Island towards the West lyeth the Creeke of Vsquy where the king of Bungo holdeth Court If you desire to put in there you shall runne towards the first Island kéeping from the aforesaid Island and the Islands and Cliffes lying by it holding your course through betweene it and the other two Islands that lye further forward being passed in by this Island and the Islands and stony Cliffes you shall see Westward within the Créeke a great round and a high Island full of Trées wherevnto you shall runne alwaies kéeping néerer the two Islands then the Island of stony Cliffes for by the Iland of Stony Cliffes you haue seuentie fadome déepe and within the two Islands Westward you finde but 25 fadome muddy ground holding your course in that manner to the aforesaid Islands that lye in the Créeke kéeping on the North side for there it is faire and cléere and being right against this Island you shall find twenty fadome déepe where you shall anker that from them you may sée the hauens which are two the one lying a smal mile from this Island towards the Southwest by a point of land whereon there standeth sixe or seuen trées seperated one from y e other with some bushes you must put to this point which within it hath a small Bay or Créeke at the end whereof standeth a riffe of stone reaching from thence into the Sea in the which lyeth the aforesaid small Créeke which hath a very good harbour at thrée fadome déepe good and fair ground where you shall anker but it is not for great shippes The other Hauen is Northwestward on the other side of the Créeke hauing in it some Islands and stones it is a great Bay which runneth inward to the land making a bow with very good harbor This hauen is for great ships From this Créeke of Vsquy somewhat further Northward lyeth another great Creeke which runneth inwards West Northwest The Land and the point betwéene these two Créekes may bee from the one Sea to the other about the length of the shot of a great Péece in breadth and halfe a myle from the end of the point Westward on the South side lyeth a small Island close by the Land betwéene the which and the land runneth a channell of twelue fadome deepe with faire ground of great sand where I haue ankered Right ouer against this Island on the Northwest Land about the length of the shotte of a great Péece lyeth a small Creeke with a village called Sanganaxeque where Don Francesco Mascharenhas lay with his shippe for the monson This hauen with a northwest wind is harbourlesse From this Créeke
about halfe a myle forward you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast By all this coast and the low land it is all bankey grounds wherfore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle In the middle way of this lowe land there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow whereby you may not enter into them by any meanes and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie being sandy ground Close by the Roade or entry of this Riuer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo where the Kings in time past held their Courts where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it who are very rich and aboundant in wealth are resident From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen with harbour against all windes it is a small Bay for the points or heights therof doe runne through each other wherefore they make a good defence against the South windes The entry of this hauen is faire you need but run in through the middle of the Channell where you haue foure and a halfe and fiue fadome deepe and there you haue great furtherance for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson to vnderstand it well you must know that all this Countrey as also all China Malacca India and all the orientall places doe sayle with the coniunction of the windes which for certaine months together blowe out of one place as now in the North then in the South and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling which coniunction is called as in other places I haue said the Monson as Monson of the South winde that is when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Windes in like sort wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens Creekes Riuers Bayes and Islands where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe which is to bée vnderstoode that if they bée against you in the way you should hold you should know which hauen is good to stay in for that time or to winter in for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is against you so that you cannot holde on your voyage and of force you must stay for the wind and weather that is the Monson which serueth you and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue and then to follow on your voyage Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes that first set downe noted and obserued these courses and Nauigations vsing here the same manner and description of the countrey not chaunging the word of Monson although that in some places before I haue saied some thing thereof But to the matter you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy but it is not free from Rouers and theeues From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse-waies In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land but it is bad ground and there it is not good to stay for the windes for there you could not saue any thing From this point you may see the East land and at the end where this great Creeke endeth it is low land which is called Mâ—ryee and is all along faire and cleare The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and â— From this point or end of Mâ—ryee two myles further there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South it is a low land with sandie strands at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast and a myle beyond it there is a Village called Tamboca and another myle further lyeth another place called Tambico lying both on the Sea side but they haue no Hauens with harbours also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted Beeing right against this point of Land you shall along the coast see a long Island which a farre off sheweth like two Islands lying distant from the land about two myles it is called Fimexima betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo to this Island aforesaid All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground Riffes Stones and other filth All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo to this Island you must runne on the East side along by the land of Tocaa From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid nine myles Northward there is a very high Lande which reacheth East and West that is the land of Amanguchen a great mighty and rich country for therein is one of the mines of siluer of the countrey of Iapon In this coast are good Hauens as also the Island of Meagima which in times past before the Portingales trauelled to Iapon had great Trafficke for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon for all kindes of wares and Marchandises Along by this land of Amaguchen and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda of the which as also the other places thereabouts I will speake in another place together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof To sayle from the point of Moryee in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique lying in the country of Amanguchen which is very sure and good for all winds and of great Trafficke you shall holde your course Northeast and Northeast and by East being about sixtéene myles This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high and you runne all the aforesaid coast along to a Hooke or point of Lande East and West and East and by North and West and by South and from the Hauen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles whereof seuentéene and ½ make a degrée as all the myles in this description likewise doe in the which coast lyeth the Hauens hereafter following that is from Caminaxique to Toraque are about two myles and â— from Toraque to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles From Anooxyma to Toumoo are also fiue miles
Islands and great Rockes reaching from the land to seaward Within these Islands and stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into it you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land When you are right against the end thereof then Northeastward from you to Sea-ward there will lye another Island or stony Cliffe You shall runne within this Island and betwéene it and the Land there is a great Créeke where you may anker at fiue and twenty fadome déepe if néed be but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the Islands and stones that lye outward to Sea then you shall presentlie runne along betwéene a point of Lande Northward on the right hand and the Islands into the Hauen that you shall sée lye open without feare and being about this point of land you shall presently sée a Creeke stretching Northward inwards and then you shall put to that point of land which will bée on your right hand where you may fréely enter for it is foure fadome déepe all muddy ground and anker by the East land shunning the West From this Créeke of Tanora forward you runne Northward along the coast which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo all faire and cleare ground hauing nothing thereon to feare then that you see before your eyes and eightéene myles further you shall find a very great Island that will bee on the East side from you which is the land of Toca and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South about fortie myles long comming out by Sacay and Miaco The Southside of this Island is faire and cleare along the which you runne to Sacay betweene this Island and the coast of Bungo on the West side thereof there is a straight or passage of foure fiue or more myles broad and such as will goe to Bungo must alwaies kéepe along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga shunning the coast of Toca But returning to the coast of fiue and twenty degrées ½ beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno as aforesaid If you desire to saile to the Island Firando you shall runne from thence in the aforesaid course of Northeast and Northeast and by east to eight and twenty degrées and ¼ and being there kéepe Northeast by the which course you shall see two small long bare and broken Islands lying North and South with each other on the South side hauing two Islands or cliffes halfe a mile distant froÌ„ each other These two Islands aforesaid lye vnder one and thirtie degrées and ¼ Thrée or foure miles Northeastward from these Islandes lyeth an Island or stony Cliffe clouen in the middle hauing vpon it foure or fiue sharpe points or toppes when you are right against the aforesaid Island then you are yet tenne myles from the coast of Iapon Westward and running the same coast Northeastward you shall goe right vpon a very great high Island called Coiaquijn which lyeth East and West with the hauen of Angone being three or foure myles distant from the coast of thrée or foure myles long on the East side towards the Land it hath manie Islands and stony Cliffes If you chance to fall within the Island finding your selfe by the coast of Iapon whereby you cannot passe without the Island then take your course inward betwéene the Land and the Island without all the Islands and Stones about the length of the shotte of a great Peece from it but goe not neare the coast for that from the North Land there is a Point that reacheth to the other side Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffes as I said before you shall presentlie put along by the Island outward to Sea-ward whereby Northward you shall sée the Point of Lande aforesaid which hath some Cliffes and Riffes within the which Northward lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa This point of land lieth right ouer against another point of lande that sticketh out from the Island lying North and South with each other and when you haue past beyond this point of lande then you shall hold along the coast about a mile from it You runne along by this coast from the one point of lande to the other North Northwest and South Southeast and if you passe without the Island of Coiaquin you shall take the same way béeing past and about it to come vnto the coast and so runne along by it as aforesaid From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffes and Riffes thrée or foure miles forward there is another great and high point of lande in the same coast and beeing past it you shall sée a great opening or entrie of a Channell which is called O estrechio d'Arima that is the Straight of Arima within this straight lyeth two good Hauens the first called Xiquij which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon This Hauen lyeth about halfe a mile from the entrie inwarde on the South side and the right hand Westward at the end of a great Créeke which hath a harbour for all windes with foure or fiue fadome déepe muddie ground but in this Hauen three or foure Portingales were slaine I thinke it happened by their filthie pride and presumptuousnesse for in all places they will be Lordes and masters to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants which in all places will not be endured namely in Iapon being a stubborne and obstinate people But to to the matter On the North side of this créeke on the land lying on the other side there lieth a high round Island and hitherto it is all ouer faire and cléere sea and ground To put into Arima you shall goe towards the North Lande for on the South side as soone as you are past the Creeke of Xiquij you haue two stones and thereabouts it is all ouer full of riffes and other filth This straight aforesaid as you first enter into it reacheth Eastward and then turneth Northwarde and along by the point where it turneth northward there runneth strong streames and so stiffe that if you be not carefull it will turne the shippe about and put it backe againe if you haue not a stiffe forewind to breake the force of the streames Being about this point aforesaid on the same land there lieth a very good Hauen called Cochinochy or Cochinâ—quyn and then the Hauen of Arima whereof the Straight receiueth the name and lyeth halfe a mile Northward from Cochinochy beeing a Creeke which is open for an East wind and without any defence for foule weather Somewhat further lyeth the Hauen of Simonbaia that hath thrée Islandes which make a harbour against the North wind but at low water the shippes lie drie In this Straight there are no other Hauens that are safe and good for All windes but onely Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before From this Straight to the Island of Firando along the coast there are many
Islands and Cliffes and a great Créeke At the issue of the Straight of Arima sixe miles forward lyeth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima which is a great high land hauing on the Sea side close by it foure or fiue Islands or cliffes and betwéene this Island and the Firme land there is a good harbour and in the same Island there is a village with many people with a good small Créeke or Hauen where many Fisher boats Foists doe lie from thence begin the Islands of Firando From this Island Cambexima fiue or sixe miles forward there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffes that reach from the land into the sea you must run to the same point northwestward This way from Cambexima to the aforesaide point of land is all one créeke because the land windeth inward and because that on this coast of Iapon commonly at such time as you goe thither it is cloudie mistie weather therefore you can hardly discerne the scituation of the land but if it be cléere weather you shall presently see the point sticking out that hath the Island and Cliffes at the end thereof but if it be cloudie and mistie weather then you must not saile along the coast but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid when you are hard by it you shall presently discouer all the Islands and cliffes The furthest to seaward of these Islands cliffes are two Islands separated from each other betwéene high and lowe and longer then round wholly without Trées and that which lyeth furthest to seaward hath two riffes reaching out from it one lying Eastward the other West Northwest about halfe a myle by the East Iland of these aforesaid two Islands as I was tolde if is faire and good ground close to it as it séemeth to be And vpon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the South windes and if you haue occasion you may anker there From these aforesaide two Islandes to the lande there lyeth two Islandes or Cliffes in forme like two Pillars betweene these Cliffes and another Channell which the Islands begin to open before you many Iuncos or Chinish shippes doe passe laden with merchandises to Fâ—rando and the Hauen of Vmbra notwithstanding you shall leaue all these Islands or Cliffes on the East side or your right hand running about halfe a mile to Seaward from them and béeing right ouer-against these Islands then three or foure miles further in the same course of North Northwest there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land being a high and flat land on the top and in the first appearance it séemeth like three Islands although it is but one for it hath two broken partes and by that meanes maketh a shewe of thrée Ilands From the point of this Island thrée miles Westward to seaward you shall see a round Island hauing close by it a long small Island and if it be cléere weather West Southwest or West you shall see the Island of Goto which is very high and great with many rentes and clouen peeces on the toppe being all euen and flat ground When you sée the Island aforesaid that sheweth like three Islandes then runne straight vpon the point thereof that sticketh outward and if the tide chance to be against you with slatâ—e winde then the water by this point sticking out of the aforesaid Iland maketh a great roaring and hath much scumme so that it séemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh vpon notwithstanding it is all ouer faire and deepe therefore you may fréely put towards it without feare keeping a little from the point and in this manner passing about the point then you must saile along where you haue a great and good creeke where you shall put in till you find ten or eleuen fadome deepe it is hard ground where you may anker at pleasure it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson and being there you shall presently haue Barkes and Foâ—stes enough aboord your shippe that will bring you to Firando In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Rode to anker with good harbour for all winds Likewise the length of the shotte of a great péece Northeastwarde lieth another Hauen that hath a good harbour for all winds wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Rode aforesaid If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you feare any foule weather then you may fréely lie in any of these Hauens where you lie safe from rouers and théeues that may come thither This Iland that seemeth to be thrée is called Faquyn and from thence to the Iland Firando are fiue miles From this Iland Faquyn if it be cléere weather you may well sée the Iland of Firando Northward from it but because for the most part you there find cloudie and mistie weather there is no certaintie but from the hauen where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Iland with some stonie rockes about it about halfe a mile from the rode of the aforesaid coast where you lie which reacheth North Northeast and North by West about two miles and a halfe from you you shall sée another long high and flatte Iland clouen in the middle and so sheweth to be two Ilands stretching East and West About halfe a mile from this iland lieth a great round Cliffe betwéene this Cliffe and the round Ilande that lyeth halfe a mile from the Hauen of the aforesaid Iland there is a great créeke which maketh a chanell through the which you passe to the Hauen of Vmbra and when you sée the Island that sheweth like two Ilands runne right vpon it to the Hooke or end thereof lying in the East to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow as also by the great Cliffe that lyeth Eastward from you running inward then you shall sée a verie long land which is the coast that maketh the strait or channell betwéene the land and the Iland of Firando you must shunne all the land that lieth on the East side for it is all ouer foule ground as you passe about by the aforesaid Iland which is called Caroxyma leauing it on the West side about the length of the shot of an arrowe from the ende thereof you shall sée two Islandes whereof that Westwarde is long the other lying right before you béeing rounde hauing a stonie Cliffe which you must shunne and then presently you shall sée two other Cliffes which shall all lie Westward from you and béeing there you shall sée the Island of Firando lying before you being about two small miles from you you may fréely make towardes it for it is all ouer faire and passe aboue the coast of the Firme lande that lieth Eastward When you are by the Islands and cliffes then there are certaine small Channels which you shall shunne kéeping close
by the Island of Firando which is on your West side and is a verie great and long Island and sheweth on that side whereunto you saile with a great high Houell in the middle way vpon a point sticking out of the same Island when you are close by the same Island you shall runne along by it where you shall find an opening stretching inwards like a riuer you shall passe about a mile beyond it where you shall haue a small Créeke or Bay called Cochyn wherein you shall enter vntill you finde twelue fadome deepe and there anker and although there you lie open to the South winde yet the water goeth whole beeing there you shall send either by water or by lande to the towne where the Hauen is for certaine Foists or Barkes that may bring you into the Hauen which Hauen lyeth somewhat further for the entrie thereof is something dangerous because of the great streames that haue their Current therein If you desire to saile into this Hauen when it is almost high water haue care for the wind is strong at your entring and when the water beginneth to ebbe then it helpeth to bring you in then you shall runne in such maner along by the Island as I said before and being past the créeke of Cochyn to the first point of lande that you shall come vnto that sticketh out from the same Island from the which point Northward there iutteth two stonie Cliffes you shall goe neare the stonie Cliffes the better to get into the Hauen and you shall presently sée before you on the side of Firando a great and high Island full of trées when you sée it take your course right vpon the West point of the same Island vntill the saide Island lyeth wholly vncouered to Leeward from you whereby presently you shall sée inwarde the point or end of the towne and when you beginne to see the houses then put somewhat neerer to it right ouer against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hande and there the Island hath a small loâ— poinâ— of lande comming from a high hâ—uâ—â— and stretcheth into the Sea from the which point there runneth a Sand or Banke therefore you shall put towardes the side of the houses or end of the towne to kâ—pe out of the streame and when you are out being in calme water if the winde be not good then anker and from thence be rowed in either with Foists Barks or your own boat West West Southwest into the Hauen All this description and course of Nauigation is in breefe to conclude that when you come to the coast of Iapon you shall leaue all the Islandes that lie along vpon the coast on the East side and vpon the right hand and runne without them and the Islandes lying to Seaward from thence whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row called Saquyn and the long Island Caroxyma that lyeth further forwarde which reach North and North and by West from the ende of the rowe and the two small Islandes with two other small Islandes or Cliffes lying further forward and are seuen in all leauing them all on the left hand or the West side with the which course you shall goe directly vpon the Island of Firando as is before mentioned The 33. Chapter A voiage made by a Portingale Pilot with a Soma that is a Chinish shippe from Macau or out of China to the Island of Iapon and the countrey of Bungo with the scituations of the places along the course THe ninetéenth of Iune béeing Saterday we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the issue or chanel of Macau running outward to sea putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca doe vsually enter but because we could not get aboue the Island called A Ilha grande dos Ladronis that is the great Island of théeues lying four miles East Southeast to Seaward from the Islande and the Hauen of Macau therefore wée ranne to Leeward thereof About the length of the shot of a base from it there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other with a very small channell running betweene them thorough the which they passed with Bankoâ— or Chinish Barkes From thence about halfe a mile Northward lieth another long Island full of trees and bushes and when you put in there on the West Southwest side in the middle of the channell there lieth a stone which is couered with the Sea Sixe miles East Southeastward from these Islandes lyeth the Island of Tonquian which is a high and long Island full of trees and bushes and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islandes or Cliffes and because wee could not take the height to passe betweene the Islandes and the Cliffes which is a faire good channell wée passed to Leeward between it and another Island about a small mile Northward from thence which is a great Iland and there lie two Ilands or cliffes the greater hard by it and the other further off which we left on the left hande running along by the Island of Tonquian where it is all fair ground Which Island on the point that lyeth East Northeast on the land side hath a sandie Bay which is a very good Rode for the Monson of the South windes When wee were out beyond that Island then wee helde our course East Southeast vntill wee were as farre to Seaward as the furthest Island and being in sight thereof wee tooke our course East and east and by North for threescore miles till wee were vnder the height of the Island Lamon which course we helde thereby to shunne Rouers and Theeues who at that time and in those countries were continually risident making warre against the Portingales of Macau and yet wee had the firme Land still in sight I meane the toppes of the Trees and Bushes that stoode vpon the lowe flatte Lande and comming to the coast of Lamon although wee sawe it not wee presently ranne Northeast by the which course wee had the sight of the high lande of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China and beeing there wee found much badde water and hard streames and at the last wee espied the Varella or stonie Rocke that standeth aboue the Hauen of China seeing nothing else but high hilles and from thence forwarde wee sawe no more of the coast of China and running in that course of Northeast which from Lamon wee alwaies held wée perceiued the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or Small Lequeo which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau for wée espied it on Wednesday in the morning and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China beeing on the Southwest point thereof This Island Lequeo Pequeno stretcheth Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South it is a very high Island and about fifteene or sixteene miles long the furthest point
or end Northeastward of the same Island lyeth full vnder 29. degrees ½ for there I tooke the height of the Sunne with calme weather being about fiue or sixe myles from it and from this Northeast point the coast of the Island runneth Southeast at the end thereoâ— hauing another great and high Island making a small Channell that runneth betweene them both and it seemeth that on the Norâ—heast side there is a good Rode for the Monson of South and Southwest windes and along by this coast of Lequeo for the space of three daies we had calme weather and after that wee had a good gale of winde of the Monson and I thinke wee had so great a calme because wee kept so close vnto the shoare About fiue and twentie degrées and â— from the point of Lequeo wee helde our course Northeast and Northeast and by East till wee came vnder nine and twentie degrees Ten miles from Lequeo forwarde wée sawe great store of Cuttle bones driuing on the water and many other shelles that were verie white shewing farre off much like vnto Cotton but it was not long that they draue any thing thicke for in short space after wee might perceiue them scattered abroad verie thinne and but verie few vntill wée came vnder 26. degrées Comming vnder 29. degrées wée held our course halfe a strike East Northeast for the space of eight or nine miles till the Sunne-setting and then wée perceiued right before vs a round and high Island being about sixe miles from it which was the first and furthest Island Westward of the seuen Islandes which at this present are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters which lie vnder 29. degrées and ½ This first Island hath a sharpe point on the West side in the middle at the foot thereof hauing a stone in forme of a Pillar like the Varella in the straight of Singapura by Malacca and on the Northeast side about halfe a mile from thence there lieth a round blacke Cliffe Béeing in the sight of this Island wée presently ranne North and by East as before all that night and in the morning béeing right against it wee sawe all the rest of the seuen Islands and still held our course Northeast vntill we were before the last of the said seuen Islands From whence about sixe miles Northward lyeth two Islands stretching East West whereof that in the East is verie long and high full of blacke shining trées and that in the West much lesse and lower at the East end or point of the lesser Iland there is a high houell that descendeth Westward making a long and lowe point These islands are about a mile distant from each other Westward from this Island about two miles and a halfe there is another island as great and high as the other aforesaid the first great high Island aforesaid is called Icoo and the aforesaid seuen Islands shall all lie on the Southeast side from you and from the first to the last they may be about seuen or eight miles when wee were at the end of the seuen Islands we held our course Northeast towardes the channell that runneth betwéene the great high Island and the Iland that hath the long low point where we passed through comming out againe on the North side This channell is faire and deepe without any cliffes or stones Foure miles Northwestward from this Channell lyeth a verie high and round Island which on the West side seemeth to be full of Cliffes This Iland hath a Mine of Brimstone which lyeth in the middle thereof A mile Northward from this fiery Island lyeth another small and lowe Island and from the aforesaide fiery Islande about eight miles Eastward lyeth the Island of Tanaxuma aforesaid the great high Island of Icoo aforesaide lying on the East side of the Channell on the North side thereof hath a lowe Lande and all along by it is verie good harbour béeing faire and good ground reaching foure or fiue miles East and West Thrée miles Northward from the East end of this Island of Icoo lyeth the aforesaide Island of Tanaxuma as it is also declared in the Description of the Course and Nauigation to the Island of Ferando This Island of Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South béeing altogither low Land and full of Houels and Valleyes with Pine trées that stand farre distant one from the other and is about seuen or eight miles long and in the middle thereof on the West side lyeth a Hauen within certaine Cliffes and Rockes and a mile and a halfe West Northwestward from this Hauen lyeth a very small and lowe Island with a little Houell in the middle On the North end of this smal Iland there are some stones rocks sticking out about the length of the shotte of a great péece all the rest is faire Likewise betwéene this Island and Tanaxuma it is all ouer faire and cleere Seuen or eight miles Northward from the Island of Tanaxuma lyeth the great and high Land of Iapon which coast on the South side stretcheth East and West for the space of ten myles from the channell aforesaid that runneth betweene the Islandes you can not see Tanaxuma vnlesse it bée faire and cleere weather wee ranne East Northeast and were about three miles distant from the aforesaide Channell before wee discouered Tanaxuma as likewise the great land of Iapon which as I saide before is verie high stretching East and West about tenne miles and because Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South being lowe land and the land of Iapon high therefore in that place where wée were they seemed vnto vs like one Lande because they reach each through other Wherevpon the Chinish Pilote which wee had at that time aboord our shippe thought then to be all one land but when we put nearer to it then wée began to sée the Channell that runneth betwéene them beeing distant one from the other crosse ouer about seuen or eight miles and in that manner wée ranne halfe a strike East Northeast towardes the land of Iapon it being flood where the tide ranne Eastward towards the small Island that lyeth by Tanaxuma driuing vs thither whereby we had much labour and paine to get aboue it passing about the length of the shot of a great péece from it wherefore it is necessarie for a man to runne Noâ—theast vntill hée be past that small Iland aforesaid When we had passed about the Island of Tanaxuma wée ranne North Northeast towards the coast being three myles distant from it and right against the creeke of Xebuxij we had a calme beeing the last of Iune hauing departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the mouth or channell of Macau the nintéenth of the same moneth hauing Sailed toward Iapon about eleuen dayes whereof we had thrée daies calme so that our Sailes lay flat to the Mastes being vnder the Island of Lequeo as aforesaid The 34. Chapter Another description of the course from
towards it without feare for it is a very good way And being within this straight or channell whereby you discouer the Riuer then you must holde your course on the right hand whereby you shall presently sée a round Island hauing a Crosse on the toppe thereof and although you sée not the entry yet you must put towards that Island for when you are right against it then you shall preently see the Road wherein the shippes doe lye as also a Portingale Church standing vpon the Lande and béeing within you must runne South-warde about the length of the shot of a great Péece where you may anker at tenne fadome déepe being very good muddye ground and there you shall make your Shippe fast on the North Northeast and South South-west sides and euen as the Winde dooth blowe you shall winde the Béeke heade of the shippe making the ankers fast vnder the stones for there it is very narrowe Notwithstanding you néed not feare although the wind be great Take héed when you come from Cabo de Sumbor from y e coast of China towards the land of Iapon although you see not the Islands aforesaid leaue not your course of Northeast vntill you be vpon the coast of Iapon for although you fall by the Hauen of Arima which is twelue miles from Vmbra you néede not care for in those places you haue very good Hauens By the Hauen of Arima aforesaid there lyeth an Island somewhat néerer the North then the South called Cabexuma which on the inside hath a very good Hauen where you may lye and Trafficke freely And if from thence you desire to runne further inward then holde your course North Northeast and Northeast and by North wherewith you shall come to a Hauen called Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of Arima and departing from Cabexuma you shall runne along by the Northpart of the land about seuen or eight myles whereby you shall come right against Cochinochy which is a better hauen then Vmbra because therein the Shippes may anker at pleasure and before you come néere this Hauen many Shippes and Barkes will come aboord you shippe which wil fréely bring you in and you néed not feare the creeke of Arima for the old Pilotes were in doubt thereof because they knew it not so well as I for that I haue sayled all within and about it with a Foist with trouble ynough Right against Cochinochy lyeth another very good Hauen called Oxy belonging to the King of Bungo where you may freely trafficke You need not feare the entry of Arima for that besides the hauens aforsaid wherin you may lye safely there will many Foystes and Barkes come and boord you Shippe that will bring you whether you will and helpe you to your desire You must likewise vnderstand that along by the coast of China you need not feare any thing for it is all faire and good ground keeping without all the Islands for if you goe betwéene them you should hardly get out againe to your desire therefore it is best for you to keepe without them running along by them and so there is no feare for it is all faire way as well to the Island Firando as to the Hauen of Vmbra onely that Firando lyeth seuen or eight myles North-ward from the Hooke or Point of Trées and being there you shall presently sée Firando and in putting forward to it you find a Varella that is a marke of a sharpe stony hill then you shall gouern your selfe as aforesaid for then you may presently perceaue it being a very high land which stretcheth East Northeast West Southwest in the middle way hauing many small Islands with channels betwéene them thereby to runne from the one side to the other but if you wil go from the Island of Cabexuma to Vmbra you must alwaies kéepe close to the land for in the Island of Diamonds or pointed Island there is another very good hauen where as soone as you are in sight thereof many Barkes and Foists will boord you and so bring in your Shippe The Hauens in those countries are these that follow as well in the Land of Iapon as the Islandes lying about it whereof in this description I haue alreadie made mention First in the Island of Cabexuma there is a very good Hauen also Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of Arima is a better Hauen The Hauen of Oxy right against Cochinochy is also a better Hauen In the Island called O Ilha do Diamon that is the Island of the Diamond because of the sharpe pointed Rocke there is likewise a very good Hauen which is part of the Lande of Vmbra also the Hauen of Vmbra is a good Hauen The 35. Chapter A short description of the course from Macau in China to Iapon and the Island Cabexuma to the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache which at this day is most frequented of the Portingales with all the courses and scituations by an expert Pilote with a declaration of the winds called Tuffon AS soone as you are past y e Island of Ilha do Leme which lyeth as you come out from Macau then hold your course East northeast wherby you shal passe about the Island of Lamon and if it be in the night time you shall cast out your Lead and find two and twenty and thrée and twenty fadome déep with shels and blacke sand on the ground and then you are right against the Riffe and when you are past it you shall finde white and small sand Then holding your course Northeast and Northeast and by East alwaies kéeping from the coast of Chinchon as much as you may for the best way is to runne in the middle of the channell as far from the Island of fishers as from the coast of Chincheo And if you goe néerer the Island of Fishers called A Ilha dos pescadores you shall finde lesse depth and therefore you must look to your course and when you are past the Island Lamao cast out your Lead because of the Island of fishers And if in those countries you haue a storme with the winds called Tuffon and come from the Northeast parts then hold your course to Seaward as much as you may to shunne the coast for the wind without doubt will be southeast which is right vpon the coast whereby it lyeth right against you and if it driueth you not vpon the coast then it were best for you to strike all your sayles and take them in and so lye driuing vntil the wind come South and then to follow on your course againe I giue you this counsell because that for the space of two yeares one after the other I haue béen in those countries with storms of the winds called Tuffon so that one voiage we were almost cast away by séeking to put vnto the coast Nowe to vnderstand the meaning of this word Tuffon it is a Chinish word which the Portingales also doe holde without altering the same and signifieth a storme or Tempest
land The seuenth of Iuly being sunday we had a calme and somtimes but not much Southeast and South Southeast winds holding our course East Northeast northeast and Northeast and by North at 24 and 26 fadome water and as soone as we had past the Island of Lamon we presently had small thinne white sand vpon the ground with some shels being in the morning about seuen miles from the land of Chincheo and saw the Island that is like the Island called Ilha dos Lymoins that is the Island of Lemmons lying by Mallaca and somewhat further wee saw a thinne Lande with a sharpe point standing vpon it which is said to bée a Varella do Chinchon that is the marke or Rocke of Chinchon being vpon the eight day which was munday the next night following wee had a calme wherewith the wind came North being somewhat cold with some shoures of rayne but with a South-east winde we had no raine yet in the night time we had two claps of thunder out of the South-east with lightning out of the Southeast and North parts The ninth being Tuesday wee had the height of the sunne at 23 degrées and ½ in the night hauing had the winde East Southeast with a good gale and all night wée lay driuing without sailes with an East and East Southeast windes and a good gale casting out our Lead and found twenty and foure twenty fadome déep once hauing eightéene fadome where wee found small white Sand with some shels In the morning very earely we had a north wind wherwith we wound eastward hauing nothing but the Foukesaile and the Misen vp vntill euening and at the depths aforesaid wée tooke in our sailes minding to driue the next day we saw land which wee had séene the day before and it lay Northward from vs and halfe a point North and by West The eleuenth being Thursday wée tooke not the height of the Sun because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East and East Southeast windes the waues comming Southeast our Shippe winding Northeast this was by night but by day wée had a Northeast and north Northeast wind in such maner that somtime we kept on the one side and sometimes on the other as wind and weather serued at twenty and foure and twenty fadome deepe small white sand and sometimes eightéene fadome the night before we had much lightening out of the West and South parts being the thirtéene day of the new moone and the day before wée had the heigth of the Sunne at 23 degrées and ½ The land we saw we could hardly discerne but we supposed it to bée the land we had séene the other day The twelfth day being Friday wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East South-east wind in the night time and in the day wée had it North-east at twentie and foure and twentie fadome déepe and sometimes eightéene fadome with small thinne white sand the ground at foure and twenty fadome being somewhat greater sand with some she is when it began to be day we were as we thought about fiue or sixe myles from the land and the night before wée had much lightening round about vs and in the morning some shoures of raine without wind the skye being thicke and close whereby it seemed the weather would chaunge About euening we had a Southeast wind presentlie changing South South-east wherevpon we let fall our sailes holding our course North-east and North east and by East and also East Northeast but most part Northeast so that the depths began to bée greater and were fiue and thirty fadome with small white sand the Moone as then being at the full and the waues alwayes running out of the South-east and with that winde wée sayled for the space of fiue daies together The thirteenth being Saterday wée tooke the height of the Sunne at foure and twenty degrées that night running East Northeast till morning then sailing East and East and by north and found wâ— had sayled twenty myles being eight myles from the coast of China and in the morning we saw land vpon the other side the ground on that side was white thinne and some blacke sand and about sunne setting we cast out out Lead and found fiue and thirtie fadome déepe with very fine black sand The fouretéenth being sunday we took the heigth of the sun being scarse fiue and twenty degrées hauing a southwest wind with very good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North all that night at seuen and thirty fadome déepe with very thinne sand some black muddy ground and at the last watch in the morning wee found muddy ground at the same depth of â—7 fadome mixed with blacke sand and when day began to appeare we saw Lande being part of the coast of â—hina being about four fiue or six miles from it and we discouered the Lagarto with the two sisters that is the cockodril Islands so called and so we cast out our Lead and found two and forty fadome déepe muddy ground and somewhat sandy and y e same day also we saw the Island Fermosa lying by Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and then the winde séemed as though it would haue blowne fuller The fiftéenth day being Munday wée tooke the height of the sunne at 25 degrées and 1 â— and in the night we had the winde North with very good weather running about to the northwest and we ran East northeast Northeast Northeast to east wheÌ„ it began to be day we saw land being the end of the Island Fermosa or y e fair Island which is a long and low land broken or rent in the middle which séemeth to be a breach but it is nothing els but as I said before and presently after eastward we saw another higher land which is Iands called Ilhas dos Reâ—s Magos that is the Island of the thrée Kings we passed along by about 7. or 8. miles from them and that night we had 34 fadome déepe and desiring to know what depth wee found being in sight of the land aforesaid wee found aboue 40 fadome the aforesaid land lying east Southeast from vs being muddy ground that day we had a sharpe wind of the Monson but it helde no longer then til euening and then it was calm againe and so held till morning and then we had it Northwest so running about from the West till it came Southwest and continued till night and then it was calme being Tuesday The sixtéenth being in sight of the Islands aforesaid the same day wee had the heigth of the Sunne at 26 degrées lesse ½ degree and the end of the great Island lay east and east and by south from vs and the little Island east southeast This little Island is higher on the south southwest side then on the Southwest side and the point or hooke of y e southwest part hath a breach or rent to the which the néerer you approch
then most certainly you are by the land When you sée the land of Sumbor then in the night time you musâ— runne South Southwest and by day make towardes the land thereby at times to kéepe somewhat to Seaward from the land thereby to shun the cliffes called As duas Irmaas or the two Sisters which lie far inward to sea as also the Island called do Baboxyn which lieth crosse ouer against you being distant from the firme land to Seaward about foure or fiue miles stretching Northwest and Southeast you runne along all the coast of Sumbor Northeast and Southwest and somwhat Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South When you are past the aforesaid Island of Baboxyn then runne the course aforesaide for the space of thrée or foure miles and from thence West Southwest whereby you shall come to the Island of Chinchon where you shall finde sand vpon the ground which in all the coast aforesaid you can not find with 18. or 20. fadome water From the Island of Chinchon to the Island of Lamon you shal hold your course Southwest or as you thinke good and when you are right against the Islandes or Cliffes called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo you shall find vpon the ground great sand with shelles and from thence to Lamon which is twelue miles you finde the like by the Island of Lamon you find shelles and blacke sand with oyster shels among it if you chance to be in that countrey by night runne not vnder 22. fadome water for that along by the riffes it hath 21. and 22. fadome with shels and blacke sand vpon the ground and runne still Southwest without leauing that course and if it chance before day or by day to be close aire running Southwest and that you haue small thin white sand then you are by Lamon and then hold your course west Southwest and so you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island called Ilha Branco and from thence runne West vnto the Channell whereby you goe vp to Macau The 40. Chapter Another voiage made from the Hauen of Langasaque to Macau which is from Iapon to China with certaine descriptions and accidents which happened by the Island Guâ—to with the description of the Hauens thereof accomplished in the yeere of our Lord 1584. by a Portingale Pilot. DEparting out of the Hauen of Langasaque the 25. of Februarie Anno 1584. and passing along by the Island of Facunda wee had a West Northwest wind so that wée ankered the 26. day it began to blowe so stiffe that wee were constrained to put for harbour into Tomache The 27. wée hoised anker with an East Northeast and an East winde and cleare weather and comming to the Island dos Cauallos we had a South wind againe wherewith we made back againe to Facunda from whence we set out The eight and twentie being Friday wée set saile againe from Facunda it beeing thrée dayes before the newe Moone with a cold East Northeast wind And beeing within thrée miles of the Island dos Cauallos we had a Southeast wind running on the Southwest bough all that day and the winde began to bee somewhat coole and then we gessed it to be thrée or foure miles beyond the Island of Guoto but in the morning watch wee first espied the point of Guoto being a houell lying on the Northwest part thereof there we had a sharpe wind and it began to rise high out of the South Southeast as much as the ship with all his Sayles might heare wee let the maine saile vp the better to make way and not long after the winde came about to the Southwest and West Southwest with two thunder claps and much lightning wherwith wee hoped it would haue beene still weather but it was not so whereat wee woondered On Saterday by day light wee were right ouer against the point of Guoto almost vpon the end of the Island that lyeth Northwest being about two myles from the lande hauing with the West Northwest winde a crosse storme with the waues of the sea out of the southwest which were verie hollowe and mightie high which tossed the shippe monsâ—rouâ—ly although the winde was ouer much but onely the force and power of the waues troubled vs most which fell behind at our sterne for there wee found a very strong streame and because the wind was slack we doubted we should not get aboue the point of the Island neither from the one side nor from the other for wee had the crosse vpon the Island At the end of this Island we saw another Island of low land being about two miles long and was about a mile and a halfe distant from Guoto some of our ship affirmed that there was a verie good Hauen running in on the one side and comming out againe at the other wherefore we determined to put in there for our better securitie as we did and we ranne in West Northwest At the entry there of it hath a verie great houell with two cliffes lying on the Southeast side of the point The Island that lieth without is on the left hand till you be about a mile from it betweene which and the lande it is all faire you may boldly goe as néere the Island of Guoto as you will and néed feare nothing but what you see before you The entry of the Hauen reacheth Northwest and Southeast hauing within it a great Bay which is all ouer verie déepe from twentie to thirtie fadome water and nothing therein to be feared From this Island to the land you haue all ouer the depthes of thirtie and fortie fadome and yet I haue tried it from the halfe way to Guoto and found eightéene to thirtie fadome with sand and shels on the ground in some places hauing good ground inward in some places you haue Sand and in some places muddie ground froÌ„ thence wée were brought out againe by Scutes about halfe a mile forward so that after that the North wind serued well to saue vs and to driue vs forward from the point lying on the South side which hath certaine stonie Cliffes wée ranne along the land Northeastward and it fell out well for vs for therby we had twentie or thirtie Scutes of the Island that for 20. taes Chiâ—â— money holpe vs well and pulled out our beat we likewise gaue them 50. taes and about 20. depesas to haue our shippe ankered and stayed but they asked vs 30â— whereupon we sent one of our Portingales on land whome they helde for a pâ—wâ—e although by certaine practise we got him out of their hands againe and when after that wee séemed to complaine they cried vs mercie and sent him backe againe although wee vnderstoode verie well that they were our friends by force as perceiuing they had no meanes to hurt vs because wee coulde helpe our selues without them but we marked so much in them that if they coulde haue hindered vs they would not haue failed to doe it or else wée must
night at the depths of ninetéene twenty and two and twenty fadome with so clear bright a sky that almost all the night we saw the coast and when day began to appear we were somwhat beyond the Islands called Ruy Lobo and presently thervpon we saw the Island of Lamon there we beganne to haue certain stormes as I gesse it is from Ilhas de Ruy Lobo to the Island of Lamon ten miles by the Island of Lamon we saw the water shynne and burne to Seaward in such sort that wee passed close by the Riffe those that come from Iapon must first passe by the Island and then by the Riffe this Riffe lieth Northeast southwest and is dangerous for those that saile from Macau to Iapon we ran about thrée miles from it with a strong northeast and East Northeast winde so that wee made good way whereby it séemed we made fifty miles in one meale tide but the strēgth of y e water and streames against vs were so stiffe that we sailed but fiue and twenty myles in a mealetide This strong streame and stiffe water commeth as we were informed out of the Riuer of Tancoan and continueth till you be past the Island Branco being past it the streame runneth presently towards the Island Ilha de Leme which lyeth close by Macau from Lamon we ran West southwest and in truth we found the way from Lamon to Ilha Branco very short for by night wee stroke all our sayles and so lay driuing without sailes winding Southwest alwaies at the depths of fiue and twentie and six and twenty fadome water and at the midnight watch we began to hoise vp our maine saile and our foukesaile in that manner running West to get to twenty fadome deepe which is the middle of the chanell where we must passe through and in the morning we saw the Island Do Leme that is the Island of the harquebush lying somwhat on y e lareboord of vs. This Island Do Leme if you go east and West vpon it séemeth very small and the déeper you are within the channell the bigger it sheweth in the entry wherof on the right hand it hath two Islands or Cliffes and from thence forward the Islands begin to lye on a rowe till you come to Macau as I said in another place The 42. chapter An instruction and large declaration of the course from the Island Firando in Iapon to the coast of China the hauen of Macau with all the courses situations and stretchings of the same done by a Portingale Pilote HE that desireth to saile from the Island Firando to Macau or Canton in China as soone as he is out of the hauen of Firando if he hath time inough to get to the Island Guoto he must presently saile forward if not hée must anker about a mile from Firando at 28 fadome déepe where hee may prepare himself and make fast his boat y t the next day in the morning he may set saile As soon as you are set out from Firando to follow on your course you must runne along by the land of Firando till you bee at the end thereof and as you run south west vntil you be by the land you shal hold somwhat néerer south-west and then on your West side there will bee 3. or 4. Islands and passing by the formost of them southward you shall presently sée the channell that runneth betwéen that Island and the Island Guoto and through it you must passe By this channel there lieth another Island betwéen the which and the Island Guoto you must likewise passe when you are through and out of this Channell and that the Islands westward from you then you must runne along by Guoto vntil you are past it to seaward so to kéepe on further your course and if in passing through the channel the wind chanceth to be still you may boldly anker therein close by the land of Guoto In this Island Guoto are very good Hauens which passe through and through againe therfore it is not one Island but deuided into foure parts Whē you are two myles from Guoto you must hold your course West Southwest vntill you are past the two Islands one called Xuma y e other Meaxuma which are eight myles distant from the Island of Guoto Being past those Islands you must run Southwest néerer south from the aforesaid Islands there is another Island called Meaxuma which you must likewise passe by by those Islands aforesaid it is all faire way without any trouble neither yet by the Island this Island lyeth vnder 31 degrées and 1 ◠You must run betwéene the Island and the smal Islands and whē you are past them the Island of Guoto then you must runne Southwest southwest and to south When you are past this and the other Islands running southwest as aforesaid you shal goe right vpon the point of Cabo de Sumbor which lieth on y e coast of China vnder 28 degrées ◠◠and if it be clear weather y t you there desire to know the land you may well doe it if not then put not too neer the coast because of the many Islands that lie all along by it for you must runne outward from it alwaies kéeping as far from it as you thinke néedefull that you may be frée from it and by night not to put in betwéene it for that all the coast from Cabo de Sumbor to Chinchon is nothing but Islands You must likewise sée that you put not too farre inward to Sea to kéepe close to the winds that blowe off the Land and to Sea-ward you haue the Islands of small Lequeo called Lequeo Pequeno and the Island of fishers which are distant from the Firme land about twenty miles if you haue a cléere night you may well passe along by the Islands yet with great foresight The most daungerous Island vpon that coast is the Island of Camaroyns which lyeth to Sea-ward out from all the rest I haue passed twice betwéene it and the Land it is an Island that is deuided in two partes by a rent or breach that is in it Foure myles forward beyond this Island lyeth a small Island which is flat and euen with the Sea hauing certain stones lying Northeastward from it but not many If you chaunce to passe by it in the night time you must bee carefull to auoid it for it is flat and little without any trées you must likewise shun the Island of Baboxyn which likewise lieth outward into the Sea in such sort that when you fall vpon it with good aduise and warely you may fréely passe by it for you néede feare nothing then what you see before you And when you are fiftéene myles from Cabo de Sumbor accounting from y e point of the firm land and not from the Islands lying by it thē you must hold your course Southwest and so run without all the Islands whereby you shall be out of danger of the Island
Lequeo Pequeno also y e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pequeno or before if it so fall out you must seeke to know the land for it is necessary for you to see it because of the Island Lamon as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by North and Southwest and by South but not much And when you are right ouer against Chinchon and that by marking the land or by the heigth of the sunne you know it being foure miles from the land you must hold your course southwest so to go without the Island of Lamon and if you desire to passe within the Islands you may well do it for it is faire ynough and you néede feare nothing But if you feare to mâ—e Lamon then it is better to runne as aforesaid for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon which is very dangerous There you must haue great foresight for when you are past Lamon then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon are called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo that is the Islands of Ruy Lobo from the which that which lyeth Northeast is the smallest the other being somewhat greater Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bushes from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y e ground from thence you shal run southwest and holde a little southwest and by South and if it be in the day time you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon from whence the said Riffe hath his issue reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course you shal make good way but if it be night you must looke well to your selfe And running the aforesaid course of Southwest you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon and doe 〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time and 〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉 â—sently make towards the 〈…〉 passe along by it From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the coâ— of 〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest and from thence East Northeast and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco which lyeth distant from the coâ—st about fiue miles vnder 22 degrees and â— right ouer against the creeke of Fuâ—â—da de Bona Ventura that is the creeke of good fortune you may passe close by the Island Branco both on the sea side as you thinke best and being past that Island 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan are fifty miles When you are past Ilha Branco then you must runne west Southwest from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie miles that is twelue miles before you enter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands and twelue miles from thence to Macau you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands which will be on the Northeast side of you and on the Southside it hath two Islands whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe and being ouer against those high bare Islands on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell which I neuer passed but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord and so running Southwest you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through although it sheweth narrow notwithstanding it is very good for I haue run into it by night you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you and runne in with the flood west west and by north and west Northwest and so you shall go right to Macau also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe And when you come from Iapon right ouer against the cape De Sumbor being fiftéen miles to seaward from it then cast out your lead and you shall find fortie and fiue fortie fadome water muddy ground with many streames of foule water and when you sée the land then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon which lie eight miles into the sea whereby you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags which the fishermen of that Countrey haue set vp for markes From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them lieth a town called Guara from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land and to know the Somes which are Chinish carnels and Barkes vsed in those countries they beare but one saile Now to make toward the Lande as you would you must runne West you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon that is the banke or marke of Chinchon is a high Lande lying along by the entry of Chinchon on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest stéeping downeward reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it from the which runneth a riffe of sand at lowe water being two fadome déepe reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece towards y e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry which in length reacheth East and West in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very lowe being there then you are close by it and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point and anker at four fadome muddy ground on the Northeast side lie certain Islands close by the Point of Laylo and two miles to Seaward from it you haue twenty fadome water y e water of that country being very blew from thence to Lamon 3. or 4. miles from the land you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome and being past Chinchon towards Lamon You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels being right ouer against Chinchon or towards the northeast pou shal find muddy ground with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome and right ouer against Lamon you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground The 43. Chapter How you shall runne in out and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau with all the markes signes and tokens thereof so to saile into the Hauen of Macau IF you desire to saile out of Macau you must vnderstand y t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil and presently after towards the East you haue two houels which with the Hill of the white vlacke
or rootes whereof they make bread and because it was late they returned againe vnto their shippe without doing any other thing for that day The next day the said Captaine with the aforesaide twelue men being Harquebushers rowed to land again and set two of their companie on shore with their vessels to fetch fresh water and by the place where they should fill their water there lay certaine Indians secretly hidden that fell vpon the two English men and tooke them which they in the boat perceiuing went out to helpe them but they were so assailed with stones and arrowes that all or the most part of them were hurt the Captaine himselfe béeing wounded with an arrowe on the face and will another arrowe in the head whereby they were constrained to turne backe againe without once hurting any of the Indians and yet they came so neare the boate that they tooke foure of their oares from them This done they set saile againe running along the coast with a South winde sailing so for the space of sixe miles passing by the Hauen called Saint Iago or Saint Iames where they put into a Hauen and there they tooke an Indian that lay fishing in a Scute or Canoa giuing him linnen and Butchers chopping kniues with other trifles and not long after there came an other Indian aboord their shippe called Felippe and hée spake Spanish hee gaue the English Captaine notice of a certaine shippe that lay in the Hauen of Saint Iago which they had left sixe miles behinde them with that intelligence the Indian béeing their guide the next day they set Saile and put to the aforesaide Hauen of Saint Iago and entring therein they tooke the saide Shippe wherein they found a thousand seuen hundred and 70. Bortigas of Spanish pots full of wine other thinges which hauing done they leapt on land where they tooke certaine sackes with meale with all whatsoeuer they could find they tooke likewise the ornaments and other Relickes out of the Church wherewith they departed from thence taking the aforesaid shippe with two menne that they found in her with them and so departed from that Hauen which lyeth vnder 32 degrées and ½ running along by the coast till they came vnder one and thirtie and thirty degrées which was the place where they had appointed to méet and there to stay for each other if by tempest or foule weather they chanced to be seperated and so loose each others company And comming vnder thirty degrées they found a very good Hauen wherein they entred and ankered at sixe fadome deepe the shotte of a great Péece from the Lande which was right ouer against a Riuer where they tooke in sixe Pipes of fresh water and to defend them that fetched the water they set twelue men vpon the Land and being busied in filling of their water they espied a company of men comming towards them wherof halfe of them were Spaniards being about two hundred and fifty horsemē and as many footemen but they had no sooner espied them but they presently entered into the Boat and escaped away loosing but one man The same night they set saile againe with both their Shippes running along the coast about ten miles further where they tooke in some fresh water but because they perceiued certaine horsemen they departed without lading any more water Frō thence they folowed on their course along the coast for the space of 30. myles where they entred into a desert or vnhabited Hauen yet they went not on Land for euery day they sawe people vpon the shore and there they made out a small pinnace the péeces whereof they brought readye framed out of England and hauing prepared it they launched it into the Water wherein the Captaine with fiftéene men entred with the cheefe Boatesman called Ian de Greicke being Maister of the shippe which they had taken in the Hauen of S. Iago wherewith they went to sée if they could finde the two Shippes that they had lost by stormy weather as I saied before and likewise thinking to goe on Land to fill certaine vessels with fresh Water they durst not venture for they sawe people on all side of the shoare so that in the end they returned againe without hearing of the other Shippes being there they tooke all the Ordinaunce out of their Shippe and newe dressed and rigged her which done they put a small péece of Ordinaunce into the Pinnace wherewith they set saile againe following on their course Hauing sayled thirtéene daies they came to an Island lying about the shot of a Base from the Lande where they ankered and there they found foure Indian Fishermen in two Canaos who tolde them that on the Firme Lande they might haue fresh water but they vnderstanding that there was not much and that it was somewhat within the Lande they would not spend any time about it but set sayle againe leauing the Fishermen with their Canaos following on their course along by the shore The next day being somewhat further they espied certaine Indian Fishermen that were vpon the Lande in their houses which the English Captaine perceauing presently entered into the Pinnace and rowed on Land where hee tooke three of the said Fishermen taking with him halfe of the Fish that lay packed vpon the shoare ready to bee laden with the which Indians and booty they came on boord againe The next day following they sawe a Barke laden with Fish that belonged to the Spaniards with foure Indians in it This Barke with the Indians and the Fish they tooke and bound the Spanish Shippe to their sterne and so drewe it after them leauing the said Indians within it who by night vnbound the Barke and secretly made away with Barke and Fish and were no more seene The next day the Captaine went into the Pinnace and because hee sawe certaine houses vppon the shoare hee made thither and beeing on Lande hee found two menne in them whereof one hee tooke leauing the other behinde and there hee found thrée thousand Pesoes of siluer euery Peso being the value of a Ryall of eight and seuen Indian Sheepe Hennes and all whatsoeuer they found wherewith they departed from thence following on their course and two dayes after they came by the hauen called Azijcka where they found two shippes the one laden with goods and Spanish wares out of the which they tooke only two hundred Bottigas or Spanish Pots with Wine and out of the other seuē and thirty Bharas of siluer which are péeces of tenne or twelue pound each Bharre and thinking to leape on shore with two Barkes that they found in the said Hauen with about seuen and thirty Harquebushes bowes they perceiued on the land certaine horsemen comming towards them whervpon they left off their pretence and tooke with them a Moore that they found within the Barkes with whome they retourned aboord The next day in the morning they burnt the shippe that was laden with the Spanish wares and tooke the other with
them passing forward with it on their course the Captaine sayling along the shore with his Pinnace and the Shippe keeping about a myle from him to Seaward to séeke for a shippe whereof they had intelligence and hauing in that manner sailed about fiue and forty myles they found the shippe that lay at anker in a hauen who about two houres before had beene aduertised of an English Pirate or Sea-rouer and had discharged eight hundred Bharres of siluer out of her and hidden it on the Land which siluer belonged to the King of Spaine of the which siluer the Englishmen had receiued some intelligence but they durst not goe on land because there were many Indians and Spaniards that stood to guard it and they found nothing in the ship but thrée Pipes of water the shippe they tooke with them and being about a mile in the Sea they hoised vp all her sailes let her driue doing the like with the Shippe that they had taken in Azijcka as also the other of Saint Iago which likewise they let driue following on their course with their owne ship and the Pinnace Being seuen or eight myles from the Hauen of Callan de Lyma they espied thrée Shippes and boording one of them they tooke thrée men out of her and so helde on their course towards Callan de Lyma where they entred being about two or thrée houres within night sayling in betwéene all the shippes that lay there being seuentéene in number and being among the ships they asked for the ship that had laden the siluer but wheÌ„ answere was made them that the siluer was laid on land they cut the cables of the ships and the masts of two of the greatest ships and so left them At the same time there arriued a Shippe from Panama laden with wares and Marchaundise of Spaigne that ankered close by the English Ship which was while the English Captaine sought in the other Shippes for the siluer As soone as the shippe of Panama had ankered there came a Boat from the shoare to search it but because it was in the night they let it alone till morning and comming to the English shippe they asked what shippe it was wherevpon one of the Spanish prisoners by the English Captaines commandement answered and said it was the shippe of Michiel Angelo that came from Chile which they of the boat hearing sent a man on boord who climbing vp light vpon one of the great Péeces wherewith hee was afraid and presently stept backe againe into the boate because the Shippes that lay there and that sayled in those Countries vsed to carry no great shotte and therewith they were abashed and made from it which the shippe of Panama hearing that was newely come in shee iudged it to bée a Rouer and therewith cutting her Cables shée put to Sea which the Englishmen perceiuing shipped certaine men in their Pinnace and followed her and being hard by her they baddde her strike which they of the shippe refused to doe and with a Harquebush shotte killed one of the Englishmen wherewith they turned againe into their shippe and presently set sayle following after the shippe which not long after they ouertooke which they of the Shippe perceiuing hoised out their Boate and leaping into it rowed to Land leauing the shippe with all the goods which the Englishmen presentlie tooke and with her sayled on their course The next day they sawe a boat with sayles making towards them whereby they presentlie mistrusted it to bee a Spye and not long after they perceaued two great shippes comming towards them which made the English thinke they came to fight with them wherevpon they let the Shippe of Panama driue therein leauing Iohn de Greicke With the two that they had taken the same day they entred into Callan de Lyma as I said before and presently hoised all their sailes and sailed forward not once setting eye againe vpon the aforesaid shippes for they made towards the shippe of Panama which the Englishmen let driue From thence they sayled againe along the coast following on their course and hauing sailed certaine dayes they met a Frigate that went towards Lyma laden with wares and Marchandises of the Countrey from whence the Englishmen tooke a Lampe and a Fountaine of siluer and asked the Pilote being a Spaniard if they met not with a Shippe that they vnderstoode should bee laden with siluer but the one Pilote said he met her not and the other said hee sawe her about thrée dayes before This Frigate came not to the shippe but to the Pinnace wherein the Captaine sayled for the Pinnace ranne close by the shoare and the shippe kept a myle and a halfe from the Lande wherewith they let the Frigate goe following on their course Two dayes after they came to the Hauen called Payta where they found a Shippe laden with Spanish wares which the Pinnace boorded and tooke it without any resistance for as soone as the Spaniards perceaued the Englishmen they presently made to Land with their Boat and two of them leapt into the Sea none staying in the shippe but the Maister Pilote and some Moores out of the which shippe the Englishmen tooke the Pilote and all the Bread Hens and a Hogge and so sayled forward with the Shippe but being about two Harquebush shotte to Seaward they let it goe againe not taking any thing out of it and asking after the shippe which they sought for they told them that about two daies before shee departed from that place wherewith they followed on their course and before night they met with a Shippe of Panama which they presently boorded but tooke nothing from her but onely a Moore and so left it holding on their course The next day being the first of February they met another Shippe that sayled to Panama laden with Fish and other victuals fortie Bharres of siluer and some golde but I knowe not howe much which they tooke and sent the passengers with two Friers that were in her in a boat to Land The next day they hanged a man of the Shippe because hee would not confesse two plates of golde that hée had taken which after they found about him which done they let the Shippe driue following on their course The first of March towards noone they espied the shippe laden with the siluer béeing about foure myles to Seaward from them and because the English Shippe was somewhat heauy before whereby it sayled not as they would haue it they tooke a company of Bottigas or Spanish Pots for Oyle and filling them with water hung them by ropes at the sterne of the Shippe to make her sayle the better and the shippe that sayled towards Panama made towards the English Shippe to knowe what she was thinking it to bee one of the shippes that vsed to saile along the coasts and to traâ—ficke in the country and being hard by her the English Captaine bad them strike but the other refusing to doe it with a great Peece
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
not knowe it but when you see this Island then you may knowe where you are From this Island to S. Vincents are twelue miles which is a pleasant way and in that countrey there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boa Sicanga From these Islandes to the Hauen called A Berra de Birtioga are sixe miles which is a verie good a deepe Hauen Between the Islandes aforesaid this Hauen lieth another rouÌ„d Island called Monte de Trigo that is the hill or heape of wheate which is a verie good marke for such as desire to put into the Hauen of Bertioga From this Hauen to the Hauen called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa that is the hauen of Steuen da Costa are fiue miles this is a good Hauen for great shippes it hath a very good Bay for shippes to lie in and if you will not put into it outwarde close by the land you haue an Island called A Ilha da Moela that is the Island of Chéese where you may anker From this Hauen Southwestward lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada that is the burnt Island which is a flat Island all stonie but along by it it is faire ground like South southeastward From the Hauen lyeth a Cliffe which of many men is not knowne it lyeth aboue the water and is in the middle way betwéen the Island Dos Alcatrases and Ilha Queimada From thence to the Island called Canaueas that is the Island of Réedes are thrée miles you run North Northeast and South Southwest along by the coast Canaueia is an Island that hath a verie good Hauen and fresh water and lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ on the south side it hath two Rockie Islands whereof the one is somewhat long and round and right ouer against it lyeth the riuer called Rio de Canauea where you may put in with small ships From Canauea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina are 48. miles and you run along the coast North South This is a long Island full of trées it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South On the North side at the entry of the Hauen it hath two Islands and on the South side another Island called A Galle that is the Island of the Gally on the North side thereof you can not enter but onely with small Barkes and ships but on the South side it hath a very good entrie for great ships it hath much fresh water and great store of fish and wilde Deere This Island lyeth vnder 28. degrees and ½ From thence to the Hauen called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are fiue myles and fiue miles further forward lyeth the Hauen called dos Patos that is the Hauen of Géese by some called La Laguna that is the Lake This Hauen serueth for Barkes and small ships that traffique in those countries From thence to the riuer of Rio de Plata there is not one hauen where you may put in the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast Sayling from the aforesaid Island of S. Caterina to Rio de Plata you must holde your course southward to the height of 34. degrees â…” Then you must put to the land when you sée it which at the first sheweth like an Island called los Castillos then you shall run along the coast which will lie Southwestward Southwest and by West and west southwest from you and make not your account to sée the Cape de Sancta Maria for the land there is so flat that there you can not discerne any signe or token of a point but there you shall sée certaine riffes but you néed not feare any thing more then that you sée before your eies and if you chance not to sée any land running towardes it then cast out your Lead and there you shall find 10.14 and 18. fadome déepe therfore feare not for it is all one kind of ground and you are in a good way Being there as aforesaid then run as long as you can well discerne the land then you shall sée an Island called A Ilha dos Lobos that is the Island of Wolues for there you sée many wolues it is a flat Island all full of stones on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe but you néede not feare any other then that you sée before your eies This Island is distant from the Firme land about two miles and ½ towards the northwest from this Island of Wolues there lieth a small flat Island with a low wood close by the land which hath a good hauen to anker in if you haue any tempest out of the Southwest If you passe along by this Island on the East Southeast side then goe néere the point or hooke of the firme lande which is a lowe stony point and betwéene this point and the Island lyeth a sand which you shall presently sée by the water that breaketh vpon it and if you enter on the Northeast side you néede not feare any thing and to anker kéepe close by the Island for there you haue fresh water and great store of fish vpon the ground Béeing there you must bée carefull for there beginneth the first high Lande and from it about eight or ten myles further lyeth a sand that is verie dangerous and is about foure miles from the Firme Lande being two myles in length you must runne betwéene it and the Firme lande and when you sayle from the high land aforesaide for the space of a mile and a halfe or two myles you must kéepe harde by the shoare because of the sande aforesaide and from thence with your Leade in your hande with good watch and foresight and if it bee not seasonable weather to saile by night then your best way were to anker and to stay till it bee day the better to make your voiage And when you thinke you are past this sand then you shal sée a hill called O monte de Santo Seredâ—o which is a rounde high hill the like whereof is not in those countries to bee founde betwéene the which hill and the sandes aforesaid lyeth an Island called A Ilha das Flores that is the Island of Flowers which you may passe about without danger And when you come into the salt or fresh water which floweth fiue and twentie miles beneath the riuer called Rio de Buenos Aires that is the Riuer of good aire where the water is verie fresh then hold your course West and then you shal be eight or ten miles beneath the Riuer of good aire which is the best course you can holde but I aduise you still to haue your Lead in hand and when you are at thrée or foure fadome water then saile no further if it bée by night but in the day time you may sée whither you saile which must be in sight of land and so neere that you may easily discerne the trées holding two miles from the land for you can not passe by the Riuer of
which lye by the Hauen of Charthagena you must runne along by the first Cliffe betwéene it and the Lande alwaies with your Lead in hand and you must not goe néerer then ten fadome to the Land there you shall find white sandy ground and being at fiftéene or sixtéene fadome muddye ground then kéepe aloofe to the Southeast and South and so runne in for you shall sée the hole open before you Sayling from Carthagena to Nombre de Dios that is the name of God with the winds called Brisas which are windes blowing from the East and North parts generally called Brisas then you must hold your course West and somewhat West and by South till you be vnder 9. degrées and ½ vnder the which heigth lyeth the point called Cantina which are seuen Islands whereof fiue stretch east and west the other two Northeast and Southwest Being somewhat past these Islandes you shall sée a low point of Land reaching into the Sea called A Punta de Lambras which lyeth on the West side and Westward from it it hath a Hill which is somewhat higher then the Point which you may well discerne when you make to Sea-warde from it and that the Point lyeth South-west-warde from you the said Hill hauing on the Southeast side certaine lowe Lande and somewhat more Westward the Lande beginneth to bee higher which endeth at the Riuer of Francisco At the mouth of this Riuer to Sea-ward from it lyeth a stony cliffe and from this Riuer to Nombre de Dios it is all ouer a flat and red shining Lande to the houell called Niquea which is about a myle from Nombre de Dios you shall likewise sée the edifices or buildings of Capira and if a man should ask you when those buildings lye Northeast from you where you are then you may answere him that you are vpon the coast of the lande North-east and Southwest beneath Nombre de Dios. Sayling from Nombre de Dios to Carthagena you shall holde your course East Northeast to the point from thence you must runne East whereby you shall discouer the Islands of Saint Barnard which are low and yet Hill Islandes with very faire ground along by them and if you should be in a Frigate then you may passe betweene them and the land Fiue or sixe miles further you shall see the Islands called Braua which are foure small Islands whereof the furthest outward is the greatest they are all lowe and bare Lande hauing by them faire and cleare ground and with a Frigate you may passe inward but with a shippe you must not goe neerer then sixe fadome From thence east Southeastward you shall sée the Gally of Carthagena with the markes aforesaied in the East and East Northeast bough you shall see the Land Cariscos which is a high and hill land From thence you must runne along by the coast vntill you begin to sée the Hauen then you must put in alwaies shunning the sands of Carys running along by the east point being there if night falleth vpon you then you may anker betweene Carys and Baru in the surest place you can finde to defend you from the windes called Brisas by the high Lande of Carys and if you put out of the Hauen of Nombre de Dios you shall lauere till you sée the buildings that are beyond it and sayling into the Hauen you shall doe as wind serueth Sayling from Carthagena to the Island of Hauana you shall hold your course North-west till you come to thirtéene degrées and 1 â— and when you are vnder thirteene degrées then you shall let your selfe driue South South-east and South as the manner is vntill you bee past the heigth or bee out thereof or in the depth and when you are vpon the ground of the Serrana then you shall sleepe towardes it as much as you can and if it bee possible you shall hold Northward for so you shall the sooner be there From the point of Cabo de Camaron to Cabo de Roncador with the Sea strand that stretcheth from the one to the other as also from Serrana and Serranilla being Islands and Cliffes so called on the west side of all these sands is great sande with Fish sâ—ales vpon the ground and the least depth you find there is fiftéene fadome waâ—r being all faire and in this depth you shall runne till you bee ouer it and being ouer you shall presently begin to multiply or rise till you bee at fiftie fadome deep and somewhat more Serrana lieth vnder foureteen degrees and ½ and Serranilla vnder sixteene degrees If you sée Serranilla on the West side on that side it is a lowe sandye Island stretching Northwest and Southeast Sayling from Serranilla or Cabo de Roncador to y e point of S. Anton lying in the Island Cuba yuâ— shall holde your course Northwest and Northwest and by north wherewith you shall discouer the Cape aforesaied or the Cape de coryentes that is the Point of the streames which is a clouen Point towards the sea side being lowe Land on it hauing some Palme Trees From thence to Cabo de S. Aâ—n the Land beginneth to bée lower the coast stretcheth Northwest and south-east The cape de S. Anton is a low sandy Point vpon it hauing two or three houels and lieth vnder 22. degrees If in this course you chaunce to see the Island called Cayman Grande that is the great Cayman You must vnderstand that it lieth vnder nineteene degrees and is low land ful of Trees stretching east and west on the south-side hauing some white sandy strands Sailing from the Point of S. Anton with the windes called Vendaval which are West and South windes generally called Vendauaâ—es as the East and North windes are called Bâ—sas to the Hauana then you must runne Northeast to shunne the droughtes that runne out from this Point which reach to the beginning of the hils called Los Organos that is the Organs and when you are past the sands you shall hold your course along by the coast for there you neede feare nothing more then that you see before you The Organs are certaine high Trées which make manye openings and rents whereof those on the South-side are called the point of Guanico these Organs or hils reach to the Riuer called Rio de Porâ— that is the riuer of hogs from thence begin the Hils called the Cabinas which are high and doubled on the highest of theÌ„ hauing a playne or flat Lande there you haue a Hauen called El Puerto de Cabanas Eastward from this point to the field of Mariam it is low flat land ful of Trees where there is another Hauen From thence to Hauana it is all lowe land without any risings except one Houell lying right ouer against the Hauana which is a clouen hill vpon it hauing a sharpe point called Atalaya that is a guard and beeing North and South with the Hauen within the Lande you shal see two Hils which shew like two
20 or 30 miles wherewith you shall finde ground at 80 fadome being shels From thence you shal run west and west and by South till you be at 30 fadome and from 30 fadome west-ward to 30 fadome with the which course you should sayle along this Countrey And being a greater depth you shall run west and west and by south wherby you shall come again to the former depth By this course you shall passe through the Islāds of Ilha de Sconocida Ilha d'Arena that is the vnknowne Island and the sandy Island From the Iland la de Sconocida to the Islād d'Arena west west and by south you shall descry the Hils Las Sierras de San Martin which are two high Hils in the middle hauing a great opening or cliffe Sailing from these Hils you shall runne West by the which course you shal sée the stony rock which is a clouen hil you shall run Northwest and northwest by west wherewith you shall sée the Riuer of Medelyn which is a lowe land somewhat more to Loofeward lieth the Island called Ilha Blanca or the white Island as also y e Island Rio Riffias which a farre off sheweth like a ship vnder saile then presently you shal sée the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and from the riuer called Rio Varado to the Riuer of Vera Crus There is no high land but only one black shining hill lying aboue the aforesaid Hauen The 65. Chapter How to sayle from the Island La Desseada to the Island of Porto Riso through the channell called De Passagie SAyling from the Island La Desseada to the Island Puerto Riso y t is the rich Hauen Desiring to passe through y e channel of De Passagie that is the thorow faire you must vse all y e means you can to runne betwéene the Islands of Moncerrate Redonda or to Loofeward y t is betwéen y e Island of S. Christopher and the Islands d'Estacio and from thence you shal hold your course Northwest somewhat more to loofeward frō the Islands of Estacio which are 2. Islands one greater thē the other shewing almost like 2. loaues of bread when you are by them you shall find 10.12 and 25. fadome déepe at the depthes of 10. 12. fadome you haue white sandy ground and at 25. fadome black sand to sayle from this Banke to the Ilandes las Virgines that is the maydes you shal holde your course northwest for there the streams draw Southwestward to shunne S. Crus which stretcheth almost Northwest and Southeast and when you see las Virgines the first poynt is the greatest and therefore it is called la Virgin Gorga or the fatte mayde and presentlie after follow the rest which are long full of Houels they stretch East and West and runne one within the other hauing certaine Cliffes and Rockes hard by them running on the South syde in the middle way frō them you shall sée a great Cliffe two myles into the sea This Cliffe hath for a marke a grayish colour and besydes these there are manie other cliffes and to know whē you are in the passage running along by it to Porto Riso as aforesaid then you shal sée white cliffes that a farre off shew like a ship vnder sayle the whitenes of these cliffes procéedeth of birds filings when you sée them you must make towards them and desiring to run through the passage you shall hold your course betwéene these Ilands the Ilands las Virgines whē you are by them thē you must run northwest to a smal Iland which lieth two miles further forward called Ilha Verde that is the gréen Iland and being right against this Iland thē you are out of the passage or without the channel and being ther you shal presently sée the land of y e Iland Puerto Riso the first point wherof called la Punto de Loquillo lieth East west with the Iland Ilha Verde if you chance to be by the aforesaid cliffe and that the winde scanteth y t you can not passe to loofeward from it then you shall passe to léeward of it for it is also a good chānell of 18. 20. fadom deep with sand and shels vpon the ground about a mile to léeward from it to know whē you are out of the Channell with this course then this cliffe must lie Southeast from you and being at 30. fadome déep with white sandy ground you shall presently as I said passe by the Ilande of Ilha Verde running by the point of Loquillo along by the land of Puerto Riso Westnorthwest and if you desire to be in the hauen of Puerto Riso and that you cannot get thether then you shal lauere or ly driuing to léeward with the point of Loquillo Southeastward from you and from midnight forward you shall follow your course because the streames draw Southeastward the marks you haue there are these that is ouer the hauē of Puerto Riso standeth an hermitage vpon a high hil which is called Santa Barbara and sheweth like a white patch vpon a hill and passing along by it you shall see the Cloyster or Conuent of Dominican Fryers which is about a quarter of a myle from the hermitage and then you shall presently sée the hill that sheweth like a clouen Iland these are the right marks of this Hauen and to put into it you must goe néere the hill but not too néer to shunne a shallow place that lieth within the said hill after that you must loofe asmuch as you can vntil you comé wher you must anker which is right against the houses that stand on the East side of the hauen The 66. Chapter The groundes and depthes by the coast and countrie of New Spaigne BY the Ilāds called Alaclanes lying betwéen the Iland Cuba and the coast of New Spaigne right ouer against the poynt called Punta de S. Anton. the ground is shelly by the Iland called Ilha de Robos it is muddy slyme ground by the Riuer of S. Pedro S. Paulo from 40. fadom to the land it is shelly ground by the fields or playnes of Almeria called Los Islano◠de Almeria at 40. fadome it is sandy ground from thence outwards shelly ground by Vilila Rica or the rich stone at 16 fadome it is muddy ground East west with the cliffes sands de Tortugas of Torteaux it is white sand Northeast and southwest with the same Tortugas it is blacke sand and eastward frō it reddish sand by the riuer of Panuco from 40. fadom outwards it is white and red sand and towardes the land muddy ground by the riuer called Rio Hermoso or the faire riuer frō 30. fadome towardrs the land it is white sand ◠outward towards y e sea muddy groūd by the riuer called Rio de Palmase de Mōtanas that is the riuer of palm trees of hils frō 40. fadom towards y e land you haue sand but most white and outwards muddy groūd mixed with gray sand
of Spain and from the same flat land it is higher for it is 7. miles long now to put into this Iland you must hold your course on the northeast point being close by it within a stones cast you néed not fear for ther it is 15. fadom deepe and within it is all faire ground this is the road on the side of the Iland close by if from this Iland to the firme land there is no more but a quarter of a mile and you cannot see the entrie till you be hard by it and if there be any ships within the hauen you shall see them before you can discerne or know the Iland which sheweth as if it were trees y t stand vpon the land the farthest point outward on the northeast side of this Iland lieth vnder 9 deg therefore deceiue not your selfe by the card for some of them haue it vnder 9. deg and others vnder 9 deg and a halfe therfore beleeue none but such as haue it vnder 9. deg at the northeast end of the aforesaid IlaÌ„d Hereafter followeth the degrees and hightes of all the principal hauens riuers points Ilands places of the Nauigations of the Portingals Spaniards in the countries by them discouered and part inhabited each place with their right names and surnames as they are by them called and ordinarily named in their Seacardes First from the furthest point outward of Portingale called Cabo de Finisterra following along by the coast of Portingale Spain Barbary to the line of Tropicus Caueri and from thence along the Coast of Guinea to the Equinoctiall lyne The degrees on the north side of the line CAbo de Finisterra that is the point of the lands end lieth vnder degrees 43 The Ilandes of Bayona lie vnder 42. Porto de Portug y t is Porte port ly vn 41 As Berlengas y t is the Barles ly vnder 40. Lisboa or LisboÌ„ y t IlaÌ„d of tercera vn 29. Perseueira and the Iland of S. Michael lieth vnder 38. Cabo de san Vincente and the Iland santa Maria lie vnder 37. Trastalgar lying on the coast is vnder 36 Larache lyeth vnder 35 Soneia lyeth vnder 34. Cabo de Canty Porto santo y t is the holy haueÌ„ lying by the IlaÌ„d of Madera are vn 33 Rio dos saueis y t is y e riuer of faries is vn 32 The Iland of Madera or the Iland of wood is vnder the same heights of 32 Taffatama lieth vnder 31 Mecca and Ilha dos Saluaes that is the Iland of the wilde men lyeth vnder 30 Cabo de non and the Ilandes Palma and Lancarotte being of the Ilands of Canarie lyeth vnder 29 A Ilha or the Ilande de Forte Ventura lyeth vnder 28 Cabo de Boâ—ador and the Ilandes of great Canarie and also A Ilha de Hierro or Iland of Iron lyeth vnder 27 Angra dos Cauallos that is the Hauen of horses lieth vnder 25 Rio d'Ouro or y e riuer of Gold lieth vnd 24 The line or Tropicus Cancri Angra or the open hauen of Goncalo de Sintra lyeth vnder 23 Cabo das Barbas or the point of Baerden lyeth vnder 22 Cabo Branco or the white point lieth vn 21 Rio de Sao Ioâ—o or the riuer of S. Iohn lieth vnder 20 Furna de Santa Maria or the caue of S. Marie lyeth vnder 19 Sete monte or seuen hils vnder the Ilands of S. Anna S. Vincent S. Lucia and S. Nicolas lieth vnder 18 Ante Rotte and Ilha de Sal. or the Iland of Salt vnder 17 Rio or the Riuer of Canaga and the Iland Ilha de Maâ—a vnder 16 Cabo verde or the gréen point the IlaÌ„ds of S. Iago and Ilha do Fogo or of fyer vnder 15 Rio or the riuer of Gambia vnder 14 Rio das Ostras or the riuer of oisters vn 13 Cabo Roxo vnder 12 Buguba vnder 11 Rio do Pichel or the riuer of y e Can vnd 10 Rio or the riuer of Cachecache vnder 9 Rio de Serra Lioa or the riuer of the Lions hill vnder 8 Rio das Palmas or the riuer of Palms vn 7 Cabo de monte or the point of the hill vn 6 Cabo dos Baixos or the point of sands and the myne of S. George vnder 5 A Ilha or the IlaÌ„d of Fernando Poa Cauo dà s Palmas or point of Palmes vnder 4 Rio de Campo or the riuer of the field vn 3 Rio de Princepe or y e riuer of y e prince vnd 2 The Iland of S. Thomas vnder 1 From the Equinoctiall line to the south side following the coast of Congo Angola and Ethiopia to the cape de Bona Speranza The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial lyne CAbo or the point of Lopo Gonsalues vnder deg 1 Cabo or the point of Catharina vnder 2. Angra da Iudia or the hauen of the Iewe vnder 5. Praya de San Domingos or the straÌ„d of S. Dominico vnder 6. Rio or the riuer of Congo vnder 7 A Ilha d' Ascention or the ascention vnd 8. Rio or the riuer of Angola and the Iland of Loanda vnder 9 Cabo Ledo vnder 10. Rio or the riuer of S. Lazaro vnder 11. Cabo de Loubos or y e riuer of wolues vn 12 Monte Negro or the black hill vnder 14 Serra Parda or the gray hill vnder 15 Angra das Aldeas or the open hauen of the villages the Iland of S. Helena vnd 16. Manga das Areas or the sandy sleue vn 17. Cabo Negro or the blacke point vnder 18. Os Mendoins vnder 19 A Serra de S. Lazaro or Hill S. of Lazaro vnder 20. Praya or the straight of Ruy Pires vnd 21. Cabo do Padrao or the point of Colosso or Colume vnder 22. Praia Fria or the cold strand vnder 23. The lyne or Tropicus Cancri Ponta da concepsao or the conceptioÌ„ vn 24 Praya das Ala-goas vnder 25. Feiaco da Boca or the maÌ„ner of the mouth vnder 26. Angra or the hauen of S. Anthony vnd 27 Angra or hauen of S. Thomas vnder 28. Angra or the haueÌ„ of S. Christopher vn 29 Rio do Infante or the Riuer of the Kinges sonne vnder 32. Angra or hauen of S. Helena vnder 33. As Ilhas or IlaÌ„d of Tristan de CuÌ„ha v. 34. Cabo de Bona Speranza or poynt of good hope vnder 34. ½ From the cape de Bona Speranza northwards along the coast to Soffala Mosambique and Melinde to the Equinoctial lyne all being on the south side of the same lyne CAbo das Agulhas or the poynt of the Compas full vnder 35. Cabo de Infante or point of the kings sonne vnder 34. ½ Cabo Talhado or the clouen point vnd 34. Cabo das Vaccas or point of cowes Baya Fermosa or the faire bay vnder 34. Cabo de Areciffe or the point of the Cliffe vnder 33. Rio de infante or point of y e kings son v. 32. Ponta Primeira or the first point vnder 32. Terra do Natal vnder 31.
of thirty yeares sent vnto them to vndermine and examine them wherein they behaued themselues so wel that they were holden esteemd for good and Catholick Romish Christians yet still suspected because they were strangers specially Englishmen The Iesuites stil told them that they shuld be sent prisoners into Portingal wishing them to leaue off their trade of marchandise to become Iesuites promising them thereby to defend them from all trouble the cause why they said so and perswaded them in that earnest maÌ„ner was for that the Dutch Iesuite had secretlie bene aduertised of great summes of money which they had about them and sought to get the same into their fingers for that the first vowe and promise they make at their entrance into their order is to procure the welfare of their said order by what means soeuer it be but although the Englishmen denyed them and refused the order saying that they were vnfit for such places neuerthelesse they procéed so farre that one of them being a painter that came with the other thrée for company to sée the countries and to séeke his fortune and was not sent thether by the English marchants partly for feare and partlie for want of meanes to relieue himselfe promised them to become a Iesuite and although they knew and well perceiued he was not any of those that had the treasure yet because he was a Painter whereof they are but few in India and that they had great néed of him to paint their church which otherwise would cost them great charges to bring one from Portingal they were very glad thereof hoping in time to get the rest of them w t all their money into their fellowship so y t to conclude they made this Painter a Iesuite where he continued certain daies giuing him good store of worke to doe and entertayning him with all the fauour and friendship they could deuise and all to win the rest to be a pray for them but the other thrée continued stil in prison being in great feare because they vnderstood no man that came to them nor anie man almost knew what they said till in the end it was told them that certaine Dutch men dwelt in the Archbishops house counsell giuen them to send vnto them whereat they much reioiced and sent to me and an other Dutch man desiring vs once to come and speake with them which we presentlie did and they with teares in their eyes made complaint vnto vs of their hard vsage shewing vs froÌ„ point to point as it is said before why they were come into the countrie with all desiring vs for Gods cause if we might by any means to helpe them that they might be set at liberty vpon Sureties being readie to indure what Iustice should ordaine for them saying that if it were found contrarie and that they were other then trauelling marchants and sought to find out further benefite by their wares they would be content to be punished With that wee departed from them promising them to do our best and in the ende we obtained so much of the Archbishoppe that he went vnto the Vice-roy to delyuer our petition and perswaded him so well that hee was content to set them at libertie and that their goods shuld be deliuered vnto them again vpon condition they should put in sureties for 2000. Pardawes not to depart the countrie before other order should bee taken with them Therupon they presently found a Citizen of the towne y t was their suretie for 2000. Pardawes where they paide him in hand 1300. Pardawes and because they say they had no more ready monie he gaue them credite séeing what store of marchandise they had whereby at all times if néede were hee might bee satisfied and by that meanes they were deliuered out of prison and hyred them selues a house and began to set open shoppe So that they vttered much ware and were presently well knowne among all the Marchants because they alwaies respected Gentlemen specially such as brought their wares shewing great curtesie and honor vnto them whereby they wonne much credite and were beloued of all men so that euerie man fauoured them and was willing to doe them pleasure To vs they shewed great friendship for whose sake the Archbishop fauoured them much and shewed them verie good countenance which they knew wel how to increase by offering him many presents although hee would not receiue them neither would euer take gift or present at any mans hands Likewise they behaued themselues verie Catholikely and verie deuoute euerie day hearing Masse with Beades in their hands so that they fel into so great fauour that no man caried an euill eye no nor an euill thought towards them Which liked not the Iesuites because it hindered them from that they hoped for so that they ceased not still by this Dutch Iesuite to put them in feare that they should bee sent into Portingall to the King counselling them to yéeld them selues Iesuits into their Cloyster which if they did he said they would defend them from all in troubles saying further that he counselled them therein as friend and one that knew for certaine that it was so determined by the Viceroyes priuie Counsell which to effect he saide they stayed but for shipping that should sayle for Portingall with diuers other perswasions to put them in some feare so to effect their purpose The English men to the contrarie durst not say any thing to them but answered that as yet they would stay a while and consider thereof thereby putting the Iesuites in good comfort as one among them being the principal of them called Ioâ—n Nuberye complained vnto me often times saying hee knew not what to say or thinke therein or which way he might be rid of those troubles but in the ende they determined with themselues to depart from thence and secretly by meanes of contrarie friends they imployed their money in precious stones which the better to effect one of them was a Ieweller and for the same purpose came with them Which being concluded among them they durst not make knowne to any man neither did they credite vs so much as to shewe vs their minds therein although they tolde vs all whatsoeuer they knew But on a Whitsunday they went abroad to sport themselues about thrée miles from Goa in the mouth of the ryuer in a countrie called Bardes hauing with them good store of meate and drinke And because they should not be suspected they left their house and shop with some wares therein vnsolde in custodie of a Dutch Boy by vs prouided for them that looked vnto it This Boye was in the house not knowing their intent and being in Bardes they had with them a Patamar which is one of the Indian postes which in winter times caryeth letters from one place to the other whom they had hyred to guide them because that betwéene Bardes and the Firm land there is but a little ryuer in manner halfe drie
they passed ouer it on foote and so trauelled by land being neuer heard of againe but it is thought they arriued in Aleppo as some say but they knew not certainely Their greatest hope was that Iohn Newbery could speake the Arabian tongue which is vsed in al those countries or at the least vnderstoode for it is very common in all places there abouts as French with vs. Newes being come to Goa there was a great stirre and murmuring among the people and we much wondered at it for many were of opinion that wée had giuen them counsel so to doe and presently their suertie seased vpon the goods remaining which might amount vnto aboue 200. Pardawes and with that and the money he had receiued of the English men he went vnto the Viceroye and deliuered it vnto him which the Viceroy hauing receiued forgaue him the rest This flight of the English men grieued the Iesuites most because they had lost such a pray which they made sure account of whereupon the Dutch Iesuite came to vs to aske vs if we knew thereof saying that if he had suspected so much he would haue dealt otherwise for that he said hee once had in his hands of theirs a bagge wherein was fortie thousand Veneseanders each Veneseander being two Pardawes which was when they were in prison And that they had alwayes put him in comfort to accomplish his desire vpon the which promise hee gaue them their money againe which otherwise they shoulde not so lightly haue come by or peraduenture neuer as hee openly said and in the ende he called them hereticks and spies with a thousand other rayling spéeches which he vttered against them The Englishman that was become a Iesuite hearing that his companions were gone and perceiuing that the Iesuites shewed him not so great fauour neither vsed him so well as they did at the first repented himselfe and séeing he had not as then made any solemne promise being counselled to leaue the house told that he could not want a liuing in the towne as also that the Iesuites could not kéepe him there without he were willing to stay so they could not accuse him of any thing he told them flatly that he had no desire to stay within the Cloyster and although they vsed all the meanes they could to kéepe him there yet hee would not stay but hyred a house without the Cloyster and opened shop where he had good store of worke and in the end married a Mesticos daughter of the towne so that hee made his account to stay there while he liued By this Englishman I was instructed of al the waies trades and viages of the countrie betwéene Aleppo and Ormus and of all the ordinances and common customes which they vsually hold during their Viage ouer land as also of the places and townes wher they passed And since those Englishmens departures froÌ„ Goa there neuer arriued any strangers either English or others by land in the sayde countries but onely Italyans which daylye traffique ouer land and vse continuall trade going and comming that way About the same time there came into Goa from the Iland of Iapan certaine Iesuites and with them thrée Princes being the children of certaine Kings of that country wholly apparelled like Iesuites not one of them aboue the age of sixtéene yeares being minded by perswasions of the Iesuites to trauel into Portingall and from thence to Rome to sée the Pope therby to procure great profit priueledges and liberties for the Iesuites which was onely their intent they continued in Goa till the yeare 1584. and then set sayle for Portingall and from thence trauelled into Spaine whereby the King and all the Spanish Nobilitie they were with great honour receiued and presented with many gifts which the Iesuits kept for themselues Out of Spaine they roade to sée the Pope where they obtained great priueledges and liberties as in the description of the Iland of Iapen I haue in part declared That done they trauelled throughout Italy as to Venice Mantua Florence and all other places and dominions of Italy wher they were presented with many rich presents and much honoured by meanes of the great report the Iesuites made of them To conclude they returned againe vnto Madril where with great honor they took their leaue of the King with letters of commendation in their behalfes vnto the Viceroye and all the Captaines and Gouernours of India and so they went to Lisbone and there tooke shipping in Ano. 1586. and came in the ship called Saint Philip which in her returne to Portingall was taken by Captaine Drake and after a long and troublesome Viage arriued at Mosambique where the ship receiued in her lading out of an other shippe called the Saint Laurence that had put in there hauing lost her Mastes being laden in India and bound for Portingall where the shippe was spoyled and because the time was farre spent to get into India the said Saint Phillip tooke in the lading of Saint Laurence and was taken in her way returning home by the Englishmen as I saide before and was the first ship that had beene taken comming out of the East Indies which the Portingales tooke for an euill signe because the ship bare the Kings owne name But returning to our matter the Princes and Iesuites of Iapan the next yeare after arriued at Goa with great reioycing and gladnesse for that it was verily thought they had all béene dead when they came thether they were all thrée apparelled in cloth of Golde and Siluer after the Italian manner which was the apparell that the Italian Princes and Noblemen had giuen them they came thether very liuely and the Iesuits verie proudly for that by them their Viage had beene performed In Goa they stayed till the Monson or time of the windes came in to sayle for China at which time they went from thence and so to China thence vnto Iapon where with great triumph and wondering of all the people they were receiued and welcomed home to the furtherance and credite of the Iesuites as the Booke declareth which they haue written and set foorth in the Spanish tongue concerning their Viage as well by water by land as also of the intertainment that they had in euerie place In the yeare 1584. in the month of Iune there arriued in Goa many Ambassadours as of Persia Cambaia and from the Samoriâ— which is called the Emperour of the Malabares and also from the King of Cochin and among other thinges there was a peace concluded by the Samorijn the Malabares with the Portingall vpon condition that the Portingales should haue a Fort vpon a certaine Hauen lying in the coast of Malabare called Panane ten miles â—rom Calâ—cut which was presently be 〈◊〉 built and there with great costs and changes they raysed and erected a Fort but because the ground is all Sandie they could make no sure foundation for it sunk continually wherby they found it best to
miles and a halfe as they come néere vnto this cape they shall perceiue it to be a high hilly land lying vnder seuen degrees and a halfe from this poynt to the Rio de Pinas or Pine trée hauen the coast runneth south west and southwest and by south and is distaunt from the poynt aforesaide foure and twenty miles which are six Spanish miles or sixe degrees and a halfe it is a high land with great hilles and dales on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees and therefore it is called the Hauen of Pine trees from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest to Cape de las Correntas that is the cape of Streames which is very small and reacheth into the sea and because of the great and stiffe streame that runneth like a strong fall of waters running eastward like riuers many times the Portingale ships which saile that way are forced to anker in the night and in the morning setting saile it happeneth oftentimes that when they thinke to winde that they are stayed and driuen backe agayne so hang somtimes 15. or 20. dayes about that Cape before they can passe it but passing forward beyond that Cape you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Palmas so called because of the aboundaunce of palme or Indian nut trées that do growe thereon This riuer is in compas somwhat more than fiue miles which is one Dutch mile and a mile and â— Spanish which was once inhabited it is distant from Cabo de Correntes seuentie fiue miles or foure degrees â— Thereabouts are many riuers all very good water and not farre from thence lyeth the land and riuer of Peru where Pizaâ—us arriued and after his name almost all the country is called Peru from the Iland de las Pâ—linas folowing along the coast and the same course you come to the strand of Bonauentura which is distant from the Island aforesaide somewhat more than nine miles which are two Spannish miles ¼ Hard by this strand which is very great lieth a high cliffe or rocke of stone and the entry of the Bay is vnder three degrées 1 â— All this side is full of very great hilles and there runneth into the sea many and verie great riuers that haue their springs out of the hilles by one of those the shippes enter into the land or haâ—â—n of Bonauentura but the â—ilots that puâ—â—h there ought to haue good knowledge of the riuer for that if they be not wel acquainted with it they are like to induâ—e much danger as it happeneth vnto many shippes that had Pilots to whom the riuer is not knowne from this Bay the coast runneth east and east and by south to the Island Gorgona which is distant from the strande seauenty fiue miles which are ninetéene Spanish miles the coast al along this course is very lowe full of trees and other wilde places and hilles from whence there runneth many great riuers whereof the chiefe and greatest is the riuer of Saint Iohn which is inhabited by Barbarians hauing builded their houses vppon great postes and stoopes in manner of houelles where many dwell in one house and some alone by themselues because the houses are very long and broade These Indians are rich of gold and their country is very fruitfull the riuers by force of the streames abounding with much gold but it is so sleeke and moorish that it can hardely bee gotten but with the losse of many people and with great labour This Island of Gorgona is vnmeasurable high wherein for the space of eight moneths yéerely it neuer ceaseth raining and thundering whereby it seemeth the Elements fight and striue one against the other it is in circuite about two miles or sixe Italian miles all high hilles vpon the the trees whereof are seene many peacocks phesants speckled cats great serpents many sea crabbes and night foules seeming as if it were not inhabited it hath likewise much fresh water Summer there beginneth at the end of Maie cleane contrary to Panama whereas then winter beginneth In this Iland Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discouered the countrey of Peru stayed certayne days induring great paine and hunger before they coulde ouercome the countrey This country of Gorgona lieth vnder three degrees and as touching the miles that in this discourse as also in the description of Brasilia and other places I haue obserued they are all Spanish miles whereof seuenteene 1 â— make a degrée from this Iland the coast runneth west southwest to the Iland del Galâ—o or of the Cocke all this coast being lowe and full of vallies from whence there runneth many riuers this Iland is small and in compas scarse a mile or about three Italian miles it hath certayne redde Downes The same coast from the firme land thither lyeth twoo degrees from the Equinoctiall from thence the coast tourneth southwestward till you passe the point called Manglaâ—es which are trees so called and in our Card Manglalos which lieth scarce vnder two degrées and from the Island to the poynt which is sixe Spanish miles little more or lesse or foure and twenty Italian miles the coast is low and ful of vallies and thereabouts runneth certaine riuers into the sea which inwards to the land are inhabited from thence the coast runneth southwest to the strand called S. Iacob or S. Iago and maketh a greate Creeke where there is an open hauen or roade named by the Sardinians and from thence runneth the great riuer of S. Iacob where the gouernement of Pizarro began and this strand is 9. miles ¼ from the point of Manglares and it happeneth many times that the ships haue there at the beake head fourescore fadomes water and at the sterne they touch the ground and also it is often found that sometimes they sayle in two fadomes water and presently they find ninetie fadomes which the strong course and fury of the riuer causeth and although there are such banks yet are they not dangerous neither do the shippes refuse to passe in and out when they will The strand of S. Mathew in our Carde Mathias lyeth full in one degree from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis which lieth from the strand thirtie Italian miles that is seuen Spanish miles and one halfe this poynt lieth on high ground and hard by it are certayne red and white Downes that are of the same height This poynt of saint Francis lyeth vnder one degrée on the north side of the Equinoctiall line From thence the coast runneth southweast to the poynt Passao which is the first hauen of Peru ouer the which passeth the Equinoctiall line Betweene these two poynts there runneth foure great riuers into the Sea which are called Liquixinus in Latine Quisinuae and there about there is an indifferent good Hauen where the ships finde good water and wood to burne From the poynt Passao to the firme land are diuers high hilles that are called De Quaque